LR Study Guide 2003-2004

AEROSPACE ENGINEERING STUDY GUIDE
Academic year 2003-2004
B.Sc. program
M.Sc. program
Colophon
Aerospace Engineering Study Guide
Delft, July 2003
Editorial staff
A.R. Rademaker-van Baar
E.C.D. Emmen
Printing
CENDRIS - Delft (formerly DocVision)
PREFACE
Welcome to a new academic year at the Faculty of Aerospace Engineering of Delft University of Technology.
A choice that has been made by many before you. I can safely state that all graduates are proud to have
belonged to the student body of this faculty. The curriculum has not always been easy but the rewards are
worthy of the necessary intellectual and social investments. Whether employed in- or outside the aerospace
industry, with the baggage provided by the Faculty of Aerospace Engineering our graduates prove to be well
sought after.
Once again many students have joined you in Delft this year. We will provide you with a rich menu of
fundamental scientific knowledge but at the same time we will start from day one with core aerospace
engineering courses. That way you will be able to see and feel why aerospace is such an interesting subject.
During all three years of the Bachelor of Science program the curriculum covers all relevant disciplines to
design and build aircraft and spacecraft. It will prepare you to choose a specific field of interest for your Master
of Science courses and final thesis. In order to prepare you for your future we expect you to permanently orient
yourself on what is happening in the world of aerospace engineering outside the university. We will stimulate
and help you in acquiring this knowledge whether through excursions or by securing internships within Europe
or beyond.
This study guide offers you a helping hand. It covers an overview of the structure of the courses and the
contents of all subjects taught. The guide starts with very useful information ranging from student facilities and
organisations to students and facultys duties and rights. The rules of the game with regard to the study
program are laid out. Please read them carefully, I expect you to get acquainted with these rules and play by
them. Do not hesitate to contact lecturers, staff, study counsellors and if you wish so, myself.
As dean of the faculty it gives me great pleasure to extend a warm welcome to you and to all new students,
and to wish all of you lots of success in the upcoming year 2003-2004.
Prof. B.A.C. Droste
Dean
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION..................................................................................................1
INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................1
Contents and application of the Study Guide 20032004....................................................................1
The Faculty ................................................................................................................................1
Education and Student Affairs Office...............................................................................................2
Faculty representatives ................................................................................................................3
Annual schedule 2003-2004: the semester system............................................................................3
STUDY FACILITIES.........................................................................................................................4
Faculty library.............................................................................................................................4
Central library ............................................................................................................................4
Readers, study books and interim examination sales .........................................................................4
Computing facilities.....................................................................................................................5
Printing .....................................................................................................................................5
Blackboard.................................................................................................................................5
Study counseling and supervision...................................................................................................5
Student financing ........................................................................................................................7
Tempometer...............................................................................................................................7
Study awards .............................................................................................................................8
PROCEDURES AND REGULATIONS ....................................................................................................9
Interim examinations and TAS.......................................................................................................9
Adapted programs.....................................................................................................................11
Safety, health, and well-being.....................................................................................................11
STUDENT ORGANISATIONS ...........................................................................................................13
VSV Leonardo da Vinci..............................................................................................................13
BeNeLaiR.................................................................................................................................14
SSVOBB ..................................................................................................................................14
EUROAVIA ...............................................................................................................................14
VSSD ......................................................................................................................................16
CHAPTER 2 - B.SC.PROGRAM............................................................................................................... 17
The curriculum............................................................................................................................. 17
Alterations in the B.Sc. program..................................................................................................... 17
Credits: European Credit Transfer System........................................................................................ 17
Important prerequisites................................................................................................................. 18
CHAPTER 3 - B.SC. FIRST COURSE YEAR............................................................................................... 19
Course descriptions....................................................................................................................... 20
CHAPTER 4 - B.SC. SECOND COURSE YEAR............................................................................................35
CHAPTER 5 - B.SC. THIRD COURSE YEAR...............................................................................................55
CHAPTER 6 - M.SC. PROGRAM.............................................................................................................. 71
Choice of graduation program.........................................................................................................71
M.Sc. program..............................................................................................................................71
Capita Selecta.............................................................................................................................. 72
M.Sc. procedures.......................................................................................................................... 72
Honours Track.............................................................................................................................. 73
Exchange programs...................................................................................................................... 74
Teacher training............................................................................................................................74
CHAPTER 7 - OVERVIEW OF MASTER VARIANTS AND M.SC. FIRST YEAR COURSES......................................75
Aerodynamics and Computational Fluid Dynamics................................................................................75
Flight Mechanics and Propulsion........................................................................................................ 80
Control and Simulation.....................................................................................................................83
Aerospace Management and Organization...........................................................................................88
Industrial Organization.....................................................................................................................90
Aerospace Structures.......................................................................................................................92
Design and Production of Composite Structures...................................................................................94
Aerospace Materials........................................................................................................................ 97
Astrodynamics and Satellite Systems............................................................................................... 100
Engineering Mechanics...................................................................................................................103
Fundamentals of Advanced Materials................................................................................................106
System Integration Aircraft.............................................................................................................108
System Integration Spacecraft........................................................................................................ 110
TABLE OF CONTENTS
List of core courses and elective courses in the M.Sc. first year............................................................114
Additional information elective courses, the websites..........................................................................118
Course descriptions M.Sc. first year..................................................................................................119
CHAPTER 8 - COURSE CODES.............................................................................................................203
Chair attributes............................................................................................................................. 203
New course codes..........................................................................................................................203
Course languages.......................................................................................................................... 203
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION REGULATIONS B.SC...............................................................................207
Appendix 1 - Final objectives B.Sc. program in Aerospace Engineering..................................................219
Appendix 2 - Absentieregeling voor het eerste- en tweedejaars projectonderwijs....................................221
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION REGULATIONS M.SC.............................................................................. 223
Appendix 1 - Final objectives M.Sc. program in Aerospace Engineering................................................. 233
STAFF TELEPHONE DIRECTORY.......................................................................................................... 235
ABBREVIATIONS AND COMMON PHRASES........................................................................................... 238
ACADEMIC CALENDAR....................................................................................................................... 239
MAP OF TU DELFT CAMP US................................................................................................................ 240
BUILDINGS (AND BUILD INGNUMBERS) OF TU DELFT CAMPUS ................................................................ 241
GENERAL INFORMATION
CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION
Contents and application of the Study Guide 20032004
The Aerospace Engineering Study Guide 20032004 contains detailed information on the Bachelors (B.Sc.) and
Masters (M.Sc.) study program, as well as the teaching and examination regulations. The information is
arranged by year of study. First-year B.Sc. students need only read the first-year information and the teaching
and examination regulations. However, it is useful to peruse the whole study guide to gain insight into the
overall curriculum.
Most of the abbreviations in this document are in Dutch. These have not been translated simply because the
Dutch abbreviations are common phrases and are used throughout the university. Chapter 8 includes a list of
these abbreviations and phrases.
The Study Guide is supplemented by a lecture and interim-examination schedule, which are available at the
faculty Education Administration Office. The newsletter Syncom contains the announcements regarding the
Aerospace Engineering study program. The most recent announcements will be posted on the faculty notice
boards and on the Aerospace Engineering web site (www.delftaerospace.com/education). As Syncom appears
only once a month, the announcements on the notice boards and on the Internet should be considered official.
The university e-mail address is also an official means of information.
New in this guide
From September 2003 on TU Delft uses only European Credits (conform the European Credit Transfer
System ECTS) instead of Delft Credit Points. Thus, all credits mentioned in this guide are European Credits.
One ECTS equals approximately 28 working hours for the student. One year equals 60 ECTS. The conversion
from Delft Credit Points to European Credit Points has been carried out according to the TU Delft conversion
regulations. The conversion to ECTS is only administrative, hence does not entail any curricular changes.
The academic records -which list the students already obtained results- will be converted in
October/November 2003.
Chapter 6 contains all information concerning the M.Sc. program and procedures.
A list of all education related websites from the TU Delft is provided in chapter 7, page 118. These websites
contain information about courses offered by other faculties than Aerospace Engineering.
In Chapter 8 a table Course Language is added. This table lists al mandatory courses in the B.Sc. and M.Sc.
program and whether they are offered in Dutch, English or both languages.
The Faculty
Street address:
Faculty of Aerospace Engineering
Kluyverweg 1
2629 HS Delft
Mailing address:
P.O. Box 5058
2600 GB Delft
Homepage:
www.delftaerospace.com
The study program for Aerospace Engineering has existed since 1940, when Prof. Dr. ir. H.J. van der Maas was
named Professor of Aeronautical Engineering at the Delft Technische Hogeschool. As the facultys name
indicates, the goal of the study program is to educate engineers in the field of aeronautics, as well as in space
engineering and technology.
The study program has grown rapidly since 1945. The facultys history from 1940 to 1990 has been recorded in
a jubilee book, published for the facultys fiftieth anniversary by Delft University Press. The title of this unique
book is Vijftig jaar Vliegtuigbouwkunde in Delft. The book is available at the desk of the Society of Aerospace
Students Leonardo da Vinci.
1 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Education and Student Affairs Office

The Education and Student Affairs Office is responsible for general educational proceedings. This office is
located on the second and third floors of the main building.
Student counter
2nd floor, room no. 208
Mrs. H.A.A. van Wel
Opening hours are:
Hours
Monday
08:3011:30
X
12:3016:00
open
Telephone: (015) 27 82076, fax: (015) 27 87589

Tuesday
open
open
Wednesday
X
X
Thursday
open
open
Friday
open
X
At the student counter, you can ask questions on lecture and interim-examination schedules, schedule
appointments with the student counselors, and other general questions concerning the curriculum. If necessary,
you will be redirected. Your personal academic records are available on blackboard.
Education Administration
Mrs. A.R. Rademaker
tel. (015) 27 88819
fax (015) 27 87589
Ms. J.R. Eisma
tel. (015) 27 85912
fax (015) 27 87589
Some of the Education Administration Offices responsibilities include the lecture and interim-examination
schedules, the Study Guide, and the reservation of lecture rooms.
Examination Administration
Mrs. S. Kop
(015) 27 88653
One of the main tasks of the Examination Administration Office is the registration of the interim-examination
results. Here students can direct their questions regarding grade registration and examination. Opening hours
are the same as those of the student counter.
Student Counselor
3rd floor, room nos. 303 and 302
Mrs. drs. M.A. van den Broek-Zoon (015) 27 82145
Mr. drs. E.J.F. Jansen
(015) 27 82048
The student counselor advises on study problems or problems that may influence study performance. More
information on study advice and counseling can be found on page 5.
IT Manager
3rd floor, room no. 308
Ing. P.N.J. Deken
(015) 27 88586
The IT Manager is responsible for the computer facilities of the project rooms and the two computer rooms.
Questions regarding student accounts may be directed to the IT manager.
Educational Affairs Officer
Mrs. dr. I.M. Croese
(015) 27 88308
The Educational Affairs Officers responsibilities include the task of managing the educational information
systems and education policy. She also runs the secretariat of the Board of Examiners.
Director of Education
Dr. B.A. Reith
(015) 27 81355/82076 (secretary), 85863 (fax)
The Director of Education is responsible for the facultys education policy. He is also head of the Education and
Student Affairs Office.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Faculty representatives
The Dean is the head of the faculty. As faculty Dean, prof. B.A.C. Droste, is in charge of the general
management of the faculty. The Dean is also responsible for the management and organization of the scientific
and educational activities and curriculum.
Regarding faculty education, his duties are:
- Determining the teaching and examination regulations (OER);
- Appointing the Board of Examiners, the Admissions Board, and their members;
- Determining the regulations on exemption, sections 7.25, 7.28, and 7.29 of the UEA;
- Appointing the members of the Board of Education.
The Board of Education (OPCIE) makes assessments and advises on the implementation and determining of the
teaching and examination regulations. The OPCIE is responsible for advising the Dean on the study program
and all corresponding educational affairs. The OPCIE consists of five members of the scientific staff and five
students. The student counselor is an advisory member.
The Board of Examiners assesses the proper implementation of the teaching and examination regulations.
Among other things, the board determines the examination results and makes decisions on the requests to
deviate from the regulations.
The Student Advisory Committee draws up study advice for each first-year B.Sc. student. This takes in June.
The members of the Student Advisory Committee are Prof. B.A.C. Droste and Prof.dr.ir. Th. van Holten.
The three committees, as mentioned above, are attended by the student counselor, who has the role of
independent advisor.
The Student Council (SR) consists of five members and has the right of approval regarding:
- The determination and alteration of faculty regulations;
- Sections of the teaching and examination regulations;
- The educational section of the student statute;
- The design of the faculty system of educational quality control and the planned policy regarding that quality
control;
- The determination and alteration of faculty regulations regarding students safety, health, and well-being.
Furthermore, the student council has advisory rights concerning the budget plan, student services, and major
changes in student and educational services.
Annual schedule 2003-2004: the semester system

The semester system spans a course year divided into two semesters, both with a short interruption. The
curriculum thus consists of four lecture periods of seven weeks. The system is based on a (biannual) interimexamination period at the end of each semester (in January and June).
Lecture period
Lecture free week
Examination period
1st semester
part 1
Sept. 1, 2003 - Oct. 17, 2003
Oct. 20, 2003 - Oct. 24, 2003
1 Oct. 27, 2003 - Oct. 31, 2003
1st semester
part 2
Nov. 3, 2003 - Dec. 19, 2003
2 Jan. 5, 2004 - Jan. 23, 2004
2nd semester
part 1
Jan. 26, 2004 - Mar. 12, 2004 Mar. 15, 2004 - Mar. 19, 2004 3 Mar. 22, 2004 - Mar. 26, 2004
2nd semester
part 2
Mar. 29, 2004 - May 28, 2004 June 1, 2004 - June 4, 2004
re-sits
4 June 7, 2004 - June 25, 2004

5 Aug. 16, 2004 - Aug. 27, 2004
Please note that the third year examinations and the Design Synthesis Exercise (OS) period slightly deviate
from this schedule. The academic year 2004-2005 starts on Monday September 6, 2004. The Academic
Calendar can be found at the last pages of this Guide.
GENERAL INFORMATION
STUDY FACILITIES
Faculty library
Each faculty has its own local librar(y/ies), all part of the Delft University of T echnology Library (BTUD). The
Aerospace Engineering library is situated on the second floor of the main building, Kluyverweg 1, telephone
(015) 27 82071.
The library has a collection that serves both research and education of the Faculty. The collection comprises
books and reports available for loan, as well as journals and reference material, available for perusal only.
The study collection also includes the OS-collection for the third year Design Synthesis Exercise. The services
of the central library and the faculty libraries are also available online. The website www.library.tudelft.nl
provides access to the catalog of the entire library collection of Delft University of Technology and to the
Resources Guide, presenting subject-specific sources of information (databases). The library has photocopying
facilities. A library pass is required to borrow literature. Passes can be obtained free of charge upon
presentation of a personal ID and a recent proof of address. Opening hours: Monday through Friday, 9:0017:00 (every first Monday of the month: 11:0017:00).
Central library
Additional student services are provided by the Central Library, Prometheusplein 1, Delft. The collection
contains standards and limited report literature, as well as books and magazines. For more information, please
call the reception desk, telephone (015) 27 84510.
Central library opening hours:
Course periods
Monday through Thursday 09:0022:00
Friday
09:0018:00
Saturday and Sunday
10:0018:00
Examination periods
09:00-24:00
09.00-22.00
10:00-22:00
Summer holiday
09:00-17:00
09:00-17.00
closed
Readers, study books and interim examination sales

Reader sales points
At the beginning of the first course year, students are required to purchase a study pack containing the
necessary AE readers for the first-year courses (Propedeuse). It is recommended to wait until the lectures have
started before purchasing the remaining readers, as some are distributed during the lectures. If a reader is not
in stock/sold out it takes the sales points a couple of days to supply.
Reader sales point Aerospace Engineering:
W. Spee, room 001, Main building, Kluyverweg 1, tel. (015) 27 81250. In approximately October the sales
point will move to the first floor (next to the new computer room)
Opening hours: Monday through Friday, 09:30-09:45, 10:30-10:45, 11:30-11:45, 12:30-12:45, 13:30-13:45,
14:30-14:45 and 15:30-15:45.
Reader sales point Applied Physics (TN):
B. Sonneveld, room no. C057, Applied Physics building, Lorentzweg 1.
Opening hours: Monday through Thursday, 8:0012:30 and 13.30-16.00. Friday, 8:00-12:30 and 13:30-15:00,
telephone (015) 27 86048.
Reader sales point Mechanical Engineering and Marine Technology (WBMT):
L.C. Vroonland, faculty OCP (building Industrial Design), Landbergstraat 15
Opening hours: Monday through Friday, 09:0012:00 and 12:30-16:00, telephone (015) 27 83062.
Reader sales point Technical Mathematics and Informatics (ITS):
N.W. Koster, Mekelweg 4, tel. (015) 27 87855,
Opening hours, Monday through Thursday: 8:3016:00. Friday: 8:3015:30
Reader sales point faculty of Technology, Policy and Management (TBM):
Student Information Center, Jaffalaan 5, next to main entrance, tel. 015-2786373.
Opening hours, Monday through Friday, 10:00-12:30 and 13:00-15:00. Tuesday night and Thursday night:
18:00-19:00.
Book sales
Most lecturers use books instead of readers. Most of these can be purchased (with discount) at:
VSSD, Schoemakerstraat 2, tel. (015) 27 84125 (membership required) and the Society of Aerospace Students
(VSV) Leonardo da Vinci (VSSD/VSV membership required).
The VSV is offering their members the service of buying books online. The VSV homepage
(www.delftaerospace.com/vsv) contains a link to order books. The books can be picked up and paid for at the
GENERAL INFORMATION
VSV desk after a few days. The books for the first part of the first semester have already been ordered by the
VSV, so students do not need to order these. Books can be picked up at the beginning of the course year.
Please note! All Dutch books are submitted to trade regulations and have a fixed price. A discount can be
offered, depending on the amount of books ordered. This means that the prices of the Dutch books are
conditional. However, most of the books are in English and are not submitted to a fixed book price.
With this way of selling books, the VSV offers a wider range of books at a lower price. If you have further
questions, feel free to drop by the desk, or contact the VSV education official. Watch for the announcements on
the notice boards and in the Leonardo Times.
Interim examination sales
Collections of previously given interim examinations can be purchased at the VSV desk.
Computing facilities
Aerospace-engineering students are permitted to use the following faculty IT facilities.
Access to the computers belonging to the LR0Student cluster, situated at the first floor and the computers
in the project rooms on the third, fourth, fifth and sixth floors of the main building, Kluyverweg 1. The
computers at the first floor are available to every student during the opening hours of the main building. All
other computers may be used according to the project schedule.
The computers belonging to the LR0Student cluster have been equipped with general software, such as
Windows NT and Microsoft Office (campus licensed versions) and special software purchased by the faculty
to assist in assignments and exercises.
Access to the faculty and university networks, which can be used to establish a connection with private or
public systems and the Internet.
An electronic mailbox to receive e-mail. There is a standard format for each students address:
I.N.I.T.I.A.L.S.insertionsLastName@student.tudelft.nl
The university networks (DUNET) can also be accessed from outside the university using a telephone
connection (analog, ISDN or ADSL) or direct network connection (FttD). For this, a so-called service account is
needed. The private university systems, as well as the Internet and the electronic mail system, can be accessed
through the university-wide computer networks.
Access codes and passwords for the LR0Student systems and electronic mailboxes, as well as a short
description on system use and access, are issued upon presentation of valid proof of registration. The serviceaccount data are sent separately by e-mail. Access to the facilities is discontinued when the student is no longer
registered. The university e-mail address is an official means of information. You are advised to check your
mailbox regularly.
All computer facility use is subject to rules and regulations. These are supplemented when the student receives
his access codes. Violation of these regulations will result in exclusion from all computer facilities.
To apply for an account or to obtain account information, please contact the IT Manager, room no. 308, tel.
(015) 27 88586.
Printing
From September 1, 2003 a paid-printing system will be introduced. At each printer or printcorner a ticket
machine is installed which accepts the 'Chipknip'. When you're not in possession of a Chipknip, a prepaidchipknip is available at the faculty restaurant.
Blackboard
Blackboard is a digital learning platform used by Delft University of Technology. Blackboard can be found at
http://blackboard.icto.tudelft.nl. An account is created as soon as a student registers with the university. To
obtain your account go onto blackboard and press on the "i"-button next to "NETID" and follow the instructions.
Should you loose your password, press forgot your password and enter your NETID press submit. If your
email-address is listed press send the mail. Blackboard will email you a procedure to set up your TUDELFT
account. In case of problems contact the blackboard coordinator by email: G.N.Saunders@lr.tudelft.nl.
Study counseling and supervision

Student counselor
The faculty student counselor is the person to contact regarding questions or problems relating to the study
program or studying in general. The student counselor acts as an ombudsman or trusted representative.
Furthermore, he/she attends committees as a counselor and has contact with teachers, colleague counselors,
and staff outside the university who are concerned with student advising and counseling. Students can call on
the counselor for answers to questions and problems like:
- Did I choose the right study program?
GENERAL INFORMATION
Why am I failing so many courses?

What is the best way to plan my study?
How do these regulations work?
How do I resolve problems with my parents, boyfriend, or girlfriend?
What can I do to improve my concentration?
I feel I have been treated unfairly by a teacher. What can I do about it?
I have problems due to illness / disability.
I am a top(-class)sporter, what arrangements can be made?
Personal issues may be dealt with during a meeting with the student counselor. Students can be assured that
all information will be treated as strictly confidential and will be discussed with third parties only upon their
consent.
At your explicit request, the student counselor may advise the institutes that decide on student affairs for the
benefit of your case. Where necessary, the student counselor will act as faculty mediator for student deans,
psychologists and doctors.
Students are advised to contact the counselor as soon as problems arise. Waiting often results in the loss of
valuable study time and escalation of the problem.
The student counselors of the Faculty of Aerospace Engineering are:
Mrs. Drs. M.A. van den Broek-Zoon
Kluyverweg 1, 3 rd floor, room no. 303
Telephone (015) 27 82145, e-mail: m.a.vandenbroek@lr.tudelft.nl
and
Drs. E.J.F. Jansen
Kluyverweg 1, 3 rd floor, room no. 302
Telephone (015) 27 82048, e-mail: e.j.f.jansen@lr.tudelft.nl
You can schedule an appointment during open office hours with the student counselor, or discuss matters that
can be resolved in a short time. The remaining hours are reserved exclusively for appointments and for other
matters. This rule has been made to prevent the interruption of conversations and meetings.
The open office hours will be announced at the beginning of the course year. Appointments can be scheduled
with the secretary, Mrs. H.A.A. van Wel, room 203, tel. (015) 27 82076, or at the student counter during
opening hours, second floor, room no. 208.
Student mentor system
The faculty offers guidance to first-year B.Sc. students through mentor groups. These groups are formed in
September at the beginning of the first year and hold frequent meetings. Every group has got a senior-year
student of the faculty for student mentor.
The mentor system is intended to help students begin their study in the best way possible. The contact with
senior-year students helps them build insight while exchanging experiences. During the meetings, the following
will be open for discussion:
Information about the faculty and study program;
Assistance in tracking down and eliminating study barriers within the faculty;
Information about planning the study program and the skills needed.
The student mentors are guided by the student counselor.
Study advice
All B.Sc. first-year students will receive a written study progress evaluation at the end of their first year,
regarding their ability to continue the study program. A study-evaluation committee, appointed by the faculty,
issues this evaluation when the second interim-examination period has concluded. The evaluation is an
indication as to whether the study program can be completed within the period allotted. Both quality and
quantity are considered in the written study evaluation.
During the first year, the student develops insight into talent capacity and interest in the AE study program. It
is of great importance that the student considers the continuation of the study program with regard to the
allotted registration period. The written study evaluation should be seen as an important, though non-binding
contribution of the faculty.
Explanation of the study evaluation:
Positive: You have good prospects to complete this study successfully.
Reasonably positive: You have reasonably good prospects to complete this study successfully.
Doubtful: To successfully continue your studies at the Faculty of Aerospace Engineering, a considerable
progress must be realized.
Negative: You are strongly advised to discontinue your studies at the Faculty of Aerospace Engineering.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The faculty urgently advises students to consider the continuation of the study program before August using
the study evaluation as a strong indicator and, if needed, with the help and advice of the student counselor.
Considering the current student financing regulations, it is very important to register for the second year of
study only if you are reasonably certain of completing the study program successfully.
Student Facility Center
In addition to the facultys own resources, students can call on the Student Facility Center (SFC) of Delft
University of Technology. The staff is there to answer your questions on conditions and requirements of the
study like student financing, registration rights, legal affairs and the financial support regulation for students
(RFOS). For more specific, professional assistance, students may call on the student psychologists.
The Information Center offers information regarding studies (university level and higher education level) in the
Netherlands and abroad. Furthermore, information regarding internships in the Netherlands or abroad and the
corresponding job markets is also available.
Office hours of the Deans: weekdays, 09:00-17:00.
Office hours of the student psychologists: Tuesday and Thursday, 11:3012:30.
The Information Center is open throughout the week from 09:0017:00.
Student Facility Center (SFC)
Julianalaan 134
2628 BL Delft
Telephone (015) 27 88012
Student financing
Performance scholarship (prestatiebeurs)
If you receive student financing from the Dutch government via IBG, the following is of interest:
Students are evaluated for the prestatiebeurs at two points. The first point is at the end of the first year when
students must have obtained at least 30 ECTS credits. If you have registered as a student on February 1, 2001,
or later, the standard is 20 ECTS credits. The second point is after ten years, when the B.Sc. or M.Sc. diploma
must be obtained.
If you meet the requirement of 30 ECTS credits in your first year of study, your basic and additional financing
of the first 12 months is automatically converted into a grant. Students receiving student financing for the first
time on September 1, 2000, or later immediately receive their additional financing as a grant.
If the 30 ECTS credits requirement is not met, but the student does graduate within the ten-year period, both
basic and additional loans are converted into a grant.
Your OV-card is also converted to a grant if you meet the requirement of 30 ECTS credits. Students who have
received their student financing since September 1, 1999, or later must pay back 60,58 per month starting
September 1, 2000, if they do not meet this requirement.
Your basic and additional financing of the second, third, fourth, and fifth years of study are converted into a
grant if you graduate within the ten-year period.
Tempometer
Delft University of Technology has developed an instrument to measure study progress to assess whether the
prestatiebeurs standards are met. This tempometer consists of a list of study units and the corresponding
credits that count in the calculation of study progress and a system of rules to calculate the study progress for
every student through a specified academic year.
The
-
The
-
results are dated and determined as follows:

Interim examinations are dated on the day of sitting;
Laboratory and study exercises are dated on the day they are submitted or completed;
For study units that have been completed outside the Faculty of Aerospace Engineering, the students
themselves are responsible for providing the written statements issued by official bodies stating the
corresponding examination unit, along with the title, code, credits awarded, date of issue, and date on
which the result was obtained;
Exemptions granted on the basis of academic performance in previous years of study do not count as a
factor when calculating study progress.
tempometer calculation rules are as follows:
Grades 6, and sufficient marks (s) count their full weight in credits;
Grades between a 5.0 and a 6.0 (near sufficient) count half their weight in credits;
Grades < 5.0 are not taken into account;
Study progress is calculated over two separate stagesthe P phase and the D phase (B.Sc. 2nd+3rd year &
M.Sc.), added together and rounded up to the closest integer;
The calculated amount of credits for each study phase consists of:
Part A: counted credits of the total of sufficient results;
Part B: counted credits of the sum of the near sufficient results.
GENERAL INFORMATION
For every study phase regarding part B (the sum of "near sufficient" results), the restriction applies that this
cannot exceed 15% of the A part:
B < 15% of A: total of credits A + B;
B = 15% of A: total of credits 115% of A;
B > 15% of A: total of credits 115% of A.
As of September, the complete regulations regarding the tempometer, including a list of all courses, will be
available for perusal at the faculty Education Administration Desk. Further information on the prestatiebeurs
and tempometer may be obtained from the student counsellors.
Financial Support Regulation for Students (RFOS)
Your studies could conceivably be delayed. Contributing factors could include illness, disability, top-level sports,
pregnancy, or committee activities. The encountered delay can prevent you from completing the study program
within the period in which you are eligible for the prestatiebeurs. In this case, you may appeal to the RFOS. It is
of great importance to report the circumstances to the student counselor so that he may discuss any actions
that may be necessary in consultation with the student.
RFOS details are included in the student statute. Questions may be directed to the student counselor.
Prof. Dr. ir. H.J. van der Maas Fund
The Prof. Van der Maas Foundation is intended to stimulate the professional education of AE students and new
graduates. Students in need of financial support for an individual study, tour, or period of practical work can
submit a request to the vice president of the fund, Prof.dr.ir. Th. de Jong, Faculty of Aerospace Engineering,
Kluyverweg 1, 2629 HS Delft.
This request must contain a short description of the purpose of the trip and budget estimates containing ones
own financial contribution and support received from other funds.
The request must be supplemented by the advice of the research supervisor (if available) and a recent overview
of the obtained results regarding study progress, available at the faculty Education Administration Office. It is
stressed that in general, the Prof. Van der Maas fund will finance only a part of the total costs to be able to
offer support to as many students as possible with the means at hand. A contribution from this foundation is
awarded only once to an individual student in cases when it is clear that the estimated cost of travel and
accommodation will exceed a normal student budget.
Study awards
Propedeuse study award
A prize is awarded every year to the student who nominally completes the Propedeuse with the best score. The
announcement takes place during the presentation of the diplomas.
Prof. ir. E. Dobbinga study award
As a rule, a prize is awarded every year to students whose work indicates exceptional quality, originality, or
special effort.
All written reports of all study units excluding the dissertation project are eligible for the award. When judging
material for the Prof.ir. E. Dobbinga award, close attention is paid to the level of presentation. This must be of
such a level that a reasonably informed reader can judge the reports value. The report must present the
students understanding of the greater meaning of his work and the relationship with similar work.
Furthermore, the work must present a greater-than-average amount of interest, effort, or initiative.
Teachers and/or supervisors who consider a paper eligible for the prize may submit it to the chairman of the
facultys prize committee, prof.dr.ir. M.J.L. van Tooren. This committee advises the Dean on the award. The
prize, consisting of a modest sum of money, may be awarded to more than one student.
GENERAL INFORMATION
PROCEDURES AND REGULATIONS
The overall course of events regarding examinations and interim examinations is described in the teaching and
examination regulations (supplemented). It is necessary to read the teaching and examination regulations to
get a good idea of the study-program requirements and how they are met.
Interim examinations and TAS

Registering for interim examinations in TAS
To participate in an interim examination, it is compulsory to register in advance using TAS (Tentamen Aanmeld
Systeem) on the internet. For Aerospace Engineering examinations TAS can be used from four weeks before the
examination period until two weeks before the examination date. This means that for each examination there is
a different closing date! Other faculties (such as Applied Mathematics) may have a different procedure. Please
check this at the relevant Faculties. Without being registrated the results of your test will not be valid. Only by
request, the board of examiners can make an exemption of this rule.
TAS: the Intermediate Examination/Practical Exercise Registering System
With TAS one must register for all interim examinations, and cancel the registration if necessary. TAS also
specifies in which lecture-room the examinations will take place. Furthermore there is the possibility to print out
a registration-proof. The TAS-system can be found on http://www.tas.tudelft.nl. This site is also equipped with
a help-function.
Before you begin using TAS, you should have a password available (minimum of 6 characters of which at least
one is a number). This password gives you entrance to TAS on internet. It is advisable to leave your e-mail
address: in case of a change, the student-administration can inform students through e-mail.
The computers in the computer room and the computers in the project rooms on the third, fourth, fifth and
sixth floors of the main building are suitable for registering using TAS.
In case of problems with accessing TAS, please contact the IT Manager, room no. 308, tel. (015) 27 88586.
For using TAS on another PC than in the computer room at the Faculty, you should (once only) download and
install the JAVA-plug in and some certificates (5 Mb, this is a once-only event and requires some downloadtime). The detailed description of the installation-procedure is found on the TAS-internet page. For Windowversions, the TAS-application is supported by DTO.
Interim-examination schedule
A summary of the interim-examination schedule is published on the website
(http://www.delftaerospace.com/education/examinationschedules.asp.) and available at the 2nd floor in the
trays in the corridor. If a written sitting has not been included in this schedule, students may consult the
interim-examination schedule of the Central Student Administration Office. Alterations to the interimexamination schedule are always posted on the notice boards.
Locations
The definitive locations of the interim-examinations will be published in TAS.
It is strongly advised to check (again) on the last moment in case of location alterations.
Interim-examination regulations
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Only after the proctor has given his permission the candidates may enter the interim-examination room.
Students arriving late may, with the proctors permission, enter the examination room up to one half hour
after the examination has begun.
It is prohibited to leave the interim-examination room within one half hour after the official starting time.
In special cases, permission may be granted to leave the interim-examination room temporarily, on
condition that no more than one person at a time may be absent from the room (see also 11).
Candidates must present and display their campuscard and valid proof of admission card
(inschrijvingsbewijs) on the top-left corner of their desks at the beginning of the examination. Candidates
should bring exact change with them should they desire coffee.
Book bags and briefcases may not be brought into the examination room. In some cases, the proctor may
appoint a storage area.
Candidates must provide their own writing, calculating and drawing materials. Answer sheets and scrap
paper will be made available.
Candidates may not use a pencil or red ink on their answer sheets.
If programming calculators or other devices are not allowed at an examination, the teacher should make
this clear long before the examination.
It is prohibited to use books or readers as reference during the examination unless prior permission has
been granted by the lecturer.
GENERAL INFORMATION
10. Under no circumstances candidates may carry cellular phones. These must be stored inside the students
book bags or cased and must be turned off for the duration of the examination. It is prohibited to use a
cellular phone or to take a cellular phone outside the examination room during the examination. The use of
cellular devices or other mean of communication during interim examinations is considered cheating.
11. If the proctor observes or suspects cheating, the teaching and examinations regulations will be applied in
accordance with section 23 of the teaching and examination regulations.
12. Before the candidate finally exits the room (no earlier than one half hour after the beginning of the
examination), he must at least hand in the first page of his answer sheets, which state his name and
student number.
Supplement regarding the proctors:
1.
2.
3.
A telephone must be connected in the interim-examination room.

In the case of more than 75 examinees, there must be at least two proctors present.
If more than two proctors are necessary, a representative will be appointed.
Examinations
The first and third year of the Bachelor of Science study are concluded with the Propedeuse (P) and Bachelor of
Science degree. The second course year of the Master of Science Study is concluded with the Master of Science
degree.
Examination requests and requests to deviate from the teaching and examination regulations must be directed
to the secretary of the Board of Examiners. The Board of Examiners meets every first Monday of the month to
determine the results of the examinations and to decide on the filed requests. All procedures are explained in
the teaching and examination regulations which are supplemented at the back of this Study Guide. A short
summary of these procedures is presented below.
Meeting schedule 20032004:
8-9-2003
2-2-2004
6-10-2003
1-3-2004
3-11-2003
5-4-2004
1-12-2003
3-5-2004
5-1-2004
7-6-2004
Address, Board of Examiners:
Secretary of the Board of Examiners
P.O. Box 5058
2600 GB Delft
The Board of Examiners is made up of the following members:
Prof. B.A.C. Droste (Chairman)
Dr. I.M. Croese (Secretary)*
Prof.dr.ir. M. van Tooren
Dr. ir. B.W. van Oudheusden*
Dr. ir. H.G. Visser
Dr. B.A. Reith*
Drs. M.A. van den Broek-Zoon (advising member)*
The members marked with an asterisk (*) are present at the monthly meetings covering the daily proceedings
(Propedeuse and Bachelor examination requests).
Completing an examination
Completing an examination means that the Board of Examiners checks that the examination syllabus in
question has been completed according to the teaching and examination regulations.
Registering for examinations
Students must register for an examination at least 4 weeks prior to the assembly of the Board of Examiners.
Students must register with the secretary of the Board of Examiners. Students receive an official statement
from the Board of Examiners on passing the examination within four weeks after the meeting.
The registration forms can be found in the folders outside the Education Administration Office. The forms can be
submitted to the Education Administration Office. A P examination requires the filling in of an additional white
request form. This form is required by the Central Student Administration. M.Sc. examination forms will be sent
by Mrs. S. Kop when the student has registered for this examination.
Deviations from the teaching and examination regulations
The Board of Examiners has the authority to deviate from the teaching and examination regulations. A student
must submit a well-founded, written request to the secretary of the Board of Examiners at least 2 weeks prior
to the assembly of the Board of Examiners. The student will receive written notification within one month of the
committees decision.
10
GENERAL INFORMATION
Exemption from an examination unit

The Board of Examiners can grant exemption to an examination subject if the student has completed this
subject at another Dutch university, a Dutch higher educational institution, or a foreign university with a level
of education equivalent to that of Delft University and if the contents and study load of this examination unit
are deemed equivalent by the Board of Examiners.
Adapted programs
Students who have completed the Aeronautical Engineering Higher Vocational Education study program are
offered an adapted program, available at the faculty Education Administration Office. Graduates from the KIM
and KMA are also offered adapted programs. Consultation with the Director of Education, Dr. B.A. Reith, is
necessary.
HBO-Students who are interested in studying an adapted Aerospace Engineering program have to hand in
copies of their academic records and certificates and the descriptions of the courses (including the number of
lecture hours, hours of laboratory exercises measured in both hours and credits). On basis of this information,
it is decided what exemptions from the Aerospace Engineering program (B.Sc. plus M.Sc) can be made.
The requested information should be sent to:
Dr. B.A. Reith
Director of Education
Kluyverweg 1
2629 HS Delft
Telephone (015) 27 81355/82076 (secretary)
Fax (015) 27 85863
E-mail: B.A.Reith@lr.tudelft.nl
The Board of Examiners has a final say in determining the adapted program.
Safety, health, and well-being

According to the Act on Working Conditions (ARBO) employers are responsible for the safety and well-being of
their employees. This legislation is, in general terms, also applicable to students enrolled at the university. The
regulations demand that a healthy working and study environment is provided, and the attitude and behavior of
the university, faculty, staff, and students must contribute to this. This means that students should not
endanger fellow students or themselves. They have to behave responsibly and in accordance with the safety
regulations. Students are not allowed access to technical facilities, may not perform hazardous tasks, and may
not enter laboratories or workshops without permission and proper instructions. Important safety information is
laid down in the Risk Inventory and Evaluation and in the ARBO and environmental regulations, which contain
the essential codes of conduct and safety. Both documents can be obtained from the ARBO/Environmental
advisor and will soon be available on the faculty website.
Smoking policy
Tobacco smoke contains a large number of poisonous and cancerous elements. Hence places where people
smoke are unhealthy. Both the working conditions act and the tobacco law prohibit unwilling exposure of
employees to tobacco fumes. Therefore the faculty prohibits smoking at every location within the buildings of
the faculty. Any student or staff member is free to comment on an individual violating the smoking prohibition.
If this does not lead to the desired result, the persons involved have a right to refuse the company of the
smoker. The smoker is held responsible for the solutions to the problems that may arise from his actions.
Those who are burdened by cigarette smoke in study or office space or those who consider the smoking ban
poorly publicized or maintained are invited to contact the faculty ARBO/Environmental advisor.
Complaints and injuries arising from long-term working with computer screens
The faculty puts in a great effort to prevent employees and students from injuries or disability such as RSI
(Repetitive Strain Injury) due to intensive computer work. These injuries may arise when individuals work with
computers in a stressful and intensive way, particularly if they have adopted an unhealthy sitting/working
position or are using poor office equipment (chair, desk, etc.), overexerting parts of the body. Students who
think their workspace is poorly arranged, should report this to the ARBO/Environmental advisor to have the
workspace investigated. In case of suffering from the first symptoms such as recurring shoulder aches and
tingling in the wrists or arms, consultation of a (student's) physician is recommended. Further information
regarding this subject may also be obtained from the ARBO/Environmental advisor.
Accidents
Any accident, near-accident or hazardous situation in and around the faculty has to be reported to a faculty
representative. The person responsible for an accident will not be held liable in most cases, unless gross intent
11
GENERAL INFORMATION
or negligence is observed. Not reporting an accident, near-accident, or hazardous situation may result in
disciplinary measures.
Environment
Scientific experiments and manufacture performed within the faculty are designed to produce minimal harm to
the environment. This is supervised as part of the environmental legislation in effect. Behavior that may
damage the environment will not be tolerated within the faculty. Those who violate the environmental
regulations will be held liable. The transcripts containing the issued environmental licenses can be examined at
the ARBO/Environmental advisors office.
To contact the ARBO/Environmental advisor: Room no. 707, Mailto: A.J.Macgillavry@lr.tudelft.nl ; tel.
(015) 27 82066.
Harassment or undesirable behaviour
Everyone at TU Delft has a right to feel respected and safe. Undesirable behaviour (harassment) is
inappropriate, unwanted behaviour that disturbs someone. Teasing, mocking, gossiping, bullying, sexual or
racial intimidation, violence and discrimination are all forms of harassment. If you believe that you are the
victim of any form of harassment you are advised to consult or lay down a complaint with the student counselor
and confidential counselor for employees and students of this faculty, Mrs. drs. M.A. van den Broek (room 303,
tel. 015-2782145, or confidential at tel. 015-2789599) or a so called "vertrouwenspersoon" of any other
faculty.
12
GENERAL INFORMATION
STUDENT ORGANISATIONS
VSV Leonardo da Vinci
Established in 1945, the Society of Aerospace Students Leonardo da Vinci, has grown into a mature society. It
organizes many activities for its members, more than 95% of all students at the Faculty of Aerospace
Engineering. The faculty is constantly growing - and growing strongly. Currently there are over 1400 members,
making the Society of Aerospace Engineering Students the largest societies of its kind in the Benelux.
The Society aims to serve the moral and material interests of aerospace students in all aspects of student life.
Since 1945, this has been achieved by organizing a wide variety of activities, mostly in the field of aerospace
engineering. Here is an overview of our activities:
Education
The quality of education is important. Student participation in this matter seems indispensable. Leonardo da
Vinci keeps a close eye on all educational affairs. Student committees evaluate the quality of practical work,
exams, lectures, lecturers and education in general. In meetings with lecturers and staff members they discuss
their findings. At the end of each year these evaluations are published in a guide. This guide helps students
with exam preparation. The society is also active in a committee that measures the quality of the curriculum.
For the first three study years the society sells all the necessary books at a very good price. They can be
ordered via their website. Leonardo da Vinci also sells a variety of study guides and practice interim
examinations at the VSV desk.
Career fair De Delftse Bedrijvendagen
This career fair is a three-day event for students close to graduation. It is organized by the five largest student
societies at Delft University of Technology, of which Leonardo da Vinci is one. About one hundred companies,
carefully selected by the organization, provide presentations and have promotion stands. After this event,
companies give workshops and interviews are arranged between companies and students, in which more
detailed information is given and career opportunities are discussed. Both companies and students benefit.
Wings
The Society of Aerospace Students Leonardo da Vinci has two Wings, the Aviation Wing and the Space Wing,
which serve the interest of aviation and space-oriented students respectively.
The Aviation wing (LVD) organizes visits workshops, lectures and other aeronautic related activities.
The visits are to various companies like KLM, Schiphol airport, NLR, Air force bases at Leeuwarden and Twente
or a 'refuel-flight' on a KDC-10. There are also a few multiple-day visits to Limburg/Germany and air shows Le
Bourget or Farnborough.
The Space wing (RVD), founded in 1986 is active in the field of space technology. One of the foremost tasks is
to supply information to students to help in there choice of specialization. For this purpose, the RVD organizes
the Space Info day, tries to generate interest for this field of expertise and contribute to the space technology
curriculum at the Faculty. There are also lectures, workshops and symposia on subjects like UFOs, mars
colonization and the International Space Station. Companies like ESA/Estec, Fokker Space and Bradford
Engineering are visited annually.
Freshmen weekend (EJW)
The freshmen weekend, organized for the new first year students, is the traditional start of their student years
and marks the beginning of a beautiful career. The purpose of this weekend is for the freshmen to get to know
each other before the academic year starts, meet senior year students and exchange knowledge of the study
program and studying in Delft in general. The EJW is held at the beach and the traditional Airshow and beach
party make it an unforgettable experience.
Following the freshmen weekend is the reception week (OWEE), organized to get accustomed with the
university, the City of Delft and the student clubs.
The EJW committee also publishes the first year mug book, containing the mug shots and addresses of all the
first year students.
Movies and social get-together
Leonardo da Vinci organizes more than just the above. Movies, sports events, indoor carting, indoor skiing and
get-togethers often take place. 'Top Gun', the pre-eminent aerospace movie, is the traditional start of the social
academic year for all aerospace students. With these activities we try to increase the contact between the VSV
members.
Yearbook
All the activities of Leonardo da Vinci are annually reported in the yearbook. This book describes the
developments in the aviation and space industry of the past year. Every yearbook has its own theme (e.g.
environment, turbulence, and the horizon) and includes an address book of all Aerospace Engineering students.
Members of the VSV can pick up a free copy at the VSV desk.
Leonardo Times
This quarterly, 44 page full-color magazine is the pride of the society. The Leonardo Times has a professional
look and has a circulation of over 5000. The magazine is sent to the society members, alumni, honorary
13
GENERAL INFORMATION
members and companies. Faculty employees, secondary schools, university libraries and relations in the trade
and industry also receive the magazine.
The magazine covers various aerospace related technical topics and contains corporate profiles, trainee and
alumni reports and activities of the society. Companies can advertise in the Leonardo Times and can present
themselves in the corporate profile section with information about their activities, staff interviews and a profile
of potential recruits.
Study tours
The aerospace business has a strong international character. Every year a study tour is organized to introduce
students to aerospace and related high-tech companies abroad. Another aim is to get in touch with other
students, and of course to get acquainted with different cultural surroundings.
The destination is alternately in and outside Europe and varies from 2 to 4 weeks. About thirty students and a
few faculty members can participate. Recent destinations have been Russia, China, Scandinavia, Indonesia,
Australia, Italy, North America, Brasil and Germany. This years trip Origami will unfold the mysteries of the
Japanese and South Korean aerospace industry.
Companies
Leonardo da Vinci offers her senior-year students the possibility to reach potential employers through several
workshops, master classes and company days. During these visits, students work in small groups on a problem
the company is dealing with. At the end of the day they present their solutions and discuss this with the
companys representatives. Companies which we visited last year are KLM, The Royal Airforce, Thales, Shell
and Airbus in Toulouse!
Finally
Studying in Delft is more than following courses and writing reports. Personal and organizing skills are of equal
value. These skills can be obtained at the VSV `Leonardo da Vinci, a society with a long history and tradition,
and a good reputation in the aerospace world. Dont hesitate to drop by the VSV desk or room 801 if you are
interested in one of our committees, or visit the committee orientation evening.
The VSV has her own office situated on the eighth floor, which is manned from 09.00h to 18.00h. The VSV desk
is situated on the ground floor and is opened from 10.30h to 10.45h, 12.30h to 13.30h and 15.30h to 15.45h.
A membership costs 17.00 and remains valid for the entire duration of your study.
The VSV can be reached at the following address: VSV Leonardo da Vinci, Kluyverweg 1,2629 HS Delft,
telephone: (015) 27 85366, fax: (015) 27 81243, E-mail: VSV@lr.tudelft.nl
Check out our homepage (http://www.delftaerospace.com/VSV) for more information and our activity agenda.
BeNeLaiR
BeNeLaiR stands for Belgium The Netherlands Aerospace Engineering. BeNeLaiR started in 1996 to assist the
Belgian students at the Faculty of Aerospace Engineering by handling the formalities, because studying in
another country always gives some difficulties.
t Belgisch Boekske has been published to solve several problems which are encountered by the coming
students, e.g. residence permit, enrolment and insurance. Through the years the job responsibilities have
grown. BeNeLaiR is now functioning as information service for Belgium. Also the establishment of contacts with
the Belgian Aerospace industry is one of their tasks. In the past BeNeLaiR has already organized a Belgian
Company Day and a five days excursion to the most prominent companies of this sector.
It is not the intention to separate the Belgians of the Dutch students, but to bring some typical Belgian
atmosphere into the faculty. Therefore several drinks and other activities are organized, which are enjoyable
and informative. Everyone who loves a Belgian beer is welcome. BeNeLaiR is not only for the coming students,
but also for 200 Belgian students who already study in Delft and have some practical problems. You can always
contact BeNeLaiR if you have questions about studying and living in Delft or if you miss some important
information! You can find them in room 8.08 or you can send an email to
http://www.delftaerospace.com/benelair.
SSVOBB
The SSVOBB (Stichting Studenten Vliegtuigontwikkeling, -bouw en beheer) is the Delft Student Aircraft
Manufacturers Association. In 1989, aerospace students decided to add a practical dimension to their study.
Construction started on the replica of a thirties aerobatics airplane, the Lambach HL II. Meanwhile, the
Lambach has contributed to many air shows and has since been undergoing maintenance and inspection. The
Impuls project, started in 1995 offers students the opportunity to not only help in constructing an aircraft, but
in the design of an aircraft as well. Considerable time has been spent constructing and designing the aircraft in
the faculty basement, using advanced composite technology. Many students of all course years are involved in
both projects. Everyone interested in designing or maintaining one of the two aircraft is welcome at room 8.01
or can mail to SSVOBB@LR.TUDelft.nl.
EUROAVIA
EUROAVIA, founded in 1959 is the European Association of Aerospace Students. This association aims to
stimulate contacts between Aerospace students in Europe and to prepare her members to get used to work in
14
GENERAL INFORMATION
an international environment. Throughout the years international cooperation got more and more important in
the Aerospace industry. More and more international oriented graduates are needed and EUROAVIA gives
Aerospace students the opportunity to get familiar with the international way of thinking. During the last
decennia, EUROAVIA has developed into an active association with more than 28 local groups, scattered across
the whole of Europe. EUROAVIA has local groups from Stockholm to Istanbul and from Lisbon to Warsaw.
EUROAVIA has a lot of international activities, for example fly-ins, congresses, workshops, symposia. A fly -in is
a reception week, organized by one Local Group for the benefit of the participants from other Local Groups. The
aim is to provide the mutual knowledge of Aerospace reality, the culture and the working of the different
European countries.
Congresses are held at least two times a year. During the congresses decisions are made concerning EUROAVIA
on an international level. Congresses are always attended by students originating from different countries.
One of the biggest projects of EUROAVIA is the well-known Design Workshop. This event is organized every two
years. The Design Workshop is hosted by an Aerospace related company. During the workshop a group of
Aerospace students work on a design, which will be used in real life if possible. Examples of hosting companies
of the past Design Workshops are Rolls Roys, British Aerospace Engineering Systems and Carlo Gavazzi Space.
This workshop is very much appreciated by the students, as well as by the companies and the Faculty of
Aerospace Engineering.
The Local Group of Delft is very active on an international level. Our goal is to organize an international activity
at least every two years. These activities always attract a lot of foreign students. EUROAVIA Delft is also very
active on a local level and organizes activities like the annual BBQ and drinks, which are held every first
Tuesday of the month in the Faculty Room. In general, the activities of EUROAVIA are open for all Aerospace
students, even for non-EUROAVIA members. Come and see for yourself!
15
GENERAL INFORMATION
VSSD
The VSSD is the Association for study and student affairs in Delft.
Protection of student rights and interests
The purpose of the VSSD is to safeguard the interests of all students studying at Delft University of Technology.
This is done primarily by influencing the politics of the local authority and the university. The VSSD has four
policy workgroups to fulfill these tasks. The committee and active members meet and discuss current relating
issues and make plans on how to improve each. The Union mainly focuses on areas such as education, income,
legal status and housing.
The VSSD also exercises national influence. The VSSD is a member of the National Student Union (LSVb) and of
the ISO (a national student organisation).
Besides meeting with various authorities, responding to current events and planning, the workgroups have a
number of set projects. The workgroup income publishes the 'Poenboek' (Money magazine), containing
information on student financing, taxes and side-jobs. One of the products of the workgroup education is the
Mr-dan Konsumentengids, which evaluates a large number of courses throughout the whole university.
Student support service
In addition to the structural approach to problems and inconsistencies, the VSSD offers an individual service to
aid students in legal mattes and help in a wide range of problems and complaints on subjects such as rent
rights, student financing and education.
The VSSD also tries to contribute concrete services to make the student's life a little easier:
VSSD store
The VSSD store has a wide range of study related products, such as: study books, calculators, drawing
accessories, ring binders, computer disks, printer supplies, etc. Our web page http://www.vssd.nl/winkel
provides easy access to this information. The assortment is tailored to the needs of the aerospace engineer
student. Information regarding books and readers is can be found at http://www.vssd.nl/winkel/boekenlr.htm.
VSSD Manuals
The VSSD publishes and sells their own study books: the VSSD manuals. These are good quality books and are
relatively cheap to buy. Information on these books can be found at http://www.vssd.nl/hlf. Most information is
supplemented by PDF samples.
Not only are these VSSD publications used in the higher education in the Netherlands and Belgium, but also a
dozen English versions are used throughout the world.
Insurances
It is possible to take out the necessary insurances (car/travel/fire/PC/liability/healthcare) at the VSSD for a
reasonable price.
The 'Room shop' (Kamerwinkel)
The VSSD, together with building society DUWO and the Delft University of Technology has setup the Room
Shop to aid in the student's search for a place to live.
VSSD and culture
Since last year, VSSD members receive a discount on movies at movie theater Lumen. On presentation of the
wrapper of the Orakel, our member's magazine published six times a year, a movie costs only 3.50.
Members fee
The VSSD members fee for the academic year 2003/2004 is 16.
Wish to contribute?
An association such as the VSSD could not operate if it weren't for the active members. If you are interested in
giving your thoughts and vision on the University's education, the internationalization, student housing, etc., or
wish to work on major project (organizing a symposium), check out our website: http://www.vssd.nl/actief.
VSSD Office
Leeghwaterstraat 42
2628 CA Delft
tel: (015) 27 82050
fax: (015) 27 87585
bestuur@vssd.nl
www.vssd.nl
VSSD student support

Leeghwaterstraat 42
2628 CA Delft
tel: (015) 27 82057
steunpunt@vssd.nl
www.vssd.nl/steunpunt
VSSD shop
Leeghwaterstraat 42
2628 CA Delft
tel: (015) 27 84125
winkel@vssd.nl
www.vssd.nl/winkel
De Room shop
Mekelweg 5
(University auditorium)
2628 CC Delft
tel: (015) 2192222
info@duwo.nl
www.duwo.nl/aanbod
Opening hours:
Monday to Friday:
9:00 - 17:00
Opening hours:
Monday to Friday:
12:00 - 14:00
Opening hours:
Monday to Friday:
9:00 - 17:00
Opening hours:
Monday to Friday:
09:00 - 17:00
16
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE PROGRAM
CHAPTER 2 - B.SC. PROGRAM

The curriculum
The curriculum of the B.Sc. program covers three years including the propedeuse or P-examination (first year
of the B.Sc. program). Students are urged to read carefully the Teaching and Examination Regulations
supplementend at the back of this study guide.
Composition of the B.Sc. Study program
Calculus
Linear Algebra
Statics
Dynamics
Mechanics of Materials
Aerospace Engineering:
- Aerodynamics
- Flight Mechanics Propulsion
- Aircraft Structures
Programming
Differential Equations
Thermodynamics
Electricity and Magnetism
Aerospace Materials and
Manufacturing
Aircraft Stress Analysis

Aircraft Structural Analysis
Aircraft Performance
Vibrations
Aerodynamics
Aerodynamics
Systems & Control Theory
Aircraft Systems
Numerical Calculus
Flight Dynamics
Space Technology
Dynamics and Stability
Air Transport
Probability Theory & Statistics
Space Engineering and

Technology
Manufacturing
Laboratory exercises and
projects
Gas Turbines
Space Technology
History of Technology
Laboratory exercises and
projects
P examination
Finite Element Method

Industrial Organization
Partial Differential Equations
Laboratory exercises
Design-Synthesis Exercise
B.Sc. degree
Alterations in the B.Sc. program

The second and third year Mechanics courses have been revised. Students who started their studies in 2001 or
after should complete the new series. For other students, choices may depend on the study progress. It is not
possible to exchange single courses, only complete series.
Old series
Course name
Mechanics II
ae2-514
Vibrations
ae3-931 or ae2-914
Mechanics III
ae3-214
Expires in year
2002-2003
not applicable
New Series
Course name
Vibrations
ae3-931 or ae2-914
ae3-914
Starts in year
not applicable
2003-2004
2003-2004
Credits: European Credit Transfer System (ECTS)

Every course in this Study Guide is listed with the corresponding credits awarded to each subject. From
September 2003 on all TUD credits are converted into European Credits (conform the European Credit Transfer
System). One ECTS equals approximately 28 working hours for the student. One year equals 60 ECTS.
17
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE PROGRAM
Important prerequisites in the B.Sc. program

The table below lists the courses and program phases for which prerequisites are set.
B.Sc. 1st year
B.Sc. 2nd year

2 year exams and
practicals
nd
AE2-011
B.Sc. 3rd year

AE3-302P
AE3-001
(M.Sc. 1st year)

register for a M.Sc.
variant
AE2-002
AE2-208P
Prerequisites 1st year
There are no prerequisites in the first year.
Prerequisites 2nd year
2nd year exams and practicals: (For generation 2003 and after.) If obtained at least 24 credits (ECTS) including
the 1st year project (ae1-004) in the first year, one is allowed to attend second year exams and practicals.
Selection takes place on the basis of results obtained up to the fourth examination period (June). More
information in section 11 and 21 of the Teaching and Examination Regulations (B.Sc).
AE2-011: To enter the first part of the second year project a minimum of 60% of the first year must be
completed including the ae1-004 project, ae1-020 part 2 grade 5.0 or higher, ae1-914 part 1 grade 5.0 or
higher, ae1-701 grade 5.0 or higher. Selection takes place on the basis of results obtained up to the fourth
examination period (June). More information in the ae2-011 course information in chapter 3.
AE2-002: To enter the second part of the second year project a minimum 75% of the first year must be
completed including the ae1-004 project, IN1 278LR introduction JAVA completed, ae1-020 grade 6.0 or higher,
ae1-914 part 1 and 2, grade 5.0 or higher and ae1-801 grade 5.0 or higher. Selection takes place on the basis
of results at the end of the first examination period (October). More information in the ae2-002 course
information in chapter 3.
AE2-208P: To attend the Flight Test the Propedeutic examination must be completed. Selection takes place on
the basis of results at the end of the second examination period (January). More information in the ae2-208p
course information in chapter 3.
Prerequisites 3rd year
AE3-302P: To attend the Exercise Flight Dynamics and Simulation the Propedeutic examination must be
completed and the second year Flight Test (ae2-208P) must have been completed (including the report). More
information in the ae3-302p course information in chapter 4.
AE3-001: In order to be admitted to the Design Synthesis Exercise you must meet the following requirements:
Completed Propedeutic exam, not more than 1 subject (with max. 5 ECTS credits) in the second year with
grade 5.0, all other subjects in second year with grade 6.0 or higher, all second year projects completed and all
second year exercises and practicals completed. More information in the course information in chapter 4.
To register for an M.Sc. variant: Those students who started their B.Sc. in Aerospace Engineering in 2001 or
before may register for an M.Sc. variant once the Design-Synthesis Exercise is completed.
18
B.SC. FIRST COURSE YEAR
CHAPTER 3 - FIRST COURSE YEAR

Code
AE1-020
AE1-701
AE1-801
Course
Introduction to
Aerospace Engineering
Aerospace Materials
and Manufacturing I
Technology I
Lecturer(s)
Veldhuis , v. Holten,
Vermeeren
Brgemann, van
der Zwaag, Rivera
Ambrosius,
Hamann , Visser
Tijssens, Gutirrez,
Saunders, Hommel,
Turteltaub
AE1-914
Delft Applied Mechanics
IN1 278LR
Introduction To
Pronk
Computer Programming
WI1 276LR
Calculus B
Meijer
WI1 277LR
Linear Algebra
Daalderop
4
2
6
(4)
E1
16
T
Test
E
Interim Examination
E1 Interim Examination part 1
Note: the hours indicated within brackets
Laboratory Exercises
and Practicals
R
R1
R2
R3
() are
E1
4
(4)
R1
E2
R3
R1
Aug
E2
Credits
(ECTS)
R2
4
4
2
(4)
E3
R1
R2
R3
11
E2
R2
12
16
20
4
(4)
R2
Total
Code
Hours of lectures per week

1 st semester
2 nd semester
st
1 part
2 nd part 1 st part
2 nd part
E1
14
R1
47
Re-sit Examination
Re-sit Examination part 1
instruction hours.
Supervisor
Number of shifts
1 st semester
2 nd semester
1 part
2 nd part
1 st part
2 nd part
st
Credits
(ECTS)
AE1-004
Introduction to Aerospace
Saunders -Smits
Engineering Project
AE1-701P
Metal Working Demo
De Kanter
IN1 278PR
Practical Introduction To
Computer Use
Pronk
13
Total
12
12
17
17
20
20
10
* Included in the course credits
1919
AE1-004
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
INTRODUCTION TO
AEROSPACE
ENGINEERING PROJECT
B.Sc. 1
1,2,3
Project, lectures & exercises
10
Assignments & small tests
Ir. G.N. Saunders-Smits
62
1102
015-2785369
G.N.Saunders@lr.tudelft.nl
See each subpart
Detailed description
The project consists of several modules. These

modules are:
1. Introduction into Aerospace course (LEC)
2. Aerospace Introduction project (IN)
3. Projection methods (PM)
4. Aerodynamics project (AER)
5. Computer Aided Design Exercise (CAD)
6. Structures & Draughtsmanship project (STR)
7. 3D modelling Exercise (PRO)
Detailed information as well as the reference code
used in the schedule is given per module below. All
of these modules have to be completed before a
final grade is given and credits are awarded.
Students who feel they are entitled to exemption
(vrijstelling) for one or more of these modules
can contact Ir. G.N. Saunders-Smits.
Every single project is only done once a year;
therefore, it is compulsory to attend at the
scheduled hours. The students presence will be
noted. See the rules regarding absence at the back
of this study guide (Teaching and Examination
Regulations, appendix 2). Both group performance
and individual performance are judged, which leads
to an individual grade.
Objectives
1.
2.
3.
An integrated introduction to the various

branches of Aerospace Engineering.
Demonstrate the connection between theory
and practice.
Have sufficient background in Computer Aided
Design, 3D -modelling and elementary
draughtsman skills to start the projects in the
2nd year.
Set-up
See each separate module for details.
Week Arrangement
First part of first semester

1. Projection methods (3 half days)
2. Introduction into Aerospace lectures (14
lectures)
3. Aerospace introduction project (5 half days)
Second part of first semester
1. Aerodynamics project (14 half days)
2. Computer Aided Design exercise (3 half days)
First part of the second semester
1. Structures project (14 half days)
2. 3D- modelling exercise (6 half days)
20
Additional information
This project is a prerequisite for ae2-011 and

ae2-002.
AERODYNAMICS
PROJECT
AE1-004AER
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
B.Sc. 1
2
Project
not applicable
Report
Ir. L.L.M. Veldhuis
45
041
015-2782009
L.L.M.Veldhuis@lr.tudelft.nl
L.R.F. Kram
The Aerodynamics project is implemented in the

2nd part of the first semester. It concerns the
application of aerodynamics on rockets. It aims to
help visualise and to get a better understanding of
the theory explained in the lectures AE1-020 part I
aerodynamics. Part of the project will be the
building and launching of a waterrocket and
comparing the measurements done during the
launch to the theory in a report. Also incorporated
in the project are several windtunnel tests.
Objectives
The Aerodynamics project aims at gaining insight
in the basics of Aerodynamics (ae1-020 part 1) and
Statics (ae1-914 part 1) by applying the lecture
material to solve problems relevant to the project
and learning to work as a team. Students are
introduced to measurement set-up and the
processing of results in the faculty laboratories.
Set-up
The project has been introduced to teach students
to apply the lecture material to aerospace related
subjects. Every project group of ca. 8 students has
their own project room with (computer) equipment
and software as well as a permanent supervisor
and a teaching assistant.
Course Material
Information regarding the project 1 provided
through internet and handouts are available for
each of the separate projects.
AE1-004CAD
COMPUTER AIDED
DESIGN
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
B.Sc. 1
2
General Practice Exercise
not applicable
A sufficient result is obtained
when all exercises have been
successfully completed
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer Ing. H.A.P. Cremer Mtd
Building Number 62
Room Number
610
Phone Number
015-2785177
E-mail address
H.A.P.Cremer@lr.tudelft.nl
Technical drawings are the primary info medium to

communicate with in an engineering environment.
This course provides an introductory training in
the use of a 2d graphical drawing program. Various
drawing assignments have to be made for
familiarization and practicing purposes. At the end
of the course, students should be sufficiently
proficient to make a technical drawing, using the
CAD-system.
Objectives
See Detailed description.
Set-up
This practical consists of 3 half days or evenings of

hands-on drawing experience. You will be working
in pairs. You MUST attend your scheduled time.
You can only miss one half day or evening
regardless of the reason why, which must be made
up for in a time period determined by the lecturer.
You will acquire AutoCAD skills by being guided
through exercises. If you cannot complete the
exercise in the given three half days or evenings
you will be able to make up for lost time in a period
determined by the lecturer.
To ensure a smooth proceeding of the exercise, it
is desirable that the students look through the
general part of the ACAD manual, prior to the
start.
Course Material
1.
2.
Manual AutoCAD, part of first year package

The assignments will be handed out at the
start of the exercise.
Follow Up Courses
AE1-004PRO
2121
AE1-004IN
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
INTRO. TO AEROSPACE
ENGINEERING
LABORATORY EXERCISE
B.Sc. 1
1
Project
not applicable
Small test
At demonstration flight
Ir. J.A. Krijnen
62
1018
015-2785368
J.A.Krijnen@lr.tudelft.nl
prof.dr.ir. Th. van Holten
Detailed descriptio n
This laboratory exercise constitutes a general

introduction to the field of aerospace engineering.
And is linked with the introduction into Aerospace
Course ae1-004LEC. The field of expertise is
highlighted by means of laboratory exercises,
excursions and a demonstration flight. The
following subjects are discussed:
1. Aerodynamics.
2. Airforce Museum excursion.
3. Noordwijk Space Expo excursion.
4. Constructing a thin-walled plate using paper.
5. Laboratory exercise in the model collection(2x).
6. Determining the weight and the center of
gravity of an airplane.
7. Determining the mass and the centre of mass
of a satellite.
8. Demonstration flight in a small single engine
aeroplane.
Objectives
1. An integrated introduction to the various
branches lecturers of Aerospace Engineering.
2. Demonstrate the connection between theory
and practice.
3. Have sufficient background to start the
remainder of the project in the second part of
the first semester.
Set-up
The laboratory exercise consists of a series of
exercises and excursions given by teaching
assistants, directly coupled to the theory in order
to make the theory more tangible. The laboratory
exercise is concluded with a test which is taken
before the demonstration flight. A sufficient result
for the test ae1-004LEC is a requirement for
participating in the test and the demonstration
flight.
Week Arrangement
See the individual group schedules.

The demonstration flight will take place at
Rotterdam Airport. The flights are planned to start
at the beginning of the second part of the first
semester. Further information regarding
registration is posted on the notice boards.
Performing the demonstration flight depends on
the condition of the weather. That is why this part
of the laboratory exercise is not bound to a certain
time.
22
Course Material
1. Lecture notes: Some aspects of aerospace

engineering
2. A.M. Kraeger: Introduction to the first year
flight practical
Additional Information
Examination:
The test is to be taken before participating in the
demonstration flight. The test is taken at
Rotterdam Airport. Besides knowledge gained in
the laboratory exercises, the manual Introduction
to the first year flight practical contains important
material for the test.
AE1-004LEC
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
INTRODUCTION TO
AEROSPACE
ENGINEERING COURSE
B.Sc. 1
4/0/0/0
Lecture
not applicable
Multiple choice test
Prof.dr.ir. Th. van Holten
62
1015
015-2785301
Th.vanHolten@lr.tudelft.nl
See additional information
This course is a general introduction to the field of

aerospace engineering. This course has close ties
with the AE1-004IN Aerospace introduction project.
The following subjects are discussed in this course:
- Aerodynamics.
- Flight mechanics and propulsion.
- Stability and control.
- Structures and materials.
- Space technology.
Recommended Literature
Anderson, J.D., Introduction to flight, McGrawHill, ISBN 0-07-001641-0

Ruijgrok, G.J.J., Elements of airplane
performance, Delft 1996, Delft University Press
Follow Up Courses
AE1-020
Additional recommended literature:

E. Torenbeek, AE1-004P Algemene Inleiding
Luchtvaarttechniek (in Dutch)
Additional lecturers: Ir. G.N. Saunders-Smits, Ir.
L.L.M. Veldhuis, Ir.J.A. Krijnen, Prof. Ir. B.A.C.
Ambrosius, Ir. J. Sinke
Up to date and additional information can be found
on Blackboard.
Objectives
1. To provide an integrated introduction to

2. To demonstrate the relation between theory
and practice.
3. To gain sufficient background to start the
projects in the second part of the second
semester.
Set-up
The course consists of a series of lectures, given by

various lecturers that is coupled to the laboratory
exercises and excursions to make the theory more
tangible. The course is concluded by a test, which
is multiple choice. A sufficient result for the test is
needed to complete this module and also allows
you to participate in the demonstration flight. Once
you have obtained a sufficient results you can
register for a demonstration flight via
www.testflight.lr.tudelft.nl.
Week Arrangement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Introduction and Aerodynamics

Structures and materials
Space technology
Stability and control
Flight mechanics and propulsion
Flight mechanics and propulsion
Preparations for the demonstration flight
Course Material
Lecture notes: Some aspects of aerospace

engineering
A.M. Kraeger: Introduction to the first year
flight practical.
2323
AE1-004PM
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
PROJECTION METHODS
B.Sc. 1
1
not applicable
Small test after each session
L.R.F. Kram
62
408
015-2787332
L.R.F.Kram@lr.tudelft.nl
ing. H.A.P. Cremer Mtd
Technical drawings are the basic information

medium to communicate in te chnical product
information.
These exercises aim to teach drawing conventions
and project in methods which should enable
students to read technical drawings and to set up
their own using industry standards.
Objectives
See Detailed description.
Set-up
The exercise consists of three sessions. Session 1

and 2 are started of with a short lecture after
which students practise the theory using dedicated
software in the project rooms. At session 3
students can go straight to the project rooms to
practise. At the end of each session a small test is
given to test the acquired knowledge. The result of
these tests is averaged with the grades for the
drawings made in the AE1-004STR part of the
project to obtain a grade for overall
draughtsmanship skills.
Course Material
Oswestry, O., Engineering drawing with CAD

applications, London, Edward Arnold
Follow Up Courses
AE1-004CAD
AE1-004PRO
AE1-004PRO
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
SPATIAL INSIGHT AND

COMPUTER
APPLICATION
B.Sc. 1
0/0/4/0
not applicable
successfully completed.
Ing. H.A.P. Cremer Mtd
62
610
015-2785177
A 3D parametric CAD system is a powerful

integrated tool to design and optimize complex
products. Spatial insight and familiarization with
the CAD system are the prerequisites to use it in
an efficient way. This course provides the means to
develop these skills. The faculty uses the
programme Pro/Engineer
The exercise lasts 6 half days or evenings. You
MUST attend your scheduled time. You can only
miss one half day or evening regardless of the
reason why, which must be made up for in a time
period determined by the lecturer. If you cannot
complete the exercise in the given six half days or
evenings you will be able to make up for lost time
in a period determined by the lecturer.
To ensure that everything runs according to plan,
the students are urged to look through the general
part of the Pro/Engineer manual.
Objectives
1. Practicing with spatial insight.

2. Practicing with Americans projection method.
3. Practical knowledge regarding terminology and
the use of a 3D CAD system.
Set-up
Laboratory exercises in pairs.
Course Material
Pro/Engineer Manual, part of the first year package
24
AE1-004STR
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
STRUCTURES PROJECT
B.Sc. 1
3
Project
not applicable
Report
62
1102
015-2785369
ing. H.A.P. Cremer Mtd
Dhr. L. Kram
The structures project is implemented in the first

part of the second semester, and concerns the
structural design of a wing or a satellite, and the
principles of lightweight wing and satellite
structures. The strength and stiffness are
determined using calculations based on lecture
material. The design is recorded in a CAD
system. Then, a simplified version of a wing or
satellite box-structure is made from plane
materials and tested on strength and stiffness in
the Laboratory for Structures and Materials. Finally
the measurement results are compared with the
design calculations.
Objectives
The projects aim at gaining insight in the basics of

Statics (ae1-914 I), Mechanics of Materials (ae1914 III), Aeronautical engineering (ae1-020 II) by
applying the lecture material to solve problems
relevant to the project and learning to work as a
team. Students are introduced to measurement
set-up and the processing of results in the faculty
laboratories.
Set-up
The project has been introduced to teach students

to apply the lecture material to aerospace related
subjects. Every project group of ca. 8 students has
their own project room with (computer) equipment
and software as well as a permanent supervisor
and a teaching assistant.
Week Arrangement
Course Material
Engineering Drawing and Reporting Manual,

part of the first year package.
Information regarding the structures project is
provided through internet and handouts are
available in the first years package. Additional
handouts will be given out on the first day of
the project.
INTRODUCTION TO
AEROSPACE
ENGINEERING I
AE1-020 I
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
B.Sc. 1
0/4/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
2,3
Ir. L.L.M. Veldhuis
45
041
015-2782009
dr.ir.drs. H. Bijl
Basic concepts like theory of continuity, definition

of momentum, Bernoullis law, energy equation,
laminar and turbulent flow, boundary layer,
conformity and dimension analysis, compressible
flow, Mach effects, introduction to aircraft
aerodynamics, aerodynamic forces, properties of
airfoils and wings and actuator disc. theory.
Objectives
The first lecture is the start of a series of

Aerodynamics lectures. Students get accustomed
to basic concepts with which they are able to
calculate relatively simple flow problems.
Set-up
The lecture is part of the first year project

aerodynamics.
Week Arrangement
Lecture and study material (see below)

Chapter 1 to 5 are treated in a 7 weeks period.
Course Material
Anderson, J.D., Introduction to flight,

McGraw-Hill, ISBN 0-07-001641-0
Additional information is handed out during
lectures.
Entry qualification
AE1-004LEC is recommended.
Follow Up Courses
AE2-191P
AE2-115 I
During the first year projects, students practice in

using the lecture material to solve assignments
related to the project.
Practice exercise lectures: details will follow.
Practice exercises/Recent practice interim
examinations are available at the VSV desk.
This course is a prerequisite for ae2-002.
2525
INTRODUCTION TO
AEROSPACE
ENGINEERING II-a
AE1-020 II-a
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
B.Sc. 1
0/0/4/0
Lecture
3
Written
4,5
Dr.ir C.A.J.R. Vermeeren
61
005
015-2785160
C.A.J.R.Vermeeren@lr.tudelft.nl
ir. A. Kwakernaak
The components of an aircraft structure. The

requirements of aircraft components, not just
structural requirements but also requirements
regarding manufacturability, maintenance, safety,
etc. Loads and stresses. Introduction to production
techniques.
Course Material
Introduction to Aircraft Structures
The written examination covers the material of this

course and its companion course AE1-020 II-b.
This course is a prerequisite for ae2-011 and
ae2-002.
AE1-020 II-b
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
INTRODUCTION TO
AEROSPACE
ENGINEERING II- b
B.Sc. 1
0/0/0/4
Lecture
3
Written
4,5
62
1015
015-2785301
ir. J.A. Krijnen
Ing. D.M. van Paassen
Thermodynamic concepts for flight mechanics.

Mollier diagrams and properties of various engine
types. Summary aerodynamics, drag polar.
Performance diagram. Influence of altitude, weight
and engine setting on instantaneous performance
in steady flight. Measurement of altitude, rate of
climb, temperature and Mach number including
non-standard conditions and effect of
compressibility. General layout of helicopters and
hover performance.
Objectives
Teaching the elements of performance analysis.

To apply mechanics, aerodynamics and
thermodynamics to practical problems,
including modeling, methods of solution,
interpretation, design and operational procedures.
Set-up
Lectures with exercises and solutions on blackboard. The course is coupled to the 2nd year flight
exercise (AE2-208P). The 1st year course has to be
completed successfully for admission to the 2nd
year flight exercise.
Week Arrangement
1.
2.
3.
4.
26
Thermal and propulsive efficiency. Gas law,

internal energy, principal law, specific heats,
enthalpy, entropy, Mollier diagram.
Isentropic processes, Poisson's law, speed of
sound, intakes and pitot tube, relation with
Bernoulli's law. Isobars, isochores, isotherms
in the Mollier diagram, and analysis of the
ideal turbojet.
Influence of compression ratio, combustion
temperature, altitude, speed, engine setting.
Ideal turboprop, fan engine, rocket.
Summary of aerodynamic concepts, drag
polar. Equations of motion in rectilinear flight.
Performance diagram with points for minimum
speed, minimum drag, minimum power
required. Gliding flight. Powered flight. Steady
flight performance, maximum speed,
maximum rate of climb, maximum climb
angle.
5. Analytical approximations. Specific range,

endurance, speed stability.
Influence of altitude, theoretical and practical
ceiling, height-velocity diagram.
6. Influence of compressibility, aerodynamic
ceiling, flight envelope, VD, VMO, MD, MMO.
Influence of weight. General layout of
helicopters and rotor systems. Actuator disc
theory, figure of merit and hover performance.
7. Standard atmosphere. Measurement of altitude,
QNH and QFE, flight level, transition altitude.
Measurement of speed incl. compressibility
effects, IAS, CAS, EAS, TAS. Measurement of
temperature and Mach-number. Vertical
speed indicator.
Course Material

performance, Delft, 1996, Delft University
Press
Applied Thermodynamics for Flight Mechanics
and Propulsion; reader ae1-020 part 3
Rotorcraft Mechanics, reader ae4-213 part I
Anderson, J.D., Introduction to flight, McGraw-Hill,

ISBN 0-07-001641-0
Entry qualification
The following is recommended:

AE1-004LEC
AE1-020 I
AE1-020 II
Follow Up Courses
AE2-202
TN2543
Additional information and exercises can be found

on Blackboard.
Assistance during exam preparation is given by D.
M. van Paassen.
course and its companion course AE1-020 II-a.
This course is a prerequisite for ae2-011 and
ae2-002.
AE1-516/HTS
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
PRO/ENGINEER for HTS

students
B.Sc. 1
0/0/4/0
1
successfully completed.
Ing. H.A.P. Cremer Mtd
62
610
015-2785177
A 3D parametric CAD system is a powerful

integrated tool to design and optimize complex
products. Spatial insight and familiarization with
the CAD system are the prerequisites to use it in
an efficient way. This course provides the means to
develop these skills. The faculty uses the
programme Pro/Engineer
This project is scheduled under the code AE1004PRO in the first year schedule. Please register
with the lecturer before January 15 so you can be
assigned to a group in the schedule.
The exercise lasts 6 half days or evenings. You
MUST attend your scheduled time. You can only
miss one half day or evening regardless of the
reason why, which must be made up for in a time
period determined by the lecturer. If you cannot
complete the exercise in the given six half days or
evenings you will be able to make up for lost time
in a period determined by the lecturer.
To ensure that everything runs according to plan,
the students are urged to look through the general
part of the Pro/Engineer manual.
Objectives
1. Practicing with spatial insight.
2. Practicing with Americans projection method.
3. Practical knowledge regarding terminology and
the use of a 3D CAD system.
Set-up
Laboratory exercises in pairs.
Course Material
Pro/Engineer Manual, part of the first year package
2727
AE1-701
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AEROSPACE MATERIALS
AND MANUFACTURING I
B.Sc. 1
4/2/0/0
Lecture
4
Written
2,3
Ir. V.P. Brgemann
045
015-2785492
V.P.Brugemann@lr.tudelft.nl
S. van der Zwaag, P. Rivera
Introduction to the field of engineering materials:

Fundamentals of materials, e.g. atomic and crystal
structures, together with their link to the
macroscopic mechanical properties like strength
and stiffness. Concept of force, stress and strain.
Different stress-strain diagrams with the typical
points for yielding, ultimate strength and strain.
Fabrication of the materials from ore to product,
including different forming techniques. Concept of
structure and use of different materials (based on
microscopic properties) for specific load cases, like
fatigue, impact, heating and other environmental
loads. Materials treated are typical for aerospace
applications and consist of metals (e.g.
aluminium), polymers (e.g. thermoplastics) and
ceramics (e.g. glass) and combinations of those,
like fibre reinforced composites and sandwiches.
Typical applications will be shown throughout the
lectures for space- as well as aircraft.
Objectives
Gain fundamental knowledge of materials in order
to be able to integrate the production and the
material mechanical and physical properties into a
reliable product.
Set-up
Active presence (taking notes) during the courses
is strongly advised.
Course Material
Callister, W.D., Material Science and

Engineering, an introduction, 6th ed
Reader AE1-701
Follow Up Courses
Aerospace materials and manufacturing II
28
AE1-701P
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
METAL WORKING
DEMONSTRATION
B.Sc. 1
4
Video Presentation
0
Written test
4
Ir. J.L.C.G. de Kanter
61
049
015-2784186
J.L.C.G.deKanter@lr.tudelft.nl
Presentation of often used production techniques.

The presentation covers the following subjects:
(Pressure) Casting, deforming, machining, milling,
heat treatments, cutting. punching, mechanical
joining, adhesive bonding, aircraft assembly,
prepreg production, VARTM, filament winding.
Objectives
The objective is to familiarise the students with

often used production techniques.
Week Arrangement
Twice a two-hour block of video, including a written

test.
AE1-801
SPACE ENGINEERING
AND TECHNOLOGY I
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
B.Sc. 1
2/0/0/4
Lecture
5
Small test + written examination
Small test: 1
Written examination: 4,5
Principal lecturer Prof.ir. B.A.C. Ambrosius
Building Number 62
Room Number
918
Phone Number
015-2785173
E-mail address
B.A.C.Ambrosius@lr.tudelft.nl
Add. Lectures
ir. R.J. Hamann (period 1)
dr.ir. P.N.A.M. Visser (period 4)
First period:
Overview of space mission context and history.
Space markets, applications and missions. Space
systems and payloads. In-class exercises to
illustrate major mission characteristics.
Fourth period:
The course treats orbits and orbital dynamics,
ascent and descent trajectories, (interplanetary)
mission aspects, orbit disturbances, orbit and
trajectory determination, special orbits and
tracking, visibility and coverage aspects.
Objectives
The student shall be able to:

First period:
Demonstrate the understanding of the basic
principles of the development of space flight and
space applications (including launch vehicles) and
quantify their main characteristics. Identify the
impact of major mission parameters on the space
system and vehicle concept and to quantify them.
Produce a space mission and space vehicle
breakdown.
Fourth period:
1. Orbits & orbit dynamics: History of celestial
mechanics, Newton's equations, Kepler's laws,
elliptical, hyperbolic and parabolic orbits.
2. Orbits & orbit dynamics: Variations of velocity
and altitude, Kepler elements, reference
frames.
3. Ascent trajectories: Tsiolkowski, single- and
multi-stage rockets,Space Shuttle, injection
accuracy, g-loads, launch location.
4. Re-entry: de-orbit burn, aero-assisted braking,
heat shielding, g-loads.
5. Orbits & trajectory determination: guidance,
navigation & control, tracking (by ground
stations and satellites: laser, Doppler, GPS,
TDRSS), station keeping, thrusters.
6. Mission aspects: Hohmann transfer,
interplanetary orbits and missions, swing-bys.
7. Mission aspects: perturbing forces, J2-effects,
sun-synchronous orbits, eclipse, ground track,
visibility, Molniya orbits
Course Material
Fortescue, P., Stark, J., Spacecraft systems

engineering, 1995 2nd. ed, Wiley, ISBN
0471952206
Wertz, J.R., Larson, W.J., Space mission
analysis and design, Deventer, 1999, 3rd ed.,
Kluwer, ISBN stud. ed 0792359011
Follow Up Courses
AE2-S02
Course Coordinator: Prof.ir. B.A.C. Ambrosius

Lecturer first period: Ir. R.J. Hamann
(R.J.Hamann@lr.tudelft.nl)
Lecturers fourth period: Prof.ir. B.A.C. Ambrosius,
Dr.ir. P.N.A.M. Visser
(P.N.A.M.Visser@lr.tudelft.nl).
Fourth period:
Determine the major characteristics of a satellite
orbit around the earth or in interplanetary space
and the important parameters of an ascent or
descent trajectory based on certain mission
objectives. Define and quantify the elements
required for orbital transfer and generate the
corresponding velocity increment budget.
Demonstrate a basic understanding of the function
of various elements of launch and re-entry
vehicles. Explain and quantify the principles of a
tracking system. Determine mission aspects as are
eclipse, visibility and coverage.
Week Arrangement
First period:
1. Space and space flight; mission and spacecraft
break-down; space flight history.
2. Launch vehicles; the Moon program.
3. Space stations; space markets and missions.
4. Spacecraft: Scientific research.
5. Spacecraft: Earth observation.
6. Spacecraft: Communication.
7. Spacecraft: Navigation; the space mission.
2929
AE1-914 I
DELFT APPLIED
MECHANICS COURSE
Statics
Year
Period
B.Sc. 1
lectures 6/0/0/0
instructions 4/0/0/0
Course Method
Lecture
Credits (ECTS)
4
Examination
Written examination
Exam. Period
1,2,5
Principal lecturer Dr.ir. M.G.A. Tijssens
Building Number 65
Room Number
1.54
Phone Number
015-2789552
E-mail address
M.G.A.Tijssens@lr.tudelft.nl
Add. Lectures
Dr.M.A. Gutirrez, English course
Lecture and study material

1. Forces (2/3-8):Concept of force according to
the three Newton laws. Point forces, moment
of a force and couple. Statically equivalent
system of forces.
2. Vector algebra (1/1-3, 2/2-4, C/7): Vectors as
mathematical representation of forces.
Decomposition and sum of vectors in 2D and
3D. Dot and cross product of vectors.
Graphical operations with vectors.
3. Mechanical systems (3/1-5): Mechanical
systems are assemblies of bodies connected
with the surroundings. The physical reality is
schematised in different kinds of connections
and supports. Degree-of-freedom of a
connection.
4. Loads (5/1-5): Substitution of line, plane and
volume load by statically equivalent resultants.
Center of mass, first moment of area,
Varignons theorem.
5. Equilibrium (3/1-5): Free body diagram as
representation of an isolated mechanical
system. Equilibrium equations. The developed
theory of forces, moments, connections and
supports is applied to the evaluation of
reactions and interaction forces.
6. Statical determinacy (3/3): The statical and
kinematical nature of a mechanical system
(determinate/indeterminate) is analysed
through the number of connections and
supports.
7. Spatial structures (3/4): Simple 3D structures
are analysed by means of smart equilibrium
equations.
8. Frames and machines (4/6): Analysis of the
equilibrium of interconnected bodies.
Evaluation reactions and interaction forces.
9. Trusses (4/1-4): A framework composed of
bars joined by pins is known as a truss.
Method of joints and method of sections.
Representation of equilibrium equations in
matrix notation.
10. Internal forces (5/6-7): Evaluation of the
magnitudes normal force, shear force,
bending moment and torsional moment in
a bar or a beam by means of equilibrium.
Definitions, notation and sign conventions.
Representation of the internal forces by means
of diagrams.
30
11. Load, shear force and bending moment

diagrams (5/7): Analysis of characteristic
shapes of the load and the internal force
diagrams. Quick statement and assessment of
diagrams.
12. Differential relations (5/7): Derivation of
integro-differential relations between the
internal forces. Application to the statement of
diagrams.
13. Virtual work (7/1-5): Work and deformation
energy. Alternative formulation for the
equilibrium of particles, bodies and
mechanisms.
14. Flexible cables and pressure vessels (5/8):
Description of the relation between shape and
internal forces of special structures.
Objectives
Statics deals with the principles of equilibrium. The

goal is to provide the necessary knowledge, insight
and skills to predict the magnitude of the forces
present in any object of concern.
Set-up
Two blocks of two hours per week in the first half

of the first semester and one block of two hours
per week in the second half of the first semester.
The lectures are supported by a comparable
amount of instructive lectures in groups of about
30 students, supervised by a senior student
assistant.
Course Material
Meriam, J.L., Engineering mechanics: Statics,

New York, 1998, 4th SI ed, Wiley, ISBN
0471241636
applications, London, Edward Arnold,
Hartsuijker, C., Toegepaste Mechanica, Deel 2,

Schoonhoven, 2000, Academic Service,
Entry qualification
The following is recommended: A proper

knowledge of differentiation, integration and
trigonometry is required.
Follow Up Courses
AE1-914 II
AE1-914 III
AE2-521 I
AE2-521 II
AE1-914 II
DELFT APPLIED
MECHANICS COURSE
Dynamics
Year
Period
B.Sc. 1
lectures: 0/4/0/0
instructions: 0/4/0/0
Course Method
Lecture
Credits (ECTS)
3
Examination
Written
Exam. Period
2,3,5
Principal lecturer Dr.ir. M.G.A. Tijssens
Building Number 65
Room Number
1.54
Phone Number
015-2789552
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
dr.S.R. Turteltaub (English
course)
Hibbeler, R.C., Sterkteleer voor technici, 1997 3e
ed, Prentice Hall, ISBN 90-395-0537-3
Entry qualification
The following is recommended: A proper

knowledge of differentiation, integration and
trigonometry is required as well as a thorough
understanding of statics, with emphasis on free
body diagrams and vector algebra.
Follow Up Courses
AE2-914
Dynamics deals with the principles of motion.

Week number and study material
(chapter/paragraph of textbook.) are as follows:
1. Kinematics of particles. Description of
rectilinear and curvilinear planar motion.
Velocity and acceleration. Rectangular, intrinsic
and polar coordinates. (2/2-2/6).
2. Kinetics of Particles. Relative velocity and
acceleration. Constrained motion of an
assembly of pulleys. Newtons laws of motion.
(2/8-2/9, 3/2-3/5).
3. Special formulations. Work and energy. Impulse
and momentum. (3/6-3/9).
4. Systems of particles. Perfectly plastic and
perfectly elastic collisions. Newtons laws and
special formulations. (3/10-3/12, 4/2-4/5).
5. Kinematics of rigid bodies. Translation and
rotations. (5/2-5/6).
6. Kinetics of rigid bodies. Newtons laws revisited.
(6/2-6/5).
7. Kinetics of rigid bodies. Special formulations
revisited. (6/6, 6/8).
Objectives
The goal is to provide the necessary knowledge,

insight and skills to analyze the motion of particles
and rigid bodies and the relation between forces
and motion.
Set-up
Two lectures per week (2 hours each) in the

second half of the first semester. The lectures are
supported by two instructive lectures (2 hours
each) in groups of about 30 students, supervised
by a senior student assistant. One instructive
lecture will be used to practise problems from the
book. The other instructive lecture will be used to
make problems from a computer database.
Course Material
Meriam, J.L., Engineering mechanics:

Dynamics, 5th SI ed., New York, 2001, Wiley,
ISBN 0471241636
3131
AE1-914 III
DELFT APPLIED
MECHANICS COURSE
Mechanics of Materials
Year
B.Sc. 1
lectures: 0/0/4/2
Period
instructions: 0/0/4/4
Course Method
Lecture
Credits (ECTS)
4
Examination
Written
Exam. Period
2,4,5
ir.G. Hommel (Dutch course)
Principal lecturer
ir.G.N. Saunders-Smits (English)
Building Number 62
Room Number
11.02
Phone Number
015-2785369
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
Objectives
Mechanics of materials deals with equilibrium,
material behaviour and deformation. The goal is to
provide the necessary knowledge, insight and skills
to predict how stress and strain are distributed in
structures and how structures deform when loads
are applied.
Set-up
Two blocks of two hours per week in the first half
of the second semester and one block of two hours
per week in the second half of the second
semester. The lectures are supported by two blocks
of two hours of instructive lectures in groups of
about 30 students, supervised by a senior student
assistant. One instructive lecture will be used to
practice problems from the book. The other
instructive lecture will be used to make problems
from a computer database.
Basic concepts (1.2, 1.5-6): Tension, compression

and shear are defined on an infinitesimal material
element. Definition of normal stress and strain and
of shear stress and strain. Hookes law. Equilibrium
and stresses. Principle of superposition.
Course Material
Normal force (1.2, 2.2-5): Basic model for analysis

of a bar. Differential equation for extension.
Analysis of statically determinate structures by
means of equilibrium/constitutive/kinematic
relations or with differential equations and
boundary conditions. Analysis of statically
indeterminate structures with differential equations
and boundary conditions. First moment of area and
centroid of an arbitrary section. Thermal effects
and pre-stressing.
Bending (5.2-5, 5.12, 9.2-6, 10.2-4): Second

moments of area of symmetric sections. Curvature,
strain and neutral axis. Flexure formula for bending
about a principal axis. Design of sections, section
modulus. Uncoupling of extension and bending.
Differential equation of the deflection line,
moment-area method, tables of beam deflections
and rigid body motions. Deflection of statically
determinate and indeterminate beams and
structures, symmetry and skew-symmetry.
AE2-521
AE2-522
Shear force (5.8-11, 6.7): Determination of shear

stresses caused by shear forces. Shear formula for
rectangular sections, open thin-walled sections and
simple symmetric thin-walled boxes. Shear stress
distribution in webs and flanges. Application to
built-up beams. Design of sections.
Torsion (3.2-3, 3.10): Polar moment of inertia.
Angle and rate of twist for a circular section.
Torsion formula for circular sections. First Bredts
formula for simple thin-walled boxes. Application to
built-up boxes.
Special topics on shear stress (6.6, 6.8):
Superposition of shear stresses resulting from
shear force and torsion. Shear center for sections
with a symmetry axis
32
1.
2.
Gere, J.M., Mechanics of materials, 5th SI Ed,

ISBN 074873998X
applications, London, Edward Arnold
Hartsuijker, C., Toegepaste Mechanica, Deel 2,

Schoonhoven, 2000, Academic Service
Entry qualification
The following is recommended: Proficiency in
statics (AE1-914 I) and a proper knowledge of
differentiation and integration are required.
Follow Up Courses
IN1 278PR
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
PRACTICAL
INTRODUCTION TO
COMPUTER USE
B.Sc. 1
4
Lecture + Practical
3
Ir. C. Pronk
36
08.090
015-2781803
c.pronk@its.tudelft.nl
Objectives
To obtain knowledge of, insight and skills in the

basics of the computer language Java.
Set-up
The practical will take 7 half days in the fourth

period.
CALCULUS B
PART I AND II
WI1 276LR
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
B.Sc. 1
4/4/4/4
Lectures + seminars
12
Written
2,3,4,5
Prof.dr. H.G. Meijer
36
04.060
015-2782500
H.G.Meijer@its.tudelft.nl
Complex numbers, differentation and integration of

functions of one variable, elementary differential
equations, Taylor- and powerseries, partial
differentiation, extreme values of functions of
several variables, multiple integration, cylindrical
and spherical coordinates, vector functions, lineand surface integrals, theorems of Green, Stokes
and Gauss.
Objectives
The goal of the course is to lay a strong foundation

for the numerous and various applications of
calculus, both directly within the field of aerospace
engineering as in advanced engineering
mathematics. The possibilities of using computer
algebra systems allows for a shift in emphasis from
technical skills towards understandig the
underlying concepts.
Week Arrangement
Four hours a week, arranged in two blocks of two
hours.
Course Material
Stewart, J., Calculus, early transcendentals, 2003,

5th ed., Pacific Grove, ISBN 0534393217
Follow Up Courses
WI2029LR
WI2021LR
During the course use is made of the computer

algebra system MAPLE.
During each semester some extra bonus points for
the exam can already be obtained. Students can
earn these extra bonus points by completing
practical assignments e.g. with the use of the
Computer Algebra System MAPLE.
3333
WI1 277LR
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
LINEAR ALGEBRA
B.Sc. 1
0/0/4/4
Lectures + workshops
6
Written
4,5
Drs. A.G.M. Daalderop
36
10.230
015-2784401
A.G.M.Daalderop@its.tudelft.nl
Linear Algebra is the mathematics speciality that is

concerned with systems of linear equations and
linear transformations.
Objectives
The student should learn to apply the concepts,

theorems and calculation methods in problems
such as presented in Lay's book.
The course provides tools for working on systems
of linear equations. The student learns to predict
and judge (computer) results qualitatively, and
acquires the terminology to use them in discussion.
Set-up
The student is expected to study the book and do

the exercises listed. The instructor explains parts of
the theory, works out some of the exercises, and
assists when students solve problems individually.
Week Arrangement

1. Systems of linear equations, existence and
uniqueness of the solution, row reduction and
echelon forms.
2. Span. Homogeneous systems.
3. Linear independence. Linear transformations,
one-to-one and onto transformations.
4. Matrix operations, transpose of a matrix,
inverse of a matrix and invertible matrices.
5. Subspace, null space, column space, kernel
and range. Basis, coordinate systems and
dimension, rank.
6. Inner product, length, orthogonal sets,
orthogonal matrices and orthogonal
projections.
7. Gram-Schmidt process, least-squares
problems.
8. Determinants, determinant as area or volume.
9. Vector space. Change of basis for vectors.
Markov chains.
10. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
11. Change of basis for matrices, diagonalization.
12. Complex eigenvalues. Discrete dynamical
systems, applications to differential equations.
13. Inner product spaces. Symmetr ic matrices.
14. Quadratic forms.
Course Material
Lay, D.C., Linear algebra and its applications, 2003

3rd ed., Addison-Wesley, ISBN 0201767171
The Study Guide for the book is recommended.
34
B.SC. SECOND COURSE YEAR
CHAPTER 4 - SECOND COURSE YEAR

Code
AE2-115
AE2-202
AE2-521
AE2-522
AE2-600
AE2-701
AE2-914
AE2-S02
TN4090AE
WI2 029LR
Course
Lecturer(s)
Aerodynamics B and
Aerodynamics C
Airplane Performance II
and Aircraft Gas Turbines
Aircraft Stress Analysis
and Structural Design
Aircraft Structural
Analysis
Manufacturing II
Gerritsma , Scarano,
van Oudheusden
v. Holten, Krijnen, Visser,
v. Paassen, v. Buijtenen,
Vibrations of Aerospace
Structures
Technology II
Physics:
- Thermodynamics
- Electricity & Magnetism
Hol
Interim Examination
Interim Examination part 1
Code
AE2-011
AE2-002
AE2-191P
AE2-192P
AE2-208P
and Practicals
R
4
Bergsma, Sinke,
Vermeeren
Sinke, de Jong, v. Holten,
van der Poel, Kamp
Corstens , Vermolen
R
R1
R2
R3
Re-sit
Re-sit
Re-sit
Re-sit
E1
18
18
Suiker
Jongkind, Chu, Kamp,
Zandbergen
Gisolf, Verbruggen,
Hanjalic, Bart, Planken,
Bruin
6
2
De Vries
Aug
Credits
(ECTS)
R
4
R1
6
2
E2
R2
R
16
4
18
46
Examination
Examination part 1
Examination part 2
Examination part 3
SUPERVISOR
Number of shifts
1 st semester
2 nd semester
1 st part 2 nd part 1 st part 2 nd part
Credits
(ECTS)
Second Year Project

Part I
Second Year Project
Part II
Low Speed Windtunnel
Practical
Supersonic Windtunnel
Exercise
Saunders -Smits , Staat,

Jansen
Scarano
Flight Test
Van Paassen
De Vries, Saunders-Smits
(6)
*)
Experimental
Construction Exercise
Practical Materials
AE2-702P
Engineering
Aircraft Gas Turbines
WB4280PR
Practical
Practical Differential
WI2 030LR
Equations
Technical Writing and
WM0201TU
Business Communication
Total
AE2-523P
Total
E
E1
E2
E3

1 st semester
2 nd semester
st
nd
st
1 part 2 part 1 part 2 nd part
21
Saunders -Smit
21
Boermans
Zhou, De Kanter
Oude Engberink,
De Groot
Corste ns, Lemmens
Post
*)
7
21
10
28
**)
9
14
*) Included in the course credits

**) Technical writing is included in the Second Year Project Part 2
35
35
AE2-011
2ND YEAR PROJECT

PART I
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
B.Sc. 2
1
Project
4
Both group and individual work
will be judged
Exam. Period
n/a
Principal lecturer Ir. G.N. Saunders-Smits
Building Number 62
Room Number
1102
Phone Number
015-2785369
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
J.J. Staat
ir. E.L. Jansen
The project is carried out in groups of approx. 8

students. Projects refer to lectures ae2-521
Aerospace structures and loading The project takes
place in the first period and concerns the design of
the entire mechanical control system of aerodynamic
control surfaces of an aircraft or helicopter. For the
different subsystems alternatives have to be worked
out and compared. During the exercise the study
collection of aircraft parts with many examples plays
an important role. After a best choice has been
made, a detail design of some structural components
has to be worked out. The airworthiness
requirements concerning stiffness and strength have
to be fulfilled. The project closes with a full report
describing the design, explaining the functioning of
the mechanisms and discussing the choices made.
Objectives
Practicing team effort in designing a multicomponent mechanism, fulfilling a given set of

design requirements.
Set-up
Project groups work in assigned project rooms 3
half-day periods every week. Additional time should
be spent in preparing for next scheduled group
activities. Both individual and group activities will be
judged, mainly by the assistants (1 for 2 groups)
assigned to the groups. The students presence is
obligatory and will be checked. Please take note of
the rules regarding absence during the projects
located in the back of this guide.
Course Material
Information is provided on the Internet and in

handouts.
A manual will be for sale from the start of the
project. Instructions will follow on the introduction.
Prerequisites
first year completed or:
- a minimum of 60% of first year completed and
- AE1-004 project in first year completed
- AE1-020 II grade 5.0 or higher and
- AE1-914 part 1 grade 5.0 or higher and
- AE1-701 grade 5.0 or higher and
Selection takes place on the basis of results obtained
up to the fourth examination period (June)!
36
Mr. J.J. Staat, responsible for the daily co-ordination

and organization, telephone (015) 278 5334.
Participation in projects 1 and 2 does not have to be
in sequence.
AE2-002
2ND YEAR PROJECT

PART II
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
B.Sc. 2
3
Project
5
Both group and individual work
will be judged,
Exam. Period
n/a
Principal lecturer Ir. G.N. Saunders-Smits
Building Number 62
Room Number
1102
Phone Number
015-2785369
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
Project is carried out in groups of 6-8 students.

Projects refer to lectures ae2-202 Performance II
and aircraft gasturbines, ae2-115 Aerodynamics B
& C" and ae2-806 "Introduction to Space Technology
II".
Aerodynamics: dr ir. B. van Oudheusden,

tel. (015) 278 5349.
Aircraft simulation: Ir. J.A. Krijnen,
tel. (015) 2785368
Satellite simulation: Ir. A. Kamp,
tel. (015) 278 5172
Mr. J.J. Staat is responsible for the daily coordination
and organization, telephone (015) 278 5334
Please note that the project has to be done in its
entirity. No passes can be given for parts of project
2, e.g. programming. This will affect the group
process.
Participation in projects 1 and 2 does not have to be
in sequence
The project is held in the first part of the second

semester and comprises the development of a
simulation program for aircraft or spacecraft motion.
Beforehand a refresher course in JAVA programming
is given. On the basis of some aerodynamic theory
problems programming is practiced. The separate
course in reporting is given parallel and is tailored to
the contents of this project.
From 2003/2004 the first year JAVA prerequisite
course will apply to all students, regardless of the
first year of study.
Objectives
Acquiring basic programming experience applied to a

multi component simulation program describing an
aircraft or spacecraft motion/mission whilst working
together in a group.
Set-up
Project groups work in assigned project rooms 3

half-day periods every week. Additional time should
be spent in preparing for next scheduled group
activities. Both individual and group activities will be
judged, mainly by the assistants (1 for 2 groups)
assigned to the groups. The students presence is
obligatory and will be checked. Please take note of
the rules regarding absence during the projects
located in the back of this guide.
Course Material
Information is provided on Internet and handouts.
Prerequisites
1.
2.
first year completed or

a minimum 75% of first year completed and
AE1-004 project in first year completed and
IN1278LR introduction JAVA completed and
AE1-020 grade 6.0 or higher and
AE1-914 part 1 and 2, grade 5.0 or higher and
AE1-801 grade 5.0 or higher
Selection takes place on the basis of results at the
end of the first examination period (October).
37
37
AE2-115 I
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AERODYNAMICS B
B.Sc. 2
4/0/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
2,3
Dr.ir. M.I. Gerritsma
64
038
015-2785903
M.I.Gerritsma@lr.tudelft.nl
dr.ir. B.W. van Oudheusden
Derivation of the basic flow equations; fundamental

concepts; potential flows in two and three
dimensions, airfoil and wing theory for inviscid,
incompressible flow.
Objectives
At the end of this course one should be familiar with

the mathematical models which describe general
Newtonian Fluids. In particular, one should be able to
calculate the pressure distribution, lift and
momentum around airfoils and wings by means of
potential theory.
Week Arrangement

1. Fundamentals; Basic concepts (Ch.1+2).
2. Flow equations (Ch.2).
3. Potential flows (Ch.3).
4. Potential flows (Ch.3+6).
5. Airfoil theory (Ch.4).
6. Airfoil theory; Wing theory (Ch.4/5).
7. Wing theory (Ch.5).
Course Material
Anderson, J.D., Fundamentals of aerodynamics,

2nd ed, McGraw-Hill, ISBN 0071007679
(Chapter 1-6 of Anderson)
Additional Course Notes (on Chapters 4 and 5)
and a set of Problem Exercises, which can be
downloaded from the internet (see below)
Entry qualification
AE1-020 I is recommended
Follow Up Courses
AE2-115 II
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AERODYNAMICS C
B.Sc. 2
0/4/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
2,3
Dr. F. Scarano
64
036
015-2785902
F.Scarano@lr.tudelft.nl
Introduction to compressible flows, governing

equations, normal and oblique shock waves, PrandtlMeyer expansion, shock-expansion theory, nozzle
and diffusers, linearized theory of compressible flow
over airfoils.
Objectives
The student is introduced to the theory of

compressible flows and related phenomena: shock
waves, expansion waves. The course provides the
concepts and tools to calculate the flow around
airfoils in the compressible flow regime. The student
is also introduced to the basic problems and design
concepts of transonic aircrafts.
Week Arrangement

1. Thermodynamics, governing equations for
compressible flows (Ch.7).
2. Normal shock equations, normal shock waves
(Ch. 8).
3. Oblique shock relations (Ch. 9).
4. Prandtl-Meyer expansion waves (Ch. 9).
5. Flow in nozzles and diffusers (Ch. 10).
6. Subsonic compressible flow over airfoils (Ch.
11).
7. Linearized supersonic flow (Ch. 12).
Course Material
Anderson, J.D., Fundamentals of aerodynamics, 3rd

ed., 2001, McGraw-Hill, ISBN 0072373350
Zucrow, M.J., Hoffman, J.D., Gasdynamics.- vol.

1, 1976, ISBN 047198440X
AE2-115 II
AE3-130
AE4-151
TN4090AE is recommended
The set of problem exercises can be obtained from

the faculty's reproduction service. Further and/or
updated info about the course is available at
Blackboard and the following website:
http://www.hsa.lr.tudelft.nl/~bvo/aerob.
course and its companion course AE2-115 II.
Dr.ir. B.W. van Oudheusden
Building 64, room 034
Telephone nr.: 015-2785349
Email: B.W.vanOudheusden@lr.tudelft.nl
38
Entry qualification

course and its companion course AE2-115 I.
LOW SPEED
WINDTUNNEL
PRACTICAL
AE2-191P
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
B.Sc. 2
2
Laboratory Exercise
1
Report
n/a
Ir. L.M.M. Boermans
45
217
015-2786387
L.M.M.Boermans@lr.tudelft.nl
Measuring the properties of a two-dimensional airfoil

and a three-dimensional wing with this airfoil;
pressure measurements, wake measurements and
demonstrating flow phenomena.
Set-up
The practical exercise AE2-191P is given once every

year in the second part of the first semester. The
exercise takes place in the L.T.T. wind tunnel,
Leeghwaterstraat 42.
Week Arrangement
1. One half day introduction and review.

2. One half day performing the exercise.
3. Three half days to work out the results and report
(not scheduled).
Course Material
SUPERSONIC
WINDTUNNEL
EXERCISE
AE2-192P
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
B.Sc. 2
4
Laboratory Exercise
1
Report
n/a
Dr. F. Scarano
64
036
015-2785902
Supersonic wind tunnel, shock waves, measurement

and visualization techniques in compressible flows.
Objectives
Visualization and investigation of basic phenomena in

supersonic channel flow.
Experimental techniques in high speed wind tunnel
testing are introduced.
Set-up
The practical course is given once every year in the

second part of the second semester. The exercise
takes place in the high speed wind tunnel HS3
located at Kluyverweg 2. A plenary introductory
lecture preceeds the beginning of the exercise.
Course Material
Manual ae2-191p
Entry qualification
Entry qualification
P examination is recommended.
If the number of enrolments cause capacity problems
there will be made a selection wherefor this
recommendation will turn to be the prerequisite.
39
Exercise manual
Text book Aerodynamics C AE2-115 II
AE2-115 II is recommended.
39
AE2-202 I
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AIRPLANE
PERFORMANCE II
B.Sc. 2
0/0/4/0
Lecture
2
Written
4,5
62
1015
015-2785301
ir. J.A. Krijnen
Two- and three-dimensional equations of motion in

unsteady flight. Numerical solution methods and
analytical approximations. Performance in climb,
cruise, and landing. Phugoid. Effect of wind fields,
Turn. Helicopters in forward flight.
Objectives
1.
2.
Principles of unsteady performance analysis,

numerical simulation and the principles of
optimising flight performance.
Integration of basic subjects (mechanics,
aerodynamics, propulsion, linear algebra,
differential equations, numerical analysis) and
show how these subjects can be applied to
practical problems, taking into account the
constraints set by the "real world", regulations,
etc.
Set-up
The second year project corresponds to this subject.

During this project the student is required to
program some unsteady manoeuvres.
Week Arrangement
1. Point versus path performance. Numerical

algorithm for unsteady climb. State and control
variables. Analytical approximation unsteady
climb.
2. Minimum time to climb problem. Energy height
and optimum climb of a supersonic aircraft.
Equation of motions, take off ground run, and
numerical simulation. Engine failure, rejected
take off and V1. Analytical approximation of the
ground run distance. Effect of several
parameters.
3. Co-ordinate systems. 2D equations of motion.
Simulation of take off. Rotation speed VR and
safety speed V2. Energy method take off.
Regulations, balanced field length. Landing
procedures and speeds. Energy method landing.
Tyre, runway and brake properties. Effect of
several parameters. Regulations.
4. Simple equations of motion with wind. Effect of
uniform wind field and wind gradient, wind shear,
microburst. Transition manoeuvres between
points in the performance diagram. Phugoid.
Linearization of 2D -equation of motion. Analytical
solution phugoid.
5. Cruise: equation of motions, initial conditions and
flight procedures. Equation of Breguet. Payloadrange diagram.
40
6. Complete 3D-equations of motion. Coordinate

systems, Eulerian angles, transformation
matrices.
7. Non-co-ordinated turns. Analytical considerations
steady turns, load factor.
8. Helicopter: blade element theory for hovering
and forward flight. Flap and lag hinges, reversed
flow, retreating blade stall, compressibility limits,
and fundamental speed limit. Total power.
Hypothesis of Glauert. Performance diagram of a
helicopter. Auto-rotation, dead man's curve.
Course Material

performance, Delft, 1996, Delft University Press
AE2-201 Flight path Simulations
Rotorcraft Mechanics, reader ae4-213 part I
Entry qualification
AE1-020 II is recommended.
Follow Up Courses
AE2-002
AE3-302
AE4-213
More information on this lecture can be found on
Blackboard.
Assistance during exam preparation is given by D.
M.van Paassen.
AE2-202 II
AIRCRAFT GAS
TURBINES
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
B.Sc. 2
0/0/0/2
Lecture
2
Written
4,5
Prof.ir. J.P. van Buijtenen
62
1001
015-2782179
J.P.vanBuijtenen@wbmt.tudelft.nl
ir. W.P.J. Visser
Follow Up Courses
WB4421 (Gas turbine simulation and application)
Fifty percent of the course deals with design aspects:

defining vital requirements of gas turbine
components in relation to the required total output.
The other fifty percent deals with analysis of the
system in relation to the aircraft.
Thrust as momentum of gas jet, efficiency of

propulsion, engine efficiency; all current types of
aircraft gas turbines as turboprop, propfan, straight
jet, bypass engines, multi spool engines;
thermodynamics of ideal cycle, influence of losses,
calculation of performance; pressure loss, influence
of fuel/air ratio and blade cooling; turbomachinery
principles, velocity tri-angles, losses, characteristics;
principles of combustion, combustion chambers,
emissions, low-NOx combustion; gas dynamics of jet
pipes, choked flow, supersonic outlets, off-design
behaviour and control.
Objectives
This course is designed to give first basic knowledge
in aircraft gas turbines, especially to aeronautical
engineers. The knowledge is to be used either as
background for understanding aircraft performance,
or as a basis for further study in gas turbines.
Set-up
Principles of aircraft propulsion; Classification of
aero-engines; Thermodynamics of the Brayton cycle;
Ideal and real performance; Turbomachinery;
Combustion and emissions; jet pipes; Bypass
engines and bypassratio.
Part of the course is a half day obligatory practical in
the Laboratory for Thermal Power Engineering:
demonstration of working compressorand gas
turbines, simple measurements of performance and
thermodynamic data.
Course Material
Dutch lecture notes: 'Gasturbines

wb4420/wb4280' issued by Faculty OCP.
English lecture notes: selected chapters from
'Gas Turbine Theory' by Cohen, Rogers &
Saravanamuttoo, 4th or 5th edition, Longman
Group Ltd.
Cohen, H., [et. al.], Gas Turbine theory, 1972 4th.

Ed, Longman, ISBN 6582236320
Entry qualification
TN4040AE is recommended.
41
41
AE2-208P
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
FLIGHT TEST
B.Sc. 2
4
1
Report
2 weeks after flight submitted
62
1012
015-2782067
D.M.vanPaassen@lr.tudelft.nl
Application of subjects from the lecture AE1-020 IIb

(Airplane Performance I). The flight test takes place
in the laboratory aircraft of the Faculty and the NLR
(National Aerospace Laboratory). During steady
symmetric horizontal flights the aircraft's
performance will be measured at a certain
configuration. The measured parameters have to be
used to determine the lift-drag polar.
Objectives
To obtain more understanding of airplane

performance by measuring during the flight and by
making calculations which will lead to the lift-drag
polar. The description of this flight test and the
complete calculation of the lift-drag polar have to be
specified in a report.
Set-up
The flight test takes place once a year. A compulsory

introduction course (2 hrs.) will be given before the
flight test (see exercise and practical schedule).
Execution flight test: one half day.
Working out flight test: 3x half day.
Location: Rotterdam Airport.
Start: Beginning of April (depending on the
availability of the aircraft).
Starting time: depending on the flight schedule. The
flight schedule will be published on the second year
notice board and internet site:
www.testflight.lr.tudelft.nl
Course Material

performance, Delft, 1996, Delft University Press,
Set AE2-208P
Elling, R., [et. al], Rapportagetechniek schriftelijk

rapporteren, Groningen, 1994, Wolters-Noordhoff,
ISBN 9001291317
Prerequisites
P examination completed. Selection takes place on

the basis of the results at the end of the second
examination period (January).
42
The date of the preparatory meeting will be
published in time in the Syncom and on the second
year notice board. Also the starting and closing date
of the registration will be announced. The
registration takes place via the normal registration
lists of the education administration.
Examination: The report is judged on the correctness
and quality of the calculations and writing skills (see
note).
The report has to be handed within 2 lecture weeks
after the execution of the flight at the latest.
Prerequisites: During a compulsory preparatory
meeting some of the contents, the organisation and
the final starting date of the flight test will be
discussed.
Note: a report that does not make use of the
information in the manual and the information in the
book Elements of Airplane Performance will not be
awarded credits and the student will be asked to do
the Flight Test Exercise again next year, without
flying.
This practical has to be completed in order to be
admitted to ae3-302p.
AE2-521 I
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AIRCRAFT STRESS
ANALYSIS AND
STRUCTURAL DESIGN I
B.Sc. 2
4/0/0/0
Lecture
2
Written
2,3
Ir. J.M.A.M. Hol
62
1121
015-2785379
J.M.A.M.Hol@lr.tudelft.nl
Design examples in the field of aircraft structures,

moving aircraft components and control systems to
illustrate the mechanical principles and the design
philosophy.
Objectives
To provide a theoretical background for the second

year practical courses.
Week Arrangement
Topics covered are:

Mechanisms.
Cable control without and with pre-stress.
Push-pull rods and buckling.
Torsion rods and gearing.
Joints and bearings.
Undercarriages and work diagrams.
Course Material
ir. J.M.A.M. Hol - AE2-521 Aircraft Stress &

Structural Design part I - aircraft structures
ir. J.M.A.M. Hol - Exam problems for Aircraft
Stress & Structural Design parts I & II
Niu, M.C.Y., Airframe Structural Design, 1995

Norman, N.S., Aircraft Landing Gear Design,
1988
AE2-521 II
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AIRCRAFT STRESS
ANALYSIS AND
STRUCTURAL DESIGN II
B.Sc. 2
0/4/0/0
Lecture
2
Written
2,3
Ir. J.M.A.M. Hol
62
1121
015-2785379
Loads on aircraft, the load factor concept, manouvre

and remous loads, symmetric and a-symmetric
loads, strength and stiffness requirements,
manouvre- and remous diagrams. Influence of
flexibility. Loads on under carriages, performance of
shock absorber during landing and braking.
Objectives
Provide an introduction in aircraft loads.
Course Material
ir. J.M.A.M. Hol - AE2-521 Aircraft Stress &

Structural Design part II - aircraft loads
ir. J.M.A.M. Hol - Exam problems for Aircraft
Stress & Structural Design parts I & II
Lomax, T.L., Structural Loads Analysis for

Commercial Transport Aircraft, 1996
Entry qualification
AE1-914 is recommended.
course and its companion course AE2-521 part I.
Entry qualification
Follow Up Courses
AE2-521 II
course and its companion course AE2-521 part II.
43
43
AE2-522 I
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AIRCRAFT STRUCTURAL
ANALYSIS I
B.Sc. 2
0/0/4/0
Lecture
2
Written
4,5
Ir. J. de Vries
62
1112
015-2786306
J.deVries@lr.tudelft.nl
1.
2.
Introduction to linear theory of elasticity.

(Stress vs displacement formulation, biharmonic equation, plane stress examples.)
3. Engineering bending theory.
4. (Including modulus weighted section properties.)
5. Engineering torsion theory.
6. (St. Venants theory, the warping function,
Prandtls stress function, torsion of closed thinwalled tubes with singly or multiply connected
cross-sections, the membrane analogy.)
7. Stresses caused by transverse shear loading.
8. (Shearing stresses in open and closed simply
and multiply connected thin-walled crosssections, position of the shear center.)
9. Stresses in tapered box-beams.
10. Idealization of thin-walled shell structures.
11. Effect of wing and fuselage cut-outs.
12. Shear-Lag effects.
Objectives
The course is designed to provide the students with a

solid foundation to carry out analytical stress
analysis of thin-walled aerospace structures. The
course relies heavily on the fundamental concepts of
structural mechanics taught in the first year courses
Statics and Mechanics of Materials. In all cases
treated the students are provided with techniques
which enable them to carry out the stress analysis
on representative aerospace structures encountered
during the preliminary design phase.
Course Material
Megson, T.H.G., Aircraft structures for engineering

students, 3rd. ed, Edward Arnold, ISBN 0340705884
Entry qualification
AE1-914 III is recommended.
Follow Up Courses
AE2-522 II
44
The laboratory project ae2-523P is obligatory for all
students. This project consists of a structural test of
a wing box. For further details see the course
description of ae2-523P.
Extra information can be found at the blackboard
site.
AE2-522 II
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AIRCRAFT STRUCTURAL
ANALYSIS II
B.Sc. 2
0/0/0/2
Lecture
2
Written
4,5
Ir. J. de Vries
62
1112
015-2786306
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Concept of work and potential.

Virtual work and equilibrium.
(Principle of virtual work for a particle, for a
mechanism, for an elastic bar, for a general
deformable body.)
Potential energy theorems.
(External potential, internal potential or strain
energy, principle of minimum potential energy.)
Complementary virtual work and strain energy.
(Complementary virtual work for an uniaxial and
a general deformable body, complementary
strain energy, principle of minimum
complementary potential energy.)
Castiglianos first and second theorem.
Elastic strain energy of simple structures.
(Extension of bars, bending of beams, shear
deformation of thin-walled beams.)
Method of (dummy) unit load.
Deflection analysis of structures.
Statically indeterminate structures.
Objectives
This course is designed to introduce the students to

an alternate approach to the so-called vector
methods treated in AE2-522 I. It is shown that for
solving complex structural problems the so-called
energy methods are often the only viable approach
to obtain approximate solutions with analytical
methods. Introduction to computing structural
deflections, and solving sta tically indeterminate
structures.
Course Material
Megson, T.H.G., Aircraft structures for

engineering students, 3rd. ed, Edward Arnold,
ISBN 0340705884
D-22NB, Prof. dr. J. Arbocz
Entry qualification
AE1-914 III
AE2-522 I
Follow Up Courses
AE3-525
AE4-522
EXPERIMENTAL
CONSTRUCTION
EXERCISE
AE2-523P
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
B.Sc. 2
4
Laboratory Exercise
1
Report
Ir. J. de Vries
62
1112
015-2786306
In this project a wingbox with a cut-out will be tested

under a shearload. Students are asked to compare
the results of the measurements to the analytical
solution as presented in the lectures Aircraft
Structural Analysis (AE2-522, part1) and explain the
differences. Buckling phenomena can be observed
during the exercise.
Objectives
The exercise has the following objectives:
To show the validity of the formulae derived in

AE2-522 Aircraft structural Analysis in real
engineering practice.
To apply the theory of AE2-522 Aircraft Structural
Analysis
To observe buckling phenomena
To demonstrate testing of structures and the
inaccuracies introduced in measuring
Set-up
The exercise is performed in accordance with the

annually published schedule. The laboratory exercise
is held in the 4th period in the aircraft hall.
Students must register in the second half of the 3rd
dimester in TAS. During a mandatory introduction
students can register themselves to an exercise time
slot of their choice.
Schedules will be posted on the notice boards
Week Arrangement
Not applicable
Course Material
AE2-523P Manual (available at introduction or on

Blackboard)

ISBN 0340705884
Gere, J.M., Mechanics of materials, 5th SI Ed,
ISBN 074873998X

45
45
Recommended
a complete P examination
ae2-522, part 1
student must have the exercise manual.

there will be made a selection wherefor the first two
recommendations will turn to be the prerequisites.
Follow Up Courses
AE3-525
AE3-525P
This practical is inextricably bound up with the

lecture Aircraft structural analysis I, ae2-522.
Examination:
A report of sufficient standards must be handed in
before the start of the June exam period. Results will
be published on the notice boards. When a report is
below standard an extra meeting with the lecturer or
even additional reporting can be required. Students
will be contacted by the lecturer if this is the case.
AE2-600
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AEROSPACE MATERIALS
AND MANUFACTURING
II
B.Sc. 2
0/0/4/4
Lecture
5
Written
4,5
Dr.ir. O.K. Bergsma
62
NB 0.18
015-2785135
O.K.Bergsma@lr.tudelft.nl
dr.ir. C.A.J.R Vermeeren
ir. J. Sinke
Introduction
Fabrication processes related to bulk materials:
casting, extrusion, pultrusion, RTM.
Fabrication processes related to half products:
forming (rolling, forging, drawing, pressforming)
Fabrication processes related to cutting
technology: turning, hole tooling, milling,
sharpening, sawing
Production engineering: production planning;
the production line, prototype construction;
design information; the virtual aircraft.
Aircraft Assembly: divisions in aircraft, jigs and
fixtures, jig design, lean manufacturing.
Joining techniques hinges, fixed joints, riveting,
adhesive bonding, welding
Quality system in Aerospace industry:
quality management, measurements, non
destructive testing
Cost calculation
Aspects of the Labour forces: safety measures,
working environment.
Objectives
Gain insight in the various manufacturing techniques
and their possibilities and restrictions. Knowledge
and understanding in basic processes and
relationships during aircraft manufacture.
Engineering skills: understanding the relations
between design, manufacturing processes and
materials.
Course Material
Reader AE2-600
Recommended Course
Knowledge of the first year course Materials and

Manufacturing I.
46
AE2-701
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
HISTORY OF
TECHNOLOGY
B.Sc. 2
0/0/0/4
Lecture
3
Written
4,5
Ir. J. Sinke, drs. F. de Jong
61
0.54
015-2785137
J.Sinke@lr.tudelft.nl
dr.ir. R. van der Poel, ir. A. Kamp
Technical changes are always realised by an

interaction of different individuals, organisations and
institutes. The engineer has an important role in this
interaction. The aim of this course is to teach the
student the main lines of the history of technical
development in society. Models to describe and
analyse this development will be presented. Debates
in society play an important role for new
developments. The structure of these debates which
are taking place will be illustrated and practised.
The course has two parts, i.e., 1. The general
technical development in social context and 2. The
history of aviation and space technology. For the first
parts the various revolutions will be treated:
industrial revolution (1770), scientific revolution
(1900) and information society (1945).
8. The complexity of large projects. Concorde and

Apollo.
9. Controverses and dilemmas in the aerospace
industry. Case study about aircraft noise. The
history of space technology, and the involvement
of the Netherlands.
Course Material
Basalla, G., The Evolution of Technology, 1989,

Cambridge Univ. Press
Dictaat Geschiedenis van de techniek voor L&R.
Lecture notes ae2-701.
English: The lectures are in Dutch. The literature is

also available in English. For students who have
trouble with the Dutch language, an English seminar
with the Basalla book as topic will be held. Details
will be given at the start of the lectures.
A Dutch version of the book is available at the
beginning of the course and later on at the
secretariat
Drs. F. de Jong:
Email: f.dejong@tbm.tudelft.nl
Phone: 015-2785212
Objectives
1. Knowledge of main lines of technical development
in a societal context.
2. Insight in societal processes that determine this
development.
3. Insight in the structure of debates around new
technologies.
Week Arrangement

1. About history, evolution, revolution, and periods.
What is the value of history? Discussion about
the history of technology and the different views
on the history of technology introduction of
Basalla (Ch. 1 and 7). The evlolution of
technology. Sources, motives, drivers, incentives.
Knowledge management and communication. Ch.
2 and 3 Basalla)
2. Technology is not universal. Politics, economics,
and other factors influencing technology (Basalla
Ch. 4 and 5). Technology a a system case
study.
3. Self-study. Evaluation of Basalla: strong points
and weak points of the book.
4. Aviation until 1930. Empirical technology. The
Wright Brothers and their Flyer. The meaning of
WWI for the technical development. Fokkers
succes in the twenties
5. Aviation in The Netherlands before WWII. The
importance of enthusiasm created by Elta, Uiver
en the flights on Dutch Indi.
6. The scientific method in America in the thirties.
The success of Douglas. The jet engine.
7. Scientification in aircraft technology. From wood
to metal and the development of the countersunk
rivet.
47
47
AE2-702P
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
PRACTICAL MATERIALS
ENGINEERING
B.Sc. 2
2 (4)
Laboratory Exercise
1
Written and oral presentation
N/A
dr. J. Zhou
015-2785357
J.Zhou@tnw.tudelft.nl
B.W. Oude Engberink
ir. J.L.C.G. de Kanter
Phase diagrams, precipitation hardening,

recrystallisation and grain growth, heat treatments,
fatigue, different joining methods (bolted and
bonded), stress-strain curves.
Objectives
Application of theoretical materials science

knowledge into practical use. First on a fundamental
level of materials microstructure and second on
materials macro level, engineering problems.
Set-up
Students will work in small parallel groups on

different materials problems within a laboratory
environment. The work should be done
autonomously by the group, but direct assistance is
available from student-assistants. The materials that
will be used are aluminium, steel, copper and fibre
reinforced plastics. These materials will be given
different treatments by the students to create the
required properties, and subsequently tested to
confirm these properties. Second part will involve the
creation of a joint in one of the mentioned materials,
with subsequent a static and dynamic test program.
A test report will be written and in an oral
presentations session, the different groups must
convey their findings to the other groups.
Callister, W.D., Material Science and Engineering, an
introduction, 6th ed
Recommended Course
AE1-701
The practical will take place at two laboratories:

Laboratory for Metallurgy (Mk), Rotterdamseweg
137, Delft Structures and Materials Laboratory (Lr),
Kluyverweg 3, Delft.
VIBRATIONS OF
AEROSPACE
STRUCTURES
AE2-914
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
B.Sc. 2
0/0/0/4
Lecture
3
Written
4,5
dr.ir. A.S.J. Suiker
62
1.42
015-2781629
A.Suiker@lr.tudelft.nl
Undamped second-order systems: one degree-offreedom systems, free vibrations, eigenfrequency,

conservation of energy, forced vibrations, harmonic
excitation, resonance, frequency response,
superposition, base excitation, beats, periodic
excitations, fourier analysis, fourier transform,
impulse response, response to arbitrary excitation,
convolution integral, transfer function, Laplace
transform.
Damped second-order systems: one degree-offreedom systems, critical, undercritical and
overcritical damping, energy dissipation, logarithmic
decrement, Coulomb friction, hysteretic damping,
harmonic response, impulse response, response to
arbitrary excitation.
Undamped systems with two or more degrees-offreedom: free vibrations, eigenfrequencies,
eigenvectors including orthogonality, transformation
to normal coordinates (decoupling), Rayleigh
coefficient, forced vibrations, transfer functions.
Objectives
To give the student a good understanding of linear
vibrations in one and two degree-of-freedom
systems.
Set-up
Lectures including examples.
Week Arrangement
1. Undamped second-order systems with onedegree-of-freedom.

2. Undamped second-order systems with onedegree-of-freedom.
3. Damped second-order systems with one-degreeof-freedom.
4. Damped second-order systems with one-degreeof-freedom
5. Undamped second-order systems with more
degrees-of-freedom
6. Undamped second-order systems with more
degrees-of-freedom
7. Examples.
Course Material
Inman, D.J., Engineering Vibrations, 2001, 2nd ed,

Prentice Hall,
Recommended Course
WI2029LR
48
As a preparation for the exam, practical excercises
can be made (not obligatory). The result of the
excercises will be combined with the result of the
exam to obtain the final grade.
AE2-S02
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
SPACE ENGINEERING
AND TECHNOLOGY II
B.Sc. 2
4/4/0/0
Lecture
6
Written
2,3
Dr.ir. W. Jongkind
62
813
015-2787458
W.Jongkind@lr.tudelft.nl
dr. Q.P. Chu, ir. A. Kamp, ir.
B.T.C. Zandbergen
Space Engineering and Technology II is divided into

two parts: Part A deals with Space Vehicle
Technology and Part B with Space Vehicle
Engineering. Contents of part A:The following
spacecraft subsystems are discussed: Structures,
Thermal Control, Power, Telecommunication,
Command and Data Handling, Attitude Control, , and
Propulsion. Of each of the subsystems we discuss:
Functions, Options, Components, Attributes, and
Design Synthesis.
Contents of part B: Systems Engineering, Space
Mission Concept Exploration, Remote Sensing,
Electro-Optical Instruments, Design and Sizing of
Satellite Bus, Launch Vehicle Selection, Cost and
Risk. Manufacturing, Assembly, Integration, and
Testing.
Objectives
Purpose of the courses Space Engineering and

Technology I, II and III is to provide the aerospace
engineering student with the means to perform a
first design of a space system and more specific a
space vehicle.
Space Engineering and Technology II aims to
broaden the students' knowledge of spacecraft and
spaceflight elements, and prepares them for
participation in the 2nd-year study project and (a
space variant of) the 3rd-year Design/Synthesis
exercise. After this course, students shall be able to:
list and describe:
- the various applications of space systems and
their importance,
- the various elements/subsystems that make up
a space system/spacecraft and their main
function(s),
- the various (future) options
(architecture/components) that exist to perform
this function,
an array of specific desirable attributes to which
the various options can be traded,
determine a numerical value for each of the
attributes, using data bases or simple
experimental/theoretical modelling,
perform system/spacecraft engineering to a level
of detail sufficient to accomplish a feasible space
system and more specific a spacecraft,
perform subsystem engineering to a level of
detail sufficient to accomplish a feasible
subsystem including requirement generation,
trades, budgets, test and verification.
49
49
Set-up
The lectures are given by internal specialists in the

field of spacecraft design and spaceflight mechanics.
Week Arrangement
The lectures will be given in the following order:

PART A (36 hours)
Introduction (1 hours)
Structures(4 hours)
Thermal Control (4 hours)
Power systems (5.5 hours)
Telecommunication (4 hours)
Command and Data Handling (3.5 hours)
Attitude Control (6 hours)
Propulsion (8 hours)
PART B (20 hours)
Systems engineering (2 hours)
Mission Concept Exploration (2 hours)
Observation: Optical instruments (4 hours)
Vehicle Design and Sizing (5 hours)
Launch Vehicle Selection (2 hours)
Reliability analysis (2 hours)
Cost analysis (2 hours)
MAIT (1 hours)
TN4090AE I
PHYSICS:
THERMODYNAMICS
Year
B.Sc. 2
Period
4/2/0/0
Course Method
Lecture
Credits (ECTS)
4
Examination
Written
Exam. Period
2,3
Dutch Program
Principal lecturer prof.dr.ir. A. Gisolf
Building Number 22
Room Number
D218
Phone Number
015-2785299
E-mail address
A.Gisolf@ctg.tudelft.nl
Add. Lectures
dr. A.H. Verbruggen
English Program
Principal lecturer Prof.dr. K. Hanjalic
Building Number 22
Room Number
B 070
Phone Number
015-2781735
E-mail address
k.hanjalic@tnw.tudelft.nl
Add. Lectures
dr.ir. G.C.J. Bart
Students must have mastered the contents of the

1st-year course Space Engineering and Technology I
(AE1-801).
Chapter 1: Introductory Concepts and definitions.

Chapter 2: Energy and the First Law of
Thermodynamics.
Chapter 3: Properties of a Pure, Simple
Compressible Substance. State
relations.
Chapter 4: Control Volume Energy Analysis.
Chapter 5: The Second Law of Thermodynamics.
Chapter 6: Entropy.
Chapter 7: Availability (Exergy) Analysis.
Chapter 9: Gas Power Systems. Steady Onedimensional Compressible Flow in
Nozzles and Diffusers.
Chapter 12. 1 to 12.5: Nonreacting Ideal Gas
Mixtures.
Chapter 13: Reacting Mixtures and Combustion.
Follow up course
Objectives
Course Material

0471952206
Wertz, J.R., Larson, W.J., Space mission analysis
and design, Deventer, 1999, 3rd ed., Kluwer,
ISBN stud. ed 0792359011
Space Engineering and Technology, lecture notes
AE2-S02 (Version 2003-2004).
Workbook AE2-S02(Version 2003-2004.
Recommended
ae3-803
All lectures will be given in English only.
The course provides the student with the basic

knowledge to understand the thermodynamics
relevant to aerospace engineering.
Set-up
The course is given in lecture form. At least 30
percent of the course time will be dedicated to
problem analysis.
Week Arrangement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
50

Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 6 and 7
Chapter 7 and 9
Chapter 9 and 12
Chapter 13
Course Material
Moran, M.L., Shapiro, H.N., Fundamentals of
engineering thermodynamics, SI -version, 3rd ed.,
Wiley, ISBN 0471317136
Wisman, W.H., [et.al], Inleiding thermodynamica,

ISBN 9065621164
Recommended
Elementary calculus, in particular calculus of more

variables. Some elementary mechanics.
Follow Up Courses
AE2-201
WB4280
http://www.ws.tn.tudelft.nl/courses/tn4090AE-I.html
TN4090AE II
PHYSICS: ELECTRICITY
AND MAGNETISM
Year
B.Sc. 2
Period
0/0/4/2
Course Method
Lecture
Credits (ECTS)
3
Examination
Written
Exam. Period
4,5
Dutch Program
Principal lecturer Dr. P.C.M. Planken
Building Number 22
Room Number
E-014
Phone Number
015-2786965
E-mail address
Planken@tnw.tudelft.nl
English Program
Principal lecturer Dr.ir. C. Bruin
Building Number 22
Room Number
F-204
Phone Number
015-2786378
E-mail address
c.bruin@tnw.tudelft.nl
Electrostatics; stationary magnetic fields; dielectrics;

magnetic materials; electromagnetic induction.
Maxwell' s laws.
Objectives
The course is aimed at providing insight in the

structure and the coherence of electric and magnetic
fields, both in vacuum and in materials.
Set-up
The course is given in lecture form.
Course Material
Duffin, W.J., Electricity and Magnetism., W.J. Duffin

Publishing, ISBN 0951043811
Recommended
AE1-914
WI1 276LR
WI1 277LR
51
51
AIRCRAFT GAS
TURBINES PRACTICAL
WB4280PR
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
B.Sc. 2
4
0
ing. M.C. de Groot
8D-2-21
015-2781821
M.C .deGroot@wbmt.tudelft.nl
Demonstration of a small, twin shaft gas turbine:

start-up, power envelope, instrumentation and
measurement data processing.
Demonstration of the aerodynamic behavior of a
small axial compressor.
Objectives
Gaining insight in the structure and components of a

gas turbine. Observing the phenomenon of surge of
a controllable axial compressor. Interpreting
measurement data of a surging axial compressor.
Observing the start-up behavior of a gas turbine.
Interpreting measurement data for the power
determination of a gas turbine.
Set-up
The exercise is held in the Laboratory for Energy

Technology and Gas Turbines of the Faculty OCP in
the lecture period of the lecture Aircraft Gas
Turbines. All students are scheduled for the practical
by the education administration of the faculty of
WI2 029LR
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
DIFFERENTIAL
EQUATIONS
B.Sc. 2
2/4/0/0
Lecture
4
Written
2,3
Ir. H.F.M. Corstens
36
03.120
015-2783898
H.F.M.Corstens@ITS.tudelft.nl
Ir. F. Vermolen (Eng)
First order differential equations. Second order linear

differential equations with constant coefficients. The
Laplace transform. Systems of first order linear
equations with constant coefficients. Nonlinear
ordinary differential equations and stability. Fourier
series. Some partial differential equations of
mathematical physics. Method of separation of
variables. Boundary value problems. Series solutions
of second order linear equations.
Objectives
The course is designed to provide the students with

practical knowledge how to solve analytically linear
differential equations.
Set-up
Reader AE2-202 II
During the lecture hours exercises are treated too. A

syllabus is available at the 'Repro' of
ITS/mathematics, containing a summary of the
course and a set of problems (former interim
examinations) with answers. You may find the
description of the practical course (code WI2030LR)
(it is a session of 0.5 day) belonging to the course,
separately in this guide; convocation will appear in
due time in Syncom.
Recommended
Week Arrangement
Course Material
The student has to be attending the lecture AE2-202

II.
52

1. First order differential equations (linear
equations, existence of solution,
uniqueness,integrating factor, differences
between linear and non-linear equations). Second
order equations (general theory, method of
variation of parameters). Section 2.1 and further
+ sections 3.5, 3.7.
2. Laplace transform (definition, solution of initial
value problems, step functions, discontinuous
forcing functions, impulse functions, convolution
integral). Chapter 6.
3. (continuation) Laplace transform. Chapter 6.
4. Systems of first order linear equations (basic
theory, linear independence, Wronski,
characteristic equation, complex eigenvalues,
repeated eigenvalues, method of undetermined
coefficients, -diagonalization, -variation of
parameters). Chapter 7.
5. (continuation) Systems of first order linear
equations. Chapter 7.
6. Nonlinear differential equations (critical points,

phase portraits, stability, almost linear systems,
asymptotic stability, periodic solutions and limit
cycles). Sections 9.1 - 9.3, 9.7.
Course Material
Boyce, W.E., DiPrima, R.C., Elementary differential
equations and boundary value problems, 7th edition,
New York, 2000, Wiley, ISBN 0471089559
Laboratory projects: WI2 030LR
A lot of Aerospace Engineering courses make use of
the themes treated in the course on differential
equations; moreover the courses on Numerical
analysis and Partial differential equations.
PRACTICAL
DIFFERENTIAL
EQUATIONS
WI2 030LR
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
B.Sc. 2
2
0
Report
Ir. H.F.M. Corstens
36
03.120
015-2783898
ir. C.W.J. Lemmens
Demonstration of 7 topics.
1. First order linear differential equation (as an
introduction to the use of the computer
program).
1. Second order linear differential equation with
constant coefficients, free vibrations, critical
damping, resonance
2. Van der Pol equation.
3. Heating of a furnace.
4. Partial differential equation of heating of a rod.
5. Impulse response and periodic response in first
order linear differential equation with constant
coefficients.
6. Second order
Objectives
The practical work is designed to make the student

aware of the consequences of choosing a forcing
function and the actual values of parameters.
Set-up
The differential equations and matching graphical

presentation (on screen) of solutions are available
preprogrammed in a Matlab simulation package. The
student evaluates the obtained solutions. At the
session the students work in couples of two. The
session takes 0.5 day. It is necessary that students
prepare themselves well, also by study of the
relevant parts in the book of Boyce-DiPrima. Every
couple gets the seven topics mentioned above (see
Detailed description).
Course Material
Handleiding bij de Praktische oefeningen
Differentiaalvergelijkingen (Fac. ITS) (reader) (in
Dutch)
WI2 030LR is the laboratory project accompanying

WI2 029LR. Duration 0.5 day, executed on
workstations/PCs at the faculty of Information
Technology and Systems (ITS).
53
53
WM0201TU
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
TECHNICAL WRITING
AND BUSINESS
COMMUNICATION
B.Sc. 2
3
Laboratory Exercise
0
Written assignment
drs. P.C. Post
31
3.1.030
015-2783175
p.c.post@tbm.tudelft.nl
Nowadays, engineers are expected to be more than

just experts in their field. Many employers require
their employees to be excellent communicators,
especially in writing. This is not surprising, as
engineers spend a large proportion of their time
writing reports.
The course Report writing focuses on both the quality
of the text and the efficiency of the writing process.
The following aspects will be dealt with:
1. Problems with writing at work.
2. Planning to meet your readers informational
needs.
3. Drafting paragraphs, sections and chapters.
4. Writing effective introductions and summaries.
5. Report types: feasibility reports, progress
reports, research reports and instructions.
6. Persuasive strategies.
7. Conclusions and recommendations.
8. Visual aids.
Objectives
The course is designed to provide students with the
knowledge and the skills to write effective reports
and memos to co-workers and managers.
Set-up
Six meetings will be used to combine instruction and
practice.
This course is embedded in the 2nd year project part

II (AE2-002)
54
B.SC. THIRD COURSE YEAR
CHAPTER 5 - THIRD COURSE YEAR

Code
Course
Lecturer(s)
AE3-130
Aerodynamics D
Bakker
AE3-302
Flight Dynamics I
Mulder,
van Staveren
AE3-359
Aerospace Systems and

Control Theory
van Paassen
AE3-495
Air Transport II
Visser
AE3-525
AE3-803
Introduction to Finite
Element Analysis
Technology III

1 st semester
2 nd semester
1 part 2 nd part 1 st part 2 nd part
st
4
4
Hol
Credits
(ECTS)
3
R
4
Aug
4
R
R
4
3
R
Noomen, Chu
AE3-914
De Borst, Gutirrez,
Remmers
AE3-A75
Aircraft Systems
Astori
Hamann, van Tooren
AE3-S01
WI3 046LR
WI3 097LR
WI3 150TU
WM0501TU
Systems Engineering and

Techn. Management Techn.
Pro bability Theory and
Statistics + exercises
Numerical Mathematics
Partial Differential
Equations 1
Introduction to Business
Engineering and Management
Total
Th
E
R
Kraaikamp
4
(4)
van Beek
Horssen
ten Haaf, Bikker,

Dekkers
Th
16
R
2
Th
24
4
3
20
41
Take-home assignments
Interim Examination
Re-sit Examination
Code
and Practicals
AE3-001
Design Synthesis Exercise
Zandbergen, Kamp,
Melkert, Saunders
WM0203TU
Oral Presentation Skills
Post
AE3-193P
AE3-302P
Low Speed Windtunnel

Test 3
Exercise Flight Dynamics
and Simulation
Supervisor
100
Veldhuis
Kraeger
AE3-525P
F.E.M. Practical
Hol
WI3 097LR
Practical Work
Wilders
Total
Number of shifts *)
1 st semester
2 nd semester
1 st part 2 nd part 1 st part
2 nd part
10
7
3
10
14
14
Credits
(ECTS)
1
**)
20
100
19
*) Including report
**) Included in the course credits
55
AE3-001
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
DESIGN SYNTHESIS
EXERCISE
B.Sc. 3
4
Project
14
N/A
N/A
Ir. B.T.C. Zandbergen
62
814
015-2782059
B.T.C.Zandbergen@lr.tudelft.nl
Ir. A. Kamp
Ir. J.A. Melkert,
The Design Synthesis Exercise (OSO) consists of two

parts:The design project itself and supporting short
courses. These courses include:
Project Management, Systems Engineering,
Sustainable development, Library utilisation course,
and Oral presentation techniques.
During the exercise the student is given the
opportunity to obtain "design" experience in the
design project. This means the complete design
process, from drawing up a program of demands, in
this case specifications, to the design subject
presentation, will be covered in a structured and
iterative manner. This covers familiar aspects typical
of such a process, like making choices, taking into
account conflicting demands while optimising, etc..
Obtaining design experience also means that an
iterative process is completed where non-optimal
decisions are corrected to meet the specifications
drawn up at the start of the exercise.
Since the topics of the design project change every
year only examples of the subjects are given:
Small affordable launch vehicle
Sonic cruiser design concepts
Cargoglide project
Aircraft Carrier Trainer Aircraft
Orbit Injection at Mars
Design of a space tanker and tug
Multi purpose UAV/Micro UAV design
Design of an ultralight sailplane
Design of a flying car
New concepts for on and offshore wind energy
Design of world sailing speed record competitor
Ultra long range reconnaisance aircraft
The topics covered by the short courses are
incorporated into the design project.The credits that
can be gained by successfully completing the
exercise are divided as follows:
Design, reporting and presentation, Systems
Engineering & Project Management course,
Sustainable Development course, Library utilisation
course, Oral presentation course: see WM0203TU.
Grading will take place within one week after the
project ends
Objectives
The objective of the OS-exercise is to enhance

certain skills. These are skills in the fields of:
56
56
Application of knowledge.
Communication (discussion, presentation, reporting)
Working as a team.
Sustainable development.
Set-up
The exercise takes up ten full weeks, starting the
second week of the fourth lecture period (i.e. week
15, see Academic Calendar 2003-2004). Note that
there is no May holiday for those participating in the
OS-exercise.
Students are expected to put in a minimum (and
preferably a maximum) of 40 hours of work a week
into the exercise to a total of 360 hours. There is no
room for other (study) activities.
The project introduction is in March and attendance
is mandatory. At this introduction you will be given
the opportunity to express your interest in specific
projects. The project ends with a symposium at
which all the projects present their results.
Week Arrangement
Full working week.
Prerequisites
In order to be admitted to the Design Synthesis

Exercise you must meet the following requirements:
Completed Propedeutic exam
Not more than 1 subject (with max. 5 ECTS) in
the 2nd year with grade 5.0 and
All other subjects in 2nd year with grade 6.0 or
higher and
All second year projects completed and
All second year exercises and practicals
completed
Please contact the study counsellor in case of
mitigating circumstances.
All chairs are involved in this exercise to ensure

multidisciplinarity.
This exercise is coordinated by a committee, existing
of several lecturers.
AE3-130
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AERODYNAMICS D
B.Sc. 3
0/0/4/0
Lecture
3
Written
3,5
Prof.dr.ir.P.G. Bakker
64
031
015-2785907
P.G.Bakker@lr.tudelft.nl
Course Material
Anderson, J.D., Fundamentals of aerodynamics, 2nd

ed, McGraw-Hill, ISBN 0071007679
Entry qualification

AE2-115 I
AE2-115 II
WI2029LR
WI1047LR
Additional recommended literature: Frank M. White,

"Viscous Fluid Flow", second edition, McGraw-Hill,
1991
Viscous Flows.
1. Fundamentals of viscous flows: Laminar,
transition, turbulent; viscosity and heat transfer
constitutive relations, Newtonian fluid.
2. Navier-Stokes equations, Energy equation for
viscous flow: similarity, Reynolds, Mach, Prandtl.
Example: Impulsively started wall, diffusion of
vorticity.
3. Couette flow: pressure gradient, mathematical
modelling, viscous dissipation, adiabatic wall
temperature, recovery factor, Reynolds analogy.
4. Poiseuille flow: 2D -Poisseuille, volume flux,
friction coefficient, axi-symmetric Poiseuille,
mathematical model, friction coefficient,
turbulent flow in a pipe, roughness.
5. Boundary layers: boundary layer concept,
velocity - and temperature profiles, skin friction,
heat transfer b.l. thickness, displacement
thickness, momentum thickness
laminar/turbulent.
6. Boundary Layer Equations; mathematical model
of boundary layer, wall conditions, Boundary
conditions.
7. Flat plate boundary layer: momentum theorem,
friction drag, approximate velocity profiles,
boundary layer growth, Blasius equation,
numerical solution of Blasius equation, transition,
turbulent spots, parameters of turbulent b.l
Objectives
Providing insight into fundamentals, physical aspects

and modelling of aerodynamica flows.
Week Arrangement

1. Fundamentals, Newtonian fluid, Stokes
hypothesis.
2. Navier-Stokes equations, Energy equation;
similarity
3. Couette flows, viscous dissipation, adiabatic wall,
Reynolds analogy.
4. Poiseuille flows, modelling, skin friction, turbulent
flow in pipe.
5. Boundary layer flow, concepts, properties,
integral parameters.
6. Boundary layer, equations, Flat plate boundary
layer.
7. Blasius equations, numerical solution of Blasius to
turbulence.
57
AE3-193P
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
LOW SPEED
WINDTUNNEL TEST 3
B.Sc. 3
3
Laboratory Exercise
1
Lab report, see remarks
Ir. L.L.M. Veldhuis
45
041
015-2782009
Topics that are adressed during the lab are:

1. Measurement techniques (including balance
systems).
2. Aircraft stability and control.
3. Aircraft lift, drag and pitching moment.
4. Propeller propulsion effects.
5. Boundary layers (including tripping and
separation).
Objectives
The goal of this lab exercise is:

1. to provide a better understanding of the
capabilities of windtunnel tests on full 3D models
with respect to the stability characteristics;
2. to analyze the propeller propulsion effect on the
stability of typical propeller powered aircraft.
Set-up
The lab exercise is performed during one half day.

The data of the measurements are sent to students
by email. One report is produced per group (3-4
students).
Course Material
Manual on Internet: www.aero.lr.tudelft.nl/ls3

Lecture material: Aircraft stability and control I
Entry qualification

AE3-302
The second year should be finished.
there will be made a selection wherefor these
recommendations will turn to be the prerequisites.
A concise, clear report of the lab exercise is written

by the group. This report will be discussed in a
separate meeting. The assessment will be based on:
quality of the calculations and description of the
phenomenae encountered.
58
58
AE3-302
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
FLIGHT DYNAMICS I
B.Sc. 3
4/4/0/0
Lecture
4
Written
2,4
Prof.dr.ir. J.A. Mulder
62
031
015-2785378
J.A.Mulder@lr.tudelft.nl
ir. W.H.J.J. van Staveren
1. Introduction to Flight Dynamics, Flying Qualities,

static and dynamic stability.
2. Definitions, Reference Frames and
Transformations.
3. Equations of Motion of rigid Aircraft, effect of
rotors.
4. Linearized Equations of Motion for small
deviations from nominal flight conditions.
5. Longitudinal aerodynamic forces and moments in
symmetrical flight, contributions of wing,
fuselage, tailplanes and engines.
6. Estimation of the longitudinal Stability and
Control Derivatives.
7. Static Stability in symmetrical Steady Flight
conditions, relation between static stability and
control displacements and forces.
8. Estimation of the Lateral Stability and Control
Derivatives.
9. Lateral Stability and Control in Steady rectilinear
and curved flight conditions.
10. Analysis of the Symmetrical Equations of Motion,
asymmetrical characteristic motions.
11. Simulation of the Asymmetric Equations of
Motion.
Objectives
Thorough introduction to airplane flight dynamics,
stability and control. Relation between aerodynamic
phenomena and both static and dynamic stability
and control characteristics. Non-linear and linear
equations of motion, symmetrical and asymmetrical
characteristic motions.
Course Material
J.A. Mulder, W.H.J.J. van Staveren, J.C. van der

Vaart, Flight Dynamics, Lecture-Notes AE3-302
Entry qualification
AE2-115 I is recommended.
Follow Up Courses
AE4-301
AE4-303
AE4-304
AE4-305
AE3-302P
EXERCISE FLIGHT
Dynamics and
Simulation
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
B.Sc. 3
1, 2
3
Hand in exercise and flight test
report
Exam. Period
End of each dimester
Principal lecturer Ir. A.M. Kraeger
Building Number 62
Room Number
023
Phone Number
015-2782594
E-mail address
A.M.Kraeger@lr.tudelft.nl
Add. Lectures
Introduction in the use of MATLAB/Simulink as a

modern engineering tool during a number of classes.
Using Matlab to simulate the behaviour of
mechanical systems described by linearised
equations of motion. Using Simulink to simulate the
more complex behaviour of a non-linear system.
Execution of an actual flight with the Cessna Citation
II laboratory aircraft. The flight test is meant to be a
demonstration in real flight of some topics dealt with
in the lecture "Flight Dynamics". During the flight
some responses of the aircraft to stepwise or other
control surface deflections are measured and
recorded.
Some manoeuvres that are flown are simulated
using self-built linear models and some characteristic
parameters of the manoeuvre are identified. The
simulation results will be compared to the actual
measurements.
Course Material
-
Flight Dynamics and Simulation Exercise (Manual

AE3-302P Part I).
Flight Dynamics and Simulation Test Flight
(Manual ae3-302P Part II).
Lecture Notes Flight Dynamics (ae3-302), by J.A.
Mulder / W.H.J.J. van Staveren / J.C. van der
Vaart.
Prerequisites
-
Passed Propedeutic exam.

The second year Flight Test (AE2-208P) is
completed (i.e. a sufficient mark must have
been given for the report).
Entry qualification

Knowledge of Mechanics and Differential
Equations (WI2-029LR) is required.
It is essential to attend the classes Flight
Dynamics I (AE3-302 ) simultaneously.
Follo w Up Courses
AE4-301
AE4-304
Classes Matlab/Simulink and take-home exercise:

9 day halves.
Flight test briefing: 1 day halve.
Flight test execution: 1 day halve.
Processing the flight test data and writing the
report: 9 day halves.
Total time investment: 80 hours.
-
Writing a report of the flight test. The use of MATLAB

is integrated in examining, interpreting and
simulating the flight test results .
Objectives
To become familiar with the MATLAB/Simulink

programming environment in order to make
simulations of mechanical systems using the
computer.
To gain insight in some topics from the lecture Flight
Dynamics during an actual flight, in particular the
eigenmotions of the aircraft. To take measurements
during the actual flight and verify the modelled flight
characteristics of the Cessna Citation Aircraft with
the actual measurements.
Understanding the physics of aircraft responses to
control surface deflections.
Set-up
The practical consists of classes supplemented with a

test flight in the Cessna Citation laboratory aircraft.
During the classes some examples may be treated,
but most of the time the participants will work on
exercises in pairs of two using the computer. During
these sessions a number of student assistants will
provide help when necessary.
59
AE3-359
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AEROSPACE SYSTEMS
AND CONTROL THEORY
B.Sc. 3
0/0/4/0
Lecture
3
Written
3,5
Dr.ir. M.M. van Paassen
62
024
015-2785370
M.M.vanPaassen@lr.tudelft.nl
See week arrangement.
AE3-495
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AIR TRANSPORT
B.Sc. 3
0/4/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
2,4
Dr.ir. H.G. Visser
62
1022
015-2782095
H.G.Visser@lr.tuelft.nl
Various guest lecturers
Lectures, small assignments (voluntary).
The course offers an introduction to the Air

Transportation. The course deals with a number of
subjects namely: airlaw, airline economics,
operational aspects and specific airtransport
markets. The subjects are explained from a practical
point of view by representatives of the most
important parties in the airline industry, among
which airlines, airports, airtraffic control and the
airworthiness authorities.
Week Arrangement
Objectives
Objectives
To acquire basic knowledge of system models for

control engineering, basic techniques of classical
control theory, applied to aircraft systems.
Set-up
1. Introduction, system concept, signal types,

inputs, outputs, open and closed loop systems.
2. Laplace transforms, signals in Laplace form,
useful theorems, the s-plane, inverse Laplace
transform.
3. System models, transfer functions.
4. Modelling aircraft, state -space representation.
5. Mechanical and hysraulic systems.
6. Transient and steady-state responses.
7. Root-locus method.
8. Practicing root-locus.
9. Example: Aircraft altitude controller.
10. Frequency Analysis, Bode.
11. Frequency analysis, Nyquist stability criterion.
12. Design by frequency response.
13. Example: satellite attitude control.
14. Control problem practice, questions
To gain insight in the rules and regulations of Air

Transportation, organization and functions of the
most important actors in the air transport industry.
Course Material
Course Material
Ogata, K., Modern Control engineering, 2002,

4th ed., Prentice Hall, ISBN 0132613891.
Lecture notes AE3-359
Set-up
Lectures
Week Arrangement

1. Introduction.
2. International airlaw and airline policy.
3. The logistic and operational function of airlines.
4. The engineering and maintenance function of
airlines.
5. Aviation authorities and air transport safety.
6. Airport functions and development.
7. Aircraft economics and fleetplanning.
Entry qualification
Follow Up Courses
AE4-301
AE4-303
AE4-304
AE4-399
60
60
Doganis, R., Flying off course, the economics of

international airlines, Routledge, 1992 2nd. Ed,
London, ISBN 0415684393
Lecture notes AE3-495 'Air Transport II',
academic year 98/99.
INTRODUCTION TO
FINITE ELEMENT
ANALYSIS
AE3-525
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
B.Sc. 3
0/0/4/0
Lecture
3
Written
4,5
Ir. J.M.A.M. Hol
62
1121
015-2785379
1. Matrix methods in structural analysis. Basic

equations of elasticity in matrix form (straindisplacement relations, constitutive equations,
equilibrium and compatibility equations). Principle
of virtual work and of complementary virtual
work.
2. Structural idealization based on energy
equivalence (governing equations of the
discretized structure).
3. Stiffness properties of structural elements
(displacement functions, variational and weighted
residual approach, numerical integration).
4. Matrix formulation of the displacement method
(analysis of an example problem by the
displacement method, elimination of the rigid
body degrees of freedom, choice of reactions,
derivation of the transformation matrices,
equivalent concentrated nodal forces,
condensation of stiffness matrix).
5. Analysis of substructures (general formulation,
substructure displacement analysis of an example
problem).
6. Dynamics of elastic systems (principle of virtual
work in dynamics of elastic syste ms, Hamilton's
principle, power balance equation, equations of
motion of a discretized structure).
7. Inertia properties of structural elements
(equivalent mass matrices in global coordinate
system, equivalent mass matrix of an assembled
structure, condensed mass matrix, lumped mass
representation, frequency dependent mass and
stiffness matrices).
8. Vibrations of elastic systems (the free-vibration
problem, properties of the eigenmodes,
orthogonality relations, the forced vibration
problem by direct and modal analysis, dynamic
condensation, component mode synthesis).
9. Special topics.
-
Bathe, K.J., Finite element procedures, 1996,

ISBN 0133014584
Huebner, K.H., The Finite Element Method for
Engineers, 2001
Przemieniecki, J.S., Theory of Matrix structural
analysis, 1968, ISBN 0486649482
Entry qualification
AE2-522 I
AE2-522 II
Follow Up Courses
AE4-528
The course runs parallel to AE3-525p F.E.M Practical.

The grade of the written examination must be 5.0 or
better. The final grade of AE3-525 is the weighted
average of the grades of the final written
examination (AE3-525) and of the workshop report
(AE3-525p).
Objectives
The course is designed to provide the students with a

thorough understanding of the theory upon which
the development of large general purpose finite
element computer codes is based.
In addition the students must take the F.E.M.
Practical (AE3-525p) where F.E.M. theory is applied
in a workshop environment.
Course Material
ir. J.M.A.M. Hol -F.E.M in Aircraft Structures

(updated version in preparation)
61
AE3-525P
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
F.E.M. PRACTICAL
B.Sc. 3
3
1
Assignment
Ir. J.M.A.M. Hol
62
1121
015-2785379
During course year 2003-2004 a new version of the

practical will be implemented. Students will be
required to enroll and attend the scheduled computer
exercises. The practical is concluded with a written
report. More details will be published when available.
Objectives
AE3-803
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
SPACE ENGINEERING
AND TECHNOLOGY III
B.Sc. 3
0/4/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
2,3
Ir. R. Noomen
62
920
015-2785377
ron.noomen@deos.tudelft.nl
Dr. Q.P. Chu
Space environment (physical phenomena and

consequences for satellites and space missions).
Ground systems. Mission operations. Guidance and
navigation. Examples of space missions.
Objectives
To broaden the understanding of FEM-technology by

applying the theoretical knowledge from AE3-525 to
a practical problems. Learn a good problem solving
approach by using a known classical approximate
solution of the problem for settting up, solving and
verifying a FEM-based solution of the same problem.
This course treats a number of basic elements of

satellite technology and space missions, and, in the
fourth part, addresses the synthesis of all spaceflight
and spacecraft disciplines. Knowledge of these
components is elementary for a succesful
participation in (a space variant of) the 3rd-year
Design-Synthesis Exercise.
Set-up
Set-up
Scheduled workshop sessions.
Week Arrangement
Workshop schedules will be posted when available.
Course Material
ir. J.M.A.M. Hol - AE3-525p F.E.M. Practical (new

version in preparation)
To participate, students have to sign up and will be
required to attend scheduled workshop sessions.
The practical runs parallel to AE3-525, Introduction
to Finite Element Analysis. The grade of the practical
report must be 5.0 or better. The final grade of AE3525 is the weighted average of the grades of the
final written examination (AE3-525) and of the
workshop report (AE3-525p).
Lectures.
Week Arrangement

1. Introduction. Space environment: gravity field
Earth, atmosphere.
2. Space environment: foreign objects, radiation.
3. Space environment: magnetic field Earth,
magnetosphere, vacuum.
4. Ground systems.
5. Mission operations. Guidance and navigation.
6. Guidance and navigation. Space missions:
examples.
7. Space missions: examples.
Course Material
-
Prerequisite
P-examination completed and ae2-521 and ae2-522

grade 5.0 or higher. Selection on basis of the results
at the end of the first examination period (October).

0471952206
Space Engineering and Technology III, lecture
notes AE3-803
Entry qualification

AE1-801
AE1-S02
Follow Up Courses
AE3-001
62
62
DYNAMICS AND
STABILITY
AE3-914
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
B.Sc. 3
0/4/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
Prof.dr.ir.R.de Borst
Dr. M.A. Gutirrez
65
1.07
015-2785464
R.deBorst@lr.tudelft.nl
Ir. J.J.C. Remmers
Entry qualification

AE2-914
WI2029LR
WI1277LR
The course consists of a series of lectures and seven

instructions during which example problems will be
worked out. A few compulsory homework problems
have to be handed in prior to each instruction.
Principles of dynamics: Kinematics, curvilinear

coordinates, kinetics, work and energy, conservative
fields, noninertial reference systems, virtual work.
Lagrangian dynamics: Generalised coordinates and
forces, Lagranges equations of motion, conservative
and dissipative systems, forces of constraint,
Lagrange multipliers, integrals of motion, ignorable
coordinates, steady motion.
Calculus of variations: Functionals, extremals of
functionals, Euler-Lagrange equations, boundary
conditions, constrained variational problems,
Hamiltons principle.
Dynamics of rotating bodies: Kinematics, moving
axes, linear and angular momentum, tensor of
inertia, kinetic energy, equations of motion, Euler
angles, gyrodynamics, spin, precession and nutation.
Stability theory: Dynamical systems, equilibrium
points, linearisation, Lyapunovs method, application
to stability analysis of mechanical systems.
Objectives
To provide the student a background in the advanced

methods of mechanics and their application to
phenomena relevant to aerospace engineering.
Set-up
The course is given in lecture form, including

application examples.
Course Material
Trk, J.S., Analytical mechanics with an

introduction to dynamical systems, New York, 2000,
Wiley
-
Meriam, J.L., Engineering mechanics: Dynamics,

5th SI ed., New York, 2001, Wiley, ISBN
0471241636
Boyce, W.E., DiPrima, R.C., Elementary
differential equations and boundary value
problems, 7th edition, New York, 2000, Wiley,
ISBN 0471089559
63
AE3-A75
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
B.Sc. 3
0/0/4/0
Lecture
3
Written
3,5
Dr.ir. P. Astori
015-2789550
p.astori@lr.tudelft.nl
The characteristics of the principal sources of energy

on board are first described, i.e. the electrical,
pneumatic and hydraulic plant, from the point of
view of generation, control and distribution.
Theoretical background is given for basic design and
sizing of actuators and main components, with major
concern for the hydraulic system. Tools for computer
aided design of hydraulic systems are mentioned.
The functions of the systems are then described:
flight controls (from original push-pull rods to
modern FBW), landing gear (geometry, kinematics,
shock absorption), brakes (main features),
environmental control (pressurization, refrigeration,
distribution) and weather hazards protection (anti
ice). The main aspects of the fuel system and flight
instrumentation are also described; emergency
systems and advanced flying configurations are
qualitatively exposed.
In the description of the systems, attention is paid to
the working principles, theoretical foundations,
design and sizing. Typical configurations and
examples of layouts are discussed.
Objectives
Understanding of the requirements, functions,
performance and operation of the most important
aircraft systems, including some basis for design and
sizing.
Set-up
Lecture
Week Arrangement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Introduction. Hydraulic system.
Hydraulic system. Electrical system. Pneumatic
system.
Flight control.
Landing gear. Braking system.
Power plant and fuel system. Weather hazards
protection.
Environmental control system. Flight
instruments.
Emergency systems. Helicopters and advanced
systems.
Course Material
Lecture notes.
64
64
Entry qualification
AE1-914 I
AE1-914 II
WI1276LR
AE3-S01
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
SYSTEMS ENGINEERING
AND TECHNICAL
MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES
B.Sc. 3
0/0/4/0
Lecture
3
Written
4,5
Ir. R.J.Hamann
62
812
015-2782079
R.J.Hamann@lr.tudelft.nl
prof.dr.ir. M.J.L. van Tooren and
various guest lecturers
Systems Engineering process. Summary of

aerospace market and market analysis. Introduction
to systems theory, functional & operational analysis,
requirements analysis. Resource budgets and risk
assessment. Design concept selection and
description. Design for RAMS, verification,
production. product support and life cycle cost.
Documentation & configuration management,
knowledge based engineering.
concurrent/simultaneous engineering. Project
management
Anon., INCOSE Systems Engineering Handbook,

International Council on Systems Engineering,
version 2.0, July 2000 (annex to lecture notes
AE4-S12)
-

Blanchard, B.S., Fabricky, W.J., Systems
engineering and analysis, 1990, 2nd ed.,
Prentice-Hall International, ISBN 0138807582
Jackson, S., Systems engineering for commercial
aircraft, 2002, Ashgate publishing,
Entry qualification
AE2-S02 is recommended.
Follow Up Courses
AE3-001
Objectives
The course shall provide the student with material to

be able to design a Systems Engineering, Project
Management and Engineering Management
framework for a development project and provide
examples of current best practices in (aerospace)
industry and academia. In addition it shall prepare
the student for the Design Synthesis Exercise.
Set-up
Lectures with 80 % obligatory attendance and a

limited number of times homework. If these
conditions are met, a 20% bonus is given for the first
following, regular exam of the course (note: no
bonus is applicable for resits). In class problems,
occasional homework assignments.
Week Arrangement

1. SE process and aerospace market analysis.
2. Systems theory, functional, operational &
requirements analysis.
3. Resource budgets, risk assessment and
conceptual design.
4. Design for RAMS and verification.
5. Design for production and product support.
6. Documentation & configuration management,
knowledge based engineering,
concurrent/simulatneous engineering.
7. Project management, in class problems.
Course Material
-
Partial copy of reference books, collection of

lecture slides with lecture notes.
Anon., Systems Engineering Fundamentals,
Defense Acquisition University Press, Fort Belvoir,
Va, USA, December 2000 (electronic copy)
65
WI3 046LR
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
PROBABILITY THEORY
AND STATISTICS
B.Sc. 3
8/0/0/0
Lectures + exercise sessions
3
Written
1,3
dr. C. Kraaikamp
6.070
015-2781910
C.Kraaikamp@its.tudelft.nl
Probability, outcomes and events, conditional

probability. Discrete random variables, continuous
random variables, expectation and variance, joint
distributions, covariance and correlation, one
dimensional Poisson process, law of large numbers,
central limit theorem, basic statistical models,
bootstrap, unbaisedness, efficiency and MSE,
maximum likelihood, least squares and confidence
intervals.
Objectives
We aim to give a thorough basic course. The student

must be able to solve problems on the level of the
exercise given in the lecture notes.
Set-up
NUMERICAL
MATHEMATICS
WI3 097LR
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
B.Sc. 3
2/2/0/0
Lecture
4
Written
2,3,5
Ir. P.C.W. van Beek
36
3.050
015-2787292
P.C.W.Vanbeek@its.tudelft.nl
Numerical interpolation and numerical integration.

Numerical methods for nonlinear equations. Time
integration methods for initial valule problems for
systems of ordinary differential equations, including
stability and error analysis. Finite difference methods
for boundary value problems for second and fourthorder ordinary differential equations.
Objectives
To bring the student to a "scrupulous" use of

numerical methods, amongst other things by paying
attention to circumstances under which they work
badly or not at all.
Course Material
4 hours course and weekly: 2-3 hours exercises .
Burden, R.L., Faires, , J.D., Numerical Analysis,

2001, 7th ed, Brooks/Cole, ISBN 0-534-38216-9
Week Arrangement
Entry qualification

1. Examples, outcomes, events and probability,
conditional probability, independence, discrete
random variables.
2. Continuous random variables, expectation and
variance, computation with random variables.
3. Covariance and correlation, more computations
with more random variables, applications.
4. The Poisson process, law of large numbers, the
central limit theorem.
5. Basic statistical models, the bootstrap
6. Unbiased estimators, efficiency and MSE,
maximum likelihood,
7. Maximum likelihood, least squares, confidence
intervals for the mean.
Course Material
Kanstat, Probability and statistics for the 21th
century, part I and part II.
Entry qualification
WI1 047LR is recommended.
Follow Up Courses
WI3 015TU
WI4 070TU
66
66

WI1276LR
WI1277LR
Follow Up Courses
WI4014LR
Lectures LR (van Beek): 2/2/0/0

Computer use:
In the computer lab task (wi3097LRp) computers will
be used. The lab task will illustrate how to apply in
practice various techniques that have been dealt with
in the lectures. For details on the lab task consult the
description of wi3097LRp.
NUMERICAL
MATHEMATICS
PRACTICAL WORK
WI3 097LRP
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
B.Sc. 3
2
0
Two reports
Dr. P. Wilders
36
03.060
015-2787291
P.Wilders@its.tudelft.nl
Set-up
Every student is required to complete the Matlab

introduction exercise and two assignments. The
assignments contain problems based on scientific
applications. The numerical algorithms are processed
in Matlab. Working-outs of both assignments must
be handed in as reports.
Each assignment must be performed within a certain
time-span. The period is divided in three phases.
Phase one: the analysis, phase two: the
implementation, and phase three: the report.
Estimated time to complete the practical work: 40
hours
Registering for the practical work needs to be done
electronically.ihalfway the first period via the
wi3097CTp Blackboard site.
Week Arrangement
The practical work starts in week 7 of the first
period with processing the Matlab introduction
exercise. In week 1 and 5 of the second period
obligatory instruction meetings take place on which
the assignments will be distributed and on which
phase one will be finished up. In the other weeks the
emphasis lies on phase two (implementation) and
phase three (report). Reports will only be taken into
account ifthe outcome of phase two has been
discussed with the assistants. A detailed schedule
can be found on the Blackboard site.
Course Material
Practical work manual

Matlab manual
More information can be obtained at the practical
work administration office ITS/TWI,
practadm@its.tudelft.nl.
The examination is based on the two reports.
Rejected reports can be supplemented. The practical
work is completed (no grading is done) when both
reports have been approved.
The Course material is available at the Blackboard
site and can also be obtained from practical work
administration office ITS/TWI, Zuidplantsoen 4.
WI3 150TU
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL
EQUATIONS 1
part A
B.Sc. 3
2/0/0/0
Lecture
3 (including part II)
1
Dr.ir. W.T. Horssen
36
03-080
015-2783524
W.T.vanHorssen@ITS.TUDelft.nl
Introduction. Type-arrangement for second order

differential equations. Quasi-lineair, first order partial
differential equations. Wave equation.
Set-up
Lectures.
Week Arrangement

1. Linearity of equations, superposition principle,
Quasi lineair first order partial differential equa
tions. Strauss 1.1 and 1.2
2. Derivation of a wave equation; Dirichlet,
Neumann and Robin boundary conditions. Strauss
1.3 and 1.4
3. Well-posedness of problems; classification of
second order partial differential equations:
hyperbolic. parabolic and elliptic. Straus 1.5 and
1.6
4. Initial value problem for the wave equation,
d`Alembert`s formula; ill-posed problems.
Strauss 2.1 and 3.2
5. Travelling waves and reflection of waves; initial
boundary value problem, energy integral,
uniqueness of solutions. Strauss 3.2 and 2.2
6. Continuous dependences on initial values;
inhomogeneous boundary conditions, method of
separation of variables. Strauss 3.4, 4.1 and
4.2
7. Method of separation of variables for Dirichlet,
Neumann, Robin, or mixed boundary conditions.
Strauss 4.2 and 4.3
Course Material
Strauss, W.A., Partial Differential equations: an
introduction, New York, 1992, Wiley, ISBN
0471548685
Entry qualification

WI1047LR
WI2029LR
Five take-home assignments have to be completed

during the lecture period and must be handed in
before the period is finished. A short, individual
review is held with the student, within two weeks of
the assignment deadline.
67
WI3 150TU
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
EQUATIONS 1
part B
B.Sc. 3
0/2/0/0
Lectures
see part I
2
Dr.ir. W.T. Horssen
36
03-080
015-2783524
Separation of variables. Eigenfunctions. Boundary

value and initial-boundary value problems.
Parabolic, elliptic and hyperbolic equations.
Maximum principle. Heat and diffusion equations.
Set-up
Lectures.
Week Arrangement

1. Derivation of a diffusion equation.
Inhomogeneous diffusion equation, construction
of solutions, maximum-minimum principle.
Strauss 2.3 and 5.6
2. Uniqueness of solutions, diffusion equation on
infinite domain, source function. Strauss 2.4 and
2.5
3. Homogeneous and inhomogeneous diffusion
equations on several types of domain. Properties
of solutions. Strauss 3.1, 3.3 and 3.5
4. Fourier series, orthogonality of eigenfunctions for
several types of boundary conditions. Strauss
5.1, 5.2 and 5.3 (read 5.4 and 5.5)
5. Laplace and Poisson equations, harmonic
functions, maximum principle, uniqueness,
invariances, some boundary value problems in R
and R. Strauss 6.1 and 6.2
6. Poisson`s formula, mean value property,
maximum principle and differentiability. Strauss
6.3 and 6.4
7. Laplace equation for circles, wedges and annuli,
properties of solutions, Green`s first identity.
Strauss 6.3 and 7.1
Course Material
0471548685
Entry qualification
WI4025TU is recommended.
An optional Maple exercise of approx. 20 hours

(worth 0.5 credits) can be performed. The program
enables the student to perform transformations and
find solutions. Additionally, many of the solutions can
be easily visualised.
68
68

review is held with the student, within two weeks of
the assignment deadline.
WM0203TU
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
ORAL PRESENTATION
SKILLS
B.Sc. 3
4
0
Oral presentation
4
drs. P.C. Post
31
3.1.030
015-2783175
The final mark for Oral Presentations will be based

on:
1. Presentations to be held during classes;
2. Both reviews
3. The evaluation of student's own presentation.
1. Introduction: presenting yourself, preparation,

overcoming stage fright, visual aids.
2. Delivering and evaluation speeches; goal and
effect of presentations, structure, body language,
voice.
3. Persuasion, enthousiasm, audience involvement,
questions.
Objectives
The aim of the course is to increase the students'

oral presentation skills to a level that is expected in
the world of engineering. The emphasis lies on
acquiring general skills insights that Aerospace
engineers need in different professional presentation
situations.
Set-up
During the Oral Presentations sessions, the attention

is focused on each student's individual skills, but also
on presentations with several speakers. Subjects for
the presentations are expected to stem from the
design assignment (Design Synthesis Exercise AE3001). The Oral Presentation sessions are embedded
in the Design Synthesis Exercise.
Three three-hour classes will be used to give an
introduction to several aspects of oral presentations
and each student will give a short presentation which
will be extensively evaluated by the tutor and fellow
students. The presentation is recorded on video.
With the help of the recording and the feedback
given, each student then evaluates his/her own
presentation.
Each student will also present a part of the Mid Term
Review and Final Review (AE3-001). The tutor will be
present during both reviews and judges each
student's presentation. The MTR is recorded on video
for discussion and evaluation.
Course Material
to be announced
Follow Up Courses
WM0211
Attendance during classes is obligatory. In case of

force majeure one session may be missed, which
should be compensated by means of an assignment.
If more sessions are missed, students are required to
follow an open course WM0203.
69
INTRODUCTION TO
BUSINESS
ENGINEERING AND
MANAGEMENT
WM0501TU
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
B.Sc. 3
0/4/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
2,3
ir. W. ten Haaf
34
8D-3-25
015-2786781
W.tenhaaf@wbmt.tudelft.nl
prof.ir. H. Bikker
ir. R. Dekkers
Backgrounds of business engineering and

management; Companies in the context of society;
Industrial production and market; Introduction to the
systems approach;
Basic forms of co-operation; Objectives and Policy;
Main functions in an enterprise;
History of Management; Decision making and
problem solving;
Mainstream and primary processes; Steady state
model; Organising operations; Forms of leadership;
Integration and application of models;
Management of product development in a life cycle
perspective; Principles of cost price calculations.
Objectives
This course is designed to recognize problems in the

context of business management and organization.
Getting involved in business the engineer, among
others, has to decide when and where to ask for
advice, to what extent and how the organization of
multi-disciplinary groups is favourable and when
post-graduate education becomes desirable. Insight
in operations management and the role of the
engineer may accommodate his work in practice and
stimulates learning to integrate social, economical
and technological aspects.
Course Material
Haaf, W.ten, Bikker, H., Adriaanse, D.J.,

Fundamentals of Business Engineering and
Management; A Systems Approach to People and
Organisations, , Delft University Press, ISBN 90-4072210-2
Follow Up Courses
WM0504TU
WM0505TU
Examination is multiple choice.
Actual information can be found on:

www.bedrijfsleer.tudelft.nl <news>
70
70
MASTER OF SCIENCE PROGRAM
CHAPTER 6 - M.SC. PROGRAM

How to use this guide
The present chapter contains general information about the M.Sc. program and some administrative procedures.
In the next chapter the discipline groups describe their M.Sc. programs. For each group a master program is set,
consisting of mandatory and elective courses. From page 119 one can find the course descriptions. All Aerospace
Engineering courses are enlisted as well as courses from other faculties which are mandatory in one or more
master variants. Students are urged to read carefully the Teaching and Examination Regulations. General
information about the faculty is found in chapter 1 of this guide.
Every course in this Study Guide is listed with the corresponding credits awarded to each subject. From
September 2003 on all TUD credits are converted into European Credits (conform the European Credit Transfer
System).
CHOICE OF GRADUATION PROGRAM

A choice of one of these Master Variants can be made after the B.Sc. Study:
1
Master variant
Chairholder
I
Aerodynamics
prof.dr.ir. P.G. Bakker
II
Flight Mechanics and Propulsion
III
Control and Simulation
prof.dr.ir. J.A. Mulder
IV
Aerospace Management and Organization
prof.dr.ir. M.J.L. van Tooren
V
Aerospace Structures
ir. T.J. van Baten (acting chair)
VI
Design and Production of Composite Structures
prof.ir. A. Beukers
VII
Aerospace Materials
ir. J. Sinke (acting chair)
VIII
Astrodynamics and Satellite systems
prof.ir. B.A.C. Ambrosius
IX
Engineering Mechanics
prof.dr.ir. R. de Borst
X
Fundamentals of Advanced Materials
prof.dr.ir. S. van der Zwaag
Horizontal Programs
System Integration/Aeronautics
System Integration/Space
prof.dr.ir. M.J.L. van Tooren

dr.ir. W. Jongkind (acting chair)
The variants can be performed in an aeronautical (A) and space (S) oriented program. Naturally, the variant VIII
(Astrodynamics and Satellite Systems) is solely space oriented. All variants provide a more design-oriented
variant to their program. The set of courses and the master variant are chosen in agreement with the chairholder.
The student has the possibility to graduate at a so-called 'horizontal' chair. These horizontal chairs do not offer
graduation programs of their own but co-operate with the above 'vertical chairs'. Students who are interested in a
horizontal project are advised to contact the horizontal chairs.
M.SC. PROGRAM
From September 2003 on the M.Sc. program is no longer exclusively open to Aerospace Engineering students but
also to students with a B.Sc. degree in Mechanical Engineering, Marine Technology, Applied Physics or Electrical
Engineering. For the latter category a slightly different M.Sc. program applies. The following tables describe the
different programs.
A. Students with a B.Sc. degree in Aerospace Engineering

Enrolled in the B.Sc. Aerospace Engineering in 2001 or before
Period of practical work (internship), 12 weeks. (18 ECTS)
M.Sc.
Preparatory courses for the graduation project. (36 ECTS)
Year 1
General engineer building courses. (6 ECTS)
M.Sc.
Year 2
Graduation project (60 ECTS)
Enrolled in the B.Sc. Aerospace Engineering in 2002 or after

M.Sc.
Year 1

M.Sc.
Year 2

As from September 2003 on the Industrial Organization variant (prof.ir. H. Bikker) is no longer part of the M.Sc.
program in Aerospace Engineering. Interested students have to switch to the M.Sc. program in Mechanical
Engineering (Faculty OCP).
1
71
71
Students who started their B.Sc. in AE in 2001 or before may switch to the new M.Sc. program, in case of
planning difficulties. Please consult the study counsellor for more information. The graduation project, whether it
is 60 or 42 ECTS, includes the reporting and the final presentation. The graduation projects in the new program,
thus, are considerably smaller than in the old program.
Note that the new M.Sc. variant Aerospace Management and Organization already offers the new program.
B. For students who completed a B.Sc. program other than Aerospace Engineering
M.Sc.
Year 1
Capita Selecta courses (18 ECTS)

M.Sc.
Year 2

The Capita Selecta courses (9 ECTS each) cover the main Aerospace Engineering fields. They are meant to bring
students without an Aerospace Engineering background up to standard. The courses are mainly set up as
literature study, but may also contain practical work. The M.Sc. program always contains two Capita Selecta
courses. Depending on the chosen M.Sc. variant one is mandatory, the other is chosen by the student in
consultation with his M.Sc. supervisor. It is recommended to contact the course coordinator at the beginning of
the course year. Course descriptions are found in the next chapter.
Capita Selecta
Coordinator
Aerodynamics (ae4-100)
Prof.dr.ir. P. Bakker
Flight Mechanics and Fligth Dynamics (ae4-300) Dr.ir. M. Mulder
Materials and Structures (ae4-500)
Ir. T.J. van Baten
Space (ae4-S00)
Ir. R.J. Hamann
Mandatory for
Aerodynamics
Control and Simulation,
Flight Mechanics
Aerospace Structures, Production
Technology, Aerospace Materials,
Engineering Mechanics, Fundamentals
of Advanced Materials
Astrodynamics
Please note that the program descriptions in Chapter 7 are based on the standard program, i.e the internship in
the 1st M.Sc. year and a 60 ECTS graduation project. However, for students with a B.Sc. degree other than
Aerospace Engineering adjustments will be made.
M.SC. PROCEDURES
The main M.Sc. procedures are described below. These procedures should be carried out properly, making sure
that all requirements are met. If not, this may cause serious delay in the last phase of the M.Sc. program. The
detailed regulations on graduation can be found in the teaching and examination regulations supplemented in this
study guide.
1. Registering for an M.Sc. variant
Who
2
Graduates B.Sc. Aerospace Engineering
Graduates B.Sc. Mechanical Engineering,
Marine Engineering, Applied Physics,
Electrical Engineering
Other
Requirements
Design/Synthesis exercise
completed
B.Sc. completed
Checked by
Chairholder
Approval Board of
Examiners
BOS
3
BOS
Registration forms are available at the Office for Educational Affairs (BOS) or at the disciplines group secretariat.
The form must be handed in at the Office for Educational Affairs. If the requirements are met, the student is
formally registered at the chair.
For more information about registering at a horizontal chair (SIA or SI-R) see page 71.
2. Compiling the program: the set of core and elective courses
Who
Chairholder and student
Requirements
See page 71 and 72
Checked by
-
This rule applies to students who registered for the B.Sc. Aerospace Engineering in 2001 or before. Those students who
started their B.Sc. in 2002 or after need their B.Sc. program to be completed in order to be admitted to the M.Sc. Aerospace
Engineering.
Office for Educational Affairs
7272

Registration forms are available at the Office for Educational Affairs or at the disciplines group secretariat. The
form must be handed in at the Office for Educational Affairs. Note that step 1 and 2 can be done at the same
time.
Note: Completion of courses specific to a chair without prior registration (thus without permission) are not
grounds on which the student can derive registration rights.
3: Handing out the graduation project
Who
Chairholder/M.Sc. supervisor
Requirements
B.Sc. completed
M.Sc. first year

completed
Checked by
Chairholder/M.Sc. supervisor
To begin work at the chosen chair, the B.Sc. program must be completed in full and approved by the Board of
Examiners. The student must be able to show the chairholder the Boards letter of approval. If the B.Sc. program
is not completed and thesis work is started nevertheless, the student cannot count on any help (e.g. extra exams
or short-cutting procedures) from the Board of Examiners when problems arise. Deviating from the second
requirement (M.Sc. first year completed) is possible only if approved by the chairholder or supervisor.
4: The Master of Science examination and presentation
Who
Student
Requirements
All M.Sc. courses, practicals and
internship completed
When
When all M.Sc. subjects except for the
thesis are completed, but
at least four weeks for the planned
presentation date
Checked by
BOS
The application form is available at the Office for Educational Affairs. Please make sure that this office has an up
to date version of your M.Sc. program (cf. step 2), signed by the chairholder. Application is possible as soon as
the M.Sc. subjects, except for the thesis, are completed. If the evaluation of the M.Sc. results is carried out
successfully, registering forms for the M.Sc. examination and presentation are sent to the student. Formally a
presentation date can only be set when the student received the registration forms from BOS, since this proves
that all requirements are met.
Note: If the B.Sc. program is not yet approved by the Board of Examiners, this has to be done first. The B.Sc. and
M.Sc. application will not be handled at the same time.
5. The graduation report
The graduation report must be printed in seven copies and typed on A4-paper. One report containing an English
transcript must be submitted to the Education Administration Office. If more than seven copies are required, the
graduate student must submit a written request, complete with the chair holders signature. The student is
responsible for covering the cost incurred in printing the additional reports. The required graduation reports are
bound and covered. For this and other issues, students can contact Mr. W. Spee, the faculty printing specialist,
tel. (015) 27 82051. A number of chairs require the student to hold one or two presentations. The cost of the
necessary overhead sheets is covered by the faculty.
6: Sign out
After graduating you need to sign out personally from Aerospace Engineering at the Central Student
Administration (CsA). Therefore you need to fill in a form which you can receive there or can be sent by them by
post. Hand this in together with your 'Bewijs van Inschrijving' (prove of suB.Sc.ription).
CsA: 015-2784249, Julianalaan 134, Postbus 5, 2600 AA Delft.
7: Certificate presentation
The graduation-certificate presentation takes place annually in the months of October, January, March, and June.
The festive presentation of the Master of Science certificates marks the formal end of the study program. The
certificate is dated on the day on which the final part of the curriculum has been completed. If all of the
procedures have been followed correctly, this will be the date of the graduation presentation.
Honours Track
Students, who graduate in their bachelor programme with an average mark of 7,5 or better, are eligible for
following an honours track in their master program.
An honours track is a special program, in addition to the regular master program, and relates to your discipline
and/or to the role of technology in society. It offers more depth, for example preparation to the doctoral
programme (PhD) or a wider orientation.
A special DUT-wide course of 160 hours of study is developed. This course is interdisciplinary and focuses on
73
73
academic competences such as communication skills, philosophy of science, methodology and ethics. It is
compulsory for honours track students.
An honours track is in total about 800 hours of additional study, to be followed within the master program.
Special facilities shall be made available. Students who have successfully completed their honours track receive a
special certificate.
Interested students should contact the M.Sc. director of education when they come close to finish their bachelor.
Exchange programs
The faculty organizes a SOCRATES/ERASMUS exchange program with a large number of European universities,
such as Cranfield, Imperial College London, Belfast, Mnchen, Stuttgart, Pisa, Toulouse en Madrid. A period at
one of the universities can be accredited as an internship or (partially) as graduation research. If necessary, Mr.
B.A. Reith can mediate between the involved parties. More information on exchange programs can be obtained at
the Student Advisory office (Julianalaan 134, tel. (015) 27 88012). Information on financial support and various
funds to support the internship can also be found at the Student Advisory Office.
SOCRATES/ERASMUS co-ordinator
Dr. B.A. Reith
Room no. 203
tel: (015) 27 81355/82076
fax: (015) 27 85863
email: b.a.reith@lr.tudelft.nl
Teacher Training
A teacher training course is offered for those who wish to obtain a grade-one teaching qualification (eerstegraads
onderwijsbevoegdheid, the highest teaching qualification in the Netherlands). You can visit their website at:
http://www.tulo.tudelft.nl. hFor more information please contact the Technische Univeritaire Leraren Opleiding
(TULO): Martin Jacobs, Lorentzweg 1, 2628 CJ Delft, tel: 015 2785594, email: m.a.f.m.jacobs@tnw.tudelft.nl.
7474
AERODYNAMICS & COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS
CHAPTER 7 OVERVIEW OF THE MASTER VARIANTS

I. AERODYNAMICS & COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DY NAMICS
Chair personnel
Scientific staff
Prof.dr.ir. P.G. Bakker
Prof.dr.ir. B. Koren
ir. W.J. Bannink
ir. L.M.M. Boermans
mw. dr.ir.drs H. Bijl
dr.ir. M.I. Gerritsma
ir. D.M. Passchier
dr. F. Scarano
ir. L.L.M. Veldhuis
dr.ir. L.M.G.F.M. Walpot
85907
82053
84500
86387
85373
85903
85349
86386
85902
82009
071-5795527
Ph.D. Students
ir. M. Baragona
ir. O. Dushyn
ir. G.F. Duivesteijn
ir. J.M. Cnossen
ir. F.J. Schrijer
ir. M.E.N. Wisse
ir. A.H. van Zuijlen
82046
86055
85169
85169
82046
85169
82046
Secretariat
Mw. A. Ratuhaling
fax
84501
87077
Technical Support
N. van Beek
ing. S. Bernardy
ing. F.J. Donker Duyvis
P.J. Duijndam
ing. E.W. de Keizer
L. Molenwijk
85908
81944
85905
85908
85905
86389
Research areas and final objectives

The field of aerodynamics and computational fluid dynamics is far from limited to that of Aerospace Engineering. It
encompasses many technological sectors. The main reason why aerodynamics is such a wide-spread field is the
frequent occurrence of flow phenomena in every-day life. Just think of what goes on inside flow machines and
engines, of during the transportation of liquids and gases through tube systems and porous materials, or
atmospheric flows (the weather!), in rivers, seas and oceans, or the flow inside the human body, e.g. the blood
stream and the respiratory system, etc.. The list goes on and on. All these fields offer a generous employment for
the aerodynamic engineer.
The aerodynamicist has a leading and creative role when designing an aircraft or spacecraft. The aerodynamicist
often operates in a fascinating field of tension where he, together with colleagues from various disciplines,
incorporates the abundance of often conflicting demands in the fields of aerodynamics, performance, structures,
safety, materials and manufacturing into a technical/ economical/ ecological sound compromise. Another field
where the aerodynamicist trained in Delft excels in is scientific research. Scientific research is performed by
university research groups, large technological institutions (NLR, TNO, ESTEC, etc.) and the research departments
of large (international) companies. Herein lies a career where people aim exceed the boundaries of aerodynamics
using fundamental research, often co-operating with different fields.
The chair's primary focus is on Aerospace engineering, despite the diversity of aerodynamics. Contiguous to the
practice, the chair also offers a stream "Aerodynamic design" and a stream "Fluid dynamics". Both streams
distinguish between an aviation and a space program.
The program "Aerodynamic design" is focused on learning and applying the aerodynamic design methods and
design tools. The chair of aerodynamics in this field covers:
aerodynamic design of aircraft, spacecraft and advanced transport systems
industrial applications of aerodynamics
implementing and (further) developing design tools
experimental methods for quantitative flow visualization
developing measurement techniques for experimental research
contributing to the design activities of Aerospace Engineering through design studies.

The program "Fluid dynamics" is focused on learning to analyze flow phenomena, developing flow models and
applying research methods, combining practicing theoretical analysis, numerical calculations and experimental
work wherever possible. The chair of aerodynamics in this field covers:
75 75
boundary layer flows and turbulence

topology of complex flows with separation
fluid-structures interactions and flow control
supersonic and hypersonic flows with space applications
computational fluid dynamics
experimental methods for quantitative flow visualization.
1st course year educational goals

Stream: Aerodynamic design
broad and thorough knowledge of fluid dynamics, thermodynamics and aircraft or spacecraft aerodynamics
knowledge of modern methods for flow analysis (numerical/experimental)
Thorough knowledge of modern methods for aerodynamic design optimization regarding aircraft, spacecraft or
advanced transportation systems
skills in the use of modern aerodynamic design programs
insight in relating course disciplines

Stream: Fluid dynamics
in-depth knowledge of fluid dynamics, thermodynamics and aerodynamics
insight in physical regularities and the interpretation of mathematical or computer models of flow phenomena
in-depth knowledge of modern methods for the numerical or experimental analysis of flow phenomena
1st course year curriculum

Code
Course
Lectures
Credits

CORE COURSES (33.5 credits)
WI4 087TU
WI4 014TU
WI4 150TU
WM0324LR
AE4-711
Optimization, Models and Algorithms

Numerical Analysis CII
Partial Differential Equations 2
Ethics and Eng. for Aerospace Engineering
Sustainable Development
2/0/0/0
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/0
0/4/0/0
4/0/0/0
3
4.5 (incl. practical)
2
3
3
Aviation program
AE4-140
AE4-151
AE4-160
AE4-170
AE4-214
AE4-930
Gasdynamics I
Numerical Methods in Aircraft Aerodynamics I
Aerodynamic Design of Aircraft and Adv. Transp. Syst.
Boundary Layer Flows A
Aircraft Propulsion, Noise and Pollution Emm.
Aeroelasticity
2/2/0/0
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/4/0/0
0/0/4/0
0/0/2/2
3
3
3
3
3
3
Space program
AE4-140
AE4-143
AE4-170
AE4-930
AE4-873 I
AE4-S01
Gasdynamics I
Hypersonic Aerodynamics
Aeroelasticity
Astrodynamics (part I)
Thermal Rocket Prop. Systems Analysis and Design
2/2/0/0
2/2/0/0
0/4/0/0
0/0/2/2
2/2/0/0
2/2/0/0
3
3
3
3
3
3
ELECTIVE COURSES
AE4-141
Gasdynamics II
AE4-145
High Altitude Aero Thermodynamics
AE4-151
Numerical Methods Aircraft Aerodynamics I
AE4-152
Numerical Methods Aircraft Aerodynamics II
AE4-171
Boundary Layer Flows B
AE4-180
Experimental Methods in Aerodynamics
AE4-211
Aircraft Design and Operation
AE4-301
Dynamics and Control Of Aircraft
AE4-305
Spacecraft Attitude Dynamics and Control
AE4-537
Spacecraft Structures
WB1424A
Turbulence A
WI4 007TU
Fourier-Laplace Transforms
WI4 008TU
Complex Analysis
WI4 019
Non-Linear Differential Equations
0/0/2/2
4/0/0/0
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/0/4/0
2/2/0/0
4/2/2/0
0/4/0/0
0/4/0/0
0/2/2/0
0/0/2/2
0/0/2/2
2/2/0/0
0/0/4/0
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4 (incl. practical)
4 (incl. practical)
3
6
4
4
4
EXERCISE (4 credits)
AE4-196P
M.Sc. 1st year Exercise
120 hours
INTERNS HIP (18 credits)

AE4-001
12 weeks + 1 week report
76
18

CORE COURSES (32.5 credits)
AE4-900
WI4 008TU
WI4 014TU
WI4 150TU
WM0324LR
AE4-711
Continuum Mechanics
Complex analysis
Numerical Analysis CII
Sustainable evelopment
0/0/4/0
2/2/0/0
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/0
0/4/0/0
4/0/0/0
4
4
4.5 (incl. practical)
2
3
3
Aviation program
AE4-140
AE4-141
AE4-170
AE4-171
Gasdynamics I
Gasdynamics II
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/4/0/0
0/0/4/0
3
3
3
3
Space program
AE4-140
AE4-141
AE4-143
AE4-170
Gasdynamics I
Gasdynamics II
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/2
2/2/0/0
0/4/0/0
3
3
3
3
ELECTIVE COURSES
AE4-145
AE4-151
Numerical Methods Aircraft Aerodynamics I
AE4-152
Numerical Methods Aircraft Aerodynamics II
AE4-171
AE4-180
Exp. Methods in Aerodynamics
TN2622
Statistical Physics
TN2643
Classical and Rel. Mechanics (Incl. Instr. Lec.)
WB1424A
Turbulence A
WI4 007TU
Fourier and Laplace Transformations
WI4 011
Numerical Fluid Dynamics A
4/0/0/0
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/0/4/0
2/2/0/0
5/0/0/0
t.b.d.
0/0/2/2
0/0/2/2
0/4/0/0
3
3
3
3
3
4
t.b.d
6
4
6
EXERCISE (4 credits)1
AE4-196P
M.Sc. 1st year Exercise
120 hours
INTERNSHIP (18 credits)

AE4-001
18
2nd course year educational goals
Operationalizing the acquired knowledge in the field of aerodynamic design and/or flow analysis
Skills in the use of modern methods for the experimental and/or theoretical approach to flow problems.
Be capable of understanding scientific literature
Thorough insight in modern aerospace aerodynamics
Skills in independently settling into an aerodynamic problem
Reporting skills, both written (e.g. in the form of a concept article) and oral (presenting at a conference)
2nd course year curriculum: the graduation project (AE5-100)

The 2nd course year curriculum consists solely of the graduation project (AE5-100), which is divided into the
following parts:
preparation for the graduation project (literature study, some additional elective courses if necessary)
graduation project
presentation of the graduation project (report and presentation)
engineering examination
The total program consists of 60 credits.
The graduation project finalizes the subject in the field of design-orientated aerodynamics or fluid dynamics. The
nature of the project can be analytical, numerical or experimental, and shall often be a combination. This will be
co-dependant on the design and/or possible preferences of the graduating student.
The preparation for the graduation project is aimed at arriving at a well-posed description of the problem by means
of project-oriented literature research, followed by drawing up an inventory of the available possibilities given the
existing expertise and facilities (e.g. numerical, experimental). During the preparation, the student may be
instructed, under deliberation, to follow additional elective courses to supplement specific knowledge.
The exercise AE4-196P is not standard, but will be specified for each student seperately. It mostly concerns an
orientation on the thesis-subject, for example by way of literature study.
77 77
The presentation of the work is done by means of a report, written in English (the graduation project report), and
an oral presentation defending the project report during the Master of Science examination. The students are also
expected to make a poster of their graduation work. Additionally, the chair stimulates the possibility for the
graduation results to be published in the international scientific literature, preferably arriving at a (concept) article
suited for publishing in a scientific journal, or as contribution to an international scientific conference.
Graduation projects
The following subjects relate to both theoretical and experimental work in the field of:
aircraft
design of an airfoil with boundary layer suction, using solar power
design of an airfoil with Fowler flap for an engine powered aircraft in the general aviation category
a fairing design for the wing-fuselage junction of a glider
analysis of a propeller/wing interaction (theoretical using Euler/Navier-Stokes code), a.o. wingtip-propeller

applications
experimental and theoretical research on vortex fields, generated by large aircraft
active flow control for separating turbulent boundary layers

advanced transport systems
aerodynamic design of road vehicles
wing design for Formula 1 and 3 racecars

measurement techniques
development of a transversing wake rake with electronic pressure sensors for drag measurements
application of PIV measuring techniques for quantitative flow field research behind wind tunnel models
Utilization of PIV-measurement techniques in subsonic and supersonic flows

The following subjects relate to both theoretical and experimental work in the field of:
Boundary layer flows and turbulence
turbulence modeling of boundary layers, wakes en shear layers
instability, transition and the starting phase of the turbulent boundary layer
disturbances in the laminar boundary layer caused by the disturbances in the outside flow exterior flow
the use of stability data and amplification calculations to determine the transition of the boundary layer
experimental research on shockwave-interactions and shockwave-boundary layer interactions
experimental research on boundary layer transition in hypersonic flows
experimental research on compressible shear layers and wake flows
compressibility influences on thermal recovery in boundary layers

topology of complex flows with separation
theoretical/numerical research on the topology of three-dimensional separation structures
topology of juncture flows

fluid-structures interactions and flow control
galloping oscillations
smart wing project (in co-operation with prof. De Borst)
unsteady flow around airfoils (experimental and CFD)
flow control
supersonic and hypersonic flows with space applications
hypersonic flow over flaps, rudders and along folds in the contour (ramp flow)
experimental/numerical research on flow near plug nozzles; influence on performance
DART project: Aerospace Engineering faculty project aimed at building, testing and flying a reusable re-entry
vehicle; studying the aerodynamic aspects experimental as well as numerical
research at the base flow behind rockets; European (ESA) design in the framework of the Future Launchers
Technology program (FLTP), regarding the interaction of the rocket's exhaust flow with the exterior flow
fundamental studies of the base flow in supersonic flows (theoretical and experimental).
computational fluid dynamics
numerical modeling of flows with real gas effects
numerical methods for fluid-structure interactions
spectral element methods
numerical solutions for two-dimensional boundary layers
least squares formulations
adaptive schemes
computational fluid dynamics for flight simulators

Experimental methods for quantitative flow visualisation
development and application of Hot Wire Anemometry for unsteady/turbulent compressible flow studies
78
application of Laser Doppler Velocimetry for separated boundary layer investigations

development and application of Quantitative Infra Red thermography for supersonic and hypersonic flow
diagnostics
quantitative Schlieren-methods for density measurement in compressible flows.
development of efficient and accurate digital image processing algorithms for PIV
development of three-dimensional particle image velocimetry
79 79
FLIGHT MECHANICS AND PROPULSION
II. FLIGHT MECHANICS AND PROPULSION

Chair personnel
Professor
85301
Part-time professor
prof.ir. J.P. van Buijtenen
prof.ir. G.J.J. Ruijgrok
82186
82067
Scientific staff
ir. J.A. Melkert, B.B.A.
dr.ir. H.G. Visser
ir. R. Slingerland
dr. M.D. Pavel, M.Sc.
85338
82095
85332
83992
Ph.D. students/Lecturers
ir. J.C. Holierhoek
ir. J.A. Krijnen
ir. B. Marrant
ir. T.J. Mulder
ir. R.A.A. Wijnen
85643
85368
85171
85368
85132
Secretary
Room no. 10.10
Technical support
ing. M. Haanschoten
ing. D.M. van Paassen
tel. 85176
fax. 83444
81486
82067

The
field of Flight Mechanics and Propulsion covers the following areas:

Flight mechanics, propulsion (including rocket propulsion), noise and pollutant emissions,
Aircraft exploitation, optimization techniques, air traffic management, safety and certification,
Concept and preliminary design studies.
Rotorcraft aerodynamics, flight mechanics, aero elasticity,
Spin-off research.
The common element in all the chair's education and research is the fact that the aircraft is always viewed as a
whole. The results of the separate disciplines (such as aerodynamics, structures, propulsion, control, flight
systems, etc.) are collected, balanced, and integrated to solve problems relating to the whole aircraft as part of a
greater transport system. Both concept/preliminary design studies and exploitation questions are part of this field
and are generally referred to as "the integrated system level" of aviation technology
The chair of Flight Mechanics and Propulsion does not focus primarily on purely scientific or specialist careers
(although these do occur amongst the graduate students), but mainly prepares for practical engineering functions
in the aviation industry and other branches of the industry.
In such a profession, the engineer functions as an intermediary between technical practice on the one hand and
technical science on the other. These situations require the engineer to be more than a technical scientist.
He/she must have a thorough knowledge of the fundamental beta -sciences (mathematics, mechanics, physics,
computer use, etc.) and the general engineering courses (fluid dynamics, structural analysis, thermodynamics,
measurement and control theory, materials, etc.).
He/she must have experience with the typical Aerospace Engineering courses (such as aircraft aerodynamics,
flight mechanics, aircraft structures, etc.), which originate from the confrontation of general engineering
courses with specific product requirements in the aerospace industry.
This requires the engineer to have a feeling for the technical practice and insight into the connections between
practice and theory: without the practical and product knowledge this confrontation would be impossible.
One should be able to familiarize oneself easily with new problems including problems in areas that were not
part of the collection of courses chosen during the study program.
Finally, the engineer must be able to function in a business environment. This puts demands on language and
reporting skills, corporate insight, insight in the "context" of the engineering profession, etc.

The first course year lecture and exercise program is best characterized as the continuation of the B.Sc. study on a
wide variety of subjects. A specialization is not yet strived after.
80

Code
Course
Lectures
Credits
4/2/2/0
4/0/0/0*
0/4/0/0*
0/0/4/0
4
3 (not incl. practical ae4-212P)
3
3
0/4/0/0
0/4/0/0**
2/2/0/0**
4/0/0/0
2/2/0/0
0/4/0/0
3 (not incl. practical ae4-301P)

3
3
3
4
3
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/0
4
2
Physics (including control theory)

ET4-039
Analog Signal Processing Techniques
ET4-235
Digital Signal Processing Techniques
IDE 345
Applied Electronics
3/0/0/0
3/0/0/0
t.b.d.
4
4
2
Strength and structures

AE4-215
Introduction to Adaptive Aerostructures
AE4-628
Structural Design of Composite Aircraft
AE4-729
Fatigue of Structures and Materials
AE4-930
Aeroelasticity
2/0/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/0/4/0
0/0/2/2
3
3
3
3
Aerodynamics
AE4-143
AE4-170
2/2/0/0
0/4/0/0
3
3
Design / flight mechanics

AE4-251 /CT5147
Wind Energy
AE4-294
Air Traffic Management
AE4-393
Avionics I
0/0/2/2
2/2/0/0
4/0/0/0
3
3
3
Space flight
AE4-S01
0/0/2/2
4/0/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/0/2/2
0/4/0/0
3
3
3
3
CORE COURSES (26 credits)

AE4-211
AE4-212
AE4-213
AE4-214
AE4-301
AE4-870
AE4-873 I
AE4-711
WI4 051TU
WM0324LR

Aircraft Performance Optimization
Rotorcraft Mechanics
Propulsion, Noise and Pollutant
Emissions
Rocket Motion
Astrodynamics (Part I)
Introduction to Operations Research
Ethics Eng. for Aerospace Engineering
* one of both courses is compulsory

** one of both courses is compulsory
ELECTIVE COURSES (10 credits)
Mathematics
WI4 008TU
WI4 150TU
AE4-S02
AE4-S12
AE4-838
AE4-S51
AE4-201
AE4-001
Complex calculus
Partial differential equations 2
Thermal Rocket Propulsion Syst.

Analysis and Design
Spacecraft Mechatronics
Space Systems Engineering
Manned Space Flight
Electrical And Information Systems In
Space
Flight Mechanics Exercise
Exercise in independent (possibly
literature) research, simulation or
design. The subject is chosen
individually, regarding e.g. contract
work for the industry.
Internship (12 weeks + 1 week report)
18
Note: deviation from the above core and elective courses is possible, in agreement with the lecturer. See also the
complete table of core and elective courses of all the chairs.

The second course year is dedicated to the graduation project (often divided into a preparatory assignment, the
final result and the writing of a publication ). Additional practicals and exercises can be agreed on (e.g. short flying
course).
81 81
This course year is aimed at gaining skills in independently (but not solitary) solving a problem representative for
the engineering practice (multidisciplinary) and to learn to creatively solve this type of problems.
Although the graduation project in general concerns a more specialized subject, this must definitely not be seen as
a specialization. Students must realize that it would be pure co-incidence to end up in the same profession as the
field in which the student graduates. The graduation project must be seen as exercises, where the student
experience the whole traject of "problem solving".
The
graduation project comprises:

familiarization with the problem, literature study and consultation with experts, resulting in:
planning
modeling the problem
gathering quantitative data
qualitatively and quantitatively determining 'model' solutions
interpretation and translation to solutions that take into account all "real world" constraints
report (oral and written), defense
preparation of a publication

The chair requests that students choose a graduation project that is derived from the chair's research or contract
research.
There remains the possibility based on special interest to perform the graduation project at a foreign or domestic
company or institute.
Examples of recent or current (graduation) research:
Flight mechanics, propulsion, noise, emissions, certification
determining the cross-wind operating limits when landing on a wet runway (Schiphol)
developing low-noise flight procedures around Schiphol (Schiphol and KLM), e.g. delayed flap approaches,
decelerating approach, dual glide slope
design of a maneuvering thruster (in co-operation with Estec)
design of a lift fan for the F-16 successor (in co-operation with Stork)
propulsion system design for an aerostatic HALE vehicle (High Altitude Long Endurance) (DASA)
developing software to calculate the noise pollution of aircraft (in co-operation with Airbus/ Toulouse)
studies to prepare a measuring grid to determine the noise pollution around Schiphol (RLD).
performance and noise certification tests for the Eaglet (Euro-Enaer).

Aircraft operation, optimizing techniques, air traffic management, safety, economy
optimal escape maneuvers with wind shear
optimization of helicopter autorotation and rejected take-off
research into genetic optimization techniques
optimization of free-flight strategies (in co-operation with NLR)
development of planning and simulation tools for ground traffic control (in co-operation with NLR)
development and simulation of flight equipment for Continuous Descent Approaches (in co-operation with NLR)
developing analytical methods for crash investigation, particularly in-flight break-up (in co-operation with
Cranfield)
theoretical prediction methods for cockpit work load and the relation with accidents.
Concept and preliminary design
preliminary design of a four-seater version of the Eaglet (in co-operation with Euro-Enaer)
concept studies of the F-16 successor (in co-operation with Stork)
preliminary design of a turboprop version of the Extra-400 (EA-500, in co-operation with Extra GmBh)
concept studies of aerostatic HALE-vehicles (in co-operation with DASA)
concept studies of hydrogen aircraft (in co-operation with DASA)
design of a low-noise propeller for the Eaglet.

Helicopter aerodynamics, flight mechanics and aero elasticity
helicopter model wind tunnel measurements to determine the location and strength of "side edge vortices" (in
co-operation with NLR)
theoretical modeling of "side edge vortices" and the coinciding rotor-tail interference.
pilot models for helicopter simulations (in co-operation with NLR)
aero-mechanical modeling of helicopter for SIMONA
noise predictions of helicopters
aero-elastic research into a new bearing-less rotor (in co-operation with Eurocopter)
flutter calculations on the Masquito-helicopter (in co-operation with Masquito).

Spin-off
aero-elastic instabilities in future off-shore wind turbines (NOVEM, in co-operation with the Inst. for Wind
energy, Energy Research Center, Stork)
Simulation methods for very complex dynamic systems (off-shore wind turbines, robotic arms, etc.)
Development research condi-cyclone (= flow equipment for natural gas cleansing) (Stork and Shell).
82
CONTROL AND SIMULATION
III. CONTROL AND SIMULATION

Chair personnel
Professor
85378
Secretary
mw. B.M. Markus
82094
Scientific staff
dr.ir. S. Bennani
dr. F.D. Barb
dr. Q.P. Chu
ir. A.M. Kraeger
dr.ir. M. Mulder
dr.ir. M.M. van Paassen
dr.ir. J.C. van der Vaart
82674
85376
83586
82594
89471
85370
85314
85376
Technical support
C. Dam
P. Kraan
ing. H. Lindenburg
ing. A. Muis
R.A.W. van Olden
J. Quartel
A.M. Tak
ing. K. van Woerkom
82597
84090
85315
83515
85312
82597
87936
85311
Ph.D. students
ir. R.J.M. Bennis
ir. H.J. Damveld
ir. S. Juliana
ir. J.F.M. Lorga
ir. M. Roza
ir. F.J.P. Vormer
ir. G.M. Voorsluijs
ir. J.M.V. Oliveira
ir. M. Mulder
83586
89108
85867
85867
88277
89108
89099
89099
82594
Cessna Citation II Pilots

ir. H. Benedictus
ir. A.M. Kraeger
drs. T. van Netten
J. van Osnabrugge M.Sc.
G. Plooij
82094
82594
82094
82094
82094
85378
SIMONA
prof.dr.ir. J.H. de Leeuw
ir. O. Stroosma
81395
85344

The field of Control and Simulation (C&S) covers various scientific disciplines, such as systems and control theory,
cybernetic ergonomics, model forming and identification, signal theory, stochastic systems, real-time simulation
and software engineering. The curriculum and research has been divided into six streams. The before mentioned
disciplines are an essential factor in each of the streams (with the project leaders between brackets):
Graduation variants
I.
Mathematical model forming & identification (prof.dr.ir. J.A. Mulder, dr. Q.P. Chu)
Application of aerodynamic techniques, namely Computational Fluid Dynamics to describe the behavior of aeroelastics aircraft and spacecraft. Model identification based on dynamic response measurements on control signals
and in-flight disturbances.
II.
Real Time simulation & software engineering (dr.ir. M.M. van Paassen)
Flight simulation: the design and use of simulation systems and software techniques to produce real time
simulations.
III.
Aircraft control & handling qualities (dr.ir. S. Bennani)
Multivariable design of fly-by-wire control systems for automatic control and manual control based on various
control-theoretical approaches. Design requirements for proper cybernetic properties: Pilot-Induced Oscillations
(PIO)-free design of fly -by-wire control systems.
IV.
Human-machine systems & flight deck development

(dr.ir. M.M. van Paassen & dr.ir. M. Mulder)
The research of the interaction between man and aircraft or spacecraft, both is manual control tasks as monitoring
tasks, and the development of user-friendly interface solutions to enhance the interaction. The design and
evaluation of advanced 3D/4D tunnel displays and intelligent interfaces, Ecological interface design, cognitive
systems engineering.
V.
Avionics & air traffic management (dr.ir. M. Mulder)
The development of flight systems for flight navigation, flight control and flight management in current and future
air traffic management environments such as Free Flight. Sensor fusion, data acquisition and management. The
design, planning and use of airspace structure, both en-route and near airports. Development of low-noise, steep
and curved approach procedures for future airports.
83 83
VI.
Dynamics and control of spacecraft (dr. Q.P. Chu)
State estimation and control of satellites, rendezvous/docking, re-entry guidance and control, flexible motion of
large space stations, intelligent control system with Fuzzy Logic, non-linear Dynamic Inversion, dynamics of exotic
space systems such tethers, intelligent estimation techniques for sensor failure detection, isolation and data
fusion.
The chair can best be described as a group where theory goes hand in hand with the experiment and practice. The
theory is not the goal in itself, but remains a tool for the practical application in the above mentioned fields.
Examples of current projects are Airport 2020, Flight Deck 2020 and En-Route Airspace 2020, Guidance & Control
and Cockpit Human-Machine Interface of the ISS Crew Rescue Vehicle, Robust flight controls, and Airborne
Determination of Atmospheric Motion (ADAM). The chair is tuned to the ever important developments in the field of
future air traffic and air traffic management (or absence of air traffic management!).
Proof that practice plays a big role in the chair's activity lies in the fact that the chair has a number of advanced
experimental facilities at its disposal, namely a modern twin-engine jet aircraft, an advanced flight simulator, a
laboratory for research into human-machine interaction, and a flight instrumentation laboratory. The Cessna
Citation II laboratory airplane, operated by the chair has been converted into a flying lecture room for student
laboratory exercises and laboratory for the development of flight testing techniques and avionics, all under the
chair's management. The airplane is also used for the evaluation of new control and guidance concepts for future
generations of commercial aircraft.
An advanced flight simulator forms the hart of the SIMONA, an inter-facultary research institute of which the chair
is a major contributor. This important Delft institute is a product of one of the chair's initiatives. SIMONA is situated
is a custom-designed laboratory building adjacent to the faculty of Aerospace Engineering. The flight simulator
enables a wide variety of scientific research, such as handling qualities (HQ), pilot induced oscillations (PIO),
human vestibular and visual perception, advanced flight deck interfaces and 3D/4D cockpit displays, manned flight
simulation technology and real time software engineering of distributed and modular simulation systems.
1st and 2nd course year educational goals

The 1st and 2nd course year educational goals can be summarized as follows:
Getting students acquainted with state of the art control and systems theory, estimation and identification
theory, simulation technology and cybernetic ergonomics.
Presenting the students with the opportunity to test theoretical results in a practical environment by using
simplified laboratory experiments as well as professional advanced experimental facilities.
Teaching students to work together in a team and in projects. This can only be sustained with a high level of
project progress management and planning.
Training students in use of modern engineering tools, such as MATLAB, SIMULINK and computer languages
such as JAVA and C++, based on their own interest and insight.
Enabling students to gain experience with the use of divers computer systems, such as PCs, workstations and
extremely fast real-time computer systems such as dSPACE, based on their own interest and insight.
The guidance during the graduating phase of the second course year is comprised of project meetings, intensive
contact and co-operation with foreign and domestic laboratories, universities and industry.

Students of the chair receive a thorough theoretical and practical education to prepare them for the graduation
project in the second course year.
The first year program consists of:
Core courses, compulsory for all students.
Core courses, divided into Aviation and Space technology groups.
Elective courses, dependant on the area in which the student performs his or her graduation project.
Students who are interested and show an aptitude for flying aircraft are eligible for a limited number of flying
lessons.
Code
Course
CORE COURSES for all students (20 credits)

AE4-301
Aircraft Flight Control and Handling Qualities
(Including Practical AE4-301P)
AE4-304
Aircraft Responses to Atmospheric Turbulence
AE4-393
Avionics I
AE4-711
WI2 056LR
Systems Theory I
WM0324LR
CORE COURSES for Aeronautics students (8 credits)
AE4-360
Aerospace Human Factors
AE4-361
Flight Simulation (Including Practical)
84
Lectures
Credits
0/4/0/0
3
1
3
1
3
3
3
3
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
3
1
4
0/0/4/0
4/0/0/0
4/0/0/0
4/0/0/0
0/4/0/0
0/0/0/4
0/0/0/4
CORE COURSES for Space technology students (8 credits)

AE4-305
Spacecraft Attitude Control Systems Design
AE4-399
Dynamics and Control of Spacecraft and Space Systems
0/4/0/0
3
1
4
0/0/4/0

AE4-001
x
x
18
RECOMMENDED ELECTIVE COURSES PER STREAM (14 credits)

The following tables show that both aviation and space technology students have a core program that consists of
28 credits.
Students registered to the chair Control and Simulation are recommended to choose a stream program at the start
of the first course year, and register at one of the above mentioned project groups after choosing the graduation
project at the end of the first course year.
The recommended elective courses () for the first course year are presented in the tables below, depending on
the stream program. Core courses in the first course year curriculum are marked (C). The minimal number of
credits for elective units (courses, practicals or exercises) for both Aviation Technology as well as Space
Technology is 14. Therefore, many students choose to exceed the minimal required number of credits.
Code
Course

AE4-151
Numerical methods aircraft aerodynamics part I
AE4-212
Aircraft performance optimization
AE4-213
Rotorcraft mechanics
AE4-214
Aircraft propulsion, noise and pollutant emissions
AE4-294
Air traffic management
AE4-303
Robust flight control
(including practical AE4-303P)
AE4-305
Spacecraft attitude dynamics and control
AE4-360
Aerospace human factors
AE4-361
Flight simulation
AE4-394
Avionics II
AE4-399
Dynamics and control of spacecrafts and space syst.
AE4-S02
AE4-S12
AE4-S38
Manned Space Flight
AE4-S51
Electrical and Information systems in Space
Stream program
Lectures Credits I
II III IV V
2/2/0/0
4/0/0/0
0/4/0/0
0/0/4/0
2/2/0/0
0/0/4/0
3
3
3
3
3
31
0/4/0/0
31
0/0/0/4
31
0/0/0/4
0/0/0/4
0/0/4/0
4/0/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/0/2/2
0/4/0/0
3
2
4
3
3
3
3
Faculty of Information Technology and Systems

ET3-101
Control Systems I
IN4017TU
Multimodal Interfaces and Virtual Reality
IN4050TU
JAVA and Object-Oriented Design
SC4040
Filtering and Identification
SC4060
Model Predictive Control
SC4080
Knowledge Based Control Systems
SC4090
Optimization in System and Control
WI3 031
Non-linear Optimization
WI4 005TU Classical Analysis S.S. Wavelets
WI4 040
Opt. Control Theory and Practice
3/0/0/0
0/0/2/2
2/2/0/0
0/4/0/0
3/0/0/0
0/2/0/0
0/0/3/0
0/0/4/4
0/4/0/0
0/0/4/0
4
6
6
6
4
3
3
6
6
6
Faculty of Applied Physics

TN 2545
Systems and Ssignals
SC3010 TN Stochastic signal analysis
AP3531
Acoustic Imaging
4/4/0/0
0/0/2/2
2/2/0/0
6
4
6
Faculty of Design, Engineering and Production

WB2301
System Identification and Parameter Estimation
WB2306
Cybernetic Ergonomics
WB2404
Human-machine Systems
WB2407
Human Motion Control
WB2415
Robust Control
0/0/2/2
0/0/0/4
2/2/0/0
2/2/0/0
0/0/0/4
7
3
4
4
6
VI
85 85
2nd cour se year curriculum: the graduation project (ae5-300)

The entire second course year is dedicated to the graduation project (ae5-300). This is the year in which
knowledge is integrated and where there is a gain of more in-depth knowledge in the field of the graduation
project.
Examples of recent, current and future graduation projects in the six different stream programs (surf to
www.cs.lr.tudelft.nl) are:
Mathematical model forming & identification
Development of an aerodynamic model of the Crew Rescue Vehicle (CRV) for the International Space Station
(in co-operation with ESA/ESTEC)
Development of aero-elastic models for flight simulation and control system design (part of MOU with the
University of Minnesota, USA)
Development of ADAM, a modular and very accurate instrumentation system for flight tests
Detection of 'gravity waves' from the air, using inertia navigation and satellite navigation instead of linear
Kalman filter theory (SHELL)
Non-linear, adaptive Kalman filters and smoothers for orbital reconstruction with great accuracy
Software environment for real-time and post-flight flight test data analysis (PROCESS, Codex)
Real time simulation & software engineering
Distributed simulation of air traffic and air traffic control using flight simulators, aircraft and air traffic control
stations (in co-operation with Eurocontrol)
Design of modular and re-configurable flight simulation systems (SIMNED, Nederland)
Development of a distributed, modular software environment of a new generation for real-time simulations
with hardware components, software components and systems coupled via HLA (DUECA/DUSIME)
Distributed simulation of future the future air traffic environment Free Flight using STANS (in co-operation with
Eurocontrol)
Potential of advanced flight simulators (such as the SIMONA flight simulator) for the detection and prediction
of PIO (in co-operation with BOEING)
Mathematical modeling of human visual and vestibular motion perception, to improve the design and
implementation of simulator motion filters.
Flight control & handling qualities
Application of 'predictive control' for the final approach during wind-shear
Design of an automatic landing systems for large aircraft regarding multivariable robust control theory (in
European project REAL)
Criteria for 'PIO (Pilot Induced Oscillations) free' control systems, design of the accompanying control systems
(in European co-operation GARTEUR)
Method to calculate the 'worst case' for control systems caused by model errors and stochastic disruptions (in
European co-operation GARTEUR)
Design of task oriented' control systems for UAVs (unmanned helicopter)
Reconfigured control systems (in European university 'Aerospace Network')
Design of Fly-by-Wire control systems for the Cessna Citation laboratory aircraft (within the LIFTT consortium
with a.o. the Empire Test Pilot School, UK)
Man-Machine systems & flight deck developments
Mathematical modelling of human visual and vestibular motion perception, visual-vestibular interaction.
Visualization of time-information of (4th dimension) in 3D 'tunnel-in-the-sky' displays (in co-operation with the
Wright State University, USA)
Advanced cockpit crew interfaces for a Free Flight air traffic environment (Barco Avionics, B)
Development of a Cockpit Display of Traffic Information (CDTI) (in co-operation with Georgia Tech, USA and
Eurocontrol, F)
Displays and interfaces for future en-route tasks such as Station Keeping (in co-operation with Eurocontrol, F
and Georgia Tech, USA)
The design of a task-oriented control/display system for large civil aircraft.
Intelligent, adaptive cockpit interfaces
Pilot associate systems, i.e. development of an intelligent electronic pilot associate system.
Ecological design of interfaces (cockpit displays) for energy management (in co-operation with Wright State
University, USA)
Development and evaluation of the human-machine interface of an a Unmanned Aerial Vehicle (UAV) (in cooperation with FlyCam)
Haptic (force-feedback) interfaces for aircraft, automobiles and tele-operated UAVs.
Design and in -flight evaluation of a flight director for micro-g parabolic flights.
Avionics & Air Traffic Management
Development of a system architecture for future avionics systems (in co-operation with Barco avionics (B))
Applying artificial intelligence in early warning systems (co-operation with Georgia Tech (USA))
Modeling and integration of future onboard warning systems with intelligent agents (in a European
consortium)
Design and evaluation of collision avoidance and separation assurance flight systems (in co-operation with
Eurocontrol and NLR)
Development of a real-time 4-D approach planner based on genetic algorithms.
86
Evaluation of future operations like station keeping (self-separation) and advanced noise abatement
procedures such as the three-degree decelerated approach, continuous descent approach and others (in cooperation with Georgia Tech, and MIT (USA))
Dynamics and control of spacecraft
Development of a simulation tool for the Infrared Space Observatory (ISO) satellite (in co-operation with
ESA/ESTEC)
Development and simulation tools for space vehicles (X-38, ARD, Mass Express, DART, ATV, ISO),
(ESA/ESTEC)
Modeling and simulating a 'Star Tracker' optical head system
Design and development of improved control algorithms for the attitude stabilization of the DELFI micro
satellite
Design of an intelligent fuzzy logic attitude stabilizer for the ISO satellite (in co-operation with ESA/ESTEC)
Development of an experimental facility for 3D testing of satellite attitude stabilization and control systems
Design and development of a flush air-data system for large angles of attack using wind tunnel tests, CFD and
identification
Development and application of a fuzzy logic adaptive Kalman filter for the detection and isolation of faulty
sensors
Design of adaptive FL control with reinforcement learning for ATV (ESA/ESTEC)
Sliding mode approach with application for adaptive FL control for X-38 re-entry vehicle (ESA/ESTEC)
Regulators for aerospace vehicles by applying Non-linear Dynamic Inversion (X-38, ARD, Mass Express).
The graduation projects in the above overview are almost always performed in the context of a project, in close cooperation with other students, the scientific staff, and in many cases with universities, laboratories, institutes and
industry outside Delft University of Technology.
87 87
AEROSPACE MANAGEMENT AND ORGANISATION
IV.
Chair personnel
Professor
Prof.dr.ir. M.J.L. van Tooren
84794
Scientific staff
Ir. J.A. Melkert, BBA
85338
Secretary
L. Pijpaert
85911
Research areas and goals

Starting from an aerospace engineering BSc this MSc variant offers an engineering based Management and
Organisation Master program aimed at the aerospace industry. The graduate will be able to operate in an
environment where high-tech mixes with management and organisation issues. The educational program offers a
generic module in which elements like law, logistics, business marketing and economics are taught. Next to the
generic module students have to choose a specific engineering module. The modules offered are:
production
design
operations
maintenance
The obligatory internship and the thesis work will preferably be performed in industry or in close co-operation with
industry. The research within the chair focuses on subjects in which engineering knowledge is combined with
applied management and organisational theory. The research will be directed towards applications in industry.

In the first course year students have to make a switch in their approach of technical problems. In the BSc
program they developed a sound technical background. In the MSc program technical problems will be approached
form both a technical and a management and organisational point of view. In order to train this approach the
majority of courses (42 ECTS credits) in the 1st year of the MSc program is focussed on non-technical issues. The
remainder of the program (18 ECTS credits) is directed towards a deepening of the technical knowledge. Four
technical disciplines are offered from which the student has to choose one. This discipline will also be the focus of
the program in the second year.
1st course year program description

The 1st year lecture program can be characterised by a combination of lectures and exercises given in two
modules. The core courses can be found in a generic module. The courses taught in the generic module totalling 42
ECTS credits. They are centred on the areas of law, economics, business management, policy management and
logistics. The remainder of the 60 ECTS credits in the first year has to be chosen from a list of electives related to
on of four technical modules. The four technical modules offered are: production, design, operations and
maintenance. First a technical module has to be chosen. From the electives within this module courses with a total
value of 18 ECTS credits have to be chosen. The choice of the elective module, the composition of the list of
electives has to be discussed and agreed upon with the staff.
CORE COURSES (COMPULSORY)
GENERIC MODULE
Code
Course name
AE4-401
Project (Incl. Stress Exercise)
AE4-711
ID5131
Business Marketing for Engineers
IDE 511
Integral Aspects of Business Marketing
MOT 1610
From Business to Supply Chains
SPM1210
Admininistration and Business A
WI4 051TU
Introduction To Operations Research
WM0324LR
Ethics and Eng. in Aerospace Engineering
WM0517LR
Corporate Strategy
WM0605TU
Business Economics
WM0722TU
Introduction To Law
88
Lectures
0/0/X/X
4/0/0/0
0/0/0/4
0/0/2/0
0/0/2/0
4/4/0/0
2/2/0/0
0/4/0/0
0/0/2/0
2/2/0/0
0/4/0/0
Credits
4
3
2
2
5
9
4
3
3
4
3
ELECTIVE COURSES
PRODUCTION MODULE
Code
AE4-485
AE4-632
AE4-786
ID3101
IN4-005TU
WB5417
WB5420-03
WM0504TU
Course name
Manufacturing Engineering
Composites: Materials, Struct. and Prod. Processes
Sheet Metal Forming
Business Admin. of Production Development
Insdustrial Automization
Innovation of Manufacturing
Design of Production Systems
Industrial Organization A
Lectures
0/0/2/2
0/4/0/0
0/4/0/0
0/0/2/X
0/0/4/0
0/2/2/0
4/0/0/0
6/0/0/0
Credits
3
3
3
6
3
3
3
4
DESIGN MODULE
AE4-528
AE4-627
AE4-632
ET4-256
ID0401AE
IN3016P
TB9533
WM0501TU
WM0504TU
WM0506TU
WM0621TU
Computerized Structural Analysis

Structural Design and Airworthiness
Composites: Mat., Struct. and Prod. Processes
Reliability Engineerng
Engineering Design Processes
Product Modeling
Engineering Design Problem Formulation
Introduction to Business Administration
Starting of an Enterprise
Innovation Management
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/4/0/0
0/3/0/0
t.b.d.
0/0/0/3
X/X/0/0
0/4/0/0
6/0/0/0
t.b.d.
2/2/0/0
3
3
3
4
3
1
6
3
4
6
3
OPERATIONS MODULE
AE4-160
AE4-211
AE4-212
AE4-212P
AE4-214
AE4-294
AE4-485
EUR A4311
TB161 or
TB261
TB9152
TB9422
TB9423
TB9424
TB9427
Aerodyn. Design of Aircraft and Adv. Transp. Syst.

Exercise Aircraft Performance Optimization
Aircraft Propulsion, Noise and Pollutant Emissions
Aerospace Economics (Erasmus University)
Transport, Infrastructure and LogisticsTransport,
Infrastructure and Logistics 2
Strategic Planning for Airport Systems
Logistical Management: A Business Perspective
Supply Chains Eng., Analysis and Management
Though-life Eng. and. Man. of Trans. and Log. Syst.
Simulation of Logistic Systems
0/0/2/2
4/2/2/0
4/0/0/0
0/0/4/0
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/2/0/0
0/0/6/6
0/4/4/0
0/0/0/4
0/2/0/0
0/0/2/0
0/0/0/2
0/0/4/4
3
4
3
1
3
3
3
4
9
9
3
3
3
3
6
MAINTENANCE MODULE
AE4-485
AE4-490
AE4-496
AE4-632
AE4-729
ET4-256
TB9422
TB9423
TB9424
TB9427
Maintenance Management
Maintenance Engineering
Composites: Mat., Struct. and Prod. Processes
Fatigue in Structures and Materials
Reliability Engineering
Logistical Management: A Business Perspective
Supply Chains Eng., Analysis and Management
Though-life Eng. and. Man. of Trans. and Log. Syst.
0/0/2/2
0/4/0/0
0/0/4/0
0/4/0/0
0/0/4/0
0/3/0/0
0/2/0/0
0/0/2/0
0/0/0/2
0/0/4/4
3
3
3
3
3
4
3
3
3
6

The second year is focussed towards application of the knowledge gained in the previous year(s). Both the
internship and the graduation project will be used to confront the student with an engineering based approach of
(technical) problems where management and organisational issues will have to be taken into account. The second
year should prepare the graduate for a career in industry where technology is combined with management and
organisation.
2nd course year program description

The course program consists of an internship (18 ECTS) and an individual graduation project (42 ECTS). The
internship should preferably be performed in industry. Combination of internship and the graduation project is
possible. This will have to be discussed with the staff.
89 89
INDUSTRIAL ORGANIZATION
IV B. INDUSTRIAL ORGANIZATION
As from September 2003 on the Industrial Organization variant (prof. ir. H. Bikker) is no longer part of the M.Sc.
program in Aerospace Engineering. Interested students have to switch to the M.Sc. program in Mechanical
Engineering (Faculty OCP).
The discipline program Industrial Organization is part of the chair Industrial Engineering and Management.
Chair personnel
Professor
prof. ir. H. Bikker
82711
Scientific staff
Ir. R. Dekkers
Ir. B.R. Meijer
Ir. F.P.M. Sopers
Ir. H.P.M. Veeke
Ir. L.N.J. van der Velde
83153
86876
85343
82706
86580
Secretary
C.M.P. de Wilde
fax
Educational office
Mrs. Suzan D.W.M. van der Meer
Mrs. Dorothea J.W.M. Brouwer
Blok IV. 3rd floor
83152
83910
87428
83302

The lectures and exercises in the fourth course year are aimed at enhancing and broadening the basic study. The
objective, in short, are:
Gaining more in-depth knowledge of the engineering sciences in the field of the study.
Broadening of the insight in other relevant sciences fo the engineering practice.
Integration of knowledge based on various scientific areas.
Obtaining skills in the application of technical-scientific methods when analyzing managerial problems in a
wide range of research areas.
Gaining insight and experience in the corporate practice and relationship between theory and practice.
Gaining experience and comprehension regarding the context of the engineering profession and the exercise of
corporate profession.

Code
AE4-711
WB3417-03
WB5420-03
WB5428
WM0104WB
WM0324LR
WM0404TU
WM0504TU
WM0505TU
Course
Discrete Systems: Modeling, Proto., Sim. and Control
Developing Production Systems
Applied Systems Theory
Psychology of Organisation
Sociology of Techn., Labour and Organisation
Industrial Organisation A (incl. practical)
Industrial Organisation B (incl. obligatory practical)
Lecturer(s)
Van Drimmelen
Veeke a.o.
Meijer
Dekkers/ Van Till
Wiethoff
Sinke
Ravensteijn
Bikker/ Ten Haaf
Ten Haaf
Lectures
4/0/0/0
2/2/0/0
4/0/0/0
2/0/0/0
4/0/0/0
0/4/0/0
2/2/0/0
6/0/0/0
0/0/4/0
Credits
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
4
2
Lecturer(s)
Verbeek
Smit
Dietz
Lodewijks
Steinhoff
Tomiyama
Cooke
Van Maaren
Borovkova
Poot
Rijlaarsdam
Lectures
0/0/2/2
0/4/0/0
3/0/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/2/2/0
0/0/0/4
0/0/4/0
2/2/0/0
0/0/4/0
2/0/0/0
0/4/0/0
Credits
3
3
3
3
3
2
4
4
4
2
3
ELECTIVE COURSES (minimum of 13 credits)

Stream: Organization of production
Code
AE4-485
AE4-490
IN2041TU
WB3420-03
WB5417
WB5431
WI2 064
WI4 051TU
WI4 070TU
WM0610TU2
WM0722TU
Course
Maintenance Maintenance
Information Systems and Corporate Processes
Introduction Transport and Logistic Engineering
Innovation of manufacturing
Life Cycle Engineering
Decision Theory
Introduction to Operation Research
Digital Simulation A
Elementary Business Economics
Introduction to Law
Note: WM0610TU is part of WM0605TU Business economics of engineering- Dolfsma (4 credits)
90
INDUSTRIAL ORGANIZATION
Stream: Organisation of Design

Code
AE4-485
AE4-490
IN2041TU
IN2410
WB2306
WI2 064
WM0610TU3
WM0621
WM0722TU
Course
Maintenance Maintenance
Information Systems and Corporate Processes
Databases (including practical)
Cybernetic Ergonomy
Decision Theory
Introduction to Law
Lecurter(s)
Verbeek
Smit
Dietz
Ter Bekke
v.d. Helm a.o.
Cooke
Poot
Kleinknecht
Rijlaarsdam
Practicals and exercises in the workgroup of PTO

(WB0402-1-03, 2/2/6/6 or 6/6/2/2) incl. attending colloquia
Internship Business practical (WB0403-3)
Total amount of credits 4th year:
Lectures
0/0/2/2
0/4/0/0
3/0/0/0
0/0/4/0
0/0/0/4
0/0/4/0
2/0/0/0
0/0/0/2
0/4/0/0
Credits
3
3
3
5
3
4
2
3
3
8 credits
15 credits
63 credits

It is of great importance for the engineer to be able to creatively and openly apply the knowledge and learning of
his or her own discipline in different fields, to various problems as these might arise in the field of the study, the
business community and the society. The second course year objectives have been summarized as follows:
Learning skills to apply the obtained knowledge and learning to current problems.
Independently searching for new supplementary knowledge and specific information at scientific resources and
in the corporate practice.
Learning to take ones own point of view in complex research, in close agreement with experts of various
disciplines.
Practicing the oral and written presentation of as necessary in tuning the theory and practice, alongside the
input of the experts of various levels and disciplines.
The presentation and defense of ones own work.

The literature study as an assignment is primarily focused on and the analysis of knowledge resources and
information , and structuring and reporting the students work.
The graduation project is primarily focused on the analysis of a problem, often under difficult conditions regarding
available information and finding and working out solutions. Therefore, both the basis of the analysis and the
design of the solution, as well as the presentation and defense in the scientific and business community require
extra attention.
the chair encourages the writing of a publication on the literature research or practical research in a renowned
scientific magazine, hereby receiving an extra possiblity to take responisbility fo his or her own work and
presenting the findings in a wide range of peers.
2nd course year curriculum: the graduation project (AE5-400B)

Literature thesis including preliminary research (WB0403-4)
Preparing for the graduation project including test case (WB0403-1) and
Interim examination (WB0403-2)
Graduation project AE5-400B
Doctoral colloquium and final discussion with the graduation board
9 credits
4 credits
42 credits
2 credits
57 credits
Gradution projects
Developing Quick-scan methods to improve production by prioritizing.

Developing new organizational structures in manufacturing, assembly and distribution.
Optimizing processes for service and technical support.
Improving processes in the course of the product desing and product preparation.
Optimizing the product structuring, product documentation and configuration management.
Introduction of new control concepts and information technology for the primary corporate processes.
Developing methods and means for quality control, planning and cost management in various managerial
sistuations.
Developing technology-scan methods for the innovation of manufacturing and assembly.
Note: WM0610TU is part of WM0605TU Business economics of engineering- Dolfsma (4 credits)
91 91
AEROSPACE STRUCTURES
V. AEROSPACE STRUCTURES
Chair personnel
professor
vacancy
prof.dr.ir. A. van Keulen (Mon)
85302
84185
Scientific staff
ir. T.J. van Baten (acting chair)
ir. J.M.A.M Hol
ir. E.L. Jansen
ir. J. de Vries
ir. J.J. Wijker (We)
ir. G.N. Saunders-Smits
prof.dr.A. Rothwell
81580
85379
82592
86306
81382
85369
82056
Ph.D. students
ir. J. Buursink
ir. K. Vervenne
ir. P. Tiso
ir. T.C. Wittenberg
88288
82069
82069
87308
Secretary
mw A. van Lienden-Datema
fax
85381
85337
Technical support
Th. Douma
L.R.F. Kram
J.J. Staat
ing. H.A.P. Cremer
82019
87332
85334
85177
Post-doc
Dr. Y. Goldfeld

The research area of design, optimization and analysis of lightweight structures demands a thorough knowledge of
the typical theory of thin-walled structures as well as knowledge of modern materials and production methods.
Therefore research is carried out in natural cooperation with the groups of aerospace materials and Design and
Production of Composite Structures. Research activities focus on the use and development of tools to design and
optimize aerospace (composite) structures as well as to analyze their behavior under different types of loading
conditions. The current challenge is to broaden existing research topics on optimization, buckling and vibrations
with respect to the increasing use of composite and hybrid materials and practical application in industry.
Students finishing the masters program will have knowledge of the mechanics of thin-walled/light-weight
structures, the requirements associated with these structures and the influence of the material properties on the
structural behavior..
The Master of Science in aerospace structures understands the design principles and is capable of analyzing
structures. He/she will be able to contribute independently to the further development of design tools and analysis
methods, based on scientific insight.

To gain more in-depth knowledge in the fields of thin-walled structures, numerical calculation methods and the
mathematical theories on which these are based. This knowledge constitutes the foundation for the research of the
graduation project in the 2nd course year.

Code
Course
AE4-522
Aircraft Structural Analysis III
AE4-524
Thermal Loading of structures
AE4-528
AE4-530
Special Topics in Vibration and Buckling
AE4-537
AE4-711
WB1405A
Stability of Thin-walled Structures I
WM0324LR
Lectures
4/0/0/0
0/4/0/0
2/2/0/0
0/0/0/4
0/2/2/0
4/0/0/0
0/0/4/2
0/4/0/0
Credits
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
3
RECOMMENDED ELECTIVE COURSES

Code
Course
AE4-535 I+II
Structural Optimization
AE4-900
Continuum Mechanics
AE4-684
Fiber-reinforced Materials in Aerospace Structures
AE4-S12
AE4-729
Fatigue of Structures and Materials
WI4 007TU
WI4 014TU
Numerical analysis CII + exercise
WI4 150TU
WI4 008TU
Complex Analysis
Lectures
2/2/2/2
0/0/4/0
0/0/0/4
0/0/2/2
0/0/4/0
0/0/2/2
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/0
2/2/0/0
Credits
6
4.5
3
3
3
4
4.5
2
4
92
INTERNSHIP
AE4-001
18 credits

The student is able to apply previously required skills and experiences to the field of study in a larger research- or
design-project. The research is preferably done in conjunction with current chair research programs.
The student is able to offer an acceptable solution to a design or analyze problem through scientific approach.
The student is able to apply the accepted methods (software etc.) to the field of study and/or be able to shape up
the methods.
The student is able to carry out scientific research (supervised) independently.

The graduation project (AE4-500) consists of 42 credits, divided into:
Preparatory graduation research
Graduation project
Preparation and final discussion with the graduation board
Total
17
40
3
60
credits
credits
credits
credits
The assignment of the graduation project is formulated, taking into account the following guidelines:
The preparatory graduation research usually consists of a literature study and the making of a planning for the
intended final thesis.
The graduation project often contains the following phases:
1. Analysis of the technical-scientific problem. Translation of the technical-scientific problem to a physical
problem.
2. Modeling of the physical problem. Translation of the physical problem to a mathematical model and/or a
numerical-mathematical model.
3. Validation of the developed model and the software developed for that purpose.
4. Interpretation of / discussion about the obtained results.
5. Formulation of conclusions and recommendations.
The graduation project is concluded by a graduation report, preferably written in English. Graduate students are
encouraged to perform their research in conjunction with current chair research programs.
Survey of research program

The research program of the group concentrates on topics for which the permanent staff has acquired an
international reputation and in which fundamental and strategic research of high quality can be carried out. New
challenging activities are found in developing methods for design and optimization of structures in metals, fiber
metal laminates and composites.
Characteristic of the research program is further the attempt to combine expertise in the field of the subject matter
with the use of the advanced tools of information science in order to develop a computerized simulation
environment. This makes an optimal solution of the problem investigated possible.
In the following the major research topics are summarized.
Structural Design and Optimization
Development of design and optimization procedures for specific structural design problems
Theoretical optimization including multi-level procedures and optimization of structural shape and layout
Stability and Vibrations of Imperfect -Composite - Shells
Theoretical and numerical studies of the collapse behavior of imperfect composite shells under combined
loading
Development of an International Imperfection Data Bank and DISDECO (Delft Interactive Shell DEsign COde)
Theoretical and numerical studies of the non-linear vibration behaviour of shell structures
Theoretical and numerical studies of the dynamic buckling behavior of shell structures, FE approaches
Thermal Loading of Structures
Numerical (FEM) modeling of non-linear transient thermo-structural behavior of space re-entry structures
Development of thermal test facility and combined experimental/numerical verification of thermo-structural

design problems
93 93
DESIGN AND PRODUCTION OF COMPOSITE STRUCTURES
VI. DESIGN AND PRODUCTION OF COMPOSITE STRUCTURES

Chair personnel
Professors
prof. dr. ir. Th. de Jong
prof. ir. A. Beukers
87587
85144
Scientific staff
dr. ir. O.K. Bergsma
dr. ir. H.E.N. Bersee
dr. ir. C.J.A.R. Vermeeren
ir. J. Sinke (VM)
85135
88175
85160
85137
Ph.D. students
ir. L. Krakers (SIL)
ir. S. Koussious
ir. R. Oosterom
ir. B. Veldman
ir. P. Lisandrin (SIL)
ir. R.P.l. Nijsen
ir. K. van Rijswijk
ir. D. Stavrov
ir. V. van Tooren-Antonelli
S. Joncas M.Sc
G.F. Nino Martinez M.Sc
Ir. P. Parlevliet
Ir. D. Vlasveld
N.H. An M.Sc
85304
88164
89489
88233
87317
84015
88981
88233
85165
Secretary
mrs. L. Vollmer
fax
85340
81151
CLC Researchers and Lecturers

ir. W.D. Brouwer
ir. M.D. Gan
ir. P.A.J. de Haan
ir. M. Labordus
ir. E Tromp
82463
88306
85165
88021
86404
Post-doc. students
dr.ir. W. Swieszkowski
89489

Design and Production of Composite Structures, together with Aerospace Structures and Aerospace Materials, are
the three chairs that form the hart of the education, research and development of modern light-weight structures
within the faculty of Aerospace Engineering. Within this coalition, the research is focused on the development of
design and analysis methods, the development and optimization of high-grade materials and structures and their
manufacturability.
When looking at the staff, the tradition and the development of knowledge, the chair can best be seen as the group
concerned with realization of fiber-reinforced polymer products and structures. Modeling and simulation techniques
for manufacturing processes, verified by feasible mechanical behavior and production cost are some of the chairs
most important tools. The chair has a strong application-oriented and knowledge-driven approach.
To give the research a realistic and ambitious boost, there is a continuing search for co-operation with the industry.
The chair has chosen an integral approach to her research. The material and structure laboratory is hereto divided
into specific, partly overlapping and close working research groups. These groups are primarily focused on metallic
of fiber-reinforced structures. The laboratory, an 'academic workshop' is well equipped with complete and modern
facilities, including extensive computing facilities.
An important activity is the application of the developed knowledge in short-term developments of new high-quality
products, simulation and manufacturing processes. The Center for Light-weight Structures (CLC), a co-operation
between the faculty of Aerospace Engineering and TNO, plays a key role in these applications. A number of CLC
staff members play an important role in the education and long-term research of the chair of Design and
Production of Composite Structures.
The
chair's field of study consists of the following areas:

conceptual design and development of composite products and the necessary manufacturing techniques
the development of simulation and computer methods for design, analysis and manufacturing techniques
developing advanced structures, particularly using the translation of the mechanical and physical requirements
into material properties
The chair's study program is aimed at the development of knowledge and skills in the above areas. The purpose of
the program is to train an engineer capable of solving problems and creating solutions relevant to the realization
and manufacturability of composite products and structures.
The chair's field of study is inextricably connected to the design, selection and application of advanced materials.
This is why the chair combines a lot of her education and research with the chairs "Aerospace Materials" and
"Aerospace Structures".
The program must produce an engineer that meets the following final objectives:
Knowledge in the field of conceptual designing, manufacturing techniques and choice of materials
94
The ability to apply the above knowledge to definite problems

Proven skills in analyzing and synthesizing problems related to the field of study
Skills in communicating in a team
Motivating decisions
Skills in presenting the work written and oral (graduation project and presentation)
The ability to bear responsibility for ones own work (defense of the graduation project).
Graduation program profile

The program is aimed at the development of knowledge and skills related to the designing and manufacturing of
new products and structures, arriving at a choice of material. The graduation phase is primarily aimed at
developing independence combined with creatively solving the defined problems. The analysis and synthesis as
well as the argumentation of choices made in this process are of great importance.

The fourth course year offers a series of core and elective courses that is considered necessary to gain more indepth and broader knowledge of the chairs field of study. The set of courses also aims to work up to a practical
finalization of the study program, embodied by the graduation project (see below).
The larger part of the offered courses and exercises is compulsory; the remainder can be used to specialize in the
mathematical oriented program or the design oriented program. Students are allowed to deviate from the choice of
elective courses, in agreement with the graduation professor (chair holder).

The chair's set of courses covers the before mentioned fields of study. The compulsory courses are primarily
focused on design, materials and manufacturing. The elective courses are divided into two set: one set which
aimed at the mathematical/numerical side of the manufacturing process, and another which focuses on the
application of designing and manufacturing techniques. Students are allowed to deviate from the choice of elective
courses, in agreement with the chair holder.
Code
Course
AE4-485
AE4-496
AE4-627
AE4-632
Composites: Materials, Structures and Production
Processes
AE4-684
Fiber-reinforced Materials in Aerospace Structures
AE4-786
Sheet Metal Forming
AE4-729
Fatique in Structures of Materials
AE4-711
ST2472
Polymer Science
WM0324LR
AE4-628
Design of Composite Aircraft Structures
Lectures
0/0/2/2
0/0/4/0
0/0/2/2
0/4/0/0
Credits
3
3
3
3
0/0/0/4
0/4/0/0
0/0/4/0
4/0/0/0
0/0/0/4
0/4/0/0
0/0/2/2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1st period
1st period
1
1
ELECTIVE COURSES (7 credits)

Mathematical/numercal oriented program
AE4-528
AE4-737
Thermal Control
IN4 005TU
Industrial Automization (including practical)
WB1405A
WB2207
Control Techniques
WI4 008TU
Complex Analysis
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/0
0/0/3/0
0/0/4/2
0/6/0/0
2/2/0/0
3
3
3
4
4
4
Manufacturing/design oriented program

AE4-535 I+II
AE4-537
AE4-737
Thermal Control
ET4-256
IN3 016P
Product Modeling (including practical)
MK5291
Non-destructive Investigation
AE4-490
2/2/2/2
0/2/2/0
0/0/2/0
0/3/0/0
0/0/0/3
t.b.d.
0/4/0/0
6
3
3
4
1
3
3
EXERCISES (2 credits)
AE4-051
AE4-652

AE4-001
Stiffness Design Exercise

Strength Design Exercise
18
95 95

The graduation project is aimed at applying the gained knowledge and skills to the areas of conceptual design,
manufacturing and the choice and forming of material. The emphasis lies on the development of independence, in
combination with creatively solving the given problem. The analysis and synthesis, as well as the argumentation of
the decisions made over the course of the project are of great importance.
The graduation project is reviewed based on the following criteria:
independence
analytical and synthesizing abilities
selection of solution based on arguments
written and oral reporting
defending the graduation report
the preparatory publication

The 2nd course year is reserved for the graduation project AE5-600. This project is divided into two parts:
preparatory graduation research (approx. 3 months) and the graduation project (approx. 7 months). The
graduation project includes the preparation of a publication based on the graduation project. The estimated time
span for this preparation is two weeks.
Graduation projects
The graduation project is an assignment in the chair's research area, preferably connecting to the long-term
research of the chair or to project carried out in co-operation with the industry. The graduation project can
generally be described by one or more of the following research areas:
product development (in co-operation with a company)
process development (in co-operation with a company)
process simulation
process optimization
new concepts for products, structures and processes
research projects, in co-operation with the horizontal chairs, such as Inflatable structures, Re-entry vehicles
and new flight configurations (Blended Wing Body Configurations and Prandtl Planes).
The above themes can be defined separately for aviation purposes, space purposes and other transportation
sectors.
96
AEROSPACE MATERIALS
VII. AEROSPACE MATERIALS

Chair personnel
Professors
Vacancy
Secretary
Mrs. G.J.M. van der Windt-Krse
fax
Scientific staff
ir. J.Sinke (acting chairholder)
ir. T.J. van Baten
dr.ir. T.J. de Vries (TU/EADS)
ir. J.L.C.G. de Kanter
ir. A.W.H. Klomp
ir. J.J. Homan
ir. A. Kwakernaak (HI)
ir. J.W. Gunnink (FMLC)
ir. R. Alderliesten (TU/FMLC)
ir. P. Hooijmeijer (TU/FMLC)
85137
81580
89558
84186
85134
88230
85253
83611 / 2514751
81593 / 2514745
85492 / 2514746
Ph.D. students
Ir. S. Vesco
ir. M. Hagenbeek
ir. J.J.M. de Rijck
ir H.J.M. Woerden
ir. P. van Nieuwkoop
ir. B. Vermeulen
88672
82625
86279
86279
88378
89748
Technical Support
ing. B.A. Grashof, chief lab.
ing. N.H. Jalving
M.J.F. Badoux
S.C.H. van Meer
F.G.C. Oostrum
C.G. Paalvast
J.H. Weerheim
ing. D.U.W. Krul
89617
81151
82083
88454
86397
85136
86700
86396
86395
85164

The program is aimed at product development in relation to the development, research and application of
advanced materials in lightweight structures. The material properties are closely related to the manufacturing
techniques, design concepts and analytical/numerical calculations. In general the projects are design oriented:
from a problem analysis, via concept solutions, designs, calculations, production of components, and testing in the
laboratory to the analysis of the obtained results.
Lightweight structures in general are assembled with a large variety of materials. The most important ones are
lightweight metals, fiber-reinforced polymers and fiber-metal laminates. The various materials have their own
specific methods for manufacturing of parts. One important aspect is the method and technique used for joining
the parts during assembly. The Adhesion Institute, related to the Chair of Aerospace Materials, is performing
research on adhesive bonding, coatings and their applications. Other researches of joining, within the Chair are
the study of riveted and welded joints. To tests samples, components and products, the Chair uses the extensive
manufacturing and testing facilities of the Structures and Materials Laboratory.
A research/student project can have either a designing character or a more theoretical character, depending on the
strategy of the Chair and the wishes of the student.
The chair uses a strong application-oriented approach. Input from the transport related companies like Boeing,
Airbus, EADS, Fokker Aerostructures, USAF, DAF, Corus, etc., is essential to steer the research in the right
direction and to ensure that the obtained results will be applied in the industry. The Chair co-operates directly with
the industry, as well as with related institutes: the Adhesive Institute (AI) for adhesive bonding technology, and
the Fiber Metal Laminates Center of Competence (FMLC), for technology in the field of fiber-metal laminates.
The graduation program focuses on the following final objectives:
1. The engineer must have a thorough understanding into the various fundamental and application-oriented
material properties that play a role in the design of lightweight structures. The engineer must have knowledge
about the properties of various primary material groups (metal alloys, like aluminium and titanium alloys,
composites, fiber/metal laminates).
2. The engineer must be capable of engineering the relevant functions and damage tolerance of a lightweight
structure, based on material properties, joining techniques, design concepts and methods of inspection
(including Non-Destructive Investigation).
3. The engineer must be capable of recognizing scientific material problems in advanced structures (such as
fatigue and corrosion), and be able to present his or her own improvements.
4. The engineer must possess knowledge regarding material and structure testing methods, and must be able to
independently set up test programs designed to produce answers to the questions/problems involved.
5. The engineer must be able to create new products and structures by inte grating knowledge of materials,
manufacturing processes, joining techniques, and design concepts.
6. The engineer must have good communicating skills (oral and reporting) in an industrial, application-oriented
environment.
7. The engineer must be aware of the society-related aspects of a product, such as environmental tax and safety,
and must have the ability to incorporate these aspects into the design.
97 97
AEROSPACE MATERIALS

The first year of the curriculum is aimed at gaining more in-depth knowledge needed to design products and to
solve practical problems relating to the working or research area as described above. The students will acquire
knowledge in the fields of structural design, material technology, manufacturing technology, joining techniques and
the application and life cycle of products.

The obligatory or core courses in the first year consists of a balanced mix of courses related to design, material
related courses and production related courses. In addition, there is special attention to sustainable development
and ethics of technology.
Code
AE4-485
AE4-496
AE4-627
AE4-632
AE4-684
AE4-711
AE4-729
AE4-731
AE4-736
AE4-786
WM0324LR
Course
Composites: Materials, Structures and Production Processes
Fiber Reinforced Materials in Aerospace Structures
Fatigue of Structures and Mate rials
Aerospace Materials Special Topics
Introduction to the Technique of Measuring
Sheet Metal Forming
Lectures
0/0/2/2
0/0/4/0
0/0/2/2
0/4/0/0
0/0/0/4
4/0/0/0
0/0/4/0
0/0/0/4
0/2/0/0
0/4/0/0
0/4/0/0
Credits
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
ELECTIVE COURSES (9 credit points)

The selection of the elective courses (for at least 9 credit points) has to be discussed and approved by the chair
holder.
Code
WB1405A
AE4-535 I + II
AE4-537
AE4-737
AE4-S02
AE4-S12
AE4-S38
ET4-256
IN4005TU
MK6261TU
ST2472
MK3421
WB1406
AE4-490
Course
Stability of Thin-Walled Structures
Thermal Control
Manned Space Flight
Industrial Automation (Including Exercise)
Fracture Mechanics
Polymer Science
Transport Phenomena in Material Processing
Exp. Stress and Vibration Investigation
Lectures
0/0/4/2
2/2/2/2
0/2/2/0
0/0/2/0
4/0/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/0/2/2
0/3/0/0
0/0/4/0
t.b.d.
0/0/0/4
4/0/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/4/0/0
Credits
3
6
3
3
3
3
3
4
3
3
3
4.5
3
3
EXERCISES (1 credit point)

AE4-051
INTERNSHIP (18 credit points)

AE4-001
12 weeks + 1 week reporting
18
2nd course year educational objectives

The second year of the curriculum completes the development of an independent engineer who combines
knowledge, learning and experience in the creation of new processes, products or services. The final part is
performed in a realistic environment and projects in co-operation with staff members, laboratory staff, fellow
students, and (in many cases) the industry.
The Structures and Materials Laboratory is well equipped with computing facilities, manufacturing facilities and
testing equipment, which are necessary to perform research projects. Many research projects are co-operations
between the university, the industry and scientific institutes. As stated before, a research project can have a design
character, a more theoretical character, or an experimental character, depending on the strategy of the Chair and
the wishes and capabilities of the student.
Graduation (Master) thesis requirements

The thesis must contain the following:
1. Definition and description of the problem and various fundamental solutions (concepts) to the problem
definition
98
AEROSPACE MATERIALS
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A review of available literature relevant to the problem

An accurate description of the test and/or calculation programs, including the used models/input data, tested
materials and testing methods
A detailed description of the product design (selected concept), results and measurements
A thorough analysis, i.e. mechanical and material-scientific, of the obtained results
Motivated conclusions with a reference to the problem definition and design specifications
A thesis written in English is highly recommended.

The entire second course year is dedicated to the graduation research (code AE5-700). The research is divided into
the preparatory research (2 to 4 months) and the graduation project (6 to 8 months).
The graduation project serves to train creative and independent engineers. Students perform a project (with
academic freedom) which is representative for the engineering practice (multidisciplinary).
Graduation projects
In the list below a selection of current and past research projects is given which are illustrative for the research
projects within the Chair of Aerospace Materials.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
The re-entry vehicle DART.

Life span monitoring of helicopters for the Royal Dutch Air Force
Smart materials in the Joint Strike Fighter.
The Airbus A380 fuselage, e.g. designing the pressure bulkhead of the A380.
Developing design tools for structures, such as fatigue, residual strength, impact, corrosion
Developing new manufacturing techniques in the field of sheet-metal forming and joining techniques for
assembly (a.o. in co-operation with Fokker Aerostructures).
Developing new repair techniques for Airbus, Boeing and the transport aircraft of the US Air Force
Developing new concepts for freight floors and liners for airlines in co-operation with Airbus
Heat loading of spacecraft materials and structures in co-operation with Fokker Space and ESTEC
Recycling techniques and life cycle analysis for composite and fiber-metal laminates
Modeling crack initiation and fracture growth of riveted joints (a.o. in co-operation with the USAF Air Force Lab
Wright Patterson)
Fire-resistance of aircraft in co-operation with European laboratories and industry
Developing new NDI techniques for quality maintenance and inspection
Bonded structures including designing, pre-treating and new adhesive bonding systems (in co-operation with
the Adhesive Institute), i.e. for the Joint Strike Fighter
Developing new testing techniques, e.g. large shear/compression setups for fuselage panels and very high
velocity impact.
New materials for trucks (in co-operation with DAF and Corus)
Development of design rules for off-shore structures
99 99
ASTRODYNAMICS AND SATELLITE SYSTEMS
VIII. ASTRODYNAMICS AND SATELLITE SYSTEMS

Chair personnel
Professors
Prof.ir. B.A.C. Ambrosius
prof.ir. K.F. Wakker
85173
82065
Secretary
Mrs. C.C. Verbarendse
fax
82072
85322
Scientific staff
ir. A. Kamp
ir. M.C. Naeije
ir. R. Noomen
H.J.D. Piersma
dr.ir. P.N.A.M. Visser
dr. L.L.A. Vermeersen
85172
83831
85377
85367
82595
88272
Ph.D. students
J.I. Andres de la Fuente
R.M. Fernandes. M.Sc.
ir. S. Goossens
ir. R. Kroes
Mrs. ir. S. Matheussen
R.E.M. Riva, M.Sc.
85163
82043
86221
85217
86621
85870

Within the Section Astrodynamics and Satellite Systems (AS), education and research is focused on (applied) space
technology. This covers subjects such as astrodynamics, rocket motion and re-entry, satellite orbit calculations
from observations, navigation in space, interplanetary orbits, mission analysis, spacecraft system aspects,
measurement systems on board satellites, and the processing of measurements acquired from, through and by
satellites. The main emphasis is on very precise orbital calculations and the use of satellite observations for socalled earth-oriented space research. This research covers the earth's rotation, the movement of the earth's crust,
modeling the earth's gravitational field, tidal motion, large-scale ocean flows and sea-level rise, and more.
The study program has a technical, physical, electronic and mathematical nature, covering various aspects of
satellite systems and measuring equipment, both earth-based and on board of satellites. A major topic is the
development and use of efficient computation methods and computer systems to facilitate large-scale data
processing. During their graduation project, students often participate in research programs that the chair carries
out in co-operation with other (national and international) institutes. Students also have the possibility to graduate
on subjects with a more design-oriented nature. This is usually done in co-operation with the chair of System
Integration design & Analysis of Space Systems.
The study program is aimed at students who are interested in space technology in the broadest sense of the word.
The goal is to teach students engineering and research skills by confronting them with problems of an important
specific part of space technology (astrodynamics), as well as by developing more general technical, physical,
mathematical and analytical insight in space technology problems. The study program also aims to provide insight
into and to raise interest for the scientific and societal applications of astrodynamics in other research areas (Earthoriented space research). On the one hand, the program offers excellent career opportunities at institutes and
organizations concerned with space technology and space exploration. On the other hand, the acquired knowledge
and in particular the experience of working in project teams in international research programs, provides a
thorough basis for a career outside the field of space technology.

The first course year curriculum is aimed at gaining more in-depth knowledge in the following fields: motion of
rockets and spacecraft, satellite technology and the application of satellites for scientific research. This knowledge
forms the basis for the graduation project in the fifth course year. The curriculum consists of a series of core
courses and exercises to be followed by all students in this graduation program. This series is supplemented by
various elective courses, chosen in agreement with the chair holder. The composition depends on the choice
between one of the two graduation variants. These are cited as the mathematics/physics-oriented program, aimed
primarily at the problems regarding (precise) satellite orbits and data analysis, and the design-oriented program
focused on mission analysis and systems.
100

MP = mathematical/physical oriented program, D = design orientated program, C. = Credits
x = compulsory, o = elective (in agreement with prof.ir. Ambrosius).
Code
Course
COURSES (41 credits)
AE4-143
AE4-145
AE4-305
Spacecraft Attitude Dyn. and Control
AE4-537
AE4-711
AE4-737
Thermal Control
AE4-805
Astronomy
AE4-870
Rocket Motion
AE4-873 I+II Astrodynamics I + II
AE4-875
Precise Orbit Determination of Satellites
AE4-876
Earth-orientated Space Research
AE4-877
Geophysical Applic. of Sat. Measurements
AE4-S01
Thermal Rocket Prop. Syst. An. & Design
AE4-S02
AE4-S12
AE4-S38
Manned Space Flight
AE4-S51
Electrical and Info. Systems in Space
GE2122
Physical Geodesy
GE4542
Satellite Positioning (incl. practical)
AP3071G
Advanced Elctrodynamics
TN4560TU
Signals and Systems
WI2 056LR
Systems Theory
WI4 006TU
Special Functions
WI4 007TU
WI4 014TU
Numerical analysis C2
WI4 150TU
Partial differential equations 2
WM0324LR
Ethics Eng. for Aerospace Engineering
EXERCISES (1 credit)
AE4-875P
Exercise Earth-orientated space res.
Lecturer(s)
Lectures C.
MP
Walpot
Ivanov
Chu
Wijker
Van Drimmelen
Van Baten
Israel
Ambrosius
Wakker
Visser
Naeije/Vermeersen
Vermeersen
Zandbergen
Jongkind
Hamann
Ockels
Jongkind
Klees/Schrama
Van der Marel
Blanter
Herweijer
Stoorvogel
De Bruin
Meijer
Van Kan
Van Horssen
Sinke
2/2/0/0
4/0/0/0
0/4/0/0
0/2/2/0
4/0/0/0
0/0/2/0
0/0/2/0
0/4/0/0
2/2/2/2
4/0/0/0
0/0/6/0
0/0/0/4
0/0/2/2
4/0/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/0/2/2
0/4/0/0
0/0/0/6
8/0/0/0
2/2/0/0
0/5/0/0
4/0/0/0
4/0/0/0
0/0/2/2
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/0
0/4/0/0
3
3
4
3
3
3
2
3
6
3
4
3
3
4
3
3
3
4
5
6
4
3
6
4
4.5
2
3
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
o
o
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
o
o
o
x
x
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
Visser
0/0/2/2

AE4-001
18
Preferably the internship should take place at an institute, company or organization that is active in or has
experience with one or more of the chair's fields of interest. It is highly recommended to perform the internship at
a foreign institute, company or organization. The student's initiative in finding an internship is encouraged. In some
cases, the chair can mediate to find an internship at one of the institutes that co-operates with the chair.
Occasionally the internship can be the stating point for the graduation project.

The second course year is aimed at the application of the knowledge acquired in the preceding years of study. This
is embodied in the form of an independent research project, defined in consultation with the chairholder. The
emphasis is on developing a technical/scientific working attitude, activating analytical skills and mobilizing creative
capacities to solve the posed problem by performing independent research. The assessment of the graduation
project is done according to the following criteria: depth, independence, analytical ability, technical/scientific
argumentation, oral and written defense of the graduation project report. The chair encourages the student to
prepare an external publication about the research.
2nd course year curriculum: the graduation project (ae5-800)

The entire second course year is reserved for the graduation project ae5-800. The graduation research is divided
into a preparatory assignment (2 months) and a graduation project (8 months). When choosing the
mathematics/physics-oriented program in the first course year, the graduation project should preferably connect
with the chair's current research program. Design-oriented projects are usually chosen in consultation/collaboration
with the chair of System Integration Design & Analysis of Space Systems. In general, when choosing a topic, it
will be attempted to find a balance between the student's personal preferences and the chair's current research
priorities, while also taking into account the possibilities of internal and external supervision. The project must have
a certain level of depth and may require the student to follow additional education. The total study workload of the
education and research is equal to 42 credits.
101
101
Graduation projects
Below are examples of recent graduation projects. The projects have been divided into a number of topics to
enhance the broad spectrum of subjects.
Processing of satellite observations
GPS as a meteorological tool; towards operational real-time GPS water vapor estimation
Spectral analysis of altimeter data
Estimating station coordinates based on SLR data and deriving station motions based on SLR and GPS
coordinate network solutions
Earth rotation driven by atmospheric pressure and wind
The effect of oceanic loading on station positions
Satellite remote sensing data, ocean models and data assimilation for the study of El Nio
The computation of crustal deformations from series of network solutions
Exploring the limits of GPS for geo-kinematic applications
Global ocean tide modeling using satellite altimetry

Earth satellite orbits
Influence of the attitude miss-modeling of eclipsing GPS satellites
Orbits of GPS satellites determined from SLR observations
Modeling of atmospheric drag acting on geodetic satellites
Irregularities in GPS orbits
Orbit behavior of geo-stationary satellites
Non conservative forces acting on LAGEOS-1 and LAGEOS-2
Non dynamic orbit improvement techniques for altimeter satellites
Orbit determination from GPS SST observations
Surface force modeling for Envisat and GFO
Orbit decay computation and impact point prediction using NORAD elements
Operational estimation and prediction of satellite orbits for near real-time use
Development of an ERS orbit error assessment tool

Interplanetary orbits
Interplanetary multiple swing-by gravity assist missions
Lunar observation and direct lunar surface analysis through orbiting tethers
Search for eternally sunlit areas at the lunar south pole from Clementine data
Fuzzy boundaries in interplanetary trajectories
Long-term low lunar orbit perturbations due to the selenopotential and solar radiation pressure
The optimization of interplanetary trajectories
Lunar transfer trajectory search using Geodyn
Optimization of low thrust transfers to Mars using the multiple shooting method
Preliminary design of a guidance law for a Mars aerocapture manoeuvre

Design-oriented subjects
Propulsion subsystem design and mission analysis for the ConeXpress spacecraft concept
Preliminary study of Structural Failure of a Ballistic Missile re-entering the Earths atmosphere
Guidance and control for atmospheric re-entry and precision landing of a semi-ballistic re-entry capsule
Assessment study into the recovery of the core stage of Ariane 5
Analysis and definition of integrated concurrent engineering processes in a satellite design office
Design of a generic experiment operation planning tool based on the Rosetta mission
A GNSS navigation performance prediction tool; design and implementation
Start-up characterization of a solid fuel ramjet projectile; CFD calculations and test results
Design of a solid propellant rocket engine to de-orbit spacecraft from multiple constellations
Assembly, integration & Test of the CODAG-1 Sounding Rocket Experiment
Conceptual design to cost for a small European solid/hybrid propellant launcher
Software development for a low Earth orbit GPS receiver
Search and rescue with Galileo; a novel approach to near-instantaneous localization of emergency beacons
102
ENGINEERING MECHANICS
IX. ENGINEERING MECHANICS

Chair personnel
Professor
Prof.dr.ir. R. de Borst
85464
Scientific Staff
Dr.ir. E.H. van Brummelen
Dr. M. A. Gutirrez
Dr. S.J. Hulshoff
Dr.ir. A.S.J. Suiker
Dr.ir. M.G.A. Tijssens
Dr. S.R. Turteltaub
89545
82090
81538
81629
89552
85360
Ph.D. Students
Ir. D.B. Chung
Ir. M. Hagenbeek
Dr. A.V. Kononov
Dipl-Ing. C. Michler
Ir. J.J.C. Remmers
Ir. E.A Munts
86380
82625
81518
86380
83151
85389
Secretary
Mw. C. Roovers
fax
85460
2611465
Technical Support
Ing. E.H.H. Thung
81456

Engineering mechanics is a basic engineering science that furnishes indispensable tools and theories for more
applied engineering sciences. The Chair of Engineering Mechanics at Aerospace Engineering focuses on the
fundamental development of analysis techniques in five areas relevant to aerospace engineering:
Computational Mechanics
Computational mechanics is concerned with the development of accurate computational methods for simulating the
complex mechanical behaviour of materials and structures. The group is actively involved in developing new
techniques in this field, including methods for stochastic analysis, the identification and handling of bifurcations,
adaptive discretization and non-linear finite-element analysis on massively parallel computers.
Mechanics of composite materials
Composite materials offer exciting possibilities for structural design, but bring special challenges in the prediction of
their damage and fatigue characteristics. Research within the group is primarily directed to developing damagebased models for predicting delamination and matrix -cracking, particularly for fiber-metal laminates such as Glare.
These are being applied to the prediction of fatigue durability and thermal behaviour, as well as the analysis of
crack stoppers, splices and combined buckling/delamination phenomena.
Localization and failure
Under high loading conditions, uniform deformation fields become unstable due to the presence of material
imperfections, leading to strain-localization phenomena. These phenomena are technically important since they act
as a precursor to failure. The group is a leader in the development of numerical methods to capture strain
localization, including enhanced continuum models for removing the physical and mathematical deficiencies that
limit conventional approaches. Sophisticated discretization technologies are also being developed to efficiently
capture the evolution of strain-localization discontinuities.
Physics and Mechanics of Active Materials
Active materials are materials that change their crystal structure due to a change in, for example, temperature or
due to the application of electric or magnetic fields. The change in crystal structure can result in phenomena like
the shape-memory effect and super elasticity. Materials that exhibit such transformations are potential candidates
for innovative design of micro electro-mechanical systems. The research of the group in this area is focussed on (i)
a better understanding of the underlying physics through atomistic modelling and, from this, the development of
better continuum theories and (ii) the numerical simulation of phase transformations and the development of
efficient numerical techniques to generate the microstructures.
Optimization of composites and structures.
Non-homogeneous composite materials often outperform homogeneous composites in applications where they
have been tailored to their working environment. The development of robust numerical techniques to model and
optimize composites materials is an area of active research within the group. Advanced methods drawn from
optimal control and topology optimization are being investigated to design functionally graded composites and
structures under dynamic mechanical and thermal loading.
Fluid-Structure Interaction
Fluid-structure interactions have particular relevance for high-speed transportation, as they can result in
unfavourable dynamic response or instabilities which can severely limit the application of a design. Accurate
103
103
analysis of such phenomena for realistic structures in either transonic or viscous-dominated flows requires
advanced numerical techniques for both fluid and structural domains, and a sophisticated description of the
coupling occurring between the two. Research on this topic is being performed in a cooperative project with the
Chair of Aerodynamics, and is focused on developing accurate solvers and interface treatments which can be fully
exploited in a parallel computing environment. Subprojects include the development of time-stepping algorithms
for the fluid, interface and structure which minimize energy conservation errors, error estimation and adaptivity in
space and time, and efficient treatment of the multiscale phenomena which emerge in this complex problem.
To provide further understanding of the analytic and numerical techniques commonly applied in Engineering
Mechanics.
To provide a background in the issues and analysis techniques related to the area of research to be pursued in
the fifth year.

The educational program is divided into two specializations: "Numerical methods in solid mechanics", which
provides a background suitable for the first five research areas described above, and "Fluid-structure interaction"
which provides a background for the last. In their first year, students follow a common core curriculum, as well as
a curriculum related to their chosen field of specialization. This is supplemented with a number of elective courses,
which are generally chosen to further understanding of the intended second-year research area. The elective
courses listed below are only suggested options. With the agreement of the chair, other courses within the TU Delft
may also be chosen as electives.
Code
Course
AE4-711
AE4-900
Continuum mechanics
WB1405A
WI4 014TU
Numerical analysis CII
WI4 150TU
WM0324LR
Ethics and Engineering for Aerospace Engineering
Lectures
4/0/0/0
0/0/4/0
0/0/4/2
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/0
0/4/0/0
Credits
3
4
4
4.5
2
3
CORE COURSES NUMERICAL METHODS IN SOLID MECHANICS SPECIALIZATION (9 credits)

CT5142
Non-Linear Methods in Computational Mechanics
0/4/0/0
WB1416
Numerical Methods for Dynamics
0/0/2/2
WB1440
Engineering Optimatization: Concepts and Applications
2/2/0/0
3
3
3
CORE COURSES FLUID-STRUCTURE INTERACTION SPECIALIZATION (12 credits)

AE4-140
Gasdynamics I
AE4-151
Numerical Methods Aircraft Aerodynamics 1
AE4-152
Numerical Methods Aircraft Aerodynamics 2
AE4-930
Aeroelasticity
2/2/0/0
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/0/2/2
3
3
3
3
ELECTIVE COURSES
AE4-141
Gasdynamics II
AE4-153
Adv. Num. Tech. for Fluid Flow and Structure Engineering
AE4-170
AE4-171
AP3081TU G
Computational Physics
ET3-101
Control Systems
MK3201
Solid-state Physics
TN3 833
Crystal Structures
WB1406
Experimental Stress and Vibration Investigation
WB1412
Non-linear Vibrations
WB1424A
Turbulence A
WI3 001
Numerical Methods for PDEs
WI4 007TU
Fourier and Laplace transforms
WI4 008TU
Complex Analysis
WI4 010
Advanced Numerical Linear Algebra
WI4 017
Parallel Computing
WI4 037TU
Tensor Analysis
WI4 142TU
Variational Methods & Applications
0/0/2/2
0/0/2/2
0/4/0/0
0/0/4/0
t.b.a.
0/0/2/0
t.b.a.
t.b.a.
0/0/2/2
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/2
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/2
2/2/0/0
t.b.a.
t.b.a.
0/0/4/0
0/0/0/6
3
3
3
3
t.b.a.
4
4.5
t.b.a.
3
3
6
6
4
4
6
6
4
6
INTERNSHIP (18 credit points)

AE4-001
12 weeks + 1 week reporting
To gain experience in fundamental research techniques.

To become familiar with current literature in the chosen field of research.
To gain experience in working independently, while participating in a group effort.
104
18
To gain experience with the application of mathematical and numerical analysis methods.
To practice report-writing and presentation skills.
2nd course year curriculum: the graduation project (ae5-900)

The second year program gives the student a chance to pursue fundamental research within a chosen field of
specialization. In general, this will take the form of a project which directly supports one of the research efforts
being pursued within the group. Typically, a project consists of a literature review and detailed problem definition,
an investigation of the problem, and a reporting phase. This last phase includes the writing of a detailed report,
assistance in the preparation of an external publication, and a formal presentation. At the end of the project there
is an examination.
Graduation projects
The following is a inexhaustible list of currently available research project subjects. Additional subjects not listed
here may be defined as well.
Computational Mechanics
Stochastic finite-element methods
Adaptive discretization techniques for finding energy minimizing microstructures
Fuzzy finite element methods
Solution control algorithms

Mechanics of composite materials
Thermal effects in composite materials
Delamination of composite materials
Failure mechanisms in woven composites
Tunnelling cracks in F-M laminates
Failure resistance of splices
Impact in composites
Local/global methods for predicting stress concentrations in composites

Localization and failure
3D modelling of stochastic size effects
Fracture of phase transforming materials using cohesive surfaces
Simulation of corrosion phenomena

Fluid-structure interaction
Investigation of spectral-adaptive techniques
Comparisons of error indicators and estimators for mesh adaptation
Design of monolithic fluid-structure integration methods
105
105
FUNDAMENTALS OF ADVANCED MATERIALS
X. FUNDAMENTALS OF ADVANCED MATERIALS (FAM)

CHAIR PERSONNEL
Professor
Scientific staff
dr. T. Dingemans
dr. P. Rivera
vacancy
82248
Secretary
mw L. K. Chant
fax
84755
84472
84520
84559

The Fundamentals of Advanced Materials group will be responsible for the education and research efforts in the
areas of advanced metals, ceramics, and polymer systems. Our research will concentrate on the conceptual and
actual development of new materials which will ultimately lead to enabling technologies for the aerospace industry.
One can envision, for example, smart materials, which are able to adjust flight-critical properties (e.g., morphing
control surfaces of an airplane) and can self-heal after being damaged. In order to design these complex, multifunctional systems, we will utilize a wide variety of modeling, synthetic, and physical characterization tools. Our
emphasis will be on tailoring and understanding the structure-property relationships of such new materials. Our
present research areas include high temperature metals, TRIP steels, maraging steels, titanium, aluminum, liquid
crystal network polymers, and closed-shell carbon nanostructures. When it comes to applying our new materials,
the FAM group will work closely with other L&R sections and other groups at the TU-Delft. In addition, we believe
that it is important to collaborate with industry. Our group has excellent relations with a variety of industrial
partners, and includes: Stork-Fokker, Airbus, Corus, Teijin, Ticona, Arcelor, and CEIT. Other collaborators abroad
include NASA Langley Research Center, The University of Sheffield, Cambridge University, and KTH Stockholm.
As the group is in the start-up phase, our research portfolio is still under development. Please contact our scientific
staff for an update on the latest developments or visit our website at http://www.delftaerospace.com/~fam/

Students will be introduced to:
The underlying principles of material properties, physical characterization, and structure-property relationships.
How to design and test new material concepts in the areas of metals, polymers and ceramics and how to apply
these concepts towards new aerospace applications.
1st course year program description

The mandatory courses are selected to give the student a broad background in the areas of metals, polymers,
ceramics, material properties and material characterization. A variety of elective courses will be offered, which
allows the student to broaden her/his interest in a specific area. In support of the graduation project, a number of
electives will be chosen after consultation with the chair.
CORE COURSES (COMPULSORY); 12 CREDITS)
Code
AE4-X01
Course name
Modern Topics in Material Science
AE4-X02
Designing Materials with Aerospace Specific

Properties
Ethics and Engineering for Aerospace
Engineering
AE4-711
WM0324LR
106
Lecturer(s)
van der Zwaag, Rivera,
Dingemans
van der Zwaag, Rivera,
Dingemans
van Drimmelen
van de Poel, Sinke
Lectures
2/0/0/0
Credits
3
0/0/0/2
4/0/0/0
0/4/0/0
3
3
FUNDAMENTALS OF ADVANCED MATERIALS
ELECTIVE COURSES (30 CREDITS)

The elective courses offer the student the possibility to gain a more in-depth understanding of certain topics in
aerospace engineering. Students are strongly encouraged to discuss their selection of elective courses with the
chair prior to course registration.
Code
AE4-X03
AE4-X04
AE4-X05
AE4-736
AE4-632
TM2711 DB
TN3862
MK4442 DV
ET4-257
t.b.a.
Course name
Physical Metallurgy for Aerospace
Material Selection in Mechanical Design
New Developments in Aerospace Polymers
Introduction to the Technique of Measuring
Composites: Materials, Structures and Production
Processes
Fiber Reinforced Materials in Aerospace
Structures
Structure and Composition Analysis II B
Nanophysics And Nanotechnology
Design of Materials (part Fatigue)
Sensors
Applied Nanomaterials
AE4-001
Internship 12 weeks + 1 week report
AE4-684
Lecturer(s)
van der Zwaag, Rivera
van der Zwaag, Rivera
Dingemans
Klomp
Beukers
Lectures
0/0/2/0
0/0/2/0
0/0/0/2
0/2/0/0
0/4/0/0
Credits
3
3
3
2
3
Beukers
0/0/0/4
Sloof, W.G.
Verbruggen, A.H.
Zuidema, J
French, P.
Goossens, A
0/6/0/0
0/0/0/4
0/0/4/0
0/3/0/0
tba
6
6
1.5
4
4
18

The student will become familiar with the aerospace research environment by conducting research and
participating in a variety of research activities within our group. Students will receive training in how to perform
effective literature searches, provide written reports and present research results to the aerospace community
(i.e., oral presentations at conferences, poster presentations, and peer reviewed publications).
2nd course year program description (graduation project: ae5-X00)

In the second and final course year, the student will concentrate on his or her graduation project. In order to
graduate, the student will submit a report, that contains a comprehensive literature study and a clear discussion of
the research results.
Graduation project subject examples

Below is a list of new and ongoing research projects that are currently available in our group. Projects can strongly
vary from highly theoretical in nature to practical or hands on. Some projects are in direct collaboration with
industry or other (foreign) research institutions. This list, however, is far from exhaustive and we encourage
students to submit their own ideas for graduation projects as well.
Maraging and TRIP steels: A unique class of steel combining high strength and toughness (collaboration with
Corus)
Silent aluminum. Design of new microstructures for acoustic dampening applications (collaboration with Corus)
Liquid crystalline thermoset resins for advanced aerospace composites (collaboration with NASA)
Aluminum fatigue: improving properties via micro-chemistry (collaboration. with Corus)
DART re-entry vehicle (collaboration with other L&R sections)
Closed-shell carbon nanostructures for structural applications (collaboration with NASA)
High-modulus aramids with crosslinkable units (collaboration with Teijin)
Self-healing polymers and composites (collaboration with NASA)
Polymeric actuators for morphing wing concepts
Smart sensor and actuators
107
107
SYSTEMS INTEGRATION AIRCRAFT
H1. SIA SYSTEMS INTEGRATION AIRCRAFT

(DESIGN AND INTEGRATION OF AIRCRAFT AND OTHER ADVANCED TRANSPORT SYSTEMS)
Chair personnel
Professor
Prof.dr.ir. Michel J.L. van Tooren
84794
Scientific staff
Dr.ir. P.A. Astori
89550
Ph.D. Students
Ir. G. La Rocca
Ir. L. Krakers (PT, VM, CCM)
Ir. P. Lisandrin (AER, SC)
Ir. M. Baragona (AER, PT)
Ir. C. Cerulli
A.H. van der Laan
Ir. M. Nawijn
Secretary
Mw. N.O. Saaneh
Mw. L. Pijpaert
fax
85176
85911
83444
85317
85317
85317
82046
89550
87158

The horizontal disciplinary groups SIA and SI-R, which focus on aircraft and spacecraft design respectively try to
combine the knowledge and skills of the vertical disciplinary groups in multidisciplinary education, scientific
research and applied industrial research projects.
SIA succeeds the former group of prof. E. Torenbeek. It is challenged with a rigorously changed aircraft industry in
the Netherlands. These changes are reflected in the mission and strategy of the group.
Mission
Enhancement of quality and productivity of multidisciplinary design and analysis (MDA) capabilities of the faculty
and its students through education and research.
Strategy
Education in MDA capabilities is done through project education (design synthesis projects), and master thesis
works.
Research on MDA focuses on the development, verification and application of Multidisciplinary Design and
Engineering Engines (DEEs).
Research topics selection and research results are verified through participation and stimulation of industrial
projects.
Philosophy
The complexity of transport systems continues to increase and the development costs are growing with this
complexity. It is the challenge for the scientists and engineers to cope with this increasing complexity and to
improve there productivity. SIA accepts this challenges and wants to contribute to the control of future innovation
focusing on:
Education of multidisciplinary education and train people on enhancement of their system view: train them to have
a wide, top down view on system design and on technology.
Continued development of DEEs for improved multidisciplinary modeling and analysis. The DEE takes over the
repetitive and tedious work of the designer creating time for innovative design.
Research
SIA will focus on the continued development of a modular DEE. The DEE will be computer system based but
emphasis is on the information being processed and generated by the DEE, not on the information technology. The
different modules in the DEE will be developed with the different vertical disciplinary groups of the Faculty. Multidisciplinary parameterization is a major issue in this respect.
The development of the different modules is seen as a continuous series of projects, headed by Ph.D. students
which guide master students during their thesis. The continued development extents to continued verification and
application of DEEs. SIA will continue to participate and initiate multidisciplinary projects to apply, verify and
improve its knowledge and skills.

An intensive preparation on relevant theoretical subjects and design methodologies based on the specific multidisciplinary interests of the individual student.
108
SYSTEMS INTEGRATION AIRCRAFT

The program is defined as a small core program completed by a combination of selected core and elective courses
from at least two vertical disciplinary groups. The program has to be approved by all professors of the participating
disciplinary groups. Since a large variety of programs is possible, no predefined variants are provided.
CORE COURSES (COMPULSORY; 9 CREDITS)
Code
Course
ID0401AE
Design Processes in Industry
WM0324LR
AE4-711
Ethics and Eng. for Aeospace Engineering

INTERNSHIP
AE4-001
Lecturer
Roozenburg,
N.F.M.
Sinke
van Drimmelen
Lectures Credits
t.b.d.
3
0/4/0/0
4/0/0/0
3
3
18

A continued intensive preparation on relevant theoretical subjects and design methodologies based on the specific
multi-disciplinary interests of the individual student.
Application of theory and methodology in a multi-disciplinary research or design thesis work.
2nd course year curriculum: the graduation project

Based on the multidisciplinary interest of the student a thesis assignment is formulated by the professors of the
involved vertical disciplinary groups and the SIA professor.
Graduation projects
Examples:
Aircraft Design
Multi Disciplinary Design
Multi Disciplinary Analysis
Parametric Modeling
Design and Engineering Engines
Optimization
109
109
SYSTEM INTEGRATION SPACECRAFT
H2. SYSTEM INTEGRATION SPACECRAF T

ANALYSIS AND SPACE SYSTEMS DESIGN
Chair personnel
Scientific staff
Dr. ir. W. Jongkind (acting chair)
Prof. dr. W.J. Ockels
Ir. R.J. Hamann
87458
89576
82079
82059

The field of System Integration / Analysis and Design of Space Systems (SIR) addresses the following topics:
System design and/or the design and development of spacecraft,
Rocket propulsion, electrical and electronic systems and systems engineering.

The first field is covered primarily by space technology projects performed within the faculty. This enables the
student to fulfill a project function during graduation, where besides his or her specialty, attention is given to the
integration of the various technical disciplines. In principle, the student will work together with other chairs in
various research areas, if specific knowledge is present.
The second field addresses subjects that relate to the indicated disciplines. Examples are electrical propulsion,
smart structures, (technical) risk assessment, test and verification approaches and the definition of mission
operations.
The program must produce an engineer capable of:
Making a sound and well-founded choice between the various technical implementations of a space system or
spacecraft, thereby being able to distinguish between more and less important criteria,
Presenting the choice thoroughly and concisely,
Determining which tools are necessary to support the design and development process,
Determining the organizational structure of the design and development team, keeping in mind the specific
mission characteristics, the project and the design, and the applied technology,
Make a specialist contribution to the design and development of a space system or spacecraft,
Functioning as a team and in a project.

The first course year curriculum is aimed at gaining more in-depth knowledge and expanding the basic skills
needed to design spacecraft (spacecraft technology) and required for the design and development process of space
systems and spacecraft. This knowledge is necessary to perform the research in the second course year.

The curriculum consists of a series of core courses, primarily focused on the project function, which the student will
fulfill during the graduation year. There are cases where the student can deviate from the set of core courses, in
agreement with the chair holder.
The four present projects are defined as follows:
The DART project (Delft Aerospace Re-entry Test vehicle), co-ordinated by ir. J. Buursink,
The Delfi Satellite phase A/B project, co-ordinated by ir. B.T.C. Zandbergen
The HILT (Hardware-in-the-loop test) facility BENCHSAT, co-ordinated by dr.ir. W. Jongkind,
The mission and operations simulator OPSIM, co-ordinated by ir. R.J. Hamann.
These projects are performed by a team of graduating students in a multi-disciplinary environment, and are coordinated by the chairs Aerospace Materials and Design and Production of Composite Structures (DART) and the
chair System Integration / Spacecraft (last three projects).
More information on the project functions and the corresponding set of courses can be obtained at the chair
System Integration / Spacecraft, where interested students can also register for the projects (ir. B.T.C.
Zandbergen). Students interested in the DART project can contact ir. J. Buursink. More information can also be
found on the chair's website (http://dutlsisa.lr.tudelft.nl/sis/index.html).
The student is formally registered to the chair whose set core courses best matches the student's agreed set of
courses. The chairs will deliberate on how the supervising is divided during the second course year. Registration
requirement is a completed Design/Synthesis Exercise
The registration proceeds as follows:
The initial consultation provides the student with the necessary information regarding the graduation
possibilities and the required set of courses.
110
The
If the student chooses to graduate with the chair, agreements are made on the set of courses the student
desires. In general, this is the function of the graduation project's nature, insofar as this can be determined at
the moment of registration.
Depending on the chosen set of courses, the vertical chair to which the student will be registered is
determined
student prepares the following:
Application form (vertical) chair,
Passport photograph,
List of obtained study results,
List of study units still to complete (B.Sc. program),
Study plan including a time schedule up to graduation,
Short description of the desired graduation project.
The chair of SIR meets with the relevant vertical chair in question after which, in addition to the above information,
the following is recorded:
The agreed set of courses,
The degree of supervision the between the chair of SIR and the vertical chair is determined.
This completes the formal registration. The moment when the graduation activity is started, the graduation project
is confirmed and the above agreements re-confirmed or, if applicable, changed according to the most recent
developments.
The first year curriculum consists of 60 credits.
CORE COURSES (compulsory; 9 credits)
Code
AE4-711
AE4-S12
WM0324LR
Course
Sustainable development
Lecturer(s)
van Drimmelen
Hamann
Sinke
Lectures
4/0/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/4/0/0
Credits
3
3
3
ELECTIVE COURSES (amount of credits is depending on the project function)

Depending on the project function, the core courses must be supplemented with courses from the table below. It is
advised to keep in mind the set of courses of the vertical chair, the one that sponsors the project function, when
deciding on courses. For further information of the composition of the set of courses visit:
http://dutlsisa.lr.tudelft.nl/sis/projfunc/functproc.htm
Code
AE4-143
AE4-305
AE4-360
AE4-399
AE4-485
AE4-537
AE4-737
AE4-805
AE4-870
AE4-873 I+II
AE4-S01
AE4-S02
AE4-S38
AE4-S51
ET4-027
ET4-036
IN4028TU
WB3420-03
WI4 014TU
WI4 052
Course
Aerospace Human Factors (incl. pract. AE4-360P)
Dynamics and Control of Space Systems
Thermal Control
Astronomy
Rocket Motion
Astrodynamics I + II
Thermal Rocket Prop. System Analysis and Design
Manned Space Flight
Electr. & Information Systems in Space
Information Transmission Techniques
Transmission Systems Engineering
Design of Information Systems
Introduction Transport and Logistic Engineering
Numerical Analysis C2
Risk Analysis
Lecturer(s)
Bannink
Chu
van Paassen, Mulder
van Woerkom
Verbeek
Wijker
van Baten
Israel
Ambrosius
Wakker
Zandbergen
Jongkind
Ockels
Jongkind
Coenen
Arnbak
Dietz
Ottjes
van Kan
Mazzuschi
Lectures
2/2/0/0
0/4/0/0
0/0/0/4
0/0/4/0
0/0/2/2
0/2/2/0
0/0/2/0
0/0/0/2
0/2/2/0
2/2/2/2
0/0/2/2
4/0/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/4/0/0
0/0/0/4
2/0/0/0
0/0/4/0
0/0/2/2
2/2/0/0
0/4/0/0
Credits
3
3
4
3
3
3
3
2
3
6
3
3
3
3
4
4
3
3
4.5
4
3/0/0/0
RECOMMENDED ELECTIVE COURSE FOR SPACE-GROUND COMMUNICATION

ET4-015
Antenna systems

AE4-001
Hajian
18
111
111

The second course year is aimed at the application of the knowledge gained in the preceding years of study, and
independently performing research, preferably within a project and as a team. The emphasis lies on creatively
responding to the limitations that arise form the uncertainties of the design process and the design itself, whilst
maintaining a maximum and acceptable level of quality. The preparation of an external publication is an integral
part of the graduation project.
The assessment of the graduation project is done according to the following criteria: depth, independence,
analytical ability, technical/scientific argumentation, oral and written defense of the graduation project report,
quality of the external publication on the performed research and, if applicable, the functioning in a team.
2nd course year curriculum: the graduation project

The second course year is dedicated to the graduation project. The graduation research is divided into a
preparatory assignment (2 months, guideline) and a graduation project. (8 months, guideline). The preparatory
assignment covers a large part of the research area, in which the final graduation project shall be performed. In
general, these assignments are performed within a multi-disciplinary (project) team. The nature of the project may
require the student to follow additional education. The total study work load as result of the education and research
is equal to 42 credits.
Graduation projects
Examples of recent graduation projects:
1998
An evaluation of an integrated computerized Systems Engineering Tool
Structural failure of a ballistic missile entering the atmosphere
1999
Recovery core stage Ariane 5
2000
SMART1: support to spacecraft & experiment design, verification and operations by means of Eurosim (in cooperation with AS)
Euromoon with Ariane 5
Delfi mission definition
2001
Propulsion & Electrodynamic Tethers
Mars kite
Distributed Development Environment
Delfi project: Set-up Systems Engineering Delfi; Power Subsystem Delfi; Cost estimation Delfi
2002
Delfi project: Structural design of a gravity gradient boom; Command and data handling subsystem; Structure
analysis
Doppler tracking an ranging of satellites
Rockapult
Manned in-situ confirmation of lunar ice with Ariane 5
Planned
DART (co-ordinator: ir. J. Buursink)
Program planning & management
Aerodynamics
Structure & materials
Thermal protection
DELFI PHASE A/B1 (coordination ir. B. Zandbergen)
Dual frequency GPS receiver
Satellite Ground Station
VHF satellite communications
RAMS Analysis & Design
Thermal Design & Modeling
Delfi 1 Systems Engineering Process, Methods & Tools
Gravity gradient boom (2003)
Trajectory & control

Landing & recovery
Operations
Structure Delfi (2002)

Attitude Determination & Control for Delfi (2003)
Computer & OBDH system (2003)
Communications payload (2003)
Payload resources and interfaces (2003)
Resource Budgets, Hardware & Documentation Status
(2003)
Communication subsystem design
HARDWARE-IN-THE-LOOP TEST BENCH BENCHSAT (coordination dr.ir. W. Jongkind)

Definition & Implementation of Labview Test Facility
Implementation of Hardware-in-the-Loop Basic
Simulator Capability
Implementation of Delfi 1 Satellite Configuration on
Implementation of Common Spacecraft Hardware
BENCHSAT
Interfaces
112
MISSION & OPERATIONS SIMULATOR OPSIM (coordination ir. R.J. Hamann).

Space Environment & Delfi 1 Satellite Modeling (2003)
Attitude Budget, Power Budget & Payload Operations
Modeling
OPSIM Image Generation System (2004)
SYSTEMS ENGINEERING (coordination ir. R.J. Hamann).
Technical Risk Assessment Techniques (2003)
SPACE MECHATRONICS (coordination dr.ir. W. Jongkind)
Smart Structures
ROCKET PROPULSION (coordination ir. B. Zandbergen)
Advanced low thrust space propulsion systems
Thermal rocket propulsion subsystem design tool set
113
113
OVERVIEW COURSES M.SC. 1ST YEAR
H2
X X
H1
IX
VII
VIII
X X
1st
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/2
2/2/0/0
4/0/0/0
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/0/2/2
0/0/2 /2
0/4/0/0
0/0/4/0
2/2/0/0
1, 2, 3
4/2/2/0
4/0/0/0
0/4/0/0
0/0/4/0
2/0/0/0
0/0/2/2
2/2/0/0
0/4/0/0
3rd
0/0/4/0
3rd
0/0/4/0
4th
0/4/0/0
2nd
0/0/0/4
4th
0/0/0/4
4/0/0/0
0/0/0/4
0/0/4/0
0/0/x/x
0/0/2/2
0/4//0/0
0/0/4/0
4/0/0/0
0/4/0/0
VI
18
9
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
5
4
3
1
3
3
3
3
3
9
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
3
3
4
4
3
3
3
9
3
3
IV
Period
IVb
ECTS
III
Course
Code
II
LIST OF CORE COURSES AND ELECTIVE COURSES FOR THE M.SC. 1ST YEAR
AE4-001
AE4-100*
AE4-051
A E4-140
AE4-141
AE4-143
AE4-145
AE4-151
AE4-152
AE4-153
AE4-160
AE4-170
AE4-171
AE4-180
AE4-196P
A E4-201
AE4-211
AE4-212
AE4-212P
AE4-213
AE4-214
AE4-215
AE4-251
AE4-294
AE4-300*
AE4-301
AE4-301P
AE4-303
AE4-303P
AE4-304
AE4-304P
AE4-305
AE4-305P
AE4-360
AE4-360P
AE4-361
AE4-393
AE4-394
AE4-399
AE4-401
AE4-485
AE4-490
AE4-496
AE4-500*
AE4-522
AE4-524
X:
O:
*:
Internship
Capita Selecta Aerodynamics
Gasdynamics I
Gasdynamics II
Num. Methods in Aircraft Aerodynamics 1
Adv. Num. Tech. for Fluid Flow and Str. Eng.
Aero. Design of Aircraft & Adv. Transp. Syst.
Boundary Layer Flows - A
Boundary Layer Flows - B
Experimental Methods In Aerodynamics
4th Year Exercise
A/C Prop., Noise and Poll. Emissions
Wind Energy (CT5417)
Capita Selecta Flight Perform.& Flight Dyn.
Exercise Flight Dynamics and Simulation
Robust Control
Exercise Robust Control
Exercise Aircraft Responses to Atm. Turb.
Spacecraft Attitude Contr. Syst. Des. Exercise
Aerospace Human Factors Project
Flight Simulation
Avionics I
Avionics II
Dynamics And Control Of Space Systems
A .M.O. Project (including Stress Exercise)
Capita Selecta Materials, Constr., Struct.
X
X
X O
O
X
O
O
X
O
X
O
O
X
X
O
X
O
X O
X
O
X
X
O X
O
X O O
O
X O
X X O O
O
O
O O O
O
O
O X
O
X
X
O
O
X
X
O
X
O
X
X
X
X
O X
O
X
Core course
Elective course
Only mandatory for students without a B.Sc. degree in Aerospace Engineering
Graduation Programs:
I.
Aerodynamics
II.
III.
IV.
Aerospace Management and Organisation
IVb.
Industrial Organisation
V.
VI.
VII.
Aerospace Materials
VIII.
Astrodynamics and Satellite Systems
IX.
X.
H1.
Design and Integration of Aircraft and Other Advanced Transport Systems
H2.
System Integration / Analysis and Space Systems Design
114
X X X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O O
O O
O
X X
O O
X X
X
X
H2
H1
IX
VII
X
X
O
O
X
VIII
2/2/0/0
0/0/0/4
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/2/2/0
0/0/2/2
0/0/2/2
0/4/0/0
1st
0/0/0/4
4/0/0/0
0/0/4/0
0/0/0/4
0/2/0/0
0/0/2/0
0/4/0/0
0/0/2/0
0/4/0/0
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/2
4/0/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/0/6/0
0/0/0/4
0/0/4/0
0/0/2/2
0/0/2/2
4/0/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/0/2/2
0/4/0/0
2/0/0/0
0 /0/0/2
0/0/2/0
0/0/2/0
0/0/0/2
VI
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
1
4
3
4
3
9
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
IV
Period
IVb
ECTS
III
Course
Code
II
Aerospace Engineering (continued)

AE4-528
AE4-530
AE4-535 I
AE4-535 II
AE4-537
AE4-627
AE4-628
AE4-632
AE4-652
AE4-684
AE4-711
AE4-729
AE4-731
AE4-736
AE4-737
AE4-786
AE4-805
AE4-870
AE4-873 I
AE4-873 II
AE4-875
AE4-875P
AE4-876
AE4-877
AE4-900
AE4-930
AE4-S00*
AE4-S01
AE4-S02
AE4-S12
AE4-S38
AE4-S51
AE4-X01
AE4-X02
AE4-X03
AE4-X04
AE4-X05
*:

Special Topics In Vibration And Buckling
Structural Design and Optimization I
Structural Design and Optimization II
Structural Design And Airworthiness
Composites: Mat., Struct. & Prod. Processes
Fibre Reinforced Materials in Aero. Structures
Introduction To The Techniques Of Measuring
Thermal Control
Sheet Metal Forming
Astronomy
Rocket Motion
Astrodynamics I
Astrodynamics II
Precise Orbit Determination Of Satellites
Exercise Earth-Oriented Space Research
Earth-Orientated Space Research
Geophysical Appl. Of Satellite Measurements
Continuum Mechanics
Aeroelasticity
Capita Selecta Space
Thermal Rocket Prop.Syst. Analysis & Design
Manned Space Flight
Electrical and Information Systems in Space
Designing Mat. w. Aerosp. Specific Properties
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
X
X
X
X O
X O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O O
O O X
X X
X
X X
X
O X X
X X X X X
O X X
X
X
O O O
X X
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
X X X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
O X
O X
O O
X
O
O
X
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
Only mandatory for students without a B.Sc. degree in Aerospace Engineering
115
115
H2
H1
IX
VII
VIII
VI
IV
Period
IVb
ECTS
III
Course
Code
II
Civil Engineering
CT5142
GE2122
GE4542
Non-Linear Methods in Comp. Mechanics

Physical Geodesy
Satellite Positioning
3
4
5
0/4/0/0
0/0/0/6
8/0/0/0
X
X
O
ET3-101
ET4-015
ET4-027
ET4-036
ET4-039
ET4-235
ET4-256
ET4-257
Control Systems I
Antenna Systems
Information Transmission Techniques
Transmission System Engineering
Analog Signal Processing Techniques
Digital Signal Processing
Sensors
4
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
3/0/0/0
3/0/0/0
0/0/0/4
2/0/0/0
3/0/0/0
3/0/0/0
0/3/0/0
0/3/0/0
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
Industrial Design Engineering

ID0401AE
ID3101
ID5131
IDE 345
IDE 511

Business Admin. of Prod. Development
Applied Electronics
3
6
2
2
2
t.b.d.
0/0/2/x
0/0/0/4
t.b.d.
0/0/2/0
O
O
X
O
X
Computer Science
IN2041TU
IN2410
IN3016P
IN4005TU
IN4017TU
IN4028TU
IN4050TU
Information systems and corporate processes

Databases
Product Modeling
Industrial Automization
Multimodal Interfaces and Virtual Reality
Design of Information Systems
JAVA and Object Oriented Design
3
5
1
3
6
3
6
3/0/0/0
0/0/4/0
0/0/0/3
0/0/4/0
0/0/2/2
0/0/4/0
2/2/0/0
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
Applied Physics
AP3071G
AP3081TU G
AP3531
SC3010 TN
ST2472
TM2711 DB
TN2545
TN2622
TN2643
TN3833
TN3862
TN4560TU
Advanced Electrodynamics
Computational P hysics
Acoustic Imaging
Stochastic Signal Analysis
Polymers Science
Structure and Composition Analysis II B
Systems and Signals
Statistical Physics
Classical Mechanics and Relativity Theory
Crystal Structures
Superconduc tors and Magnetism
Signals and Systems
6
6
6
4
3
6
6
4
6
6
6
4
2/2/0/0
t.b.d.
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/0/0/4
0/6/0/0
4/4/0/0
5/0/0/0
t.b.d.
t.b.d.
0/0/0/4
0/4/0/0
O
O
O
O
X O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Technology Policy and Management

MOT1610
SPM1210
TB161
TB261
TB9152
TB9422
TB9423
TB9424
TB9427
TB9533
From Business Logistics to Supply Chains

Administration and Business A
Transport, Infrastructure and Logistics
Transport, Infrastructure and Logistics 2
Strategic Planning for Airport Systems
Log. Management; A Business Perspective
Supply Chain Eng., Analysis and Management
Through- life Eng. & Man. of Tr. & Log. Syst.
Engineering Design Problem Formulation
5
9
9
9
3
3
3
3
6
6
0/0/2/0
4/4/0/0
0/0/6/6
0/4/4/0
0/0/0/4
0/2/0/0
0/0/2/0
0/0/0/2
0/0/4/4
x/x/0/0
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Material Science
MK3201
MK3421
MK4442 DV
MK5291
MK6261TU
116
Solid-state Physics
Transport Phenomena in Material Processing
Design of Materials (part Fatigue)
Non- destructive Investigation
Fracture Mechanics
4.5
4.5
1.5
3
3
t.b.d.
4/0/0/0
0/0/4/0
t.b.d
0/0/0/4
O
O
O
O
O
H2
H1
IX
VII
VIII
VI
IV
Period
IVb
ECTS
III
Course
Code
II
Mechanical Engineering
SC4040
SC4060
SC4080
SC4090
WB1405A
WB1406
WB1412
WB1416
WB1424A
WB1440
WB2207
WB2301
WB2306
WB2404
WB2407
WB2415
WB3417-03
WB3420-03
WB5417
WB5420-03
WB5428
WB5431
Filtering and Idenification

Model Predictive Control
Knowledge Based Control Systems
Optimization in Systems and Control
Stability of Thin- Walled Structures I
Exp. Stress and Vibration Investigation
Non-linear Vibrations
Turbulence A
Engineering Optimization: Concepts and App.
Control Techniques
System Identification & Parameter Estimation
Cyberntical Ergonomics
Human-Machine Systems
Human Motion Control
Robust Control
Discrete Syst.: Modeling, Prot., Sim. & Ctrl.
Introduction Transport & Logistic Engineering
Innovation of Manufacturing
Applied Systems The ory
Life Cycle Engineering
6
4
3
3
4
3
3
3
6
3
4
7
3
4
4
6
4
3
3
3
2
3
0/4/0/0
3/0/0/0
0/2/0/0
0/0/3/0
0/0/4/2
0/0/2/2
2/2/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/0/2/2
2/2/0/0
0/6/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/0/0/4
2/2/0/0
2/2/0/0
0/0/0/4
2 /2/0/0
0/0/2/2
0/2/2/0
4/0/0/0
2/0/0/0
0/0/0/4
O
O
O
O
X O O
O
X
O
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O O
O X
X
O
Applied Mathematics
WI2 056LR
WI2 064
WI3 001
WI3 031
WI4 005TU
WI4 006TU
WI4 007TU
WI4 008TU
WI4 010
WI4 011
WI4 014TU
WI4 017
WI4 019
WI4 037TU
WI4 040
WI4 051TU
WI4 052
WI4 070TU
WI4 087TU
WI4 142TU
WI4 150TU
Systems Theory
Decision Theory
Numerical Methods for PDEs
Non-linear Optimization
Wavelets
Special Functions
Fourier and Laplace Transforms
Complex Anal ysis
Advanced Numerical Linear Algebra
Numerical Fluid Dynamics A
Parallel Computing
Non-linear differntial equations
Tensor Analysis
Optimization Control Theory
Introduction Operations Research
Risk Analysis
Digital Simulation A
Optim., Models & Algorithms
Variational Methods & Applications
3
4
6
6
6
6
4
4
6
6
4.5
6
6
4
6
4
6
4
3
6
2
4/0/0/0
0/0/4/0
2/2/0/0
0/0/4/4
0/4/0/0
4/0/0/0
0/0/2/2
2/2/0/0
t.b.d.
0/4/0/0
2/2/0/0
t.b.d.
0/0/4/0
0/0/4/0
0/0/4/0
2/2/0/0
0/4/0/0
0/0/4/0
2/0/0/0
0/0/0/6
0/0/2/0
O
O
O
O
O
O
X O
O
O O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
X O
O
X
X X X X
Inter-facultary Education
WM0104WB
WM0324LR
WM0404TU
WM0504TU
WM0505TU
WM0506TU
WM0517LR
WM0605TU
WM0610TU
WM0621TU
WM0722TU
Psychology Of Organizations
Sociology of Techn., Labour and Organization
Industrial Organization B
Starting of an Enterprise
Corporate Strategy
Business Economics
Introduction to Law
3
3
3
4
2
6
3
4
2
3
3
4/0/0/0
0/4/0/0
2/2/0/0
6/0/0/0
0/0/4/0
t.b.d.
0/0/2/0
2/2/0/0
2/0/0/0
2/2/0/0
0/4/0/0
X X
X
X X X X
X
O X
X
O
X
X
O
O O
X O
X X
Erasmus University Rotterdam

EUR A4311
Aerospace Economics
0/2/0/0
117
117
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ELECTIVE M.SC. COURSES

The lecture schedule of elective courses from other faculties is conditional. For up to date information students are
referred to the appropriate student administrations and their websites.
faculty / university
internet address for course information
Civil Engineering and Geosciences
www2.citg.tudelft.nlEducation
masters.ewi.tudelft.nl
Telecommunications
Electrical power engineering
Microelectronics
Industrial Design Engineering
www.io.tudelft.nl/education/vakinformatie.php(in Dutch)
Computer Science
Computer Science
Applied Physics
www.tn.tudelft.nl
Education
Course info for Applied Physics
Technology Policy and Management
www.tbm.tudelft.nl
Education, Electives (in Dutch)
lijst van alle vakken (list of all courses)
or
alfabetisch overzicht (overview in alphabetical order)
Material Science
www.tnw.tudelft.nl
Education
Mechanical Engineering
www.ocp.tudelft.nl/wbmt
Education
BSc and MSc programs
Applied Mathematics
Applied Mathematics
Inter-facultary Education
www.tbm.tudelft.nl
Education, Electives (in Dutch)
lijst van alle vakken (list of all courses)
or
alfabetisch overzicht (overview in alphabetical order)
Erasmus University Rotterdam
www.few.eur.nl/few/edu/gids02/english/Courses (in English)
118
M.SC. 1 ST COURSE YEAR
AE4-001
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
INTERNSHIP
M.Sc. 1 or M.Sc. 2
t.b.d. in consultation w/
internship co-ordinator
Internship
18
Written report
Mrs. J. van Deventer-Gille
62
807
015-2784615
j.vandeventer@lr.tudelft.nl
Objectives
The internship is part of the M.Sc. program

covering a minimal period of twelve weeks,
intended to familiarise the student with industry or
a research institution. The level of work to be
performed should give the student good insight in
the engineering practice.
Entry qualification
The following is recommended: BSc programme
completed.
Reduction of the internship is granted in special
cases where the participant has been active in a
business environment for an extended period of
time. The internship can be reduced by the board
of examiners, through a written and motivated
request directed to the secretary of the board of
examiners. Persons requesting extra oral support
for the request are advised to contact Mrs. J. van
Deventer-Gille (foreign and domestic internships).
The faculty organises a SOCRATES/ERASMUS

exchange program with a large number of
European universities, such as Cranfield, Imperial
College London, Belfast, Mnchen, Stuttgart, Pisa,
Toulouse en Madrid. A period at one of the
universities can be accredited as an internship or
(partially) as graduation research. For more
information see chapter 6.
Set-up
The internship is preferably carried out in an

aerospace engineering branch of the industry or
research institution. Students are advised to
schedule their internship after the B.Sc. program
has been fully completed.
The faculty's internship office can assist in
acquiring internship positions world wide, and
provides the corresponding information. Students
are encouraged to arrange their own internship. A
limited amount of internships is available at the
internship co-ordinator. Registering interest for an
internship must be done well in advance, especially
if the internship is performed in a foreign country.
When students have managed to arrange their
internship, this has to be approved by the
internship co-ordinator before the internship
begins. For all students the internship period, the
internship company or institution and a point of
contact have to be reported to the internship coordinator before the internship begins. Failing to do
so will result in not accepting the internship report
and no credits will be awarded for the internship.
The student must hand in a report, certified by the
management of the company or institution in
question, within no more than two months after
completing the internship. The report can be
rejected if the student has not met these
requirements or the level of the reporting is
insufficient or the work performed does not meet
the requirements. One opportunity for rewriting the
report will be given. When the report still does not
meet the requirements a new internship will have
to be performed. The report has to be handed in at
the internship co-ordinator: Mrs. J. van DeventerGille.
119
AE4-051
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
STIFFNESS DESIGN
EXERCISE
M.Sc. 1
1
Laboratory Exercise
1
Dr.ir. O.K. Bergsma

62
NB 0.18
015-2785135
ir. J. Sinke
ing. S. Lindstedt, ing. B.
Weteringe
The exercise consists of building a structure which

has to fulfill a minimum performance for strength.
Weight, cost, stiffness and strength of the structure
are combined into one factor. The group of
students which reaches the lowest factor performs
best. Before testing, an estimation must be given
for the expected strength, and the failure mode
must be given. The materials that can be used are
wood, aluminium, steel, glass fibre composites,
carbon fibre composites, or other materials that
are in stock or available.
Objectives
The students must be able to:
- work in a team;
- optimise an expression in which the design
parameters are combined;
- design a stiffness dominated structure;
- build a stiffness dominated structure.
Set-up
An introduction is given to the students , a handout is issued, and the students are divided into
groups of approx. four students.
Each group spends approx. 16 hours to the design
of the structure.
Each group spends approx. 16 hours to the
building of the structure.
All structures are tested during an afternoon or a
morning, followed by a review of the results.
CAPITA SELECTA
AERODYNAMICS
AE4-100
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
n.a.
Self-study
9
To be arranged
(coordinator)
64
031
015-2785907
This course offers an introduction to basic

aerodynamic concepts for both low speed and
compressible flows.
Introduction: basic concepts, aerodynamic forces
and moments, similarity and dimensional analysis,
different flow regimes.
Fundamental principles and equations: derivation
of the basic flow equations (mass, momentum and
energy), fundamental concepts.
Inviscid, incompressible flow: potential flows in two
and three dimensions, airfoil and wing theory.
Compressible flow: normal and oblique shock
waves, Prandtl-Meyer expansion, shock-expansion
theory, nozzle and diffusers, linearized theory of
compressible flow over airfoils.
Viscous flow: viscosity and thermal conduction,
viscous stresses, Newtonian fluid, Stokes
hypothesis, Navier-Stokes equations, energy
equation for viscous flow, (impulsively started wall,
vorticity diffusion) Couette and Poiseuille flow,
recovery factor, Reynolds analogy, introduction to
boundary layers, boundary layer properties,
boundary layer equations, Blasius solution for
laminar flat plate boudary layer, turbulent
boundary layers.
Objectives
To give the student without a BSc degree in

Aerospace Engineering a solid foundation in
aerodynamics.
Set-up
The student is expected to study the course

material mentioned below and to take part in the
Low Speed Windtunnel Practical (ae2-191P) and in
the Supersonic Windtunnel Exercise (ae2-191P). If
necessary it is possible to attend the BSc
Aerodynamics courses ae1-020 I, ae2-115 and
ae3-130, from which the course material is
derived. The student has to consult the course
coordinator in order to set arrangements for the
concluding exam.
Course Material
1.
2.
3.
120
Anderson, J.D., Fundamentals of

aerodynamics, 3rd ed., 2001, McGraw-Hill,
ISBN 0072373350
aerodynamics, 2nd ed, McGraw-Hill, ISBN
0071007679
Additional Course Notes (on Chapters 4 and 5)
and a set of Problem Exercises, which can be
downloaded from the internet (see below
4.
5.
Exercise Manual AE2-191P

Exercise Manual AE2-193P
Anderson, J.D., Introduction to flight, McGrawHill, ISBN 0-07-001641-0
Prerequisite
BSc degree in Electrical Engineering, Mechanical
Engineering, Applied Physics or Marine technology.
This course is only accessible for MSc students

without a BSc degree in Aerospace Engineering. It
is mandatory for those students who opt for the
MSc variant Aerodynamics. The student is advised
to contact the course co-ordinator to discuss
course details.
AE4-140
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
GASDYNAMICS I
M.Sc. 1
2/2/0/0
Lecture
3
Exercises + written examination
2
64
031
015-2785907
1. Introduction: notations, definitions, equations of

state, entropy, speed of sound, integral- and
differential form of governing equations, Euler
equations, entropy equation, weak solutions,
entropy condition I, moving shocks, (x,t)- diagram,
entropy conditions II, III, numerical treatment.
2. One-dimensional unsteady flow, lineared:
acoustic waves, dAlemberts solution,
characteristic method, discontinuities, Piston
problem, simple waves, Riemanns initial value
problem.
3. One-dimensional unsteady flow, non-linear:
characteristic equations, Riemann invariants,
simple waves, Riemanns initial value problem,
Hugoniot- and Poisson curves, iterative solution of
Riemann problem, characteristic method,
compression wave, wave interaction, analogy with
2D-steady.
4. Burgers equation for simple waves: non-viscous
Burgers equation, shock equation, shock formation,
entropy conditions, viscous Burgers equation, wave
interactions.
5. Traffic waves: definitions, concepts traffic
equation, characteristics and discontinuities, traffic
light, chain collision
6. Two-dimensional unsteady flows: flow equations
vector form of flow equations, diagonalisation, leftand right eigenvectors, 2D wave propagation,
enveloping of waves.
Objectives
Providing insight in the fundamentals and physics

of compressible flows.
Providing insight in mathematical modelling.
Week Arrangement

1. Introduction, notations, concepts, flow
equations, Euler equations.
2. Weak solutions, moving shocks, entropy
conditions (x,t)-diagram.
3. Linear: acoustic waves, dAlemberts solution,
characteristic method.
4. Linear: discontinuities, Piston problem
5. Linear: simple waves, Riemanns initial value
problem.
6. Non-linear: characteristic equations, Riemann
invariants.
7. Non-linear: simple wave, Riemanns problem,
Hugoniot- and Poisson curves.
8. Non-linear: interative solution of Riemann
problem, characteristic method.
121
9.
Non-linear: simple compression wave, shock

formation, wave interaction, 2D analogy.
10. Non-viscous Burgers equation, shock equation,
shock formation, entropy conditions.
11. Viscous Burgers equation, wave interaction.
12. Traffic waves, modelling, characteristics,
discontinuities, traffic light, chain collision.
13. Two-dimensional unsteady flows,
diagonalisation for 1D unsteady, left- and right
eigenvectors.
14. Diagonalisation for 2D unsteady, 2D wave
propagation, enveloping of waves.
Course Material
Ganzer, U., Gasdynamik , 1988, Springer,

Zucrow, M.J., Hoffman, J.D., Gasdynamics.vol. 1, 1976, ISBN 047198440X
Zucrow, M.J., Hoffman, J.D., Gasdynamics.vol. 2, 1985, ISBN 0898748402

There is no single textbook covering the course
material; you will find useful information in:
P.G. Bakker, lectures notes Gasdynamics, 2000.
Entry qualification
The
following is recommended:
AE2-115 I
AE2-115 II
AE3-130
John D. Anderson jr., Modern Compressible

Flow with Historical Perspective 2nd edition
MacGraw-Hill 1990;
Ya. B. Zeldovich and Yu. P. Raizer, Elements

of Gasdynamics and the Classical Theory of
Shock Waves, Academic Press 1968;
H.W. Liepmann and A. Roshko, Elements of

Gasdynamics, Wiley, 1957;
R. Courant and K.O. Friedrichs, Supersonic

Flow and Shock Waves, Interscience, 1948.
G.B. Witham, Linear and Non-linear Waves,

Wiley 1974;
C. Hirsch, Numerical Computation of Internal

and External Flows. Vol. I: Fundamentals of
Numerical Discretization. Vol. II Computational
Methods for Inviscid and Viscous Flows, Wiley
1988.
AE4-141
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
GASDYNAMICS II
M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/2
Lecture
3
Oral exam
4
64
031
015-2785907
1.
2.
3.
Non-viscous steady 2D flow: diagonalisation,

characteristic directions, hyperbolicity, timelike and space-like, flow aligned co-ordinates,
compatibility, characteristic methods, PrandtlMeyer expansion, nozzle design, transonic
nozzle flow.
Burgers equation for 2D simple waves: nonviscous Burgers equation, shock formation,
biconvex airfoil, asymptotic behaviour of
shocks, wave interaction.
Qualitative theory of 1D viscous flows,
equations governing quasi 1D viscous flows,
qualitative theory of 2nd order dynamical
systems, qualitative aspects of the solutions of
the quasi 1D flow equations, frictional effects,
Fanno equation, internal structure of a shock
wave.
Objectives
Providing insight in the fundamentals and physics

of compressible fluid dynamics.
Providing insight in mathematical modelling of flow
phenomena.
Week Arrangement

1. Non-viscous steady 2D flows,
2. Diagonalisation, characteristic directions,
hyperbolicity.
3. Time-like and space-like, flow aligned coordinates, compatibility relations.
4. Characteristic methods, Prandtl-Meyer
expansion.
5. Characteristic methods,
6. Nozzle design, transonic flow in nozzle throat.
7. Burgers equation for 2D simple waves,
8. Non-viscous Burgers equation,
9. Shock formation, biconvex airfoil.
10. Farfield behaviour of shocks, wave interaction.
11. Qualitative theory of quasi 1D viscous flow,
equations, Fanno equation.
12. Qualitative theory of 2nd order systems,
13. Application to quasi 1D flow equations,
influence of viscosity.
14. Internal structure of a normal shockwave
Course Material
P.G. Bakker, lecture notes Gasdynamics 2000
122
Ganzer, U., Gasdynamik , 1988, Springer,

Zucrow, M.J., Hoffman, J.D., Gasdynamics.vol. 1, 1976, ISBN 047198440X
Zucrow, M.J., Hoffman, J.D., Gasdynamics.vol. 2, 1985, ISBN 0898748402
Entry qualification
John D. Anderson jr., Modern Compressible

Flow with Historical Perspective 2nd edition
MacGraw-Hill 1990;
Ya. B. Zeldovich and Yu. P. Raizer, Elements

of Gasdynamics and the Classical Theory of
Shock Waves, Academic Press 1968;
H.W. Liepmann and A. Roshko, Elements of

Gasdynamics, Wiley, 1957;
R. Courant and K.O. Friedrichs, Supersonic

Flow and Shock Waves, Interscience, 1948.
G.B. Witham, Linear and Non-linear Waves,

Wiley 1974;
C. Hirsch, Numerical Computation of Internal

and External Flows. Vol. I: Fundamentals of
Numerical Discretization. Vol. II Computational
Methods for Inviscid and Viscous Flows, Wiley
1988.
B.H. Bulakh, Nonlinear Conical Flows,

translated from the Russian by J.W. Reyn and
W.J. Bannink, D.U.P. 1984.
P.G. Bakker, Bifurcations in Flow Patterns,

Kluwer Academic Publishers 1991.
J. Guckenheimer and P.J. Holmes, Non-linear

oscillations, dynamical systems and bifurcation
of vector fields, Springer 1983.
HYPERSONIC
AERODYNAMICS
AE4-143
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
2/2/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
2,
dr.ir. L.M.G.F.M. Walpot
071-5795527
louis.walpot@atosorigin.com
Hypersonic Flow: Inviscid flow, compressions and

expansions, surface inclination methods, similarity
rules, hypersonic small perturbations, Euler
equations. Viscous flow, boundary layers, viscous
interactions, heat transfer, radiation effects. High
temperature effects, inviscid and viscous
equilibrium and non-equilibrium flow. Rarefied
gasdynamics.
Objectives
This course is designed to provide the student with

fundamental knowledge of hypersonic
aerothermodynamics. The course is set up to
deliver engineering tools for conceptual design
problems together with a fysical understanding of
various aspects of the broad gamma of hypersonic
flow.
Week Arrangement

1. Introduction: characteristics of hypersonic
flow; applications.
2. Inviscid flow: 2D shocks and expansions;
Newtonian theory.
3. Tangent- wedge/tangent cone-, shockexpansion theories; similarity parameters.
4. Euler equations; small perturbation theory;
hypersonic equivalence principle; blast-wave
theory.
5. Thin shock layer theory; computational results.
6. Viscous flow: boundary layer equations;
laminar boundary layers.
7. Transition; turbulent boundary layers.
8. Viscous interactions; flat plate application.
9. Heat transfer: convective heating; results for
flate plate, cone, blunt body.
10. Laminar and turbulent stagnation region
heating; radiation: effects on surface heating;
radiation from the shock layer; nocturnal
radiation.
11. High temperature effects; chemical reactions;
inviscid equilibrium flow; difference between
equilibrium flow and frozen flow.
12. Non-equilibrium flow; high temperature effects
in flow through normal and oblique shocks.
13. High temperature effects in flow through
nozzles.
14. Chemical reacting viscous flow.
Course Material
Anderson, J.D., High temperature gas dynamics,

ISBN 0070016712
123
Bertin, J.J., Hypersonic aerothermodynamics,

ISBN 1563470365
Entry qualification
AE2-115 II
AE4-170
AE4-145
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
HIGH ALTITUDE AERO

THERMODYNAMICS
M.Sc. 1
0/0/4/0
Lecture
3
Oral
No further information available at time of printing.

For more information please check the website:
http://www.hsa.lr.tudelft.nl, or contact prof.
P.G. Bakker, tel. 015 27 85907
124
AE4-151
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
NUMERICAL METHODS
IN AIRCRAFT
AERODYNAMICS 1
M.Sc. 1
2/2/0/0
Lecture
3
Take-home exam
Whole year
Dr.ir. M.I. Gerritsma
64
038
015-2785903
Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics;

Discretization principles; Finite Volume method,
Finite Difference method, Finite Element method,
panel/boundary element methods for
incompressible potential flows, integral equations,
numerical approximations; Compatibility between
velocity and pressure approximation The
convection-diffusion equation and the relation with
high Reynolds number flows; Incompressible
Navier-Stokes equations.
AE4-152
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
Set-up
Lecture, exercises take-home exam.
Course Material
M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/2
Lecture
3
Task examination
Dr.ir. B. Koren
64
033
015-2782053
B.Koren@lr.tudelft.nl
Numerical methods for the compressible Euler and

Navier-Stokes equations.
Objectives
To understand the mathematical and physical

principles of aforementioned numerical methods.
Set-up
1.
Objectives
In the first part of the course an introduction to

CFD is given. After finalizing the first part of this
course the student should be familiar with the
various discretization techniques.
The second part focuses on the relation between
the incompressibility constraint and the pressure,
and the competing contributions of convection and
diffusion. One should be able to understand and
apply the various matyematical tools in real-life
problems.
NUMERICAL METHODS
IN AIRCRAFT
AERODYNAMICS 2
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Upwind discretisation methods for hyperbolic

systems of conservation laws (approximate
Riemann solvers; flux limiters;
multidimensional upwinding).
Multigrid solution methods (nested iteration;
nonlinear multigrid; damped, directiondependent multigrid for hypersonic flow
computations).
Conditioning of flow equations for locally low
Mach numbers.
Local grid refinement.
Sparse-grid solution methods.
Level-set methods for two-phase flows.
Non-aerospace applications.
Software (data and program structures;
testing).
Course Material
Lecture Notes to be handed out
Reprints of papers and reports (to be distributed

during the course).
Entry qualification
Entry qualification
The following is recommended: Inquisitiveness,

enthusiasm and a fair dose of common sense.
Follow Up Courses
AE4-152
Assessment in form of executing a task consisting

of answering (in writing) a number of questions.
Exam also includes use of an existing computer

program for the steady, 2D Euler equations of gas
dynamics, and writing of some new subprograms
for that (other approximate Riemann solver,
alternative flux limiter, new grid transfer operators,
etc.).
Recommended literature:
P. Wesseling: Principles of Computational Fluid

Dynamics, Springer, Berlin (2000).
Ch. Hirsch: Numerical Computation of Internal

and External flows, volumes 1 and 2, Wiley,
Chichester (1988 and 1990).
R.J. Le Veque: Numerical Methods for

Conservation Laws, Birkhauser, Basel (1990).
P. Wesseling: An introduction to Multigrid

Methods, Wiley, Chichester (1992).
125
AE4-153
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
ADVANCED NUMERICAL
TECHNIQUES FOR FLUID
FLOW AND STRUCTURAL
ENGINEERING
M.Sc. 1, M.Sc. 2 and Ph.D.

0/0/2/2
Lecture
3
Take-home exam
Dr.ir. B. Koren
64
033
015-2782053
dr.ir. M.I. Gerritsma,
E.H. van Brummelen,
dr.ir. M.J.B.M. Pourqui,
dr.ir.drs. H. Bijl,
dr. S.J. Hulshoff,
dr.ir. C.W. Oosterlee
Objectives
To get a flavor of some state -of-the-art

computational methods used in fluid dynamics and
structural engineering (in aerospace engineering in
particular).
Set-up
Partitioned methods for fluid-structure interactions

(dr.ir. H. Bijl),
Conservative methods for two-fluid flows (dr.ir.
E.H. van Brummelen),
Least-squares spectral-element methods (dr.ir.
M.I. Gerritsma),
Discretization on moving domains and fluidstructure coupling (dr. S.J. Hulshoff),
Non-conservative methods for two-fluid flows
(prof.dr.ir. B. Koren),
Multigrid methods (dr.ir. C.W. Oosterlee),
Large-eddy simulation (dr.ir. M.J.B.M. Pourqui)
Course Material
Reprints of book sections, papers and reports (to

be distributed during the course).
Entry qualification
AE4-151
AE1-152
AE4-160
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AERODYNAMIC DESIGN OF
AIRCRAFT AND ADVANCED
TRANSPORTATION
SYSTEMS
M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/2
Lecture
3
Oral
Ir. L.M.M. Boermans

45
217
015-2786387
The first part of the course deals with Boundary

Layer Theory, focussing on practical application at
low speed. Subjects are: the laminar boundary
layer, the transition process, the turbulent
boundary layer, laminar and turbulent separation,
the laminar separation bubble, lift and drag.
The second part of the course starts with general
information on drag, useful for aerodynamic design
of aircraft and vehicles. The course continues with
the analysis and design of single and multicomponent airfoils, illustrated by many examples
of CFD and windtunnel results.
Aerodynamic analysis and design codes will be
demonstrated during the course.
Objectives
This course is designed to provide the student with
the basic theoretical and experimental tools for the
aerodynamic design of aircraft and advanced
transport vehicles. No previous detailed knowledge
of boundary layer theory is needed. The design
objects are illustrated by examples.
Week Arrangement
1. Boundary layers; laminar.
2. Boundary layers; turbulent.
3. Boundary layers; transition, drag calc.
4. Pressure drag, friction drag.
5. Design of single element airfoils.
6. Design of single element airfoils.
7. Design of multi element airfoils.
Course Material
Lectures Notes (AE4-160), ir. L.L.M. Boermans.

aerodynamics, 2nd ed, McGraw-Hill, ISBN
0071007679
Bertin, J.J., Hypersonic aerothermodynamics,
ISBN 1563470365
Hoerner, S.F., Fluid dynamic drag
Entry qualification
The
126
AE1-019 I
AE2-115 I
WI2029LR
AE3-130
BOUNDARY LAYER
FLOWS - A
AE4-170
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
0/4/0/0
Lecture
3
Task
64
034
015-2785349
B.W.vanOudheusden@lr.tudelft.nl
The transport equations of mass, momentum and

energy for flows with viscosity and heat
conduction: molecular transport properties: the
Navier-Stokes equations; boundary layer
simplifications.
Incompressible laminar flows: exact solutions, selfsimilar and non-similar boundary layers; numerical
calculation methods.
Week Arrangement

1. Introduction; basic concepts (Ch.1).
2. Flow equations (Ch. 2).
3. Solutions of the Navier-Stokes equations
(Ch.3).
4. Solutions of the Navier-Stokes equations
(Ch.3).
5. Laminar boundary layers (Ch.4).
Course Material
White, F.M., Viscous fluid flow, 1991 2nd ed,
Schlichting, H., Boundary layer theory, 1979

7e dr, McGraw-Hill,
Schetz, J.A., Boundary Layer analysis, 1993,
Prentice-Hall, ISBN 013086885X
Cebeci, T., Cousteix , J., Modelling and
Computation of Boundary-Layer Flows, 1999,
Horizons/Springer
Entry qualification
The
BOUNDARY LAYER
FLOWS - B
AE4-171
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
0/0/4/0
Lecture
3
Task
64
034
015-2785349
Laminar flows with thermal and compressibility

effects. Stability of laminar flows; transition.
Turbulent flows: basic concepts, law of the wall and
defect law, equilibrium boundary layers, turbulence
modelling.
Week Arrangement

1. Thermal laminar boundary layers
(Ch.4.3+4.4).
2. Thermal laminar boundary layers
(Ch.4.3+4.4).
3. Compressible laminar boundary layers
(Ch.7.1-7.5).
4. Stability and transition (Ch.5).
5. Turbulent boundary layers (Ch.6).
Course Material
White, F.M., Viscous fluid flow, 1991 2nd ed,

Schlichting, H., Boundary layer theory, 1979

7e dr, McGraw-Hill
Schetz, J.A., Boundary Layer analysis, 1993,
Prentice-Hall, ISBN 013086885X
Cebeci, T., Cousteix , J., Modelling and
Computation of Boundary-Layer Flows, 1999,
Horizons/Springer
Entry qualification
WI4025TU
AE2-115
AE3-130
WI2021LR
127
EXPERIMENTAL
METHODS IN
AERODYNAMICS
AE4-180
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
2/2/0/0
Lecture
3
Oral and essay
n/a
Dr. F. Scarano
64
036
015-2785902
Laser Doppler Anemometry, Hot Wire

Anemometry,flow visualization, , Pressure
measurements, Optical refractive methods, Particle
image velocimetry, Infra-Red Thermography.
Objectives
The student will gain insight on the most important

and up-to-date measurement techniques. The
course provides a theoretical background for the
understanding of the measurement principles. The
student will also develop a pratical knowledge and
capability to perform measurements in a dedicated
wind-tunnel set-up studying fundamental
aerodynamic problems (boundary layers,
turbulence compressible flow phenomena).
Week Arrangement

1. Introduction: why, what, how to measure in
fluid flows. Classification of measurement
techniques.
2. Laser Doppler velocimetry.
3. Laser Doppler velocimetry (cont.d).
4. Hot wire anemometry.
5. Pressure measurement probes.
6. Flow visualization techniques (smoke, oil flow).
7. Optical refractive methods shadowgraphy,
Schlieren.
8. Interferometry, Mach-Zender and shear
interferometers.
9. Particle image velocimetry: theoretical and
technical background.
10. Particle image velocimetry : hardware
components and experimental set-up.
11. Particle image velocimetry: image recording
and processing.
12. Laser diagnostics: Rayleigh scattering, Raman,
Laser induced fluorescence.
13. Quantitative Infra-Red Thermography:
fundamentals.
14. Quantitative Infra-Red Thermography: wind
tunnel applications
Course Material
Lecture notes distributed at the beginning of the

course.
Entry qualification
WB1424A is recommended.
128
AE4-201
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
FLIGHT MECHANICS
EXERCISE
M.Sc. 1
1,2,3
5
Report
All year round
ir. R.T.H. Chin
1011
015-2783992
R.T.Chin@lr.tudelft.nl
Gaining experience in conducting independent

research. This can be a literature study, a
simulation assignment or a design study. The topic
will be jointly agreeable and can be choosen in the
framework of contract work for the industry.
AE4-211
AIRCRAFT DESIGN AND

OPERATION
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
M.Sc. 1
4/2/2/0
Lecture
4
Written exam part I (part II and
III no examination
Exam. Period
2,3
Principal lecturer Ir. R. Slingerland
Building Number 62
Room Number
1020
Phone Number
015-2785332
E-mail address
R.Slingerland@lr.tudelft.nl
Add. Lectures
Part I: Aerodynamic design. Aerodynamic design

resulting from design requirements for the various
aircraft components. Interrelation with theoretical
aerodynamics, performance and flight control.
Weight considerations. Flight safety and
regulations.
7.
Contr ol surface design. Lift spoilers. Control

surface actuation. Slipstream effects. Engine
intakes. Engine exhausts. (Ch. 33-38).
8. Thrust reversers. Subsonic cruise drag. (Ch.
39-40).
9. Brequets range equation. Aircraft weight. (Ch.
41-42).
10. Design rules and regulations. Flight safety in
civil aviation. (Ch. 43-44).
11. Aircraft Performance Regulations. (Ch. 45).
Course Material
Lecture notes Part I Aerodynamic design, Part II

Aircraft operation, and Part III Aerodynamics of
combat aircraft.
Entry qualification
AE2-115 I
AE3-302
Part II: Aircraft economics. Flight operations.

Part III: Aerodynamics of combat aircraft. History.
Manoeuvrability, inertia coupling, aerodynamics of
highly swept wings and slender bodies, vortex lift,
high-lift aerodynamics, supersonic flight, highspeed intakes and exhausts, afterbodies.
Objectives
Part I: The lectures aims to provide insight into:
- the requirements to be imposed upon pressure
distributions over various components of modern
transonic civil transport aircraft.
- the relations between geometry and pressure
distribution.
- the integration of these insights with stability and
control and weight considerations, as well as with
practical limiting conditions resulting from the
operational use of the aircraft.
Set-up
The lecture part I runs during the first and second

quarter, part II and III during the third quarter.
Parts II and III hold no examination.
Week Arrangement

1. Intro. Aircraft classification. Design
requirements. Design process. Geometry.
(Ch.1-6)
2. Velocity and pressure distributions. Boundary
layer theories. Separated flow. Supervelocities,
geometry and pressure coefficient on nonlifting and lifting components. (Ch. 7-14).
3. Pressure distributions on airfoils. Supercritical
airfoils. Buffet onset. Reynolds effects on high
speed airfoils. Low speed stalling (Ch.15-19).
4. Swept wing concept. Swept wing aircraft. Root
and tip effects. Finite wings.. (Ch. 20-23).
5. Examples of swept wing design. Maximum lift
with high-lift devices. Stalling characteristics
of aircraft. (Ch. 24-26).
6. Lift-drag ratio take-off and landing. Buffet
boundary. Flight between Mmo and Md. Tail
surface design. Horizontal tail surface. Vertical
tail surface. (Ch. 27-32).
129
AE4-212
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AIRCRAFT
PERFORMANCE
OPTIMIZATION
M.Sc. 1
4/0/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
1,2
Dr.ir. H.G. Visser
62
1022
015-2782095
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Background and outline of course; relation

with basic courses in flight mechanics.
Mathematical notation and review of some
basic mathematical facts; foundations of
unconstrained parameter optimization.
Foundations of constrained parameter
optimization; applications in flight mechanics.
Introduction to optimal control theory;
problem formulation; open-loop and closedloop control; system classification; some
intrinsic system properties.
Variational approach to dynamic optimization;
transversality conditions; first integral;
elementary examples.
Minimum Principe van Pontryagin; Hamilton's
Principe in mechanics; numerical solution
techniques.
Synthesis of optimal closed-loop control; the
Optimality Principle of Bellman; dynamic
programming; the Hamilton-Jacobi-Bellman
equation.
Graphical interpretation of the Minimum
Principle; Jacobi condition; linear-quadratic
(LQ) problems; the matrix-Riccati equation;
autopilot design via LQ-synthesis.
Bang-bang and singular optimal control
problems.
Application of optimal control theory to
trajectory optimization problems in
atmospheric flight mechanics; equations of
motion; reduced-order modeling;
transformation of variables.
Reduced-order models for solving the
"Minimum Time-to-Climb" problem;
introduction to the energy-state concept.
(Approximate) solutions to the "Minimum
Time-to-Climb" problem; solution accuracy
assessment.
Optimal flight profiles for commercial airline
operations.
Examples of flight optimization results
established in the ongoing research program.
Objectives
The course aims at providing the foundations as

well applications of static and dynamic
optimization. The emphasis is on practical
applications in flight mechanics. However, also
applications in related (possibly non-aerospace)
fields are given. In view of the fact that the
numerical resolution of practical optimal control
problems is usually far from trivial, specific
130
attention is given to computational aspects and

system model simplifications.
Week Arrangement
See detailed description of course
Course Material
Dictaat D-9A, volgnummers: 10092, 10093.
Ruijgrok, G.J.J., Elements of airplane performance,

Delft, 1996, Delft University Press
Students that have successfully completed the

course AE4-212 are eligible to enrol in the AE4212P computer exercise.
AE4-212P
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
EXERCISE AIRCRAFT
PERFORMANCE
OPTIMIZATION
M.Sc. 1
2,3,4
1
Computer assignments
Dr.ir. H.G. Visser
62
1022
015-2782095
This exercise aims at providing insights and skills in

the numerical resolution of realistic optimal control
problems in atmospheric and space flight
mechanics.
Objectives
The exercise helps to broaden the understanding of

numerical optimization techniques by applying the
theoretical knowledge of AE4-212 to practical static
and dynamic trajectory optimization problems.
Set-up
The exercise comprises a series of small computer

assignments. To solve each assignment, a
computer program has to be developed which
implements a given optimisation technique. The
programs are written in FORTRAN and run on the
CRAY mainframe computer. The exercise is
concluded with a written report.
Course Material
Set of assignments and supporting material

Dictaat D-9A, volgnummers 10092, 10093
Ruijgrok, G.J.J., Elements of airplane performance,

Delft, 1996, Delft University Press
Entry qualification
To participate, students have to sign up for this

exercise in groups of 2. Grading is based on the
quality of the written report.
AE4-213
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
ROTORCRAFT
MECHANICS
M.Sc. 1
0/4/0/0
Lecture
3
Written report
Arbitrarily
62
1015
015-2785301
mw. M.D. Pavel MSc
General lay-out of helicopte rs, performance

calculations during hover, vertical climb and
descent and forward flight. Helicopter blade
dynamics. Introduction to helicopter control
characteristics: symmetrical equations of motion
handling- and control properties. Introduction to
aeroelasticity of rotorcraft.
Objectives
1. An example of the synthesis of a large diversity

of subject areas, aimed at the analysis of a
complicated technical object.
2. Introduction to aerodynamics, flight mechanics
and aeroelasticity of helicopters, which enables the
student to independently study more advanced
literature.
Set-up
Lecture series, which is followed by a simulation
assignment of a typical helicopter maneuver. If
properly executed a helicopter flying lesson is
given in which amongst other things this maneuver
is flown. The aim is to demonstrate the possibilities
and limitations of theoretical models by comparing
them to the - much more complex - real world.
Week Arrangement
1. Lay-out of the helicopter. Qualitative
description of the rotor and control systems.
Definition of the tip plane, control plane, hub
plane and several co-ordinate systems. Blade
element analysis of hoever performance.
2. Performance calculations of vertical flight.
Turbulent Wake State. Autorotation.
Performance calculations in forward flight.
Blade element analysis. Glauert's hypothesis.
Comparison with performance of fixed wing
aircraft.
3. Flapping dynamics of centrally hinged rotors.
Equations of motion of helicopter with only
pitch degree of freedom. Stability and control.
4. Flapping dynamics in forward flight. Symmetric
equations of motion. Stability and control in
forward flight.
5. Trim conditions, linearised equations of
motions. Representation in the complex plane
and comparison with fixed wing aircraft.
6. Influence of semi-rigid rotorsystems on the
equations of motion and on the characteristic
handling characteristics.
131
7.
Flap/Torsion blade dynamics. Divergence.

Classical blade flutter, Structural lay-up to
avoid flutter. Introduction to ground resonance
instability.
Course Material
Rotorcraft performance, reader 9B part I
Entry qualification
AE1-019 IV
AE2-202 I
AE4-214
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AIRCRAFT
PROPULSION, NOISE
AND POLLUTANT
EMISSIONS
M.Sc. 1
0/0/4/0
Lecture
3
Written, "open book"
3,5
Prof.ir. G.J.J. Ruijgrok
62
1012
015-2782067
G.J.J.Ruijgrok@lr.tudelft.nl
Review of the design and off-design performance of

aircraft propulsion systems (jet and propeller
propulsion). Fundamentals, quantities and
procedures necessary for describing the features of
emission, propagation of aircraft noise. Noise
measurements and noise certification. Indices of
total noise exposure and noise zoning. Aviation and
air pollution. Combustion of hydrocarbon fuel and
formation of undesired combustion products by
aero-engines. Emission certification set by ICAO.
Nature of the amosphere and possible harmful
effects of engine emissions on the environment.
The performance of a low NOx flight.
Objectives
Providing an understanding of the relationship

between aviation and the environment. Study of
the basic topics forming the problem, namely
propulsion and flight operations, acoustics,
atmospheric science and man-made emissions due
to fossil fuel combustion.
Set-up
The course consists of a series of lectures and is

concluded by an interim examination, where notes
and books may be consulted (open book
examination).
Week Arrangement

1. Essentials of flight mechanics and propulsion.
Brake power and thrust of piston engine and
propeller. Efficiencies and fuel consumption.
Propeller types, performance and effective
thrust. Measuring thrust.
2. Performance prediction of turbojet, turboprop
and turbofan engine. Definition of thrust for jet
propulsion. Measurement of thrust. Variables
describing the operating condition. Design and
off-design performance. Performance
characteristics (effect of airspeed, flight
altitude, thrust setting and air temperature).
3. Definition of sound, noise and noise
annoyance. Summary of vibrational motion.
Emission and immission standards. Noise load
and noise contours. Operational measures to
reduce noise impact. Sound waves and sound
fields. Effective sound pressure, frequency and
wavelength. Diffraction and refraction of
sound. Sound power and intensity. Sound
132
pressure level. Addition of sound pressure

levels.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Directional patterns and elementary sources.

Discrete, random, continuous and transient
sounds. Doppler effect. Limits of audibility.
Derivation of the wave equation for
progressive waves. Velocity potential.
Properties of plane and spherical waves.
Helmholtz equation.
Directional properties of monopole, dipole and
quadrupole sources and their relation to
propeller and aerodynamic jet noise.
Developement of the turbo-engine as a noise
source. Propagation of sound in the
atmosphere. Inverse-distance law and
atmospheric attenuation. Refraction and
transmission of sound at an interface;
reflection factor and "transmission loss".
Refraction of sound rays by vertical
temperature and wind gradients. Frequency
analysis and frequency spectra. The
phenomenon of ground reflection and lateral
attenuation. Perception of noise. Weighted and
time-integrated noise measures. Noise load
and noise zoning. Aircraft noise certification.
Combustion and combustion products from
burning of kerosine. Emission standards for
turbojet and turbofan engines. Major
environmental concerns. The vertical stability
of the atmosphere. Aircraft contrails.
Course Material
Ruijgrok, G.J.J., Elements of aviation

acoustics, Delft, 1993, Delft University Press,
ISBN 9062758991
Prof.ir. G.J.J.Ruijgrok, D.M.van Paassen,
Atmosphere, Air Pollution and Engine
Emissions, Delft University of Technology,
Faculty of Aerospace Engineering,
Memorandum M-816, 1998 (in Dutch).

Press,
Houtman, C.J., Visser, W.P., Gasturbines,
1998
Wittenberg, H., Prediction of Off-design
performances of turbojet and turbofan
engines, Paper 4 in AGARD CP 242 (1977)
Entry qualification
The
AE1-019 I
AE2-202 I
WB4280
Also recommended:
H. Cohen, G.F.C. Rogers and H.I.H.

Saravanamuttoo, "Gas Turbine Theory", 1972.
Th. van Holten, P.R. Vos and G.N. Smits,

"Applied Thermodynamics for Flight Mechanics
and Propulsion", Delft University of
Technology, Faculty of Aerospace Engineering,
2000.
133
INTRODUCTION TO
ADAPTIVE
AEROSTRUCTURES
AE4-215
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
10.01
015-2789196
r.m.barrett@lr.tudelft.nl
Adaptive Aerostructures: nomenclature of the field,

basic material types and behavior including shapememory alloy, electrorheological,
magnetorheological, magnetostrictive and
ferroelectric materials, elementary methods of
modeling. Basic structural building blocks including
antagonistic wire arrangements, extenders, stacks,
benders and torque plates. Integration with aircraft
structural elements, electrical driving systems and
entire aircraft systems including helicopters,
missiles, munitions and UAVs.
Objectives
The course is intended to impart a working

knowledge of basic adaptive material types,
strengths, weaknesses, analytical modeling
techniques and elementary methods of integration
with generic structural elements. The course will
introduce the student to the challenges of electrical
power delivery and control and will lay out several
different configurations of successful adaptive
aerostructures that have made it into flight. The
course concludes with an overview of some of the
latest aerospace programs and research areas.
Week Arrangement
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Introduction and Nomenclature, Shape

Memory Alloys
Electro/Magnetorheological Fluids and
Magnetostrictors
Piezoelectrics and Ferroelectrics
Stacks, Extenders, Benders
Shear Panels and Torque-Plates
Electrical Driving Systems and Circuit
Architecture, Aircraft Applications
Missile, Munition Applications Rotary-Wing
Aircraft and UAV Applications, Limitations,
Manufacturing Considerations, Future Trends
and Programs
Course Material
Lecture Notes by R.M. Barrett, Introduction to

Adaptive Aerostructures.
Entry qualification
The
AE2-522 I
AE2-522 II
AE2-914
AE3-525
134
M.Sc. 1
2/0/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
1,2
Dr. R.M. Barrett
1.
Recommended literature
Lines, M. E. and Glass, A. M., Principles and

Applications of Ferroelectrics and Related
Materials
Rogacheva, N. N., The Theory of Piezoelectric
Shells and Plates
Clard, R. L., Adaptive Structures: Dynamics
and Control
Srinivasan, A. V. and McFarland, D., Smart
Structures: Analysis and Design
Ghandi, M. V., and Thompson, B. S., Smart
Materials and Structures
Guran, A. and Inman, D., Smart Structures,
Nonlinear Dynamics, and Control
Otsuka, K. & Wayman, C. M., Shape Memory
Materials
This lecture is a guest lecture given in the

academic year 2003-2004 only
AE4-251 /
CT5147
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
WIND ENERGY
M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/2
Lecture + assignment
3
Assignment, report, presentation
4
Prof.dr.ir. G.A.M. van Kuik
23
t.b.d.
015-2785170
G.A.M.vankuik@ct.tudelft.nl
Objectives
Introduction to wind energy application and design

of wind energy conversion systems. Integration of
knowledge from various fields of engineering on
wind turbine design.
Course Material
Walker, J.F, Jenkins, , N., Wind energy

technology, New York,1997, Wiley, ISBN 0471-96044-6
Wind energy Explained, ManWell, McGowan,
Rogers. It is possible to lend the book at the
secretary of wind energy, for 20 Euro deposit.
Lecture notes
Recommended literature: Guided tour at
www.windpower.dk
Entry qualification
The following is recommended: At least: bachelor
phase courses + detailed knowledge of one of the
following disciplines: (aero) dynamics, electrical
conversion, offshoretechnology, control, design.
This is a multidisciplinary course, attended by
students from various departments (LR, ITS, CITG,
OCP).
Set-up
The course combines introductory lectures and

application and extension of knowledge-base by
designing (components/subsystems of) a wind
energy converter in a multidisciplinary team.
Week Arrangement
Lecture and study materialLecture and study

material
1. Introduction, status, technology, market, wind
climate, Weibull, windshear, turbulence.
2. Momentum theory, power coefficient, power
curve, BEM, airfoils, airfoil/blade design.
Annual yield, farm efficiency, capacity factor,
dynamics, principles of modeling
3. Design assignment I: rotor
4. Control strategies, safety, pitch/stall. Drive
train, generator characteristics, fixed vs
variable rpm, direct drive
5. Presentation of assignment 1: rotor design
assignment II: Drive train and generator
6. Dynamics, principals of modelling, imprtant
degrees of freedom and excitations. Campbell
diagram, relation between noise requirements,
rpm, tower and blade freqency
7. Presentation of assignment II: Drive train and
generator, Design assignment III: Dynamics
8. stiffness, strength and fatigue as design
drivers, GRP fatigue. Design considerations
9. Presentation of assignment III: Dynamics
Design assignment IV: Fatigue
10. Offshore aspects, support structures,
maintenace and installation techniques, social
and environmental aspects: noise, visual, bird
impact
11. Presentation of assignment IV: Fatigue.
Design assignment V: Control
12. cost breakdown of turbine, -park, calculation
of kWh costs, Invited speaker
13. Presentation of assignment V: Control, Design
assignment VI: Economy
14. Presentation of assignment VI: Economy,
Evaluation of course
135
AIR TRAFFIC
MANAGEMENT
AE4-294
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
2/2/0/0
Lecture
3
Oral
3
Dr. F.J. van Schaik
NLR Amsterdam
020-5113208
Schaik@nlr.nl
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Definitions, different services, organisational

aspects (worldwide, European, Dutch), System
changes.
Present Communication-, Navigation-,
Surveillance systems, (CNS), Monopuls SSR,
RNP.
Airspace structure, procedures, flight progress.
Lay out ATC systems, Dutch ATC systems
(AAA). Auxilliary systems, ARTAS.
Flight plan processing, Radar data processing,
Trajectory prediction, conflict detection, STCA
function.
New developments: Data communication
(SATCOM, SSR-S, VHF, HF), RNAV, SATNAV,
MLS, ADS (-B, -C).
TCAS, Fuel saving procedures, FMS
Approach/departure automation, Airspace
Management, Surface Movement Guidance and
Control Systems (SMGCS), Flow control, Free
Flight (FF), Wake vortices.
Objectives
This course is designed to give the students an

appreciation of the current problems encountered,
throughout the world, with emphasis on the core
area of Europe, in preparing the existing ATC
systems for a predicted traffic increase of a factor
of 2 by the year 2025. Emerging technologies will
be described, with the associated implementation
aspects like human factors, European political
factors, airline policy, EUROCONTROLs EATMP, etc.
Emphasis is on functional integration of systems
rather than on pure technical aspects of individual
components.
Course Material
H.J.Berghuis van Woortman, W Aardoom, Air

Traffic Management, Report LR 4-94, Delft
University of Technology, 2000
AE4-300
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
CAPITA SELECTA
FLIGHT MECHANICS
AND FLIGHT DYNAMICS
M. Sc. 1
n.a.
Self-study
9
To be arranged
Dr.ir. M Mulder (coordinator)
62
028
015-2789471
M.Mulder@lr.tudelft.nl
This course provides a solid and comprehensive

introduction to the mechanics, dynamics and
performance characteristics of aircraft.
Introduction: flight mechanics, aerodynamics,
propulsion and performance, flight dynamics,
stability and control, flying qualities.
Definitions & basic concepts: definitions, reference
frames, transformations, standard atmosphere,
non-linear equations of motion of aircraft.
Aerodynamic basis: one-dimensional steady flow
equations, aerodynamic coefficients, lift and drag,
airfoil and wing characteristics, the lift-drag polar,
parabolic lift-drag polar.
Flight mechanics and performance: performance in
steady symmetric flight, altitude effects, symmetric
climb and descent, gliding flight, turning
performance, cruise performance, propulsion.
Flight dynamics: linearized aircraft equations of
motion, longitudinal stability and control
derivatives, static stability in steady symmetrical
flight, relation between static stability and control
displacements and forces, lateral stability and
control derivatives, lateral stability and control in
steady rectilinear and curved flight conditions,
analysis of the symmetrical and asymmetrical
characteristic motions.
Simulation: simulation of the aircraft symmetric
and asymmetric equations of motion.
Objectives
To introduce the student without a BSc degree in

Aerospace Engineering in the field of aircraft
performance and flight dynamics. This foundation
knowledge is essential when graduating in subjects
related to flight control, avionics, air traffic
management, flight simulation and human factors.
Set-up

material listed below and to take part in the
abridged version of the Exercise Flight Dynamics
and Simulation (ae3-302P). If necessary, it is
possible to attend the BSc courses ae2-202 I
(Airplane Performance II) and ae3-302 (Flight
Dynamics I) from which the course material has
been derived. The student has to consult the
course coordinator (dr ir M. Mulder,
m.mulder@lr.tudelft.nl) in order to set
arrangements for the concluding exam.
136
Course Material

Press,
J.A. Mulder, W.H.J.J. van Staveren, J.C. van
der Vaart, Flight Dynamics, Lecture notes AE3302
Cook, M.V., Principles in flight dynamics,

London, 1997, Edward Arnold, ISBN
0340632003
Collinson, R.P.G., Introduction to avionics,
1996, Chapman & Hall,
Prerequisite
Bsc degree in Electrical Engineering, Mechanical
Engineering, Applied physics or Marine Technology.

MSc variant Aerospace Control and Simulation or
Flight Mechanics and Propulsion. The student is
advised to contact the course co-ordinator to
discuss course details.
AE4-301
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
DY NAMICS AND
CONTROL OF AIRCRAFT
M.Sc. 1
0/0/4/0
Contact lecturer
3
Written or computer exercise
2,3
Ir. S. Bennani
62
026
015-2782674
S.Bennani@lr.tudelft.nl
Classical control is still predominantly used in

aerospace industry for the design and analysis of
automatic flight control systems. Various exisiting
control systems such as Control Augmentation
Systems, Generic Autopilots, Fly -by-wire systems
and many other control systems are reviewed in
detail. The emphasis of the course lies in
demonstrating through application of classical
frequency domain and state space techniques how
to design systems fulfilling the requirements
imposed by the aviation authorities with highlights
on understanding the benefits and limitations of
such systems.
Objectives
The objective of this course is to give an
introduction to flying and handling quality criteria.
In orde obtain adequate flight control systems
It is not only important to be able to design control
systems but it is also vital in order to obtain
adequate and meaningful flying qualities to
understand the physics of the presented criteria.
We shall emphasize in getting direct hands on
computer skill using Matlab and Simulink for the
implemtation, design and analysis of realistic flight
control systems.
Set-up
There is either the possibility to take a written

examination at the end of the course. The other
possibility is to make a computer exercise. Te
exercise can be conducted in teams of two and one
report has to be delivered at the end of the course
period.
The exercise consists of the implementation of the
non-linear equations of motion for rigid body
aircraft dynamics within Simulink. The students will
then perform non linear and linear system analysis
. Finally a control system must be designed that
satisfies certain desired requirements.
Week Arrangement
1.
2.
Review of the wind, stability, body and

geodetic frame of references etc. Non-linear
equations of motion of rigid aircraft. Trim and
linearization of the non-linear equations of
motion. The linearized longitudinal aircraft
dynamics using a state-space representation
and the equivalent frequency domain form
(transfer functions and frequency response
functions).
Review frequency domain systems, Laplace
transformation, Block diagram manipulation,
137
Bode, Nyquist and Nichols representation. Gain

and Phase Margins.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Classical PID Control and some Auto Pilot

design applications
Classical Root Locus Control with applications
to autopilot design, Yaw & Pitch dampers,
Static stability Augmentation systems, (AoA,
sideslip, Nz feedback loop)
System Performance Specifications, The
military specifications (MIL-SPEC CAP)
handling quality criteria. The Gibson Dropback
and Phase-Rate handling quality criteria to
avoid Pilot Induced Oscillations. The design of
a pitch-rate command system for obtaining
desired handling qualities.
Basic Autopilot Systems:
Basic Longitudinal AP Modes (Pitch attitude
hold, altitude hold, airspeed or mach hold,
Control Wheel steering)
Lateral AP Modes (Bank angle hold mode,
heading angle hold model, turn rate control,
turn coordination).
Longitudinal and Lateral-directional Navigation
Modes (ILS, Flare, Localizer hold, VOR hold
mode)
Course Material
Cook, M.V., Principles in flight dynamics,

London, 1997, Edward Arnold, ISBN
0340632003
Course material to support the exercises will
be posted on the blackboard.
Recommended: R.C. Nelson, Flight stability
and automatic control, ISBN 0-07-115838-3
Brockhaus, R., Flugregelung, Berlin, 1994,

Springer, ISBN 3540554165
Stevens, B.L., Lewis, F.L., Aircraft control and
simulation, New York, 1992, Wiley, ISBN
0471613975
Roskam, J., Airplane flight dynamics and
control Part II, ISBN 1-8845885-18-7
Entry qualification
AE3-302
AE3-359
Follow Up Courses
AE4-303
WB2415
Some chairs may require students to perform a

laboratory exercise or practical in conjunction with
this course.
138
AE4-301P
EXERCISE FLIGHT
DYNAMICS AND
SIMULATION
AE4-303
ROBUST CONTROL
M.Sc. 1
3
1
Exercise
At the end of the second
dimester
Principal lecturer Ir. S. Bennani
Building Number 62
Room Number
026
Phone Number
015-2782674
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
Year
Period
Course Method
M.Sc. 1
0/0/4/0
Lectures altered with assisted
computer exercises
4
Take-home assignment
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
The goal is to design a controller using classical

control theory. The control design is a Pitch-Rate
Command-Attitude Hold Command and Stability
Augmentation system.
Objectives
To become familiar with classical controllers and

their design, and to gain insight in handling
qualities of open-loop and controlled aircraft.
Set-up
The exercise is a home-work assignment to be

solved using MATLAB and/or Simulink.
A follow up of the design exercise given in AE4301.
Week Arrangement
Course Material
Cook, M.V., Principles in flight dynamics, London,

1997, Edward Arnold, ISBN 0340632003
Entry qualification
Follow Up Courses
AE4-303
Course material to support the computer exercises

will be posted on the blackboard.
Hand-in exercise and a report of the design of a
controller using classical control theory. The report
must be handed in at the end of the second
dimester.
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
Ir. S. Bennani
62
026
015-2782674
Many of the evolving aircraft configurations for

future civil and military aircraft present
considerable technical challenges in the field of
flight control system design. The use of innovative
control effectors such as thrust vectoring, blowing
and suction devices will be required to deliver
improved agility and performance extending
traditional flight envelopes. These new
configurations require robust multivariable control
methods for the integration of multiple controls in
all axes.
Objectives
Provide the students the skills to design modern
robust flight control systems using H-infinity and
Mu-synthesis.
A great emphasis is placed on the implementation
of the theory in software examples. Students will
learn to work with advanced software tools as MUTOOLS.
Set-up

1. The Gain and Phase margin, signal and system
norms, H-2 and H-infinity norms, the Nyquist
and Small Gain stability criteria.
2. Nominal performance of SISO systems,
robust stability of SISO-systems, robust
performance of SISO-systems.
3. The general interconnection structure and the
definition of the structured singular value Mu.
4. Uncertainty modeling using Linear Fractional
Transformations (LFTs).
5. Definition of robust performance for
multivariable uncertain systems.
6. H-infinity and Mu-Synthesis.
7. Case Studies of robust flight control system
design for aeronautical systems
Course Material
Skogestad, S., Postlethwaite, I., Multivariable

feedback control analysis and design, Wiley,
ISBN 0471943304
Bates, D., Robust Multivariable Control of
Aerospace Systems, Delft, 2002, DUP science
Doyle, J.C, [et al], Feedback control theory,

1992, MacMillan, ISBN 0029464080
139
Maciejowski, J.M., Multivariable feedback

design, 1989, Addison-Wesley, ISBN 0-20118243-2
Entry qualification
The
AE3-302
AE3-359
AE4-301
AE4-301P
Follow Up Courses
WB2415
WB2416
AE4-361
It is strongly recommended to have participated in

AE4-301 and AE4-301p.
S.Bennani, Lecture notes on multivariable flight
control system design and analysis. Those notes
will be handed out on the blackboard system.
Hand-in exercise and a report of the design of a
controller using robust control theory. The report
must be handed in at the end of the third dimester
140
AE4-304
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AIRCRAFT RESPONSES
TO ATMOSPHERIC
TURBULENCE
M.Sc. 1
0/0/4/0
Lecture
3
Written
4,5
62
031
015-2785378
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.Introduction (atmospheric turbulence does

affect aircraft responses, motivation of
importance).
2.Scalar stochastic processes (probability
theory, joint probability density functions,
covariance functions, stochastic processes,
ergodic processes).
3.Spectral analysis of stochastic processes in
continuous time (Fourier analysis, power
spectral densities, analysis of dynamic linear
system responses in frequency domain).
4.Spectral analysis of stochastic processes in
discrete time (discrete time Fourier transform,
Fast Fourier Transform, spectral estimatessmoothing).
5.Multivariable stochastic processes
(covariance function matrix and spectral
density matrix, multi-variable system
responses in the frequency and in the time
domain).
6.Description of atmospheric turbulence
(physical mechanisms, the two fundamental
correlation functions, von Krmn en Dryden
spectra).
7.Symmetric aircraft response to atmospheric
turbulence (symmetrical aerodynamic forces
and moments due to turbulence, gust
derivatives, equations of motion of aircraft
flying in symmetrical atmospheric turbulence).
8.Asymmetric aircraft response to atmospheric
turbulence (elementary two-dimensional fields
of turbulence, asymmetrical aerodynamic
forces and moments, asymmetrical gust
derivatives, equations of motion).
9.Etkins 4 point model (Etkins approach and
comparison with theory in chapters 7 and 8).
Course Material
J.A. Mulder, J.C. van der Vaart, Aircraft responses
to atmospheric turbulence, Lecture notes AE4-304 ,
August 1998.
Newland, D.E, Random vibrations and spectral

analysis, New York, 1984 3rd. ed, Longman, ISBN
0582215846
Entry qualification
AE3-302
AE4-301
Follow Up Courses
AE4-361
The written examination (stochastic process

theory, chapters 1-5) is followed by an assignment
(related to the theory of chapters 6-9).
this course.
Objectives
Understanding the physics of aircraft responses to

atmospheric turbulence, derivation of equations of
motion of symmetrical and asymmetrical responses
to atmospheric turbulence, introduction to
stochastic processes.
Set-up
Lectures, MATLAB demonstrations and small

assignments (voluntary).
Week Arrangement
See Detailed Description of Course
141
AE4-304P
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
EXERCISE AIRCRAFT
RESPONSES TO
ATMOSPHERIC
TURBULENCE
M.Sc. 1
4
1
Take-home exam
62
031
015-2785378
Application of MATLAB software to aircraft specific

turbulence responses:
1. Calculation of aircraft time-histo ries due to
both symmetrical and asymmetrical,
longitudinal, lateral and vertical turbulence
components.
2. Calculation of analytical transfer functions,
frequency response functions, and auto- and
cross Power Spectral Density (PSD) functions
of state- and output variables (e.g.
acceleration levels).
3. Numerical calculation of frequency response
functions, and auto- and cross Power Spectral
Density (PSD) functions of state- and outputvariables.
4. Calculation of (co)variance- and correlationfunctions of aircraft state -and outputvariables.
5. The effects of simple (to be designed)
Automatic Flight Control Systems on the
aircrafts responses while flying in a turbulent
atmosphere.
Objectives
Introduction to both time- and frequency-domain

identification and simulation techniques using
MATLAB. The techniques are applied to example
aircraft (amongst others Cessna Ce500 Citation I).
Set-up
Take-home assignment.
Course Material
Lecture Notes AE4-304, by J.A. Mulder and

J.C. van der Vaart, Aircraft responses to
atmospheric turbulence, Lecture notes AE4304, August 1998.
MATLAB software for the take-home
assignment/exercise, Ir. W.H.J.J. van
Staveren.
Newland, D.E, Random vibrations and spectral

analysis, New York, 1984 3rd. ed, Longman, ISBN
0582215846
Entry qualification
AE3-302
AE4-301
142
Follow Up Courses
AE4-361
The take-home exercise should be handed in at the
end of the third dimester.
AE4-305
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
SPACECRAFT ATTITUDE
DYNAMICS AND
CONTROL
M.Sc. 1
0/4/0/0
Lecture
3
2
Dr. Q.P. Chu
62
027
015-2783586
Q.P.Chu@lr.tudelft.nl
This lecture gives the fundamentals and advances

of spacecraft attitude dynamics and control. The
following contents are taught during the course
period.
1. Introduction to spacecraft attitude dynamics
and control
2. Rotational kinematics
3. Rigid body dynamics
4. Attitude sensors and attitude determination
techniques
5. Attitude control actuators
6. Single- and dual-spin stabilisation
7. Gravity gradient stabilisation
8. Three axis active attitude control
9. Nonlinear control of spacecraft attitude
10. Model predictive control
11. Matlab examples and exercises
Objectives
Students will be able to acquire classical and

advanced techniques for spacecraft attitude
control.
Week Arrangement
Week 1. Introduction to spacecraft dynamics and

control, Rotational kinematics
Week 2. Rigid body dynamics
Week 3. Modelling the spacecraft environment and
external disturbance torques
Week 4. Spacecraft attitude determination and
control actuatore
Wee 5. Spin and gravity gradient stabilisation
stabilisation
Week 6. Three axis active attitude control(1)
Week 7. Advance control techniques and Matlab
examples and exercises
Course Material
Q.P. Chu, Spacecraft Attitude Dynamics and
Control, Handout lecture notes, Faculty of
Aerospace Engineering, Delft University of
Technology.
Sidi, M.J., Spacecraft dynamics and control, a

practical engineering approach, Cambridge,
1997, Cambridge Univ. Press, ISBN
0521550726
Wie, B., Space vehicle dynamics and control,
1998, AIAA Education Series, AIAA Inc.
143
Entry qualification
Follow Up Courses
AE4-305P
AE4-399
Examination: (2 study points):

A take-home exercise of a spacecraft attitude
control system with specified requirements and
MATLAB simulations will be asked to complete after
the course. Students are asked to finish the
exercise in 8 weeks after the course. The control
technique to be applied in this exercise will be
based on classical linear control theory only. The
advance control techniques, such as nonlinear
dynamic invertion and model predictive control, will
be applied in the practical exercise course AE4305P.
144
AE4-305P
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
SPACECRAFT ATTITUDE
CONTROL SYSTEM
DESIGN EXERCISE
Follow Up Courses
AE4-399
M.Sc. 1
2
1
2
Dr. Q.P. Chu
62
027
015-2783586
AE4-305P is a practical exercise project for the

course on Spacecraft Attitude Dynamics and
Control (AE4-305). Students will have an option to
finish the course in conjunction with this practical
exercise. The total amount of credits awarded by
taking both exercises from AE4-305 and AE4-305P
will be three.
Specified practical problems of spacecraft attitude
control system design will be considered in this
exercise. Students have to deal with, for instance,
real sensor and actuator errors, uncertainties of
spacecraft models, uncertainties of external
disturbances, different attitude control modes and
switching, and fault tolerant control system design.
Advance control techniques, such as fuzzy control,
predictive control, adaptive control, nonlinear
dynamic inversion, nonlinear state and parameter
estimation, which have been taught in the course
AE4-305 will have to be applied to solve specified
problem.
Objectives
Students will be able to acquire keeper knowledge
about modern control techniques and applications
to spacecraft attitude control problems.
Set-up
Week Arrangement
Students will be asked to finish the practical

exercise assignment in 12 weeks after the course
AE4-305.
Course Material
Q.P. Chu, Spacecraft Attitude Dynamics and

Control, Handout lecture notes, Faculty of
Aerospace Engineering, Delft University of
Technology.
Sidi, M.J., Spacecraft dynamics and control, a

practical engineering approach, Cambridge,
1997, Cambridge Univ. Press, ISBN
0521550726
Wie, B., Space vehicle dynamics and control,
1998, AIAA Education Series, AIAA Inc.
Entry qualification
AE4-305
AE3-359
145
AEROSPACE HUMAN
FACTORS
AE4-360
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
0/0/0/4
Lecture
3
Written
4,5
62
024
015-2785370
dr.ir. M Mulder
See the week arrangement below.
Objectives
This course focuses on the various aspects of

actual and future aircraft cockpit human-machine
interfaces. It provides an extensive theoretical as
well as practical knowledge on the specific
characteristics of human behavior such as human
perception, human mental processing, cognitive
factors, and the role of the human pilot in manual
and supervisory control tasks. Design from a
human-centered perspective is emphasized.
Set-up
The theoretical lecture series is accompanied by a

mandatory practical assignment (AE4-360p) where
students can get hands-on experience with many
important human factors aspects of designing
human-machine interfaces in aerospace.
Week Arrangement

1. Introduction ; the Skills-Rules-Knowledge
taxonomy.
2. Manual control: the Crossover model.
3. Manual control: multi-loop pilot models and
pilot model identification.
4. Neuromuscular system ; flight deck control
devices.
5. Vestibular system.
6. Visual system ; two-dimensional displays.
7. Visual system : three-dimensional displays.
8. Supervisory control.
9. Human error.
10. Abstraction hierarchy ; multi-level flow
modeling.
11. Complexity and cognition.
12. Workload.
13. Ecological interface design.
14. Guest lecture.
Course Material
A reader is available with a collection of 14

landmark publications in the field of human
factors engineering.
A bundle is available with copies of all the
overhead-sheets used in the course.
Wickens, C.D., Engineering Psychology and Human

Performance, HarperCollins Publishers,
146
Entry qualification
The
AE3-302
AE3-359
AE4-393
AE4-301, AE4-304
The guest lecture is given by a human factors
expert from outside the university (e.g. NLR, TNO).
AEROSPACE HUMAN
FACTORS PROJECT
AE4-360P
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AE4-361
FLIGHT SIMULATION
M.Sc. 1
4
1
Report
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Dr.ir. M Mulder
62
028
015-2789471
dr.ir. M.M. van Paassen
M.Sc. 1
0/0/0/4
Lecture
4
Construction of a working flight
simulation and essay/report
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
In general, two types of experiments are done.

First, classical pilot tracking tasks such as
compensatory and pursuit tracking with various
display and control configurations. Second, typical
psycho-physical experiments such as the accuracy
and speed of estimating the egomotion through a
virtual environment. It depends on the availability
of the facilities what experiments are conducted.
The human-machine laboratory, a fixed base flight
simulator, is typically the main platform of the
project.
Objectives
Practical experience in performing human-machine

interaction experiments, practical experience in
evaluation of the results, application of statistical
theory.
Set-up
During the first afternoon some demonstrations will

be given of subjects treated during the lectures.
Then, during the following three afternoons,
students have to work together in groups (3
students per group) to set-up, conduct and
evaluate a human-in-the-loop experiment. Per
group, a short report must be written with the
main results of the experiment that has been
conducted.
Week Arrangement
The practical assignment will be conducted during
the final 4 weeks of the same period as the lecture
series. Students then have two months to finish
their report.
Course Material
See AE4-360
Entry qualification

62
024
015-2785370
dr.ir. M Mulder
ir. O. Stroosma
The lectures comprise

1. Historical review, simulator types; procedure
trainers, training simulators, research
simulators.
2. Flight simulation and human perception;
visual, motion, auditory and haptonomic cues.
3. Flight simulation hardware; image generation,
projection
4. Flight simulation hardware; motion systems
and control loading systems
5. Real-time aspects; time delays, bandwidth,
computer architecture, I/O.
6. Distributed simulation, DIS, HLA. Simulator
categories, testing, criteria, simulator fidelity.
7. Introduction to DUECA/DUSIME (the Delft
University Environment for Communication and
Activation/Delft University Simulation
Environment).
8. The lecuter series is complemented with a
practical, in which students program,
demonstrate and document a flight simulation.
Objectives
To gain an understanding of flight simulation
techniques. Insight in flight simulation hardware
and software, application of theory of aircraft
dynamics (AE3-302A,AE4-304) in simulation,
experience with muli-platform real-time simulation
and advanced software tools
Set-up
Students are challenged to create a working
simulation. In small groups, under supervision of
one of the lecturers, students are responsible for a
part of the simulation. The simulation is
programmed and implemented on distributed (PC)
hardware.
Week Arrangement
7 lectures and7 blocks of two hours each for
simulation preliminary design, a "paper
simulation" session in which the designed
simulation is evaluated. Students perform an
individual assignment to become familiar with the
programming environment. For the implementation
of the simulation, students can organise their own
time. A report on the simulation is due 4 weeks
after the end of the lecture period.
147
Course Material
Handouts and electronic material are available on

BlackBoard
Entry qualification
The
AE3-301
AE4-302
AE4-304
AE4-359,
AE3-360
AE4-393
AE4-393
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AVIONICS I
M.Sc. 1
4/0/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
1,2
Dr.ir. M Mulder
62
028
015-2789471
See week arrangement below.
Objectives
This course provides a comprehensive, unified

coverage of the principles of modern navigation
equipment and systems, both in the aircraft and on
the ground, including the aircraft instrumentation
and flight-deck systems, with a special emphasis
on the important trends in the global air navigation
and air traffic management system.
Week Arrangement

1. Introduction to avionics systems.
2. Air Data systems.
3. Gyroscopes, attitude reference systems.
4. Compasses, heading reference systems.
5. Introduction to navigation.
6. Inertial navigation systems.
7. Satellite navigation systems (GPS) + video.
8. Radio navigation systems (VOR, DME, LORAN).
9. Landing guidance systems (ILS, MLS, GPS).
10. Flight deck instruments and integrated
systems + video Boeing 777 flight deck.
11. The Flight Management System (FMS).
12. Communication, Navigation, Surveillance
(CNS).
13. Air Traffic Management (ATM).
14. The Future Air Navigation System (FANS).
Course Material
Copies of all overhead sheets that are used during

the course can be purchased.
Pallett, E.H.J., Coombs, L.F.E., Aircraft

Instruments and Integrated Navigation
Systems
Kayton, M., Fried, W.R., Avionics navigation
systems, 1997, Wiley, ISBN 0471547956
Entry qualification
AE3-302
AE3-359
Follow Up Courses
148
AE4-360
AE4-361
AE4-394
AE4-394
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AVIONICS II
M.Sc. 1
0/0/0/4
Lecture
3
S. Merhav, Aerospace Sensor Systems

and Applications, Springer, 1994.
R.P.G. Collinson, Introduction to Avionics,
Chapman & Hall, 1996.
Dr. Q.P. Chu

62
027
015-2783586
This lecture continues the lecture AE4-393,

AVIONICS I. Various mathematical models in
various reference frames for aircraft navigation are
explained. Navigation sensor characteristics and
models are addressed. Particular navigation
systems such as inertial navigation systems and
Global Positioning System (GPS) are presented
thoroughly. Another topic of the lecture is
describing the multiple sensor navigation systems.
Sensor integration and sensor data fusion
techniques, sensor integration structures,
advanced state and parameter estimation
techniques, sensor failure detection and isolation
techniques applied and to be applied to present
and future aircraft navigation systems are
presented as well.
Objectives
Students will be able to acquire knowledge about

navigation algorithms and modern state/parameter
estimation techniques with applications to aircraft
navigation problems.
Week Arrangement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Introduction to aircraft navigation

Navigation equations
Satellite radio navigation
Inertial navigation sensors and navigation
systems
Multisensor navigation systems and data
fusion
Estimation theory and applications to aircraft
navigation
Navigation sensor failure detection and Matlab
examples
Course Material
Q.P. Chu, Avionica II, handout lecture notes,

Faculty of Aerospace Engineering, Delft
University of Technology.
M. Mulder, Avionica I, AE4-393 lecture notes,
University of Technology
Entry qualification
Recommended Literature:
C.F. Lin, Modern Navigation Guidance,

and Control Processing, Prentice-Hall,
Inc., 1991.
149
M. Kayton and W.R. Fried, Avionics

Navigation Systems, John Wiley & Sons,
Inc., 1997.
F.J. Abbink,Vliegtuiginstrumentatie I,
University of Technology, 1984.
F.J. Abbink, Vliegtuiginstrumentatie II,
University of Technology, 1983.
E.H. Pallett, Aircraft Instruments:
Principles and Applications, Pitman, 1981.
Lawrence, Modern Intertial Technology,
Navigation, Guidance, and Control,
Springer-Verlag, 1993.
G.M. Siours, Aerospace Avionics Systems,
A Modern Sythesis, Academic Press , Inc.,
1993.
D.H. Middleton (ed.), Avionics Systems,
Longman Scientific and Technical, 1989.
D.H. Titterton and J.L. Weston,
Strapdown Inertial Navigation
Technology, Pter Peregrinus Ltd., 1997.
A take-home exercise about an integrated aircraft

navigation system with IMU-GPS-MagnetometerRadaraltimeter-Airdatasensor will be asked to
complete after the course. State/parameter
estimation techniques will be applied to solve the
multisensor navigation problem within the exercise.
AE4-399
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
DYNAMICS AND
CONTROL OF SPACE
SYSTEMS
M.Sc. 1
0/0/4/0
Lecture
4
Take-home exercises
3,4
Prof.dr.ir. P.T.L.M. van Woerkom
62
027
015-2783586 / 015-2782792
P.vanWoerkom@wbmt.tudelft.nl
The course focuses on dynamics modelling and

controller design for space systems, such as rigid
spacecraft, flexible spacecraft, space robotic
manipulators, and onboard space mechanisms. To
understand system behaviour a thorough
understanding of system dynamics is required. At
the same time this understanding forms the basis
for the synthesis of suitable measurement and
control systems, and for the selection of suitable
estimation and control algorithms.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Motivation:
avoiding anomalies, aiming for performance.
Dynamics of rigid multi-body systems:
application of Newton-Euler, virtual work and
virtual power principles; three-axis stabilized
spacecraft, single and dual spinners,
spacecraft with onboard rotors, spacecraft with
robotic manipulator.
Dynamics of non-rigid multi-body systems:
three-axis stabilized spacecraft with flexible
appendages, spinner with radial antennae,
spacecraft with onboard liquids, spacecraft
with a flexible robotic manipulator.
Concepts for estimation and control of rigid
multi-body systems:
sensor and actuator selection, performance
requirements, estimation and control concepts,
classical control, modern control, robust
Lyapunov control; identification and control.
Concepts for estimation and control of nonrigid systems:
pitfalls, spill-over, pole-zero cancellation,
disturbance accommodation, robust control,
vibration isolation and vibration suppression.
Capita selecta
Objectives
The course builds on course AE4-305 Spacecraft

attitude dynamics and control. Familiarity with
basic concepts in dynamics is assumed. Now, these
concepts are applied to more complex systems, as
usually encountered in space. Control system
synthesis and analysis focuses on concepts and
practicality.
Set-up
The course consists of a series of lectures.

Students are encouraged to participate actively.
At the end of the course period the participants are
to start working on a take-home assignment.
150
Course Material
Lecture notes
Written take-home assignment
Entry qualification
The
AE3-359
AE4-305
AE4-305P
Students wishing to follow this course are invited

to express their interest to dr. Q.P. Chu, room no.
027, extension 83586.
MANUFACTURING
ENGINEERING
AE4-485
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/2
Lecture
3
Written
4,5
J. Verbeek
34
mr
015-2784173
janv@adse.nl
The main processes 'building aircraft' and design of

this production system are discussed in relation
to other processes like marketing and sales,
product development and product support. A
systems engineering approach is used for the
selection and dimensioning (in terms of technology,
time and cost) of production processes for parts
manufacturing and assembly including tooling
aspects. Particularly Design for Assembly, Design
to Cost and Design for Logistics methods are dealt
with.
Objectives
Provide knowledge and insight of requirements

with respect to the design of aircraft from the point
of view of manufacturing. Teach a method to
develop the production system in a structured
approach, taking into account the specific roles and
tools of a manufacturing engineer in an industrial
organisation.
Set-up
Lectures and cases.
Week Arrangement

1. Setting the scene:
a. What is a production system design
b. Market characteristics
c. Production process characteristics
2. Program management issues:
a. Design requirements
b. Financial planning
c. Work share scenarios
d. Logistic management
e. Quality management
3. The product development process (Systems
engineering and Concurrent Engineering)
4. The production system design process:
a. Work breakdown development
b. Interfaces and tolerances
c. Tooling and equipment
d. Shopfloor logistic
e. Planning and scheduling
f. Cost
g. Trade-offs
Course Material
Collection of texts and transparencies.
151
MAINTENANCE
MANAGEMENT
AE4-490
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
0/4/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
2,3
Prof.ir. K. Smit
62
1006
015-2784978
K.Smit@lr.tudelft.nl
Development of and requirements for the

maintenance function within industry. Description
of maintenance behaviour of technical systems.
Determination and optimisation of maintenance
programs of technical systems. Design for
maintenance. Controlling maintenance processes
such as workflow, spare parts and purchasing.
Structuring of a maintenance organisation.
Evaluation of the effectiveness and efficiency of the
maintenance function and of maintenance
processes. Financial and costcontrol of
maintenance and of shutdown and engineering
projects. The provisioning of maintenance
information and maintenance management
information systems.
Objectives
Acquiring knowledge and understanding of the
objectives and structure of the maintenance
function and processes in industrial organisations.
Set-up
Courses and discussions.
Week Arrangement

1. Description of maintenance behaviour.
2. Development and optimization of maintenance
programs.
3. Workflow control.
4. Spare parts management and purchasing.
5. Organisation of the maintenance function.
6. Evaluation of maintenance processes.
7. Information provisioning for maintenance.
Course Material
Lecture notes and collection of transparancies
"onderhoudsmanagement" available from Dictaat
verkoop LR
Follow Up Courses
AE4-496
152
MAINTENANCE
ENGINEERING
AE4-496
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
0/0/4/0
Lecture
3
Essay
End of September
Prof.ir. K. Smit
62
1006
015-2784978
Developments in airtransport, aircraft production

and its influence on the maintenance and
engineering function. Description of maintenance
behaviour of aircraft systems. The development of
maintenance programs. Reliability monitoring and
adjustment of maintenance programs.
Objectives
Knowledge and understanding in the development

and optimization of maintenance programs in
relation to airworthiness requirements and
operations.
Set-up
Lectures and discussion.
Week Arrangement

1. Influence of the development of aircraft on
maintenance.
2. Description of failure behaviour.
3. Classification of failures.
4. Description of maintenance behaviour of
systems.
5. Basic and maintenance policies: conditions and
characteristics.
6. MSG method, organisation and application.
7. Development and optimization of maintenance
programs.
Course Material
D-96 Maintenance Engineering.
AE4-500
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
CAPITA SELECTA
AEROSPACE MATERIALS
AND STRUCURES
M.Sc. 1
n.a.
Self-study
9
To be arranged
Ir. T.J. van Baten (coordinator)

61
010
015-2781580
T.J.vanBaten@lr.tudelft.nl
Aerospace Materials. Material properties (yielding,

ultimate stress and strain) w.r.t. load cases
(fatigue, impact, thermal and other environmental
loads)
Metals, polymers, ceramics and combinations (fibre
metal laminates, fibre reinforced composites).
Manufacturing processes, Quality systems and Cost
calculation.
Aerospace Structural Design. Loads on aircraft
(aerodynamic, manoeuvres and gust). Basic design
rules, Structural elements, Load transfer.
Aerospace Structural Analysis. Linear theory of
elasticity, engineering bending and torsion theory
(St. Venant, warping, Prandtl stress function,
torsion of open and closed thin-walled sections.
Load transfer and analysis at cut-outs.
Energy theorems. Deflection analysis, Statically
indeterminate structures.
Analysis of aerospace structures by FEM.
Niu, M.C.Y., Airframe Structural Design, 1995,

Bathe, K.J., Finite element procedures, 1996,
ISBN 0133014584
Huebner, K.H., The Finite Element Method for
Engineers, 2001
Prerequisite
Engineering, Applied Physics or Marine Technology.
Basic knowledge in engineering materials,
mechanics and numerical analysis by FEM

MSc variant Production Technology, Aerospace
Materials, Aerospace Structures, Engineering
Mechanics or Fundamentals of Advanced Materials.
The student is advised to contact the course coordinator to discuss course details.
Objectives
Aerospace Engineering a solid foundation in
aerospace materials and (light-weight) structures.
Set-up

material listed below and to take part in the
abridged combined version of the Exercises AE2523P and AE3-525P. If necessary, it is possible to
attend the BSc courses AE1-701, AE2-600, AE2521, AE2-522 and AE3-525. from which the course
material has been derived. The student has to
consult the course coordinator (ir. T.J. van Baten,
t.j.vanbaten@lr.tudelft.nl) in order to set
arrangements for the concluding exam.
Course Material
Callister, W.D., Material Science and

Engineering, an introduction, 6th ed,
Lomax, T.L., Structural Loads Analysis for
Commercial Transport Aircraft, 1996,
ISBN 0340705884
Readers on AE1-701 and AE2-600
Lecture note s on AE2-521, J.M.A.M Hol
FEM in Aircraft Structures, J.M.A.M. Hol
153
AE4-522
AIRCRAFT STRUCTURAL
ANALYSIS III
Year
Period
M.Sc. 1
lectures: 2/0/0/0 + contacting
hours 2/0/0/0
Course Method
Lecture
Credits (ECTS)
3
Examination
Written
Exam. Period
1,3
Principal lecturer Ir. J. de Vries
Building Number 62
Room Number
1112
Phone Number
015-2786306
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
1.
Computation of structural deflections for thinwalled structures (continuation). (Applying the

Dummy Unit Load Method, computation of
relative displacements).
2. Analysis of Statically Indeterminate Structures.
(External vs internal redundancies, multiple
redundancies, applications to wing and
fuselage structures).
3. Engineering theory of bending for open and
closed tubes an overview. (General stress,
strain and displacement relationships for open
and closed tubes).
4. Shear flow in open and closed tubes.
5. Twist and warping of shear loaded closed
tubes.
6. Displacements associated with the Bredt-Batho
shear flow.
7. Warping distribution of a doubly symmetrical
rectangular closed tube subjected to a torque.
8. Warping of open tubes.
9. Axial constraint stresses in open tubes (The
Wagner torsion-bending theory, calculation of
the torsion bending constant , the wire
analogy for flat sided sections).
10. Axial constraint stresses in closed tubes.
(Doubly symmetrical single cell, 4-boom tube
under torsion).
11. Shear diffusion (Axial constraint stresses in a
doubly symmetrical single cell 6 stringer tube
subjected to a transverse shear force).
12. Elements of plate bending theory (Kirchhoffs
assumptions, equilibrium equations via the
stationary value of the potential energy,
Kirchhoffs derivation of the boundary
conditions, simply supported recta ngular plate
under sinusoidal loading, Naviers solution for
simply supported rectangular plates, the
Greens function of the rectangular plate).
Objectives
This course is designed to introduce students who

wish to specialize in stress analysis of thin-walled
structures to more advanced topics such as the
analysis of statically indeterminate structures,
warping, constraint stresses, shear diffusion and
elements of plate bending.
Set-up
To be determined at the beginning of the course:
either lectures or meetings in which the course
material will be discussed.
154
Course Material
D-22NC
Megson, T.H.G., Aircraft structures for engineering

students, 3rd. ed, Edward Arnold, ISBN
0340705884
Entry qualification
The
AE1-914
AE2-522 I
AE2-522 II
Two hours per week are lectures and two hours per
week are contact hours.
AE4-524
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
THERMAL LOADING OF
STRUCTURES
M.Sc. 1
0/4/0/0
Assignment for design
computation
3
Written report
Ir. T.J. van Baten
61
010
015-2781580
Heat transfer from boundary layer, convection,

conduction, radiation. Analytical and numerical
solution techniques electric analagon, finite
element and finite difference methods.
Temperature distribution and thermal stresses.
Objectives
Make students familiar with thermal loading basic

phenomena, theory and solution techniques.
Set-up
Introduction, assignment, progress meetings,

technical report.
Week Arrangement
AE4-528
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
COMPUTERIZED
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS
M.Sc. 1
2/2/0/0
3
Assignment
Ir. J.M.A.M. Hol
62
1121
015-2785379
One or two introductory lectures are presented to

provide background and course specific
information. Further assistance is by appointment.
Students are required to work in groups of 2 or 3.
Assignments are taken from actual practical
problems. Possible sources are research topics,
thesis work or problems from industry. Basic
requirement is anything beyond basic linear statics
and dynamics. Before starting an assignment
formal agreement by the course coordinator is
required. Individual students can optionally do a
couple of standard exercises.
The project is concluded with a written report and
a project evalation meeting.
Objectives
Course Material
Lecture notes, written assignment, analysis

programs
To use FE-technology as a tool by applying it to a

real problem. Learn a good problem solving
approach by developing a succession of more
complex well-founded (FE-) solutions for an actual
problem.
Course Material
Holman, J.P., Heat Transfer, 8th ed, McGraw-Hill
ir. J.M.A.M. Hol - AE3-525p F.E.M. Practical (in

Dutch)
Entry qualification
The
AE3-525
AE3-525P
AE2-914
See AE3-525
V. Adams and A. Askenazi - Building better

products with finite element analysis -1999
R.D. Cook - Concepts and Applications of Finite

Element Analysis - 2002
NAFEMS - Guidelines to Finite Element Practice

- 1992
To participate students have to sign-up at the start
of the course.
There is no formal work schedule only a target date
for finishing the work. Groups have to plan their
own work schedule and work packages.
Assistance is by appointment during the dimesters
the course is scheduled.
155
SPECIAL TOPICS IN
VIBRATION AND
BUCKLING
AE4-530
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
0/0/04
Lecture
3
Take-home assignment
Ir. E.L. Jansen
62
1122
015-2782592
e.l.jansen@lr.tudelft.nl
ir. J.J. Wijker
Detailed descriptio n
1.
Buckling and vibration of basic structural

elements (bars, plates, cylindrical shells):
Equilibrium equations, stability equations,
equations of motion.
2. Buckling and postbuckling of stiffened panels:
Design methods.
3. Items 3 to 7 are concerned with buckling of
cylindrical shells:Buckling analysis for
anisotropic materials.
4. Effect of initial geometric imperfections:
Koiters initial postbuckling theory. Effect of
special imperfection modes. Effect of mode
interactions. Analytical-numerical methods.
5. Effect of boundary conditions: Reduction from
partial differential equations to ordinary
differential equations. Numerical solution of
the two-point boundary value problem.
6. Numerical solution of the nonlinear collapse
problem: Riks path-following method.
7. Stochastic stability analysis: Derivation of
knock-down factors for allowable buckling
loads via reliability functions.
Items 8 to 10 are concerned with special topics in
vibration analysis related to spacecraft structures:
8. Random vibrations: Random loads and random
response characteristics.
9. Statistical Energy Analysis: Response
characteristics of "random structures" due to
random loads.
10. Component Mode Synthesis: Model reduction,
boundary conditions, and synthesis (coupling)
methods.
Objectives
After completing this course, the student should

have acquired a basic understanding of the
concepts used in buckling and vibration analysis of
plates and shells, and of several advanced
concepts used in spacecraft vibration analysis.
Course Material
References to books and research papers are

provided during the lectures.
A take-home assignment has to be completed and

the results obtained have to be presented in a
written report.
AE4-535 I
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
STRUCTURAL DESIGN
AND OPTIMIZATION I
M.Sc. 1
2/2/0/0
Lecture
3
Oral
Free
Prof.dr. A. Rothwell
62
1115
015-2782056
A.Rothwell@lr.tudelft.nl
1.
Fundamentals of structural design,

classification of optimisation problems.
2. Design of a tube in compression, optimality
criterion, material limitation.
3. Design for stiffness, direct search methods of
optimisation.
4. The general optimisation problem
characteristics of the design space.
5. Classical optimisation, interpretation of
Lagrange multipliers, Kuhn-Tucker conditions.
6. Numerical methods for unconstrained
optimisation, gradient-based methods.
7. Interior and exterior penalty functions,
augmented Lagrangian penalty function.
8. Shear web design, stiffener properties,
numerical optimisation, design space
representation.
9. Design of beams, shape of cross-section,
optimisation of a box-beam, limit analysis
design.
10. Approximation methods, constraint-following
algorithms, dual method.
11. Maxwells theorem, Michell structures,
optimum layout of a truss structure .
12. Optimisation with finite element analysis,
sensitivity analysis, evolutionary shape
optimisation.
Objectives
The aim of the course is to provide a sound

introduction to the principles of optimisation in
structural design, and to present optimisation as a
practical design tool. Applications are to the design
of frameworks, struts and beams. Attention is
given to both analytical and numerical methods, at
different levels of complexity, the latter being the
basis of all computer implementations of
optimisation.
Set-up
Exercises are made available during each part of

the course, and form part of the oral examination.
Tutorial sessions on the exercises are held
periodically during the lectures. Assistance is
available at specified times during the week.
Week Arrangement
See Detailed description above.
Course Material
Lecture notes are distributed during the course.
156
Entry qualification
There are no specific recommendations. The course
is presented in such a way as to be suitable both
for students specialising in structures and for
interested students from other specialisations.
Recommended literature: A list of recommended

Further reading is made available during the
course.
Lectures are given in English.
AE4-535 II
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
STRUCTURAL DESIGN
AND OPTIMIZATION II
M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/2
Lecture
3
Oral
Free
Prof.dr. A. Rothwell
62
1115
015-2782056
1.
Aircraft structures, loading intensity,

characteristics of a stiffened shell structure.
2. Stringer-skin panel in compression, formulae
for local buckling, flexural buckling.
3. Efficiency formula, off-optimum design,
material limitation, tangent modulus.
4. Post-buckled design, loss of stiffness, torsional
buckling, failure in various localised modes.
5. Buckling in shear, stiffened shear web, postbuckled behaviour, incomplete diagonal
tension.
6. Pressure cabin design, effect of stringers and
frames, safety factors, damage tolerant
design.
7. Frames and ribs, general instability, effect of
frame flexibility, optimum frame and rib pitch.
8. Reinforcement around cut-outs, shear lag,
stresses at the wing root.
9. Design philosophy for the fuselage and wing,
iterative design procedure, numerical
optimisation.
10. Composite laminates, optimisation of the layup, netting theory.
11. Optimum lay-up for buckling, design of a
composite strut.
12. Composite sandwich panels, various failure
modes, optimum face and core thickness
Objectives
This course is devoted entirely to the design of

aircraft structures, and to structures made of
composite laminates. Special attention is given to
understanding the physical behaviour of these
structures, and to defining an appropriate
modelling for design and optimisation. Formulae
are developed which are usable not only in a
formal optimisation process, but also in a more
conventional engineering approach to design.
Set-up
Exercises are made available during each part of

the course, and form part of the oral examination.
Tutorial sessions on the exercises are held
periodically during the lectures. Assistance is
available at specified times during the week.
Week Arrangement
See Detailed description above.
Course Material
Lecture notes are distributed during the course.
157
Entry qualification
There are no specific recommendations. The course
is presented in such a way as to be suitable both
for students specialising in structures and for
interested students from other specialisations. The
course may be taken without first taking the course
Structural Design and Optimisation I.
Recommended literature: A list of recommended
Further reading is made available during the
course.
Lectures are given in English.
SPACECRAFT
STRUCTURES
AE4-537
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
0/2/2/0
Lecture
3
Essay
4
Ir. J.J. Wijker
62
1113
015-2781382
J.J.Wijker@lr.tudelft.nl
Introduction in the design process of

spacecraft.
Spacecraft subsystems.
Launch Vehicles; expendable and reusable.
Application of safety factors.
Loads; handling, launch, test, orbital.
Design aspects of S/C structures, finite
element
analysis, static, dynamic, thermo-elastic.
Mechanical aspects of solar arrays.
Testing; qualification and acceptance, model
philosophy.
Some special topics; effective masses,
acoustics, SEA.
Objectives
To learn about mechanical aspects in Spacecraft
Structures.
Course Material
Syllabus "Spacecraft Structures" (College dictaat

"Ruimtevaartconstructies").
Sarafin, T.P., Spacecraft Structures and

Mechanisms, From Concept to Launch, 1995, Space
Technology Series
Entry qualification
The
158
AE3-803
AE3-525
AE2-914
AE4-528
AE4-627
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
STRUCTURAL DESIGN
AND AIRWORTHINESS
M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/2
Lecture
3
Written
2,4
Prof.dr.ir. M.J.L.van Tooren
61
018
015-2784794
M.J.L.vanTooren@lr.tudelft.nl
AE4-628
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
STRUCTURAL DESIGN
OF COMPOSITE
AIRCRAFT
M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/2
Assignment
3
Oral
4,5
prof.ir. A. Beukers
61
004
015-2785144
A.Beukers@lr.tudelft.nl
Prof.dr.ir. M.J.L van Tooren
dr.ir. O.K. Bergsma
General introduction into the design process.

Update on developments in aircraft structural
design (Composite structures, application of fibre
metal laminates, new aircraft configurations).
Design methodologies. Relation between
airworthiness and design requirements.
Introduction to the JAA system.
Design philosophies like damage tolerance, fail safe
and safe life. Special design cases; lightning strike,
crashworthiness and ditching. Probability aspects of
structural design and airworthiness. Aircraft loads.
Design verification methods. Application of
theory/knowledge of the first part of the course to
the different aircraft structural subsystems like
wings, fuselages, control systems, landing gears
and engine mountings.
Objectives
Objectives
To introduce students to design methodolgy,

design philosophy and design verification.
Supply a brief introduction to the airworthiness
authorities.
Application of design philosophy and verification to
the different aircraft structural subsystems and
components.
Set-up
Fourteen weeks of two lecture hours a week.
Week Arrangement
Course Material
Lecture notes AE4-627 Structural design and
airworthiness
General introduction into the design process.

Relation between material, form and
manufacturing. Design criteria for composite
materials and structures. Classical lamination
theory. Application of the Classical lamination
theory.
Overview manufacturing methods for composites.
Buckling of composite plates. General design of
composite pressurized fuselages. Design of
composite bulkheads.
Damage tolerance philosophy. Impact of impact on
composite structural design. Mechanical joints.
Adhesive joints. Airworthiness.Design stress and
strain. Structural analysis of composite
construction. Repair. Energy absorption.
Train the students to think composite.

Train the students in design methodology.
Bring students up to date with developments in the
composite structural world.
Set-up
The course is based on self study. The practical

training is done by the students themselves by
using the Kolibri program. Kolibri is a software
code developed at Delft Aerospace comprising the
Classical Laminate theory and a limited FE-code. It
offers the user the possibility to play with materials
and study the effect of coupling effects, thermal
expansion etc.
Course Material
Lecture notes AE4-628 Structural design of
composite aircraft
Niu, M.C.Y., Airframe Structural Design, 1995,

Niu, M.C.Y., Airframe Stress Analysis and
Sizing
Niu, M.C.Y., Composite Airframe Structures,
1992-1993, ISBN 9627128066
159
AE4-632
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
COMPOSITES:
MATERIALS,
STRUCTURES &
PRODUCTION
PROCESSES
M.Sc. 1
0/4/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
2,4
prof.ir. A. Beukers
61
004
015-2785144
Ir. J. Sinke
The development of composite structures or parts
is dominated by an integral approach of the
selection of the fibers, the resin, and the
production processes. In this case the design of the
composite material itself is an important issue (in
contradiction with metal alloys). In this design the
mechanical and physical properties as well as the
survivability and durability are involved. This
should result in the required price/performance
ratios.
Topics:
(past, present and future) applications of fiber

polymer combinations based on weight
reduction, minimum volume, and minimum
operational costs.
fiber systems, fiber preforms,and application

of fibers with respect to design and costs
fiber volume content, fiber lengths, and fiber

orientations in relation to production
processes.
possible product geometries for different

processes and methods to simulate the
processes and analyse the products.
plate and shell structures, in particular the

sandwich concept and its advantages.
These topics will be illustrated with the product and
process development projects which have been
performed at the chair of Production Technology,
like the Extra-400, EuroEnear Eaglet, in-situ
foaming, DRAPE, press forming of thermoplastics,
pressure vessels and structures for civil and
maritime applications.
Objectives
Understanding of the parameters and their
relationships, that play a role in the development
of lightweight composite structures and parts.
Set-up
During the lecture the emphasis is on the
philosophy of composite technology and the
applications of composites in structures and
products.
Week Arrangement
The themes or topics will be discussed over the six
weeks of lecturing.
Entry qualification
160
AE1-701
AE2-600
STRENGTH DESIGN
EXERCISE
AE4-652
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
x/0/0/0
Laboratory Exercise
1
Dr.ir. O.K. Bergsma

62
NB 0.18
015-2785135
ing. S. Lindstedt
ing. B. Weteringe
Design a load carrying structure as specified in the

course material. The material applied in the
structure must be glass fibre based, and the
production method is the VARTM process.
The structure will be tested up to failure on one of
the test facilities of the laboratory. The design
should meet the prescribed failure load and the
prescribed displacement at this load as close as
possible.
Before testing the structure, tests on self made
specimens are performed so real data for
mechanical,properties is gathered. In consultation
with the lectures the material and the test on the
specimens is selected. A new prediction for the
failure load and the dispplacement of the structure
is calculated, which will be used in comparison with
the results of the test on the structure.
From the gathered data, new design allowables
must be calculated using statistical methods, as
explained in the mil-handbook 17.
AE4-684
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
FIBRE REINFORCED
MATERIALS IN
M.Sc. 1
0/0/0/4
Lecture
3
Making a set of exercises
On appointment
Prof.dr.ir. Th. De Jong
62
721
015-2781455/87587
T.H.deJong@lr.tudelft.nl
prof.ir. A. Beukers
Ir. S. Koussios
Introduction and literature. Properties of

reinforcements and matrices. Combinations of
reinforcements and matrices. The classical theory
of laminates. Some simple one-dimensional
examples. Stress concentrations in anisotropic
plates with holes. Failure and fracture criteria.
For students of the chairs Production Technology

and Aerospace materials, participation in a
practical belonging to the course is mandatory.
Objectives
The objectives of the Stiffness design exercise are
manifold:
getting acquainted with testing of specimen.
getting acquainted with statistical methods for

determination of design allowables.
application of knowledge of structures.
getting acquainted with the difference between

modelling and reality.
Set-up
The students work in teams of 3 to 5 persons. The

division of the students into the teams is done on
the preparatory day section of the exercise. The
duration of the exercise is 20 day sections, divided
into 11 parts.
The day sections are planned by the lectures.
Week Arrangement
Up to 5 day sections a week are planned by the

lectures, this depending (1) on the other obligatory
courses of the Production Technology chair, (2) on
the planning of the Stiffness Design Exercise and
(3) on the availability of the testing equipment.
The week arrangement is handed out on
preparatory day section of the exercise.
Course Material
The course material is handed out on preparatory

day section of the exercise.
161
SUSTAINABLE
DEVELOPMENT
AE4-711
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
4/0/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
1,2
Ir. R. van Drimmelen
31
c4.1.170
015-2781043
R.vanDrimmelen@tbm.tudelft.nl
Dr.ir. K.F. Mulder
This course covers the background of Sustainable

Development in general engineering and the
specific applications in aerospace engineering. The
lectures give information about global problems
like climate change (e.g. Problems with ozone layer
and Greenhouse effect), technology dynamics (e.g.
How does technology develop? When will there be
a new paradigm in aviation?), Social dynamics
(e.g. What drives people, Can behavior be
changed? Why is Schiphol Airport argued and not
the Travel agency?), economics of sustainability
and sustainable entrepreneurship (e.g. Short term
versus Long term profits), the justice system and
sustainability (e.g. What is the use of International
treaties and protocols concerning for instance
climate or aviation?) and Worldwide Development
Countries (e.g. can there be worldwide sustainable
development without the developments of third
world countries to the level of the Western World?)
Further technologies for 'sustainable energy' are
dealt with and the energy balance of the world, as
well as material recycling and designing for
sustainability.
Objectives
After finishing the course the students should be

able to implement sustainable development in
general engineering practice and in the design of
aerospace products in particular.
Set-up
10 lectures and one practical session followed by a

written exam.
During the lecturing, the students take part in an
electronic discussion on the BlackBoard site.
Instead of participating in this discussion, a report
can be made about a specific question raised in the
study field of Sustainable Development and
Week Arrangement
After each lecture the students should participate

at least once in the electronic discussion on the
Blackboard site about the lecture topic.
Course Material
Reader Lucht- & Ruimtevaart in Duurzame

Ontwikkeling (in Dutch). Available at
Aerospace Engineering and also electronically
on the BlackBoard site.- English course
material is available via blackboard.
Slides are in English. Lectures in English.
162
Graduating in a combination of Sustainable
Development and Aerospace Engineering. See for
more information the internet site
www.odo.tudelft.nl.
For all other information see BlackBoard site and
www.odo.tudelft.nl.
FATIGUE IN
STRUCTURES AND
MATERIALS
AE4-729
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
0/0/4/0
Lecture
3
Written
3,5
Ir. J.J. Homan
0.43
015-2788230
J.J.Homan@lr.tudelft.nl
Ir. J. Sinke
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Introduction to Fatigue of Structures and

Materials
Fatigue as a phenomenon in the material
Stress concentrations at notches
Residual stresses
Stress intensity factors of cracks
Fatigue properties of materials
The fatigue strength of notched specimens,
analysis and predictions
Fatigue crack growth, analysis and predictions
Load spectra
Fatigue under variable-amplitude loading
Fatigue crack growth under variable-amplitude
loading
Fatigue and scatter
Fatigue tests
Surface treatments
Fretting corrosion
Corrosion fatigue
High-temperature and low-temperature fatigue
Fatigue of joints
Fatigue of structures. Design procedures
Objectives
This course is designed to provide the students
with engineering knowledge
and skills to recognize and to analyze fatigue and
damage tolerance problems
in aircraft structures. The course combines the
knowledge of aircraft
structures and basic material science obtained in
earlier courses and
deepens the fundamental knowledge of various
aspects of material fatigue and
fracture mechanics. Many practical examples and
case histories are given.
AE4-731
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
AEROSPACE MATERIALS
SPECIAL TOPICS
M.Sc. 1
0/0/0/4
Lecture
3
Written
Ir. J.L.C.G. de Kanter
61
049
015-2784186
various
For the academic year 2002-2003 the lectures

comprised:
Impact and Crashworthiness of aircraft structures
Structurcal repair (both riveted and bonded repair)
Adhesive bonding (theory and practice)
Fibre Metal Laminates (History, Static strength,
Dynamic strength, - Workshop properties,
Environmental influences and Maintenance))
Space Materials (Hot Metals)
Materials Selection
Academic year 2003-2004 will have a similar
program.
Objectives
Provide recent information on specific aerospace

materials research and development
Course Material
Vlot, A., Gunnink, J.W., Fibre Metal Laminates

- an introduction, Kluwer Academic Publishers,
(available from library during course)
Hand-outs
Entry qualification
The
AE1-701
AE2-601
AE4-729
Set-up
Examination will be written. An exercise prior to

examination is mandatory.
Course Material
Schijve, J., Fatigue of Structures and Materials,

Kluwer Academic Publishers
163
AE4-736
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
INTRODUCTION TO THE
TECHNIQUES OF
MEASURING
M.Sc. 1
0/2/0/0
Lecture
2
Oral
Ir. A.W.H. Klomp
61
NB VM 0.47
015-2785134
A.W.H.Klompe@lr.tudelft.nl
To measure physical phenomena several

transducers can be used. In this course will be
discussed: strain gauges, capacitive-, inductive-,
piezo-electric transducers and thermocouples.
Special attention will be paid to the use of strain
gauges and the problems that occur in working
with strain gauges. Some practical tips are given
for gauge handling so the student can get the best
from a measuring arrangement. The principals of
analogue signal processing will be discussed by
means of a few simple amplification circuits with
operational amplifiers. Attention will be paid to
digital codes and techniques: binary number
systems, switching algebra and simple digital
circuits come up for discussion.
Objectives
The material presented and the style of its delivery

are designed to ensure that the students gain a
thorough understanding of the theoretical and
practical considerations that govern the choice and
usage of suitable transducers in particular
measurement situations.
Week Arrangement

1. chapter 1 to 2.3.
2. chapter 2.3 to 2.8.
3. chapter 2.8 to 3.3.
4. chapter 3.3 to 4.
5. chapter 4 to 4.4.
6. chapter 4.4 to 5 and a few demos.
7. chapter 5
Course Material
AE4-736: Introduction to the technique of
measuring
164
AE4-737
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
THERMAL CONTROL
M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/0
Assignment for design
computations and lab work
3
Written report
Ir. T.J. van Baten
61
010
015-2781580
Heat sources, thermal balance, transient analysis,

single and multi-node calculations, thermal control
elements, design aspects, thermal protections
systems, laboratory testing.
Objectives
Familiarize students with thermal control aspects,

elements and enable them to do simple design,
analysis and laboratory testing.
Set-up
Introduction, assignment with lab testing, progress

meetings, technical report.
Course Material
Karam, R.D., Satellite Thermal Control for

System Engineers, Progress in Astronautics
and Aeronautics, Vol. 181, AIAA
Lecture notes, written assignment, analysis
programs, laboratory material and equipment.
AE4-786
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
SHEET METAL FORMING

M.Sc. 1
0/4/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
2,4
Ir. J. Sinke
61
0.54
015-2785137
One part of the course deals with the theory of

sheet metal forming processes, inlcuding topics
like: stress-strain curves and workshop properties,
forming limit curves, yield criteria, (an)isotropy,
heattreatments, springback, workhardening and
strain measuments and evaluation.
Another part of the lectures series deals with
different production processes for sheet metal
forming, like bending operations, rubber forming
processes, deepdrawing, explosive forming,
stretching, superplastic forming. In addition some
aspects like manufacturability analyses, production
in batches, etc. will be discussed.
Objectives
- Extending the knowledge of plastic deformation of

metal sheets.
- Improvement of the student's capability to work
with the problems involving design, material
selection, and production processes.
Week Arrangement

1. Introduction, formability, deformations,
formability testing.
2. Stress- and strain states, forming limit curves,
yield criteria.
3. Anisotropic behaviour, heattreatments,
bending processes.
4. Several forming processes.
5. Non-conventional processes and materials.
6. Guest lecturer.
7. Application of numerical tools, questions.
AE4-805
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
ASTRONOMY
M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/0
Lecture
2
Written
4
Dr. F.P. Israel
62
914
015-2782072 (071-5275891)
F.P.Israel@lr.tudelft.nl
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Electromagnetic spectrum, telescopes, space

observatories
Radiation definitions, equation of radiative
transport
Blackbody radiation, Planck curve, Wien and
Rayleigh-Jeans approximations
Application of Plancks curve to the Solar
System.
Planetary temperatures ans greenhouse effect.
Thermal radiation, Bohr atom, hudrogen line
spectrum.
Ionization equilibrium, Saha law, Boltzmann
law.
Stellar spectra, Hertzsprung-Russel Diagram,
stellar properties.
Solar structure, nuclear fusion.
Stellar evalution, supernova/neutron
star/black hole, reg giant/white dwarf.
Extrasolar planets.
Interstellar medium, gas, dust, star formation.
Milky Way, rotation, structure, central black
hole.
Local Group, clusters of galaxies, quasars.
Universe, present age, big bang, evolution.
Course Material
Lecture notes AE4-805 Astronomy.
Course Material
New material is under development.
Entry qualification
AE1-701
AE2-700
A list of recommended literature will be handed

over during the first lecture
165
AE4-870
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
ROCKET MOTION
M.Sc. 1
0/4/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
2,4
Prof.ir. B.A.C. Ambrosius
62
918
015-2785173
Objectives
This course aims to introduce the principles of

rocket motion, both during powered flight as well
as for the subsequent ballistic flight and re-entry
into the atmosphere. It provides insight into the
qualitative and quantitative aspects of the
performance of single-stage and multi-stage
rockets, and re-entry vehicles. The information is
considered useful to assess the performance of
existing space launchers and re-entry vehicles, and
to enable (preliminary) design of such systems.
Week Arrangement

1. 2D motion of rocket in homogeneous gravity
field, vacuum and atmosphere; vertical flight,
constant pitch angle, gravity turn.
2. Theory of the multi-stage rocket; optimal mass
distribution.
3. Ballistic flight in orbital plane; 3D flight over
spherical (rotating) earth.
4. Re-entry; ballistic trajectory, equilibrium glide
path, skipping trajectory; heat load.
5. Computer simulations of ascent trajectory of
existing space launchers, using actual rocket
parameters and realistic force model.
6. Derivation of general equations of motion of
system with variable mass (if time permits).
7. Equations of motion in scalar form, including
rotation (if time permits).
Course Material
Cornelisse, J.W., Schyer, H.F.R., Rocket

propulsion and space flight dynamics, London,
1979, Pitman,
Lecture notes AE4-870, plus additional
handouts.
Entry qualification
At present the Faculty of Aerospace Engineering

does not have a specific launcher/re-entry vehicle
research programme. However, it is involved in
several industrial development programmes and
there are good contacts with specialized institutes
in the Netherlands and abroad. Interested students
are enabled to participate in joint projects with
these institutes during the final phase of their
study.
166
AE4-873 I
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
ASTRODYNAMICS I
M.Sc. 1
2/2/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
2,5
Prof.ir. K.F. Wakker
62
915
015-2782065
K.F.Wakker@deos.tudelft.nl
Introduction to astrodynamics; many-body

problem; three-body problem; relative motion in
the many-body problem; two-body problem;
elliptic, parabolic and hyperbolic motion;
regularization of the equations of motion;
coordinates, reference frames, time and orbital
elements.
Objectives
Thorough treatment of the fundamentals of applied

astrodynamics, covering all major aspects of this
field. All topics are treated in a mathematically
consistent way. The learning goals are that the
student will be presented a full coverage of this
field; that he will acquire a fundamental insight in
the methodologies applied in this field and that he
will get the working knowledge to attack and solve
most problems that will arise with the computation
of real satellite orbits.
Course Material
Lecture notes LR4-73
Follow Up Courses
AE4-870
AE4-873 II
AE4-875
AE4-876
AE4-873 II
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
ASTRODYNAMICS II
M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/2
Lecture
3
Written
4,5
Prof.ir. K.F. Wakker
62
915
015-2782065
Relative motion of two satellites; re-entry

trajectories; transfer orbits; rendezvous orbits;
launching of satellites; perturbations and perturbed
orbits; general perturbation theory; applications for
orbital perturbations due to the gravity field.
Objectives
Thorough treatment of the fundamentals of applied

astrodynamics, covering all major aspects of this
field. All topics are treated in a mathematically
consistent way. The learning goals are that the
student will be presented a full coverage of this
field; that he will acquire a fundamental insight in
the methodologies applied in this field and that he
will get the working knowledge to attack and solve
most problems that will arise with the computation
of real satellite orbits.
Course Material
Lecture notes LR4-73
Entry qualification
AE4-873 I
Follow Up Courses
AE4-870
AE4-875
AE4-876
167
AE4-875
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
PRECISE ORBIT
DETERMINATION OF
SATELLITES
M.Sc. 1
4/0/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
1,2
62
922
015-2782535
P.N.A.M.Visser@lr.tudelft.nl
Precise orbit determination of satellites, or accurate

knowledge of their position, is a prerequisite for
many applications of space technology. Precise
orbit determination of satellites is the central
theme of this lecture series. In addition, attention
will be paid to modern satellite tracking concepts
that facilitate precise orbit determination. After an
introduction about orbit determination and
tracking concepts, attention will be paid to
establishing the equations of motions of satellites,
solving these equations, and estimating and
determining unknown parameters that play a role
in these equations from satellite tracking
observations. Several parameter estimation
methods will be discussed in detail.
Objectives
It is the objective of this lecture series to

familiarize students in detail with precise orbit
determination methods and in conjunction relevant
modern satellite tracking systems. Moreover, it is
intended to show the importance of precise satellite
orbit determination for several applications based
on space technology. Finally, it is intended to
provide knowledge and skills required for
graduating at the chair Astrodynamics and
Satellite Systems.
Set-up
Lecture series, with the possibility to apply the
acquired knowledge in the exercise AE4-875P.
Week Arrangement
1. Background and overview of the lecture series:
what is orbit determination, why is it required
and which measuring concepts play a role?
2. Equations of motion: force models, reference
systems, standards, numerical integration.
3. Tracking concepts: range and Doppler
observations. Examples of modern tracking
systems (laser, GPS, DORIS, ).
4. Orbit determination: parameter estimation
methods, including least-squares and Kalman
filtering. Attention will be paid to statistical
aspects. Data processing.
7.
168
8.

9.
Practical implementation of orbit determination

where the NASA GEODYN software serves as
an example. Orbit determination of a recent
satellite mission.
Course Material
Montenbruck, O., Satellite orbits: Models, methods,
applications, Berlin, 2000., Springer-Verlag,
Bate , R.R., Mueller, D.D., Fundamentals of
astrodynamics, 1971, Dover, ISBN 0-486-60061-0
Entry qualification
The following is recommended: Fundamentals of

Orbital Mechanics as taught in AE1-020. Moreover,
the lecture series is connected to the lecture series
AE4-873 (Astrodynamics I, II, III) and GE212
(Physical Geodesy)
Follow Up Courses
AE4-876

this course.
EXERCISE EARTHORIENTED SPACE

RESEARCH
AE4-875P
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/2
1
Written report
3,4
62
922
015-2782535
Practical application of space-geodetic

measurement principles. Examples are positioning
of artificial satellites or users on the Earths
surface, or determination of geophysical
parameters and models, such as the gravity field or
ocean currents.
Objectives
Processing of real satellite measurements for a

certain geophysical application. Acquiring computer
skills and experience in working with large software
packages.
Set-up
The exercise can be conducted in the 3rd and 4th

dimester. The exercise consists of a small
individual part and a larger part that can be
conducted in groups of 2 or 3 persons.
Week Arrangement

1 Introduction: 2 hours. Hand out of individual and
group assignments.
214 Conducting the assignments. One fixed
afternoon per week for questions/supervision.
14 Completion and delivery of report.
15 Discussion of report.
Course Material
Dr.ir. P.N.A.M. Visser,Manual exercise AE4875P,hand out during introduction session
Entry qualification

Grade 6 or higher for the written exam of AE4-875.
It is desired to attend the lecture series AE4-876.
169
AE4-876
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
EARTH-ORIENTATED
SPACE RESEARCH
M.Sc. 1
0/0/6/0
Lectures + tutorials
4
Written exams + assignments
3,4
Ir. M.C. Naeije
62
912
015-2783831
M.C.Naeije@lr.tudelft.nl
dr. L.L.A. Vermeersen
Week arrangement: Exercise part

Lecture and study material Solid Earth and Ocean
Dynamics:
1-7. Exercises and assignments
Course Material
The lecturers will provide handouts, readers and

assignments during the course.
The course addresses the use of satellite systems

in geodesy, geodynamics, and oceanography.
Besides the theoretical background of geophysical
and geodynamic processes, attention is paid to the
way these processes can be observed from space.
Often these observations are indirect and have to
be processed and analysed to be interpreted
properly. Examples are given from the research
conducted at the Delft Institute for Earth-Oriented
Space Research (DEOS).
Keywords: Earth rotation, plate tectonics, plate
deformation, sea level change, post-glacial
rebound, tides, ocean circulation, waves and Earth
gravity.
Objectives
After completion the student should be able to
reproduce the theoretical backgrounds of geodesy,
geodynamics and oceanography taught, and to put
them to practice in real life earth observation
problems related to plate tectonics, oceanography,
and gravity. Also he/she should be able to explain
the road map from measured quantity to physical
quantity, to think about new developments and to
come up with new solutions, i.e., understand the
course material. Additionally, the course supports
the final graduation at the Astrodynamics and
Satellite Systems Chair.
Week Arrangement
Lecture and study material Solid Earth

1. Plate tectonics
2. Earth interior, radial profile, mantle convection
3. Postglacial rebound, sea level change
4. Sea-level equation, qualitive solutions
5. Earth rotation, polar wander, changes in LOD
6. Liouville equation, secular drift of rotation
pole, Chandler wobble
7. Gravitation, gravitational variations, isostasy
Lecture and study material Ocean Dynamics
1. Sea level, ocean circulation, Coriolis effect
2. Ekman, geostrophy, baroclinic conditions
3. Dynamic topography, energy, scales, eddies
4. Vorticity, measurement, examples altimetry.
5. Long waves, El Nio, global climate,
atmospheric coupling, computer visualization
6. Surface waves, measurement of waves
7. Ocean tides, theory, measurement and
prediction
170
Pond, S., Pickard, G.L., Introductory dynamical

oceanography, 1986, Pergamon Press, ISBN:
0-08-028728-X
Fowler, C.M.R., The solid earth: an
introduction to Global Geophysics, Cambridge,
1990, Cambridge Univ. Press, ISBN 0-52138590-3
Kaula, W.M., Theory of satellite geodesy,
1966, Blasidell
Entry qualification
The following is recommended: The courses in the

3rd year of the study form a proper base for
following the EOSR course. It is also closely related
with AE4-873 (Astrodynamics), AE4-875 (Precise
orbit determination of satellites), GE4131 (Physical
geodesy), GE4141 (Space geodesy) and GE4151
(Geodynamics).
Follow Up Courses
AE4-877
Examination:
Written exam, 3 hours, at end of 3rd dimester,
50% of total grade. Assignments during the tutorial
part, also 50%. Final degree will be the average.
To be eligible for a final grade the partial exams
should have been passed with a grade higher or
equal 5. In the 4th dimester the 2nd opportunity
for the written exam will take place, while the
assignments can be done as homework but need
then to be discussed on an individual basis. Again
at least a 5 must be obtained.
Open University, Oceanography course team,
Ocean Circulation, Pergamnon Press, 1989,
ISBN 0-08-036369-5;
Open University, Oceanography course team,
Waves, Tides and Shallow-Water Processes,
Butterworth Heinemann, 1999 (2nd edition),
ISBN 0-7506-4281-5.
GEOPHYSICAL
APPLICATIONS OF
SATELLITE
MEASUREMENTS
AE4-877
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
0/0/0/4
Lecture
3
Essay
Dr. L.L.A. Vermeersen
62
901
015-2788272
B.Vermeersen@lr.tudelft.nl
In these lectures the geophysical processes of the

solid earth that were introduced in AE4-876 are
treated at a more advanced level. Especially the
mathematical formalisms are extended in the first
part, after which many applications follow in the
second part. The first part of these lectures consist
of two chapters: `Rheology', in which the
deformation of materials is described, and `Normal
Mode analysis', in which a mathematical formalism
is developed for deformation of the spherical earth.
Subjects that are dealt with in the second part
include postglacial rebound and associated sealevel variations and changes in the low harmonics
of the earth's gravity field; variations in earth
rotation; and deformation of the crust and changes
in gravity due to earthquakes. A number of these
subjects will be treated during the lectures, and a
number will be formulated as subjects for essays to
be written by the students.
Objectives
These lectures aim to deepen the student's insight

in the way space-geodetic measurements can
contribute to improve the knowledge of the earth's
structure and the processes that are taking place in
its interior. Students who actively participate in the
lectures will acquire a deeper insight in the
importance and a broader knowledge of the many
applications of satellite observations for the earth
sciences.
Week Arrangement
1-2. Deformation of the solid earth: characteristics
of earth materials.
3-4. Normal mode analysis: formalism for the
spherical earth.
5-7. Applications: sea-level variations, variation in
the rotation of the earth, postglacial rebound,
postseismic deformation, spatial and temporal
geoid and gravity variations.
Course Material
Sabadini, R., Vermeersen, B., Global dynamics of
the Earth: application of normal mode relaxation
theory to solid-Earth geophysics, Dordrecht, 2003,
Kluwer Acadamic Publishers, ISBN 1-4020-1268-3
Entry qualification
CONTINUUM
MECHANICS
AE4-900
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
0/0/4/0
Lecture
4
Exercises + oral examination
By appointment
Dr. S.R. Turteltaub
62
1.48
015-2785360
S.R.Turteltaub@lr.tudelft.nl
This is an introductory course to the mechanics of
continuous media. It provides a common
framework for solid and fluid mechanics. The topics
covered in this course are central to most theories
that describe the behavior of solids and fluids. This
course covers kinematics of large deformations and
constitutively nonlinear analysis.
Topics include:
Introduction to tensor algebra and tensor analysis.
Kinematics: bodies and configurations. Description
of deformations and motions. Lagrangian and
Eulerian descriptions of a continuum. Material and
spatial time derivatives. Theory of admissible
deformations. Deformation and strain tensors.
Polar decomposition (stretch and rotation tensors).
Rates of deformation (stretching and spin tensor).
Kinetics and balance principles. Mass and mass
balance. Reynolds transport theorem. Body and
contact forces. Balance of linear and angular
momentum. Cauchy and Piola-Kirchhoff stresses.
Introduction to constitutive relations. Principle of
objectivity. Material frame indifference.
Constitutive relations in elasticity and Newtonian
fluid mechanics.
Objectives
The purpose of this course is to provide a unified

framework and a thorough understanding of the
theories of solid and fluid mechanics. General
principles, used in advanced theoretical and
numerical work in mechanics, are emphasized.
Course Material
Lecture notes
Entry qualification
The following is recommended: Students taking

this course are expected to be familiar with linear
algebra, vector calculus and should have taken
introductory courses in solid and fluid mechanics.
Morton E. Gurtin, An Introduction to

Continuum Mechanics, Academic Press, 1981
Lawrence E. Malvern, Introduction to the

Mechanics of a Continuous Medium, Prentice
Hall, 1969
Peter Chadwick, Continuum Mechanics:

Concise Theory and Problems, Dover, 1999
171
Raymond W. Ogden, Non-Linear Elastic

Deformations, Dover, 1997
AE4-930
AEROELASTICITY
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/2
Lecture
3
Project (30%) & Final
examination (70%)
Exam. Period
4,5
Principal lecturer Dr. S.J. Hulshoff
Building Number 62
Room Number
NB 1.56
Phone Number
015-2781538
E-mail address
S.J.Hulshoff@lr.tudelft.nl
Add. Lectures
Physical and analytical aspects of aeroelastic

phenomena, static and dynamic aeroelasticity of
airfoils,model equations for unsteady flows,
linear and non-linear unsteady aerodynamics,
flutter prediction methods, dynamic response
prediction methods, modern computational
aeroelasticity.
Objectives
At the end of the course the student should:

-understand the physical processes which drive
aeroelastic phenomena;
-be able to formulate and solve aeroelastic
response and instability problems;
-be able to identify strengths and weaknesses of
different aerodynamic and structural models for the
analysis of a given aeroelastic condition;
-understand the basic design of computational
aeroelastic solution techniques;
-be familiar with the role of aeroelasticity in aircraft
design.
Course Material
Handouts of overheads presented in class,

weekly problem sets, videos of aeroelastic
phenomena
Demonstrations of static and dynamic
aeroelastic phenomena using a small wind
tunnel.
Zwann, R.J., Aeroelasticity of Aircraft, Delft,

1999, LR dictaat AE4-930
Fung, Y.C., An introduction to the theory of
aeroelasticity , New-York, 1955, Dover
Publications Inc.
Bisplinghoff, C.S., Ashley, H., Halfman, R.L.,
Aeroelasticity , 1955, Adisson-Wesley
Publishing Company
Entry qualification
The
172
AE3-931
AE2-110
AE2-120
AE2-514
AE4-S00
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
CAPITA SELECTA SPACE

M.Sc. 1
n.a.
Self-study
9
To be arranged
Ir. R.J.Hamann (coordinator)
62
812
015-2782079
This course offers an introduction to the general

field of space engineering and technology.
Introduction: Space environment, space flight
history, space markets, launch vehicles, Moon
program, space stations, spacecraft (scientific
research, earth observation, communication,
navigation).
Orbital mechanics: Orbits and orbit dynamics,
ascent trajectories, re-entry, orbit and trajectory
determination, mission aspects.
Space vehicle technology: Spacecraft subsystems
(power, telecommunication, command and data
handling, attitude control, structures, thermal
control, propulsion, guidance and navigation),
functions, options, components, synthesis and
development trends.
Space vehicle engineering: Specification and
generation of requirements, simple cost and risk
modeling, budget elements and synthesis, block
diagrams, configurations, manufacturing example.
Space environment: Gravity field Earth,
atmosphere, foreign objects, radiation, magnetic
field, magnetosphere, vacuum.
Ground systems.
Space missions: Examples.
The parts of Fortescue and Wertz to be studied

are indicated in the lecture notes
Prerequisite
Engineering, Applied Physics or Marine Technology.
is included in the nominal program for those
students who opt for the MSc variants
Astrodynamics and Satellite Systems or System
Integration/Space Systems and strongly
recommended for students that select a MSc thesis
subject in the field of Space applications for one of
the other MSc variants. The student is advised to
contact the course co-ordinator to discuss course
details.
Objectives
Aerospace Engineering a solid foundation in Space
Engineering and Technology.
Set-up
material listed in the paragraph below. The student
will be asked to complete an individual assignment
and to present the results of his work. This will be
the basis for the concluding exam (discussion with
some of the course lecturers involved). For the
assignment and the arrangements for the exam the
student has to contact the principal lecturer.
Course Material

engineering, 2003, 3rd ed., Wiley, ISBN
0471952206
Space Engineering & Technology I, lecture
notes AE1-801
Space Engineering & Technology II, lecture
notes AE2-S01
Space Engineering & Technology III, lecture
notes AE3-803
173
AE4-S01
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
THERMAL ROCKET
PROPULSION SYSTEM
ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/2
Lecture
3
Homework + take-home exam
4
62
814
015-2782059
Topics delt with include propulsion system

requirements, ideal performances, nozzles,
chemical propellants, heat transfer & insulation and
cooling, liquid, solid and hybrid propellant
combustion, solid regression, liquid injection, liquid
propellant storage & distribution (pipeflows), liquid
propellant feeding, non-ideal performances,
component mass estimation and (if time permits)
costing and development, test & verification.
During the lectures extensive use is made of
existing data to allow for verification of the
methods presented.
Objectives
At the end of this course, the student will be able

to analyse and design thermal rocket propulsion
systems using relatively simple methods allowing
to take into account fluid flow, heat addition,
propellant thermochemistry, heat transfer and
cooling, liquid, solid or hybrid ballistics, (liquid)
propellant feeding including storage, ignition and
thrust control.
Set-up
Lectures + homework. Take home exam is

obligatory in case homework is graded less than
7,0.
Week Arrangement

1. Propulsion system requirements: A recap of
dimensioning and sizing rules for attitude and
orbit control, important definitions (thrust,
impulse, specific impulse, volumetric specific
impulse).
2. Ideal rocket motor: Ideal performances, con-di
nozzles, nozzle dimensions, overexpansion,
underexpansion.
3. Optimum thrust, characteristic velocity and
thrust coefficient, quality factors.
4. Chemical propellants: Molar mass, specific
heat ratio and adiabatic flame temperature
calculation for gas mixtures (based on known
reaction equation).
5. Chemical equilibrium calculations (introduction
to program for calculation of chemical
equilibrium gas composition and gas
properties).
6. Heat transfer & cooling: Convection, radiation
and conduction,
7. Cooling: Thermal insulation, ablation,
radiative, film, dump and regenerative cooling.
8.
174
9.
Liquid propellants: Storage & distribution of

liquids. blow down & regulated systems,
pressurant mass, pressurant storage,
turbopumps, motor cycles, turbine drive gas
mass flow.
10. Steady state internal ballistics liquid rocket

engines: Liquid injection, operating pressure,
chamber pressure drop, characteristic length.
11. (Quasi) steady state internal ballistics solid
and hybrid motors: Solid regression, grain
shape, operating pressure, necessary
condition(s) for stable operation, pressure
sensitivity for initial temperature and change
in Klemmung, and local conditions (flow
velocity, pressure, etc.).
12. Non-ideal performances: Nozzle divergence,
boundary layers, heat transfer and two phase
flow, and heat transfer.
13. Non-ideal performances: Chemical equilibrium
flow, frozen flow, and chemical kinetics (1/3
law of Coats, Bray approximation).
14. Component mass (tanks, thrust chamber,
casing, ignitor, etc.) calculation, costing of
rocket motors (development cost, unit cost).
15. Development testing: Development
programme, type of tests, reliability and
number of tests, test facilities.
Course Material
Lecture notes Chemical Rocket propulsion + handout Supporting information and tools are available
through the Internet site of SIS
http://dutlsisa.lr.tudelft.nl/sis/.
Sutton, G.P., Rocket propulsion elements, 6th ed,

Wiley Inter Science,
Entry qualification
B.Sc. exam is recommended.
This lecture series is a continuation of the lectures

on space propulsion in lecture series ae2-806.
AE4-S02
SPACECRAFT
MECHATRONICS
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
M.Sc. 1
4/0/0/0
Lecture
3
Take-home exam in the form of
an essay
Exam. Period
1
Principal lecturer Dr.ir. W. Jongkind
Building Number 62
Room Number
813
Phone Number
015-2787458
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
The lecture has been divided in four topics:

- part I. This part provides the students with an
overview of fundamental mechanism aspects found
in spacecraft: basic elements, dynamic models,
reduction and transformation mechanisms,
applications.
- part II. This part will present basic analogue and
digital electronics on a function level such as:
number representations, logic circuits, operational
amplifiers, digital to analogue conversion, analoge
to digital conversion. part III. This part is
concerned with spacecraft sensors with the
exeption of scientific payload sensors. Subjects
are: sensor specifications, strain gages,
temperature sensing, displacement sensors, Hall
sensors, accellerometers, gyroscopes, sun sensors,
star trackers, star mappers, earth horizon sensors,
magnetometers.
- part IV. Actuators: DC motors, stepper motors,
voice coil actuators, piezoelectric actuators,
torquers, paraffin actuators.
- appendices. The appendices will contain amongst
other information, data sheets of spacecraft
components and subsystems.
Objectives

- function effectively in the field of spacecraft
mechatronics,
- obtain a comprehensive, coherent and in depth
overview of spacecraft mechatronic systems,
- obtain a long lasting view on spacecraft
mechatronic design issues such as electronics,
computer aspects, sensors and actuators,
- obtain knowledge of systems of the past and
present and also of new developments providing
state of the art information as well as future
trends.
Set-up
Lectures.
Week Arrangement

1. Spacecraft Mechatronic elements, reduction
and transformation.
2. Digital electronics, Analogue electronics.
3. Digital to Analogue conversion, Analogue to
Digital Conversion, Strain Gauges,
Temperature sensing.
4. Displacement sensors, Hall sensors,
Accelerometers.
175
5.
Gyroscopes, Sun, Earth and Star sensors,

Magnetometers, Miniaturization.
6.
7.
DC motors, Stepper motors, Voice coil

actuators.
Piezoelectric actuators, Torquers, Paraffin
actuators
Course Material
Syllabus
176
AE4-S12
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
SPACE SYSTEMS
ENGINEERING
M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/2
Lecture
3
Take-home exam
4
Ir. R.J.Hamann
62
812
015-2782079
The course covers advanced space system

engineering topics demonstrated through examples
from current European space programs. It aims at
improving the depth and breadth of space systems
engineering graduate level education at the TUD by
emphasizing the need for the "end-to-end"
approach and life cycle of space systems. The
interrelationships between systems engineering
and project management, programmatics and cost
in the development of typical space projects are
demonstrated at various occasions during the
course. The course is made up of graduate level
lectures and is aimed at MSc students of Delft
University of Technology .
Objectives
The course is guided by three principle objectives,
namely to:
1. Foster interdisciplinary thinking and trade-offs
between specialist domains as practiced in
typical space systems engineering and design
activities.
2. Delineate the "phased approach" as applied
during the life-cycle of typical space projects
from the ideas conception through the
operations phase.
3. Appreciate the use of tools and methods to
support selected Systems Engineering tasks.
Set-up
The lectures at the end of the day from 15.45

17.30 hours in one of the lecture rooms of the DUT
Aerospace Engineering building at the Kluyverweg.
The program includes selected guest lectures.
13. Application: Rosetta, a science mission; Guest

lecture by Ir. J. van Casteren, ESTEC (in-class
hand-out).
14. Design Data management; Configuration
Management; What can go wrong.
15. A development project.
Course Material
Lecture notes AE4-812 and hand-outs of guest

lectures
Lecture notes/book: Lecture notes ae4-812 and
hand-outs of guest lectures. The course material is
intended to serve as "memory notes" only! It
should serve to enhance the participants
comprehension and understanding of the topics
presented, but is not a self-contained script!
Students hence need to be present during the
lectures. Supporting information and tools are
available through the Internet site of SIS.
http://dutlsisa.lr.tudelft.nl/seinternet/.
The material presented stems predominantly from
current European study, design, development or
operational space projects and gives an insight into
selected "real life" unmanned spacecraft and, to a
lesser degree, human tended space systems.
Recommended litterature: INCOSE Systems
Engineering Handbook, version 2.0, July 2000;
International Council on Systems Engineering;
www.incose.org
Examination:
The take-home examination will be based upon the
comprehension of the material presented (incl. the
guest lectures), and upon the students ability to
relate typical space systems engineering issues to
the two principle course objective noted above.
Students need to work on a number of systems
engineering issues within pre-defined scenarios.
Information:
Individual questions/ counseling are possible after
appointment in ir. Hamann's office at the
Aerospace Engineering Faculty building at the
Kluyverweg, 8th floor, Room 8.12
Contacts outside lecture hours, incl. absence from
lectures, should be arranged directly with ir.
Hamann (Tel. 015-2872079, e-mail:
R.J.Hamann@lr.tudelft.nl) or via the secretary,
Mrs. Ellie Verbarendse, Tel. 015-2782072, Fax
015-2785322, e-mail: ssr&t-secr@lr.tudelft.nl
Week Arrangement
1.
2.

Introduction, Systems Engineering aspects:
Process, Life Cycle Cost design-to-Cost, project
phases, Systems Engineering tools.
3. Functional analysis, requirements analysis.
Homework: Functional analysis
4. Risk assessment; Homework: Requirements
analysis; Modularity and interfaces.
5. Homework: Modularity;
6. Concept selection.
7. Homework: Concept selection;
8. Technical Performance Measurement.
9. Verification.
10. Test facilities & Test Set-up.
11. The Russian launchers and manned space
program; Guest lecture by Dr. M. Toussaint,
ESA HQ (in-class hand-out).
12. Integrated System Model.
177
AE4-S38
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
MANNED SPACE FLIGHT

M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/2
Lecture
3
Written
4,5
Prof.dr. W.J. Ockels
62
918
015-2785172
W.J.Ockels@lr.tudelft.nl
The D1 Spacelab Mission constitutes the foundation

for the various aspects that are addressed during
the lecture. Examples are: crew selection and
training, Spacelab systems, underwater testing,
parabolic flight and simulations. Space Shuttle
topics discussed are start, orbit, landing,
aerodynamics, aborts and safety. The course also
covers medical, biological, physical and material
space experiments. Additionally, a number of
futuristic concepts are discussed, such as: re-entry
techniques, use of tethers, lunar base and lunar
voyage.
Objectives
The D1 Spacelab Mission constitutes the foundation

for the various aspects that are addressed during
the lecture. Examples are: crew selection and
training, Spacelab systems, underwater testing,
parabolic flight and simulations. Space Shuttle
topics discussed are start, orbit, landing,
aerodynamics, aborts and safety. The course also
covers medical, biological, physical and material
space experiments. Additionally, a number of
futuristic concepts are discussed, such as: re-entry
techniques, use of tethers, lunar base and lunar
voyage.
Attending the lecture is compulsory. Half the grade

consists of the attendance.
The written examination is made up of 100
questions
AE4-S51
ELECTRICAL AND
INFORMATION
SYSTEMS IN SPACE
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
M.Sc. 1
0/4/0/0
Lecture
3
Essay on a subject to be chosen
in consultation with the lecturer.
Exam. Period
By appointment
Principal lecturer Dr.ir. W. Jongkind
Building Number 62
Room Number
813
Phone Number
015-2787458
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
Computers, construction and use. Communication

aspects, trends, error handling. Input-output
protocols, trends. Antennas, phased array
spectrum and frequency issues. EMC grounding.
Objectives

- understand spacecraft computer-,
Communication-, Antenna- and EMC issues and
quantify their main characteristics;
-understand trends and their impact on future
spacecraft design. Apply the information to the
electrical part of the spacecraft breakdown.
Week Arrangement

1. Computers, basic principles, DSP, Embedded
systems. FPGA, VHDL.
2. Computer use, hard real time, soft real time,
application software, operating systems.
3. Computer redundancy, fault tolerance. Error
handling.
4. Communication, modulation and coding
schemes, inter satellite links, optical links,
trends.
5. OBDH, network protocols, trends.
6. Antennae, phased arrays, spectrum and
frequency issues.
7. EMC, grounding.
Course Material

engineering, 2003, 3rd ed., Wiley, ISBN
0471952206
Syllabus
Entry qualification
178
Fortescue: (Chapter 18, Product Assurance) pp

501-526, (Chapter 17, Spacecraft
Electromagnetic compatibility Engineering) pp
493-500.
Larson: (Chapter 16, Spacecraft Computer
Systems) pp 645-673, (Chapter 13,
Communication architecture: coding) pp 533575
MODERN TOPICS IN
MATERIAL SCIENCE
AE4-X01
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
2/0/0/0
lectures and group presentations
3
group presentation and paper
flexible
Prof.dr.ir. S. van der Zwaag
NB FAM1.30
015-2782248
S.vanderZwaag@lr.tudelft.nl
dr. P. Rivera
dr. T.J. Dingemans
The course aims at introducing modern topics in

materials science to Aerospace Engineers and other
TUD master students in engineering subjects. In
this course we will concentrate on innovations both
in materials and in materials technology.
Objectives
Familiarize students with the latest developments

in the field of materials science and engineering. In
addition, to stimulate innovative thinking the
students are made to elaborate on these new
developments by defining additional developments
and/or new applications. A public defence of the
proposals is part of the course.
Set-up
The course will consist of a number of lectures by

the staff on recent developments in materials
science, using well-selected review and trend
articles. In addition to these lectures, students will
give lectures on modern developments (either
based on pre-selected topics or own suggestions)
too. In these lectures, not only the current status
of the developments are presented, but own
suggestions for further improvements/
developments/applications in aerospace
environment will have to be addressed. Grading of
the students will be on the basis of the
presentation as well as the short (<4 pages)
proposal for further development opportunity. The
exploration of the best proposals will be submitted
for financing via the Young Wild Ideas programme
of the Platform Materials Science and Engineering
of the TUDelft.
Course Material
A compilation of recent review articles.
Follow-up courses
As the topics in this course are wide apart and

changing yearly, no suggestions for follow-up
courses can be given at this stage. A graduation
project might be a suitable follow-up.
Additional information can be obtained from either

of the course lecturers.
AE4-X02
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
PHYSICAL METALLURGY
FOR AEROSPACE
M.Sc. 1
0/0/0/2
lectures
3
oral exam
flexible
dr.P. Rivera
62
1.36
015-2784559
P.Rivera@lr.tudelft.nl
This course provides a firm metallurgical basis for

all aerospace students who have in interest in
metallic structures and would like to know how
metals are made in a specific microstructure to
yield the desired optimum properties. The course is
devoted to improve your understanding and not to
provide yet more factual data.
1. Advanced steels, Al-alloys and Ti-alloys for
aerospace applications.
2. Fundamentals I: crystal structures and lattice
defects.
3. Fundamentals II: thermodynamic equilibrium
and phase diagrams, microstructures, grain
and phase boundaries.
4. Transient phenomena I: nucleation, growth,
coarsening.
5. Transient phenomena II: recovery and
recrystallization.
6. Strengthening mechanisms: solid solution,
work hardening, precipitation.
7. Alloy design by control of equilibrium and
meta -equilibrium phases: thermo-chemical
databases.
8. Alloy design by modelling of transient
phenomena.
9. Breakthrough problems in physical metallurgy
of aerospace alloys.
Objectives
In this course the engineering alloys employed in

aerospace applications are introduced along with
the technology required to attain their outstanding
properties. The fundamental physical concepts
explaining such properties are introduced including
the latest models for alloy design and
improvement. The trends and breakthrough
problems in aerospace alloy design and technology
are pointed out.
Set-up
The course will consist of a number of lectures as

well as a number of design and modelling
exercises.
Course Material
A compilation of lecture notes and recent review

articles.
Follow-up courses
A suitable companion course is Designing

materials with aerospace relevant properties
179

AE4-X03
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
DESIGNING MATERIALS
WITH AEROSPACE
SPECIFIC PROPERTIES
M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/0
lectures
3
oral exam
flexible
NB FAM1.30
015-2782248
dr. P. Rivera
dr. T.J. Dingemans
In most engineering courses on materials science

the students are taught how material
manufacturing processes lead to material
microstructure, which lead to material properties.
These material properties then define the area of
application. In this course the alternative approach
of reverse material engineering is followed. Based
on the design criteria of new and not yet existing
aircraft and spacecraft components, material
properties will be defined. The students will be
trained to translate these combinations of
properties into material structures and
microstructures and to design suitable material
production processes to realise these properties.
The concept of reverse material engineering for
metals, polymers and inorganic materials will be
demonstrated in a series of lectures. The structure
of the lectures will be tailored to maximise the
student involvement during the course.
Objectives
The objective of the course is to train the student
in reverse material engineering. This skill enables
students to initiate and guide new material
developments to meet future targets in the
industry.
Set-up
The course will consist of a number of lectures as
well as a number of student exercises.
Course Material
A compilation of lecture notes.
Follow-up courses
The course material selection in mechanical

design might be a good companion course. The
course Physical metallurgy for Aerospace is a
follow up of this course with a focus on metals and
their design.

180
AE4-X04
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
MATERIALS SELECTION
IN MECHANICAL
DESIGN
M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/0
3
written exam (open book)
3,4
NB FAM1.30
015-2782248
dr. P. Rivera
The course aims at training the students in the field

of material and process selection on the basis of
objective and quantitative criteria. The concept of
material selection on the basis of so-called Ashby
diagrams will be presented in a number of lectures.
Objectives
Providing the student with the tools to make

material and process selection on the basis of
objective and quantitative criteria.
Set-up
The course will consist of a number of lectures in

which the concept of the Ashby diagrams will be
introduced. It is our intention to invite prof.dr. Mike
Ashby, FRS, of Cambridge University to give one of
these lectures.
Course Material
The book Materials Selection in Mechanical

Design by M.F. Ashby. Butterworth Heineman. 2n
Edition 1999
Follow-up courses
AE4-X05
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
NEW DEVELOPMENTS
IN AEROSPACE
POLYMERS
M.Sc. 1
0/0/0/2
3
exam and paper (topic of choice)
4,5
dr. T.J. Dingemans
62
1.34
015-2784520
T.J.Dingemans@lr.tudelft.nl
Aerospace engineers have an impressive materials

tool-box to their disposal when it comes to
designing aircraft or spacecraft. Over the last 10
years, polymeric materials have claimed a
prominent role in this tool-box. Engineers were
able to select from a variety of epoxy resins for the
fabrication of light-weight composites, or
poly(ether imide)s (PEI) for applications that
require more thermal oxidative stability. Rapid
developments in the aerospace industry, however,
force the aerospace engineer to continuously
search for new or alternative polymer systems that
meet stringent, and often multifunctional,
requirements. For example, smart airfoils need
light-weight polymer based sensors and actuators,
while expensive communication satellites might
benefit from a self-healing polymer skin which
heals it self when struck by micro meteorites. In
this course we will discuss the latest trends and
developments in polymers and moreover, what
material properties they add to the materials toolbox.
Objectives
The course designing materials with aerospace

relevant properties might be a good companion
course.
After this course students will be able to

demonstrate a broader knowledge of novel, state of the-art, polymer systems and their potential
aerospace applications.
Set-up

The course will consist of lectures, demonstrations,

in class exercises, and group presentations.
Course Material
A compilation of lecture notes and recent review
articles will be made available through blackboard.
Follow-up courses
No follow-up courses are available at this time,

however, students who feel they want to
strengthen their understanding of polymer systems
are recommended to consider the course
Polymeerkunde st2471
Additional information can be obtained from the

course lecturer.
181
CT5142
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
NON-LINEAR METHODS
IN COMPUTATIONAL
MECHANICS
M.Sc. 1
0/4/0/0
Lecture
3
Oral
L.J. Sluys
015-2782728
L.J.Sluys@citg.tudelft.nl
In the lecture series computational techniques for

the description
of nonlinear behaviour of materials and structures
will be
treated.
Topics of the course are:
- Mathematical preliminaries
- Structure of nonlinear finite element programs
- Solution techniques for nonlinear static problems
- Solution techniques for nonlinear dynamic
problems
- Plasticity models for metals and soils
- Fracture models
- Visco-elastic and viscoplastic models for timedependent problems
- Computational analysis of failure and instabilities
- Geometrically nonlinear analysis
INFORMATION
TRANSMISSION
TECHNIQUES
ET4-027
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
0/0/0/3
Lecture
4
Oral
Whole year by appointment
Dr.Ir. A.J.R.M. Coenen
36
HB20.100
015-2781894
A.J.R.M.Coenen@ITS.tudelft.nl
The lectures mainly describe the design and

application of digital modulation and digital filtering
methods for high signalling rates in modern
telecommunication systems. Special attention is
paid to:
1. one-bit coding systems for the transmission of
digital TV signals and for high-quality digital sound
(compact disc)
2. spread-spectrum systems for the design of
multipath-robust navigational receivers (GPS,
Galileo, UMTS)
Objectives
The series provides the student with the basic

knowledge to adequately use standard finite
element packages that are equipped with the tools
for nonlinear mechanics.
The aim of the course is to acquire theoretical and

practical insights in specific digital modulation
methods as well as in digital filter methods related
to digital TV, digital audio (compact disc) and
current / future multipath-robust digital
navigational receivers. These also include the
development of skills as regard to the notions:
noise-shaping in PCM; digital FM; oversampling;
sampled-data interpolation; (phase-error free)
bandpass quadrature sampling and a.o. the
processing gain in spread spectrum systems.
Week Arrangement
Course Material
Objectives
The course consists of 12 lectures

and will be given in English.
Course Material
Lecture notes "Computational Methods in

Nonlinear Solid Mechanics"
edited by R. de Borst and L.J. Sluys
Entry qualification
A course on the basic principles of the finite

element method is recommended.
182
Dissertation on one-bit coding (available: ETV

and P&N-site), hand-outs (overhead sheet
copies), lecture notes (in Dutch) informatietransmissie-techniek, ITS, 1993
Recommended: 3. Laakso, T.I., Vlimki, V.,
Karjalainen, M. and Laine U.K., "Splitting the
unit delay", IEEE signal processing magazine,
vol. 13, No.1 pp 30-60, January 1996
Candy, J.C., Temes, G.C., Oversampling DeltaSigma data converters, theory design and
simulation, New York, 1992, IEEE press, ISBN
0-87942-285-8
Shenoi, K., Digital signal processing in
telecommunications, New Yersey, 1995, ISBN
0-13-096751
Dixon, R.C., Spread spectrum systems, 2nd
edition, New York, 1984, ISBN 0-471-88309-3
ET4-036
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
TRANSMISSION
SYSTEM ENGINEERING
M.Sc. 1
3/0/0/0
Oral presentations
4
Written
1,2
Dr.Ir. J.H. Weber
36
19.280
015-2781698
j.h.weber@its.tudelft.nl
Prof.dr. J.C. Arnbak
Systems engineering in telecom; link budget

analysis; channel models (e.g., satellite link,
terrestrial line-of-sight link, mobile radio link);
multiplexing (e.g., TDM, SDH); multiple access
(e.g., FDMA, TDMA, CDMA, Aloha); channel coding;
power-bandwidth trade-off; cases (e.g.,
introducing mobile communications on a tropical
island).
Objectives
GE2122
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
Oral Presentations by lecturers (21 hours);

Written exam, in which a system design problem is
to be solved as clearly and documented as
possible. The exam assumes the "open book"
method: One should bring the book by Couch, the
lecture notes, and an electronic calculator. Personal
notes and other books are also permitted, but
students are advised to avoid an information
overload. The nature of the exams appears from
Chapters 6 and 7 of the lecture notes and from the
exams included in the "Course Documents" folder
at the Blackboard site.
Week Arrangement
See BlackBoard
Course Material
Cough II, L.W., Digital and analog

communication systems, 6th ed., 2001,
Prentice Hall,
Lecture notes ET4036 "Transmission Systems
Engineering", J.C. Arnbak & J.H. Weber.
Entry qualification
The following is recommended: Telecommunication
Techniques, Telecom Networks
Follow Up Courses
M.Sc. 1
0/0/0/4
Lecture
4
Written + exercises
4
R. Klees
52
1420
015-2785100
R.Klees@CiTG.TUDelft.nl
1.
2.
3.
The main goal of this course is to extend the

analytical knowledge obtained in the basic telecom
courses to the synthetic skills of systems
engineering and the design of means of digital
transmission, used in modern public and business
networks.
Set-up
PHYSICAL GEODESY
4.
5.
6.
7.
Introduction: objectives, contribution to

geodesy, geophysics, oceanography,
navigation
Gravitation and gravity: Newtons law,
gravitational force, gravitational acceleration,
gravitational potential, centrifugal potential,
gravity potential, basic field equations,
equipotential surface, plumb line.
Representation of the gravitational potential in
terms of spherical harmonics: series expansion
of the reciprocal distance, physical
interpretation of potential coefficients, general
solution of Laplaces equation, series
expansion of a function on a sphere,
orthogonality property of spherical harmonics,
solution of the problems of Dirichlet, Neumann
and Robin for the Laplace equation and a
spherical boundary.
Functional model for various types of
observations: gravimetry, satellite-to-satellite
tracking, satellite gravity gradiometry, radar
altimetry, levelling, satellite ephemeries.
Basic concepts of gravity field determination:
global gravity field determination from
terrestrial and satellite observations;highresolution regional gravity field determination
based on Stokes-type integrals.
Gravimetry: basis principles, absolute and
relative gravimetry, measurement principles,
calibration, corrections, gravity networks.
Heights and height systems: geometrical
heights and physical heights; different types of
physical heights: geopotential numbers,
orthometric heights, normal heights; height
systems; transformation between different
height systems; the Dutch height system.
Exercises: Relative gravity measurements with

LaCoste Romberg and Sintrex gravimeters;
calibration; data processing; exercises. D. van
Loon, 015-2788137
Written examination (2 credit points); exercises (1
credit point); final grade is weighted mean of
written examination (weight 2) and exercises
(weight 1).
Mobile and Wireless Networking

Error-Correcting Codes
183
ID0401AE
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
ENGINEERING DESIGN
PROCESSES
M.Sc. 1
t.b.d.
Self study
3
Oral exam plus written essay
N.F.M. Roozenburg
32
10-4A-09
015-2783472
N.F.M.Roozenburg@io.tudelft.nl
prof.dr.ir. M.J.L.van Tooren
Study of literature on engineering design processes

and design methods followed by an analysis of
procedures and/or organisation of design activities
in industry. This course is intended for horizontal
SIA students of the Faculty of Aerospace
Engineering. The assignment for the course shall
be attuned to the thesis work of the student.
Objectives
Understanding the basic purpose and nature of the

design activity. Understanding the general
structure and essential features of the design
process. Becoming familiar with a range of
creative, analytical and decision-making methods
for design and understanding their appropriate and
underlying principles. Be able to plan appropriate
design strategies and to suggest appropriate
design methods. Developing communication skills
concerning design processes and design methods.
Set-up
Students are expected to study the course material
by themselves. The understanding of the course
material will be judged with a short oral exam.
After passing this exam the student is expected to
write an essay on a subject preferably related to
the subject of the students master thesis. This
essay can also be written based on an internship or
a master thesis assignment done in industry.
Course material:
Productontwerpen: structuur en methoden, N.F.M.
Roozenburg en J. Eekels, Lemma, 1998.
(English version: Product Design: Fundamentals
and Methods, N.F.M. Roozenburg, J. Eekels, Wiley,
1995)
Aerospace students interested in this course can
get more information from prof.dr.ir. M.J.L. van
Tooren, room 810, extension 84794.
ID5131
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
BUSINESS MARKETING
FOR ENGINEERS
M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/0
Lecture
3
Group work and assignments
Prof.mr.dr.ir. S.C. Santema
32
4A-03
015-2783076
s.c.santema@io.tudelft.nl
The course is meant to provide insight into

marketing aspects of business to business
markten. These markets are clearly different from
consumer markets in product development,
production and sales. Internet will be used
intensively for this course.
Marketing and Market information
After initial exploration of the basic concepts this
section will deal with buying behaviour of
organisations. In order to build and develop a
relationship it is crucial to know how the customer
organisation has organised its purchasing function.
Information systems can play an important
supporting role. In addition, industrial market
research, which is characterised by its qualitative
nature, is vital as well. Fuzzy marketing will also be
addressed.
Industrial Buying Behaviour
Selling includes the anticipation of purchasing
decision of an industrial client. This is especially
true for technical or technological products. The
"Decision Making Unit" will be dealt with.
Planning, Organisation and Control
Planning, organising activitities and contorling the
execution is very important. This part of the course
will use the following site:
www.marketingplanning.com.
Marketing of services
It is said that The Netherlands has changed from a
productions towards a service economy in the
nineties. This trend is also noticeable in businessto-business markets. This is understandable
because customers would like to use the products.
Actual ownership has become less important.
Objectives
After completing the course student will have

insight into the fundamental concepts of business
marketing: marketing and market information;
industrial buying behaviour;
planning, organisation and control;
marketing of services.
Set-up
Lectures (2 hours a week), supported by cases and
the internet. The cases illustrate concepts relevant
to this course. Reading will be required.
184
Course Material
Mandatory reading material will be announced

in a later stage.
The lectures, articles and are available on the
internet site
The course will be graded based on a combination

of group and individual work. Cases, internet, and
literature will be dealt with in groups. Furthermore,
two individual assignments will be given. All
course components have to be completed in order
to receive a final grade.
IDE 511
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
INTEGRAL APSECTS OF
BUSINESS MARKETING
M.Sc. 1
0/0/0/4
Lecture
3
Group work and assignments
Prof.mr.dr.ir. S.C. Santema
32
4A-03
015-2783076
The course is meant to provide engineers insight

into current developments and newest ideas in
marketing aspects of business-to-business markets
(including E-commerce). The emphasis will be on
high-tech products. The creation and modification
of the promise to the clients will take up a central
position in this course. In other words, how the
organisation can comply to the needs of the client.
The course will Internet will be used intensively for
this course.
Marketing decisions have consequences for
different disciplines in the organisation of the
provider (as well as the user). Knowledge of the
consequences could lead to the further
development of a relationship with a customer or
strengthen an internal relationship. In both cases,
a future situation is anticipated. The following
themes will be dealt with:
Market focussed financing;
Market focussed communication;
Market focussed informating;
Direct marketing in business-to-business;
The marketing-engineering interface;
Marketing, personnel and organisation;
In addition, extra attention could be addressed to
interests of the participating students. Besides
dealing with qualitative aspects the financial
consequences of decisions will be dealt with as
well.
As a caput selectum attention could be given to
Financial Marketing Tools or the use of financiering
instruments (e.g. leasing) for capital asset
marketing. Central in all the lectures will be the
question if it is possible to plan the actions of a
market-focussed organisation.
Objectives
After completing the course student will have

insight into the consequences of marketing
decisions for other disciplines in an organisation. A
financial perspective will also be given.
Set-up
Lectures dealing with a theme of 4 hours, in which

literature is dealt with collectively, questions will be
addressed and cases solved. The cases are real-life
situations, which will be explained in the 3rd and
4th hour by practitioners. The cases are a direct
result of their experiences in practice. The lectures
will be interactive. Knowledge sharing will take
place using a website.
Course Material
185
Dwyer, R.F., Tanner Jr., J.F., , , Business

marketing: Connecting strategy, relationships
and learning, 2nd ed., 2002, McGraw-Hill
Irwin, Burr Ridge, ISBN 0-07-112332-6
Additional mandatory reading material will be

announced in a later stage.
The lectures, articles and are available on the
internet site
Entry qualification
The following is recommended: ID5131 or
equivalent
The course will be graded based on a combination
of group and individual work. Cases, internet, and
literature will be dealt with in groups. Furthermore,
two individual assignments will be given. All
course components have to be completed in order
to receive a final grade.
186
SPM1210
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
ADMINISTRATION AND
BUSINESS A
M.Sc. 1
4/4/0/0
Lecture
8
Written
2,5
Dr. H.H.M. Verheul
b3.330
015-2781139
h.h.m.verheul@tbm.tudelft.nl
A.F. Correlj
W. Wijting
Law component:
Sectie Recht en Techniek (2001) Recht voor
ingenieurs. Delft: Delft University Press, 3e druk.
Chapters 4, 5, 7, 9 to 13.
Werkboek recht voor Technische Bestuurskunde.
Please note: Information on the Law component is
available from the secretariat of the Law and
Technology group, room 3.3.010, phone 015-278
4798.
Economics component:
Gent, C. van, en P.A.G. van Bergeijk (2000)
Basisboek Markt- en micro-Economie. Groningen:
Wolters Noordhoff, 4e druk.
Entirely, omitting chapters 5 and 6.
Transparancies on blackboard
The Administration and Business A module forms

the theoretical basis for tuition in Law, Economics
and Public Management. We coordinate the module
and teach the management subjects. They address
key concepts from politics, management and
decision-making as well as organization and
management on an introductory level, applying
them to simple case studies.
Objectives
Introduction to the main concepts and theories in

public management, law, and institutional and
market economics
Application of concepts and theories to simple
cases
Familiarizing you with multiperspectivism in social
sciences
Set-up
The Administration and Business A module is

organized as follows:
Public Management: 3 weeks (weeks 36 - 38)
Law: 4 weeks (weeks 39 - 42)
Economics: 6 weeks (weeks 45 - 50)
Integration: 1 week (week 51)
Each component contains an introduction to the
relevant discipline, successively Public
Management, Law and Economics. It discusses and
teaches the basic theories of these disciplines. The
final lecture is an integration lecture.
Week Arrangement
See blackboard
See Blackboard for information update
The course is taught in Dutch.
Course Material
The following is the examination syllabus for TB121
in the academic year 2002-2003.
Public Management component:
Jong, H.M. de, en P.A. Schuszler (red.) (1999)
Nederlandse Staatkunde: Nederland in drievoud.
Bussum: Coutinho, 1e druk.
Entirely, omitting chapters 5, 7 and 8.
Rosenthal, U., e.a (2001) Openbaar Bestuur:
beleid, organisatie en politiek. Alphen aan den Rijn:
Samsom Tjeenk Willink, 6e druk.
Entirely.
187
ST2472
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
POLYMER SCIENCE
M.Sc. 1
0/0/0/4
Lecture
3
Written
4,5
Prof.dr. S.J. Picken
12 DCT
0.027
015-2786946
S.J.Picken@tnw.tudelft.nl
The course covers the following topics: Rubber

Elasticy, Visco Elasticy, Amorphous Polymers,
Crystalline Polymers, Mechanical Behaviour: Creep,
Polymer Engineering. In addition there may be a
special lecture on recycling, depending on the
availability of an external lecturer for this part.
The TM2611 course for L&R students will cover the
following:
Book Young & Lovell
Chapter 4: 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4.1 - 4.4.3
Chapter 5: 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4.1, 5.5.3, 5.5.6, 5.6.1,
5.6.7
Book Van der Vegt:
Chapter 3: 3.1-3.6
Chapter 4: 4.1-4.5
Chapter 5
Chapter 7: 7.1-7.5
Chapter 11
Also the sheets will be available on Blackboard as
Powerpoint files and this will contain additional
infomation that is useful when preparing for the
exam.
Course Material
Young, R.J., Lovell, P.A., Introduction to

polymers, 2nd ed., London 1991, Chapman &
Hall, ISBN 0412 30640 9
Vegt, A.K.van der, Polymeren, van keten tot
kunststof, Delft 1991, Delft University Press,
ISBN 90-4071283-2
Young: With additional slides available on
Blackboard
(English version of Vegt available as PDF file).
Note: there is a new version of this book (5th
ed.) written together with L.E. Govaert which
can also be used. Information on the relevant
chapters will be put on Blackboard.
WB1405A
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
STABILITY OF THINWALLED STRUCTURES I

M.Sc. 1
0/0/4/2
Lecture
4
See remarks
Prof.dr.ir. A. van Keulen
Mekelweg 2, Block 2, third floor
015-2786515
A.vankeulen@wbmt.tudelft.nl
The course is divided into three parts. The first part

deals with several analytical examples of linearized
buckling analysis. Typical examples will be
linearized buckling analysis of columns and plates.
In addition, analytical approximation techniques
are discussed. The second part is reserved for
numerical techniques; in particular linearized
buckling analysis using the finite element method.
For self-containment a short introduction to
geometrically nonlinear finite element analysis is
included. The discussion on numerical linearized
buckling analysis is completed with design
sensitivity analysis for buckling loads. In the third
part the focus is on numerical buckling analysis in a
more general setting. This implies that the
assumption of a linear pre-buckling solution will be
dropped. Moreover, post-buckling analysis is
discussed. Both analytical and numerical
techniques for (initial) post-buckling analysis are
included.
Objectives
The course is designed to give the students a

thorough foundation for solving the variety of
structural stability problems they may encounter in
practice. Students become acquainted with both
analytical and numerical techniques. The course is
intended to place stability problems in a broad
context. Therefore nonlinear buckling, postbuckling and design sensitivity analysis are also
included.
Set-up
Normal lectures will be provided. For further
reading, references to textbooks and literature will
be given. Exercises will be distributed that lead to
both analytical and numerical training. Several of
these exercises require basic hands-on experience
with finite element modeling.
Week Arrangement
Assignments will be provided during the lectures.
The answers must be handed in before the oral
exam.
Course Material
Every student must prepare his own lecture notes.
In addition, references to literature and textbooks
will be given during the lectures.
Entry qualification
The following is recommended: Basic courses on
mechanics and finite elements.
188
Follow Up Courses
AE4-534
The final grade is based on the quality and
completeness of the answers of the take-home
excersises and the quality of an oral examination.
189
WB1416
NUMERICAL METHODS
FOR DYNAMICS
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/2
Lecture and project
3
Oral exam (open book)+ grade of
project
Exam. Period
June and September 2003
Principal lecturer Prof. D.J. Rixen
Building Number 34
Room Number
8C -2-11
Phone Number
015-2781523
E-mail address
D.J.Rixen@wbmt.tudelft.nl
Add. Lectures
Using engineering tools as black boxes can be

dangerous and inefficient. This is especially true
when performing dynamic analysis of structures in
a finite element package. Choosing the right finite
element types and the suitable solution procedure
is critical to get accurate results and to compute
solutions efficiently. In order to discuss basic
principles of numerical methods for dynamics and
to explain fundamental concepts related to
dynamic analysis, the course will cover the
following topics:
- procedures in linear dynamics
- free vibration modes and mode superposition
techniques
- linear solvers (direct/iterative, parallel) and
eigensolvers for finite element models
- model reduction, including dynamic
substructuring
- time-integration of linear and non-linear systems
In this courses emphasis will be put on
understanding fundamental concepts of numerical
methods and how they relate to the mechanics of
structures. Specific topics such as dynamic
analysis of cyclic symmetric structures can be
discussed if time permits and depending on
students interest.
Objectives
The objective of the course is to explain basic

concepts specific to numerical methods typically
used in dynamic analysis codes for engineers.
Set-up
The main part of the course consists in lectures

where the emphasis is put on understanding the
essential concepts underlying engineering dynamic
modelling and analysis, and on being aware of the
efficiency and limitations of classical and advanced
numerical techniques used in engineering codes.
If time permits, a project will be proposed where
the students have to perform the vibration analysis
of a structure both in Matlab (template code given)
and in a commercial Finite Element code.
Course Material
Lecture notes written by the lecturer will be made

available.
Entry qualification
The following is recommended: Engineering

mechanics background from undergraduate studies
190
(statics, strength of material, engineering

dynamics, basic Finite Elements)
Linear Algebra and numerical analysis
Mechanical Vibrations, Theory and Application

to Structural Dynamics, M. Gradin and D.
Rixen, Wiley, 1997.
The Finite Element Method: Linear Static and
Dynamic Finite Element Analysis, T.J.R.
Hughes Prentice-Hall, 1987.
Finite Element Procedures, K.J. Bathe,
Prentice-Hall, 1996
Structural Dynamics: an introduction to
computer methods, R.R. Craig, Wiley, 1981,
ISBN 0-471-04499-7
Matrix Computation, G.H. Golub and C.F. Van
Loan, Johns Hopkins University Press, 1996.
For additional information and inquiries, contact

the lecturer directly.
ENGINEERING
OPTIMIZATION:
CONCEPTS AND
APPLICATIONS
WB1440
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
2/2/0/0
Lectures
3
Prof.dr.ir. F. van Keulen

34
8C -3-08
015-2786515
F.vanKeulen@wbmt.tudelft.nl
This course deals with the following topics:
Formulation of optimization problems
Typical characteristics of optimization

problems
Minimization without constraints
Constrained minimization
Simple optimization algorithms
Discrete design variables
Approximation concepts
Sensitivity analysis
Objectives
The course targets at a first introduction to

engineering optimization. The student will gain
basic knowledge of the formulation of optimization
problems and techniques for solving these
problems.
Course Material
Papalambros, P.Y., Principles of optimal design:

Modelling and optimization
Haftka, R.T., Grdal, Z., Elements of structural

optimization
Entry qualification
The following is recommended: Basic knowledge of

mechanical engineering and mathematics.
Follow Up Courses
WB1441
MATLAB projects have to be carried out.
191
WB3417-03
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
DISCRETE SYSTEMS:
MODELING,
PROTOTYPING,
SIMULATION & CONTROL
M.Sc. 1
2/2/0/0
Lecture and practical
4
Written
Ir. H.P.M. Veeke

34
8D-4-25
015-2782706
H.P.M.Veeke@WBMT.TUDelft.nl
Dr.Ir. J.A. Ottjes
Ir. M.B. Duinkerken
This is a course on the modelling of discrete

systems for production and transport. It deals with
a method to quickly design flexible prototype
models and to implement them in a simulation
environment. The method is based on the systems
approach in combination with process oriented
simulation. Special attention is paid to the
modelling of controls and the use of these models
for real-time control. A number of practical
examples, including a production process, a
transportation system and a port will be
considered. The first part of the course ends with a
written test. Students that have obtained a
satisfactory result will be admitted to the second
part of the course. This takes the form of a
practical. The students, working in project groups,
develop models of realistic cases. Finally the
models are implemented in a distributed simulation
environment TOMAS (see www.tomasweb.com).
WB5420-03
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
DESIGN OF
PRODUCTION SYSTEMS
M.Sc. 1
4/0/0/0
Lecture
4
1,2
Ir. B.R. Meijer
34
8D-4-06
015-2786876
B.R.Meijer@WbMt.tudelft.nl
ir. J. Neve
dr.ir. M. Tichem
Organization of the manufacturing processes,

automation possibilities and integration of activities
with the aim of maximizing the effectiveness of
these processes. The change and effect of
customer orders on product variety and product life
cycle imposes new demands on the manufacturing
processes, e.g. quality improvement, shorter
design lead-times, shorter manufacturing leadtimes and reduction of costs. This can be done with
the aid of new technology, computer integrated
manufacturing which combines the three primary
processes (design and process planning, production
control and scheduling and the manufacturing
process) and integrates them in two area's, the
material flow and the information flow. The
requirements of each primary process will be
treated, the way to integration (by structuring,
automation and integration) and how to implement
CIM with the aid of system- and reference models.
Objectives
To gain knowledge of modern flexible

manufacturing methods and conditions; being able
to recognize and use paradigms of automation
technology in factory design.
Course Material
Singh, N., Systems approach to computerintegrated design and manufacturing, 1996, John
Wiley
Entry qualification
WBPT301 is recommended.
Written open book examination.
192
WB5428
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
APPLIED SYSTEMS
THEORY
M.Sc. 1
2/0/0/0
Lecture
2
Test and assignment
Ir. R. Dekkers
34
8D-3-20
015-2783153
r.dekkers@wbmt.tudelft.nl
No further information available at time of printing.

For more information please check the website:
http://www.wbmt.tudelft.nl
WI2 056LR
SYSTEMS THEORY
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
4/0/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
1,2
prof.dr. A.A. Stoorvogel
36
06.270
015-2781912
A.A.Stoorvogel@its.tudelft.nl
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Linear, time-invariant and causal systems,

concept of linearisation
Solution of linear differential equation,
impulse and step response
Stability
Controllability and observability
Feedback and stabilization
Realisation theory, observers, dynamic
feedback en disturbance decoupling
Transfer functions and the Laplace transform.
Course Material
Olsder, G.J., Mathematical systems theory, Delft

University Press, ISBN 9065621539
Entry qualification
http://ssor.twi.tudelft.nl/Education/wi2056
193
WI4 008TU
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
COMPLEX ANALYSIS
M.Sc. 1
2/2/0/0
Lecture + exercises
4
Written
2,3,4
Prof.dr. H.G. Meijer
36
04.060
015-2782500
Week Arrangement

1. Complex numbers (review), complex
mappings;principal value sqrt(z). Analytic
(differentiable) functions.
2. Complex numbers (review), complex
mappings;principal value sqrt(z). Analytic
(differentiable) functions.
3. Differential equations of Cauchy-Riemann,
harmonic functions. Power series.
4. Differential equations of Cauchy-Riemann,
harmonic functions. Power series.
5. Complex integration. Cauchy theorems,
residue theorem
6. Complex integration. Cauchy theorems,
residue theorem
7. Calculations of residues Application on the
evaluation of several real integrals
8. Calculations of residues Application on the
evaluation of several real integrals
9. Integrands with branch points. Principal value
integral. Zeros, indentity theorem,
maximummodulus theorem; analytic
continuation.
10. Integrands with branch points. Principal value
integral. Zeros, indentity theorem,
maximummodulus theorem; analytic
continuation.
11. Summation of series. Conformal mapping.
12. Summation of series. Conformal mapping.
13. Several applications (e.g. on the evaluation of
Fourier and Inverse Laplace transforms).
14. Several applications (e.g. on the evaluation of
Fourier and Inverse Laplace transforms).
Course Material
JShnicj, K., Analysis fnr Physiker und Ingenieure, -,

Springer, ISBN 3-540588787
Entry qualification
Old examination exercises can be obtained at

Repro TWI, Zuidplantsoen 4
194
WI4 014TU
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
NUMERICAL ANALYSIS
C2
M.Sc. 1
2/2/0/0
Lecture combined with computer
exercises
4,5
Take-home assignments +
practical (30 hrs.)
Ir. J.J.I.M. van Kan
62
704
015-2783634
J.vanKan@math.tudelft.nl
- Numerical methods for partial differential

equations
- Classification of PDE's, finite differential, volume
and elements methods
- Minimalizing problems
- Methods of Ritz and Galerkin
- Linear and higher order base functions
- Conformal and non-conformal elements
- Error estimations
- Solving of large weak systems of linear equations
- Application on heat tansfer, vibrations and
transport problems
Objectives
Getting an overview of finite elements method in a

general scope and to learn solving slight complex
technical problems by means of numerical
methods.
Course Material
J. van Kan, A. Segal, Numerieke methoden voor
partile differentiaalvergelijkingen, DUM, 1993.
A practical assignment is part of the course. The
assignments can be obtained by J. van Kan
(building ITS, room 7.04). Signing in at the
practicum administration at Julianalaan 132, room
0.200 is obliged.
The practical makes use of the computer software
package SEPRAN to work out a finite element
exercise.
INTRODUCTION
OPERATIONS
RESEARCH
WI4 051TU
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
2/2/0/0
Lecture
4
Written
2,3
Dr. H. van Maaren
36
015-2784936
h.vanmaaren@its.tudelft.nl
Introduction: History of Operations Research,

Examples from practice.
Linear Programming: LP Models, Simplex Method,
Sensitivity Analysis, Examples.
Integer Programming: Computational complexity,
Examples, Branch-and-bound procedure.
During the course attention is paid (at introductory
level) to formulate and design mathematical
models as LP models, network models and integer
programming models.
Objectives
The course introduces students to the use of

mathematical models to structure and solve
practical decision problems.
Course Material
Hillier, F.S., Lieberman, G.J., Introduction to

operations research, New Yor, 1995, 7th ed,
McGraw-Hill
WI4 052
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
RISK ANALYSIS
M.Sc. 1
4/0/0/0
Lecture
6
Exercises and final essay
T.J. Bedford
t.j.bedford@its.tudelft.nl
Treatment of mathematical models for application

in risk analysis. Illustration of theory with many
examples. Thorough understanding of concepts
chance and uncertainty.
1. introduction, examples, qualitative models
2. fault- and event trees. Modelling and solution
methods.
3. Probabilistic models. Conditional failure.
4. Bayesian methods
5. Data bases and data acquisition
6. Human failure, software reliability
7. Risk management. Cases.
Objectives
Learning about techniques of risk analysis that
have been developed mainly in the nuclear
technology sector. Learning to apply risk analysis
and modelling to a variety of other technological
fields.
Course Material
Lecture book
195
WI4 087TU
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
OPTIMIZATION,
MODELS AND
ALGORITHMS
M.Sc. 1
2/0/0/0
Lecture
3
Through exercises
2,3
Dr. H. van Maaren
36
015-2784936
Non linear programming algorithms, quadratic and

separable programming techniques, gradient
following methods. Convex structures and special
methods for convex optimisation.
Objectives
The course provides insight in and a survey on a

variety of non linear programming techniques and
models.
Set-up
Course and (computer) exercises (software

provided with textbook).
This course replaces WI3 017
WI4 150TU
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
EQUATIONS 2
M.Sc. 1
0/0/2/0
Lecture
2
3
Dr.ir. W.T. Horssen
36
03-080
015-2783524
Delta functions. Green`s function Heat equation,

wave and Laplace equations. Fourier and Laplace
transforms. Waves in R and R. Shockwaves.
Vibrations of membranes.
Set-up
Lectures.
Week Arrangement

1. Green`s first and second identity, Green`s
functions, Dirichlet`s principle, maximum
principle. Strauss 7.1, 7.2 and 7.3
2. Green`s function for half-spaces and spheres.
Strauss 7.3 and 7.4
3. Waves in R and R, characteristic cone,
conservation of energy, principle of causality,
Huygens' principle. Strauss 12.1 and 12.2
4. Boundaries in R and R, Fourier`s method,
vibrations of a drumhead, nodal curves, Bessel
functions, asymptotic behaviour. Strauss
12.3, 12.4 and 12.5
5. Computation of eigenvalues, completeness and
separartion of variables. Strauss 9.1 and 9.2
6. Distributions and Green`s functions, Fourier
transforms. Strauss 10.1, 10.2 and 10.4
7. Laplace transforms, non-lineair partial
differential equations, shockwaves. Strauss
11.1 and 14.1 (read 11.2 to 11.6)
Course Material
0471548685
Entry qualification
WI3 150TU is recommended.

review is held with the student, within two weeks
of the assignment deadline.
196
WM0104WB
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
PSYCHOLOGY OF
ORGANIZATIONS
M.Sc. 1
4/0/0/0
3
Written
Dr. M. Wiethoff
31
015-2781716
M.Wiethoff@tbm.tudelft.nl
The obligatory literature concerns a.o. subjects as:

motivation, alienation, stress, types of task
distributions and its effects on wellbeing, efficiency
and the organisation, team work, leadership,
innovations in organisations. In the book, theories,
empirical support, strategies, applications and
cases in organisations are presented. There are no
lectures. In addition to studying the literature, a
paper should be written (approximately 3 pages)
about a particular subject. There are a few subjects
to choose from. The paper must be handed in a
week before the oral examination. After the
examination has been passed, the student takes
part in a three-day training. In the training, cases
and role-play will help in understanding problems
of structures and changes in organisations, and
training in appropriate skills.
Objectives
1.
2.
3.
Knowledge of types of organisations in relation

to stress, alienation and motivation, the effect
of power, organisation culture and changes in
organisation.
Understanding of ways at which work can be
organised, ways of leadership roles, and
Ability in finding solutions for several types of
organisation problems.
Set-up
Literature study, oral examination, 3-day training.
The course is solely organised for students
registered to the Industrial Organization section.
WM0324LR
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
ETHICS AND
ENGINEERING FOR
AEROSPACE
ENGINEERING
M.Sc. 1
0/4/0/0
Lectures and tutorials
3
Test + essay
December, January
Ir. J. Sinke
61
0.54
015-2785137
Principal lecturer: dr.ir. I.R. van
de Poel
several + student assistents
This course describes and analyses the

responsibility of engineers in the light of
philosophical, historical and juridical backgrounds.
Topics that are addressed include:
- Description and analysis of the problems
encountered by engineers who want to act
responsible.
- Codes of ethics for engineers.
- Argumentation and reasoning.
- Uncertainty, ignorance, risks, and their
implications for responsible behaviour.
- The technological fix of engineers and others.
- (Philosophical) ethics, the foundation of (criteria)
for good and evil, right and wrong, responsible and
irresponsible behaviour.
- Responsibility within and of organisations; the
role of law.
Objectives
After the course students should:
be able to recognise and analyse the ethical

aspects and problems of their future
professional practice and to conduct a
solution-oriented debate about such problems;
have knowledge of relevant backgrounds

(ethics, law, responsibility in and of
organisations, historical developments).
Set-up
The first week an introductory lecture is given.

During the next five weeks, there are small-group
tutorials. Presence at the lecture and tutorials is
compulsory. The tutorials have to be prepared each
time by a small group of students. During the
lecturing period, the students also write an essay.
Week Arrangement
1. Introduction.
2. Code of ethics.
3. Argumentation and reasoning.
4. Ethics.
5. Risks and hazards of technology; the
technological fix.
6. Responsibility in and of organisations.
7. Test.
197
Course Material
Title: Ethics and engineering (syllabus).

Author: composed by H. Zandvoort, I.R. van
de Poel and M. Brumsen. Available at:
Dictatenverkoop LR.
Title: Ethics and engineering for Aerospace
Engineering (working book). Author:
composed by I.R. van de Poel and A. Vlot.
Available at: Dictatenverkoop LR.
WM0404TU
SOCIOLOGY OF
TECHNOLOGY, LABOUR
AND ORGANIZATION
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
Examination: In the seventh week, there is a test.

In addition, students have to write an essay.
Entry qualification
The following is recommended: Students should
have completed a considerable part of the
curriculum in Aerospace Engineering
Additional Information: Enrolment is compulsory

for this course to allow for the timely composition
of the tutorial groups. Students can enrol at the
secretariat of Aerospace Materials. Students who
register too late can not be placed. For more
information see website:
http://www.ethiek.tudelft.nl.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
M.Sc. 1
2/2/0/0
Lecture
3
Written and assignment
2,5
Dr. W. Ravesteijn
31
3.3.080
015-2784120
W.Ravesteijn@tbm.tudelft.nl
The engineers practice

Technical development and society
Technical science and responsibility
Professionalisation
Organisation models and management styles
Labour relations in the Netherlands
Quality of working life
Globalisation
ICT and new forms of labour
ICT and organisational change
Technology and enterprise in a changing world
Objectives
The course provides students with knowledge and

insight regarding working within an enterprise,
both as an engineer and as a manager, and the
social context of the engineers profession
Course Material
1. Ravesteijn, W. De onderneming in
sociologisch perspectief (The enterprise from
sociological perspective), textbook
2. Ravesteijn, W. Techniek en bedrijf vanuit
sociologisch perspectief (Technology and
enterprise from sociological perspective),
workbook
A.L.Mok, In het zweet uws aanschijns,

Leiden/Antwerpen 1990.
C.J.Lammers, Organiseren van Bovenaf en
onderop, Utrecht, 1993.
H.Procee, de nieuwe ingenieur, Amsterdam,
1997.
The course consists of lectures, the study of a

textbook and the carrying out of an assignment.
The exam consists of multiple choice and essay
questions.
198
INDUSTRIAL
ORGANIZATION A
WM0504TU
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
6/0/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
1,3
ir. W. ten Haaf
34
8D-3-25
015-2786781
Prof.ir. H. Bikker
ir. F.P.M. Sopers, ir. H.P.M.
Veeke
Structuring of primary processes, aspects of

investment policies, effectivity, productivity,
efficiency.
Overview of quality assurance issues. Analysis and
requirement specification for human labour.
Maintenance issues, cost calculation, planning,
network planning.
Budgetting and output evaluation. Business
information
Personnel evaluation and reward systems.
Inventory control.
Objectives
This course is designed to deepen and widen the
insight in operations management and to review
the internal organization against external
requirements. Students must be able to recognize
relevant technological, economical and social
aspects in order to indicate subjects for
investigation. Also, they must be able to trace
there own position as an engineer and the role of
technology.
When re-engineering the processes, he or she
should be aware which aspects have to be
integrated into a design or have to be part of a
redesign project.
Course Material
Veld, J.in't, Analyse van organisatieproblemen,

2002 8th ed., Education partners, ISBN
90110459217
Syllabus wm0504tu vol. 1 + vol. 2, VSSD
Entry qualification
WM0501TU is recommended.
Actual information can be found on

www.bedrijfsleer.tudelft.nl <news>
Credits: 3 ECP (without workshops)
4 ECP (including workshops)
WM0505TU
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
INDUSTRIAL
ORGANIZATION B
M.Sc. 1
0/0/8/0
Lecture
3
Essay and oral examination
4
ir. W. ten Haaf
34
8D-3-25
015-2786781
Capita selecta of business engineering and

management. Every year the lecturer chooses an
important book on the field of business engineering
and management, especially related to the subject
The Learning organisation. This book will be
studied intensively. Further 5 afternoons will be
reserved for exercising purposes: 2 afternoons will
be spent on the approach of management
accounting and cost pricing as seen by the Delft
school of thought for business engineering and
management. 3 afternoons will be spent on the
Strategy Evaluation Method.
Objectives
After attending this course, students understand:
The structure of problem solving processes and
their functional contributions. Basics of the
Learning Organisation.
and have experience with:
Drawing up a strategy for problem solving,
espacially concerning the topic of the Learning
Organisatio
Set-up
During 6 successive weeks, lectures will take place
about earlier announced chapters from the book
chosen by the lecturer. These lectures are to be
prepared and presented by a group of 2 or 3
pupils, who will be chosen by the lecturer each
week. This presentation will be marked. The other
pupils will be invited to ask questions or to
comment the presentation. The comments too will
be marked.
In short the course is based on the assumption
that the student is willing to follow the lectures
actively and studies the weekly chapters before the
beginning of the lecture. Finally, the course will
contain an amount of practicing afternoons and a
Human Resource Management presentation given
by an enterprice that practices the theory of the
Learning organisation. Students that want to enroll
can attend to the lecturer.
Entry qualification
It is recommended to enroll only after following the

courses WM0501TU, WM0504TU, WM0508et or
WM0510et.
Recent information, e.g. concerning the college

schedule and the book that is chosen, will be
published on the website of the section business
engineering and management studies:
www.bedrijfsleer.tudelft.nl
199
WM0517LR
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
CORPORATE STRATEGY
M.Sc. 1
0/2/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
Dr. M.A. Zegveld
32
c2.100
015-2784711
m.a.zegveld@tbm.tudelft.nl
Drs. E. den Hartigh
Dr. R. Ortt
The study subject of the course corporate strategy

is how companies formulate their mission
statements, the objectives related to that mission
statement as well as relevant issues that need to
be solved. Main questions are:
How will the internal moving forces (vision and
core competencies) be assimilated in the policy?
How will the external moving forces (technology,
market and competition) be assimilated in the
policy?
In what way can companies translate strategic
technology into innovation?
What image do companies have of the future and
to what extent is this image translated into action?
How will the different lines of approach (companyas-a-whole: business activities en functional
activities) be worked out in a plan?
How will the strategic control be performed?
Strategy concerns the broad outlines of the
development a company wishes to realize and the
objectives connected to his growth. Therefore it is
necessary to reflect on the vision of the future and
to analyze the core competencies. Furthermore, an
analysis of the external moving forces and the
preconditions in which the company has to operate.
For this purpose, future-research - among other
methods - is used. Within the company there are
different lines of approach that have to be funneled
down the strategic plan.
Objectives
At the end of the course the student has:

understanding of the essence and background of
corporate strategy and the applied perspectives
knowledge of how companies make their strategic
policy
knowledge of several analyzing techniques that are
being used
understanding of the relation between technology,
innovation and strategy
knowledge of how to make choices, selection
processes, and analyzing the consequences of
these choices
Week Arrangement
This course consists of six introductory lectures and

one case. These will be given in seven weeks time
in sessions of two hours duration each. The casesession with Harvard (or other) will probably take
more time. Therefore the lectures will be held at
the end of the day and the section MoT supplies
sandwiches and drinks during the case-lectures.
200
This course consists of six introductory lectures and

one case. These will be given in seven weeks time
in sessions of two hours duration each. The casesession with Harvard (or other) will probably take
more time. Therefore the lectures will be held at
the end of the day and the section MoT supplies
sandwiches and drinks during the case-lectures.
Course Material
A reader, which students have to buy in advance

cases (will be handed out during the lecture)
This course is offered as a general optional course
and helps students to gain an insight how
companies come to strategic choices and
objectives, and furthermore it will teach some of
the techniques used. The course is relevant for
students who consider a career in trade and
industry.
The course provides a good view on how
companies think and act; the course will be given
by tutors of Delft University who work or have
worked in trade and industry themselves.
Given the intensive character of this class the
maximum number of students that can participate
is 30. The students experience this class as
intensive and interesting.
Testing takes place through an individual written
exam in which knowledge and perception will be
tested.
WM0605TU
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
BUSINESS ECONOMICS
M.Sc. 1
2/2/0/0
Lecture
4,5
Written
2,5
Drs. A.P. Poot
c.2.020
015-278928
a.p.poot@tbm.tudelft.nl
This course emphasizes that the essential

prerequisite of successful engineering application is
economic feasibility. Economic feasibility requires
that the benefits of a new system, product or
services, are larger than its costs (including
opportunity costs). The course therefore presents
the concepts and techniques of analysis useful in
evaluating the economic feasibility of systems,
products and services.
The first part of the course introduces the students
to the concept and various dimensions of cost, to
methods of allocating (indirect) costs to products
and/or divisions, and to "period matching"
(allocating expenses as costs to relevant time
periods). The second part discusses various
methods of investment project appraisal that can
be used to assess whether it is economically
worthwhile to introduce a new system or product
or to expand current production. Special attention
will be paid to the "time value" of money, i.e. the
opportunity cost (in the form of interest receipts
foregone) of a given project. The third part of the
course deals with financial accounting: the firm's
balance sheet, income statement and cash-flow
statement. It is shown how the information
contained in these statements can be used to
evaluate the financial health of the firm: using
financial ratio analysis, we will learn to analyse
(changes in) the firm's debt position, its liquidity
position, firm profitability, its asset position, and
the firm's market value.
Objectives
The general aim of the course is to help students to

become proficient in the evaluation of engineering
proposals in terms of benefits and costs. This aim
is achieved by:
1. introducing the students to the various
concepts of costs, their roles in decision
making, and cost allocation models;
2. building a thorough understanding of the
theoretical and conceptual basis upon which
the practice of financial project analysis is
built, with emphasis on understanding the
"time value of money";
3. explaining financial accounting statements
(balance sheet; income statement; cash flow
statement), so that engineers can understand
and speak in a common language when it
comes to making business decisions;
4. equipping students with tools to assess the
financial health of a company, i.e. financial
ratio analysis.
201
Set-up
Weekly lectures (2 hours).
Course Material
To be announced; please check:

http://www/eci.tudelft.nl/ under courses, and
http://blackboard.tudelft.nl
INTRODUCTION TO
LAW
WM0722TU
Year
Period
Course Method
Credits (ECTS)
Examination
Exam. Period
Principal lecturer
Building Number
Room Number
Phone Number
E-mail address
Add. Lectures
M.Sc. 1
0/2/0/0
Lecture
3
Written
2, 5
Mr. Ir. A. Rijlaarsdam
015-2784798 (Secr.)
A.Rijlaarsdam@tbm.tudelft.nl
The
1.
2.
3.
main topics of the lectures are:

The concept of law. The purpose of the law.
Compulsive law and regulatory law.
The significance of patents, brands, models
and trade names in industrial life.
4. Public law. Distinction between legislation,
jurisdiction and administration.
5. The purpose of civil law. An outline of business
law and contract law.
6. Labour law (lay-offs, strikes etc.).
7. Tort law.
8. Law of the working councils.
9. Law as a tool for conflict resolution.
10. Environmental law.
11. Company law (plc, Ltd).
Course Material
Reader Introduction of law, ed. 1999-2000. Law
for Engineers, ed. 1999. Collection of Law for
Engineers, ed. 1999-2000.
202
COURSE CODES
CHAPTER 8 - COURSE CODES

CHAIR ATTRIBUTES
The codes contain a chair attribute. The following table indicates which chair corresponds to which attribute.
Aerodynamics
Industrial Organisation
Aerospace Materials
Astrodynamics and Satellite Systems
System Integration / Analysis and Space System Design
Other
1(00)
2(00)
3(00)
4(00)
5(00)
6(00)
7(00)
8(00)
9(00)
S(00)
X(00)
0(00)
The code 0(00) is used for courses that span multiple chairs and courses not attributed to a chair, such as the
internship.
NEW COURSES CODES AS OF ACADEMIC YEAR 2003-2004

Old course code
New course code
B.Sc. 3rd year

AE3-410
WI4 025TU and WI4 026TU
M.Sc. 1st year
AE3-S01
WI3 150TU
AE4-534
AE4-686
CT5147
GE3121
GE4541
IN2025
TB121
TM2611
WB1410
WB2206
WB3407A
WB3417
WB5420
WI3 027
WI4 027TU
WM0104TU
WM0515TU
AE4-530
AE4-786
AE4-251
GE2122
GE4542
IN2410
SPM1210
ST2471
AE4-900
WB2207
WB3420-03
WB3417-03
WB5420-03
WI4 142TU
WI4 150TU
WM0104WB
WM0517LR
COURSE LANGUAGE
This table gives an overview of the language(s) in which B.Sc. courses and M.Sc. core courses are given.
Code
Course
English/Dutch
AE1-020 I
AE1-020 IIa
AE1-020 IIb
AE1-701
AE1-801
AE1-914 I
AE1-914 II
AE1-914 III
AE2-115 I
AE2-115 II
AE2-202 I
AE2-202 II
AE2-521 I
Introduction to Aerospace Engineering I

Introduction to Aerospace Engineering II
Introduction to Aerospace Engineering III
Aerospace Materials and Manufacturing I
Space Engineering and Technology I
Delft Applied Mechanics Course Statics
Delft Applied Mechanics Course Dynamics
Delft Applied Mechanics Course Mechanics of Materials
Aerodynamics B
Aerodynamics C
Airplane Performance II
Aircraft Gas Turbines
Aircraft Stress Analysis and Structural Design I
E/D
E/D
E/D
E/D
E/D
E/D
E/D
E/D
E/D
E
E/D
E/D
E
203
203
COURSE CODES
Code
Course
English/Dutch
AE2-521 II
AE2-522 I
AE2-522 II
AE2-600
AE2-701
AE2-914
AE2-S02
AE3-130
AE3-302
AE3-359
AE3-495
AE3-525
AE3-803
AE3-914
AE3-A75
AE3-S01
AE4-051
AE4-140
AE4-141
AE4-143
AE4-145
AE4-151
AE4-152
AE4-153
AE4-160
AE4-170
AE4-171
AE4-180
AE4-196P
AE4-201
AE4-211
AE4-212
AE4-212P
AE4-213
AE4-214
AE4-215
AE4-251
AE4-294
AE4-301
AE4-301P
AE4-303
AE4-303P
AE4-304
AE4-304P
AE4-305
AE4-305P
AE4-360
AE4-360P
AE4-361
AE4-361P
AE4-393
AE4-394
AE4-399
AE4-401
AE4-485
AE4-490
AE4-496
AE4-522
AE4-524
AE4-528
AE4-530
AE4-535 I
AE4-535 II
Aircraft Stress Analysis and Structural Design II

Aircraft Structural Analysis I
Aircraft Structural Analysis II
Aerospace Materials and Manufacturing II
Vibrations of Aerospace Structures
Space Engineering and Technology II
Aerodynamics D
Flight Dynamics I
Aerospace Systems and Control Theory
Air Transport
Introduction to Finite Element Analysis
Space Engineering and Technology III
Aircraft Systems
Systems Engineering and Technical Management Techniques
Gasdynamics I
Gasdynamics II
Adv. Num. Tech. for Fluid Flow and Str. Eng.
Aero. Design of Aircraft & Adv. Transp. Syst.
Boundary Layer Flows - A
Boundary Layer Flows - B
Experimental Methods In Aerodynamics
4th Year Exercise
A/C Prop., Noise and Poll. Emissions
Wind Energy
Exercise Flight Dynamics and Simulation
Robust Control
Exercise Robust Control
Exercise Aircraft Responses to Atm. Turb.
Spacecraft Attitude Contr. Syst. Des. Exercise
Aerospace Human Factors Project
Flight Simulation
Exercise Flight Simulation
Avionics I
Avionics II
Dynamics And Control Of Space Systems
A.M.O. Project (including Stress Exercise)
Special Topics In Vibration And Buckling
Structural Design and Optimization I
Structural Design and Optimization II
E
E
E
E/D
D*
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
D
D
E
E
E
E
E
E
* For non-Dutch speaking students an alternative trajectory on individual basis is offered.
204
COURSE CODES
Code
Course
English/Dutch
AE4-537
AE4-627
AE4-628
AE4-632
AE4-652
AE4-684
AE4-711
AE4-729
AE4-731
AE4-736
AE4-737
AE4-786
AE4-805
AE4-870
AE4-873 I
AE4-873 II
AE4-875
AE4-875P
AE4-876
AE4-877
AE4-900
AE4-930
AE4-S01
AE4-S02
AE4-S12
AE4-S38
AE4-S51
AE4-X01
AE4-X02
AE4-X03
AE4-X04
AE4-X05
CT5142
GE2122
ID0401AE
ID5131
IDE 511
IN1 278LR
MOT1610
SPM1210
ST2472
TN4090AE I
TN4090AE II
WB1405A
WB1416
WB1440
WB3417-03
WB5420-03
WB5428
WI1 276LR
WI1 277LR
WI2 029LR
WI2 056LR
WI3 046LR
WI3 097LR
WI4 008TU
WI4 014TU
WI4 025TU
WI4 026TU
WI4 027TU
WI4 051TU
WI4 087TU
WM0104WB
WM0201TU
WM0203TU
WM0324LR
WM0404TU
Structural Design And Airworthiness
Composites: Mat., Struct. & Prod. Processes
Fibre Reinforced Materials in Aero. Structures
Introduction To The Techniques Of Measuring
Thermal Control
Sheet Metal Forming
Astronomy
Rocket Motion
Astrodynamics I
Astrodynamics II
Precise Orbit Determination Of Satellites
Exercise Earth-Oriented Space Research
Earth-Orientated Space Research
Geophysical Appl. Of Satellite Measurements
Continuum Mechanics
Aeroelasticity
Thermal Rocket Prop.Syst. Analysis & Design
Manned Space Flight
Electrical and Information Systems in Space
Designing Mat. w. Aerosp. Specific Properties
Non-Linear Methods in Comp. Mechanics
Physical Geodesy
Introduction to Computer Programming
From Business Logistics to Supply Chains
Administration and Business A
Polymers Science
Physics: Thermodynamics
Physics: Electricity and Magnetism
Stability of Thin-Walled Structures I
Engineering Optimization: Concepts and App.
Discrete Syst.: Modeling, Prot., Sim. & Ctrl.
Applied Systems Theory
Calculus Part I and II
Linear Algebra
Systems Theory
Probability Theory and Statistics
Complex Analysis
Partial Differential Equations A
Partial Differential Equations B
Partial Differential Equations C
Introduction Operations Research
Optim., Models & Algorithms
Psychology Of Organizations
Technical Writing and Business Communication
Oral Presentation Skills
Sociology of Techn., Labour and Organization
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E/D
E
D
E
E/D
E/D
E
E
E
E
E
E
E/D
E/D
E/D
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
D
E
E/D
E
D
205
205
COURSE CODES
Code
Course
English/Dutch
WM0501TU
WM0504TU
WM0505TU
WM0517LR
WM0605TU
WM0722TU
Introduction to Business Engineering and Management

Industrial Organization B
Corporate Strategy
Business Economics
Introduction to Law
E
D*
D*
D
D
D
* For non-Dutch speaking students an alternative trajectory on indiv idual basis is offered.
206
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION REGULATIONS B.SC.
Onderwijs- en examenregeling (OER)1

(art. 7.13 W.H.W.)
inclusief de Regels en Richtlijnen
van de examencommissie
(art. 7.12 W.H.W.) voor de
Bacheloropleiding
Luchtvaart- en Ruimtevaarttechniek
A full English edition of the Teaching and Examination Regulations B.Sc. will be issued separately.
207
207
ONDERWIJS- EN EXAMENREGELING (OER)

BACHELOROPLEIDING
Paragraaf 1
Artikel 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ALGEMEEN
TOEPASSELIJKHEID VAN DE REGELING
Deze regeling is van toepassing op het onderwijs en de examens van de bacheloropleiding Luchtvaart- en
Ruimtevaarttechniek, verder te noemen: de opleiding.
De opleiding wordt verzorgd onder verantwoordelijkheid van de Faculteit Luchtvaart- en
Ruimtevaarttechniek van de Technische Universiteit Delft, verder te noemen: de faculteit.
Voor de opleiding genoemd onder 1. is een uitvoeringsregeling van kracht die bestaat uit de
vakomschrijvingen in de Study Guide en de Regels en Richtlijnen, die een aanvulling op en een geheel
vormen met deze Onderwijs- en Examenregeling.
De onderwijs- en examenregeling en de uitvoeringsregeling worden vastgesteld door de decaan, na overleg
met de Examencommissie. De studentenraad heeft instemmingsrecht.
De Examencommissie heeft de mogelijkheid om ten gunste van de student af te wijken van de onderwijs- en
examenregeling alsmede de regels en richtlijnen.
Artikel 2
BEGRIPSBEPALINGEN
De in dit reglement voorkomende begrippen hebben, indien die begrippen ook voorkomen in de Wet op het hoger
onderwijs en wetenschappelijk onderzoek (WHW), de betekenis die deze wet eraan geeft.
In deze regeling wordt verstaan onder:
a)
de wet: de Wet op het Hoger onderwijs en Wetenschappelijk onderzoek afgekort tot WHW en zoals sindsdien
gewijzigd;
b)
opleiding: de bacheloropleiding bedoeld in artikel 7.3a, lid 1 onder a van de wet;
c)
student:hij of zij die is ingeschreven aan de Technische Universiteit Delft (als student of extraneus) voor het
volgen van het onderwijs en/of het afleggen van de tentamens en de examens van de opleiding;
d)
propedeuse: de propedeutische fase van de opleiding, als onderdeel van de opleiding, genoemd in artikel
7.8 van de wet;
e)
practicum:een praktische oefening als bedoeld in art. 7.13, lid 2 onder d van de wet, in n van de volgende
vormen:
het maken van een scriptie;
het maken van een werkstuk of een proefontwerp;
het uitvoeren van een ontwerp- of onderzoekopdracht;
het verrichten van een literatuurstudie;
het verrichten van een stage;
het deelnemen aan veldwerk of een excursie;
het uitvoeren van proeven en experimenten;
het deelnemen aan een project;
of het deelnemen aan een andere onderwijsactiviteit, die gericht is op het bereiken van bepaalde
vaardigheden.
f)
tentamen: een onderzoek naar en beoordeling van de kennis, het inzicht en de vaardigheden van de student
met betrekking tot een bepaalde onderwijseenheid door minste ns n daartoe door de examencommissie
aangewezen examinator.
g)
examen: toetsing, waarbij door de examencommissie wordt vastgesteld of alle tentamens van de tot de
propedeuse en B.Sc. behorende onderwijseenheden met goed gevolg zijn afgelegd (conform artikel 7.10 van
de wet).
h)
examencommissie: de examencommissie van een opleiding ingesteld conform artikel 7.12 van de wet.
i)
examinator: degene die door de examencommissie wordt aangewezen ten behoeve van het afnemen van
tentamens, conform artikel 7.12 van de wet;
j)
uitvoeringsregeling: de vakomschrijvingen in de Study Guide en de Regels en Richtlijnen behorende bij de
onderwijs- en examenregeling .
k)
studiepunt: de omvang van examenonderdelen wordt uitgedrukt in studiepunten conform het European
Credit Transfer System (ECTS). Een studiepunt komt overeen met 28 studiebelastingsuren.
l)
werkdag: maandag t/m vrijdag m.u.v. de erkende feestdagen.
m)
Study Guide: de handleiding voor de opleiding genoemd in artikel 1 bevattende de specifieke informatie voor
de bacheloropleiding
n)
instelling: Technische Universiteit Delft
o)
examenprogramma: het geheel van eisen betreffende kennis, inzicht en vaardigheden, behorende bij een
bepaalde fase van de studie. Het voor een bepaald cursusjaar geldende examenprogramma wordt in de
Study Guide Luchtvaart- en Ruimtevaarttechniek van dat jaar vermeld;
p)
examenonderdeel: een onderwijseenheid van de opleiding, in de zin van de wet;
q)
cohort: de groep studenten die zich in een bepaald studiejaar voor het eerst voor de opleiding Luchtvaarten Ruimtevaarttechniek heeft ingeschreven.
208
Artikel 3
DOEL VAN DE OPLEIDING: PROFIEL VAN DE BSC GRADUATE
De BSc graduate bezit basiskennis van de luchtvaarten ruimtevaartdisciplines inclusief ontwerpen. Bovendien
heeft hij kennis van de fundamentele en algemeen technische wetenschappen, voorzover deze relevant zijn voor
luchtvaarten ruimtevaarttechniek. Zijn technisch-wetenschappelijke kennis gaat samen met een
toepassingsgerichtheid en probleemoplossend vermogen. Hij is in staat om de verschillende kennisgebieden te
integreren om binnen gestelde kaders non-standardontwerp en technische problemen op te lossen. Hij kan de
gekozen oplossingen duidelijk presenteren. De BSc graduate heeft de juiste voorbereiding voor de MSc
Luchtvaart- en Ruimtevaarttechniek en voor verwante disciplines.
Artikel 4
TOELATING TOT DE OPLEIDING
Voor toelating tot de opleiding dient de student te voldoen aan de in hoofdstuk 2 van het Studentenstatuut nader
beschreven voorwaarden.
Artikel 5
EINDTERMEN VAN DE OPLEIDING
De eindtermen van de bacheloropleiding zijn opgenomen in Appendix 1.

Artikel 6
INRICHTING VAN DE OPLEIDING
De bacheloropleiding wordt uitsluitend voltijds verzorgd.

Artikel 7
1.
2.
3.
4.
In de opleiding kunnen de volgende examens worden afgelegd:

a.
het propedeutisch examen
b.
het bachelorexamen
Het propedeutisch examen heeft een studielast van 60 studiepunten (ECTS).
Het bachelorexamen heeft (inclusief de propedeuse) een studielast van 180 studiepunten (ECTS). Het
bachelorexamen wordt afgerond met de Ontwerp/Synthese-oefening. Uit deze opdracht blijkt dat de student
de bij de bacheloropleiding opgedane kennis beheerst en kan toepassen.
Alvorens het bachelorexamen af te leggen is het propedeutisch examen afgelegd.
Artikel 8
1.
2.
3.
EXAMENS VAN DE OPLEIDING
TAAL
Het onderwijs wordt gegeven en de examens worden afgenomen in het Nederlands.

In afwijking van het gestelde in lid 1 kan een andere taal worden gebezigd:
a.
wanneer het onderwijs betreft dat door een anderstalige docent gegeven wordt, of
b.
indien de specifieke aard, de inrichting of de kwaliteit van het onderwijs dan wel de herkomst van de
studenten daartoe noodzaakt.
De opleiding kent voor het eerste en tweede cursusjaar een Engelstalige variant. Ter voorbereiding op de
Engelstalige Masteropleiding Aerospace Engineering, wordt het derde cursusjaar gedeeltelijk in het
Nederlands en gedeeltelijk in het Engels aangeboden.
209
209
Paragraaf 2 SAMENSTELLING ONDERWIJSPROGRAMMA BSc OPLEIDING

Artikel 9
1.
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
P
P
T
T
T
2.
T
T
P
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
210
Het eerste studiejaar omvat de volgende examenonderdelen, tentamens (T) en practica (P); uitgedrukt in
ECTS studiepunten:
ae1-020 introduction to aerospace engineering
ae1-020 introduction to aerospace engineering I
ae1-020 introduction to aerospace enginee ring IIa
ae1-020 introduction to aerospace engineering IIb
ae1-914 delft applied mechanics course
ae1-914 I statics
ae1-914 II dynamics
ae1-914 III mechanics of materials
ae1-801 space engineering & technology
ae1-701 aerospace materials and manufacturing
ae1-701 aerospace materials and manufacturing
ae1-701P metal working demonstration
in1278PR computer programming practical
wi1276lr calculus part I and II
wi1276lr calculus part I
wi1276lr calculus part II
wi1277 linear algebra
ae1-004 introduction to aerospace engineering project
ae1-004AER aerodynamics project
ae1-004CAD computer aided design
ae1-004IN intro to aerosp engineering labexercise
ae1-004LEC introduction to aerosp engineering course
ae1-004PM projection methods
ae1-004PRO spatial insight and computer application
ae1-004STR structures project
9
3
6
11
4
3
4
5
4
4
3
12
6
6
6
10
10
Het tweede studiejaar omvat de volgende examenonderdelen, tentamens (T) en practica (P); uitgedrukt in
ECTS studiepunten:
ae2-600 aerospace materials & manufacturing II
ae2-115 aerodynamics B and aerodynamics C
ae2-115 I aerodynamics B
ae2-115 II aerodynamics C
ae2-202 airplane performance & aircraft gas turbines I/II
ae2-202 I airplane performance II
ae2-202 II aircraft gas turbines
wb4280pr practical aircraft gas turbines
ae2-914 vibrations of aerospace structures
ae2-521 aircraft stress analysis and structural design I/II
ae2-521 aircraft stress analysis and structural design I
ae2-521 aircraft stress analysis and structural design II
ae2-522 aircraft structural analysis I/II
ae2-522 aircraft structural analysis I
ae2-522 aircraft structural analysis II
ae2-701 history of technology
ae2-S02 space engineering & technology II
tn4090ae physics I and II
tn4090ae thermodynamics
tn4090ae electricity and magnetism
wi2029lr differential equations
wi2029lr differential equations
wi2030lr practical differential equations
ae2-011 second year project part 1
wm0201 technical writing & business communication
ae2-191P low speed windtunnel practical
ae2-192P supersonic windtunnel exercise 1
ae2-208P flight test
ae2-702P practical materials engineering
ae2-523P experimental construction exercise
5
6
6
4
4
3
4
4
4
4
3
6
7
4
3
4
4
4
5
5
1
1
1
1
1
3.
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
P
T
T
P
T
T
T
P
P
P
Het derde studiejaar omvat de volgende examenonderdelen, tentamens (T) en practica (P); uitgedrukt in
ECTS studiepunten:
ae3-130 aerodynamics D
ae3-914 mechanics II: dynamics and stability
ae3-359 aerospace systems & control
ae3-302 flight dynamics I
ae3-S01 systems engineering & technical manageme nt techn.
ae3-A75 aircraft systems
ae3-495 air transport II
ae3-525 introduction to finite element analysis
ae3-525 introduction to F.E.M.
ae3-525P F.E.M. practical
ae3-803 space engineering & technology III
wi3079 numerical mathematics
wi3097lr numerical mathematics
wi3097lrp numerical mathematics practical
wi3046lr probability theory & statistics
wi3150tu partial differential equations 1
wm0501tu introduction to business economics
ae3-001 design synthesis exercise
ae3-001 design synthesis exercise
wm0203tu oral presentation skills
ae3-193P low speed windtunnel test 3
ae3-302P exercise flight dynamics & simulation
Paragraaf 3
Artikel 10
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
3.
2.
14
1
3
TENTAMENS
AANTAL, TIJDVAKKEN EN F REQUENTIE TENTAMENS
VOLGORDE TENTAMENS
GELDIGHEIDSDUUR TENTAMENS
Studenten die de studie hebben onderbroken, of op andere wijze studievertraging hebben opgelopen,
behoren onderdelen die 10 jaren of langer geleden zijn behaald en inmiddels vakinhoudelijke wijziging
hebben ondergaan, opnieuw af te leggen.
Artikel 13
1.
3
3
3
14
In de uitvoeringsregeling wordt de volgorde bepaald waarin de tentamens c.q. practica moeten worden
afgelegd.
Toelating tot het tweede jaar is afhankelijk van de studievoortgang; indien de student minder dan 24
studiepunten (ECTS) van het propedeusejaar heeft behaald of indien de student het projectonderwijs in de
propedeuse niet heeft voltooid, is het niet toegestaan om aan tentamens en practica van het tweede jaar
deel te nemen. Hierbij worden de resultaten tot en met de juni-tentamenperiode meegenomen. Studenten
die niet voldoen aan de toelatingseisen tot het tweede jaar dienen in overleg met de studieadviseur in
september een studieplanning op te stellen. Op basis van de gerealiseerde studievoortgang kan de
studieadviseur de examencommissie adviseren de student toe te laten tot het tweede jaar.
Voor enkele onderdelen van de studie zijn in de uitvoeringsregeling toelatingsvoorwaarden gesteld. Wanneer
de student niet is toegelaten kan geen geldig resultaat voor dat onderdeel verkregen worden.
Artikel 12
1.
Tot het afleggen van de tentamens van de opleiding wordt tweemaal per jaar de gelegenheid gegeven: de
eerste maal aansluitend op het semester waarin het onderdeel werd onderwezen en afgerond;
De tentamens bedoeld in het eerste lid worden afgenomen zoals voor het desbetreffende vak is aangegeven
in het rooster van het lopende studiejaar; van de gelegenheid tot het afleggen van schriftelijke tentamens
wordt jaarlijks bij het begin van het studiejaar een tentamenrooster gemaakt en gepubliceerd.
Indien ten aanzien van een tentamen in lid 1 bedoeld niet is aangegeven hoeveel malen per studiejaar het
kan worden afgelegd omdat het gaat over een onderdeel dat niet in de faculteit zelf wordt onderwezen, en
het onderdeel ook niet speciaal voor de faculteit verzorgd wordt, is het daaromtrent bepaalde in de
onderwijs- en examenregeling van de desbetreffende faculteit of opleiding van toepassing, behoudens een
hiervan afwijkende beslissing van de examencommissie van de betreffende faculteit.
Tot het afleggen van het tentamen van een onderdeel dat is komen te vervallen, wordt in het eerste
studiejaar dat het vak is vervallen nog tweemaal de gelegenheid geboden.
Artikel 11
1.
3
3
3
4
3
3
3
4
3
1
3
4
VORM VAN DE TENTAMENS EN DE WIJZE VAN TOETSEN
De tentamens die behoren tot het propedeutisch examen en het bachelorexamen worden afgelegd op de
wijze zoals in de uitvoeringsregeling van de betreffende opleiding voor het lopende studiejaar wordt
beschreven. De praktische vaardigheid wordt getoetst in de practicumuren.
Indien de wijze waarop een tentamen kan worden afgelegd niet is aangegeven, omdat dat tentamen
betrekking heeft op een onderwijseenheid die niet in de faculteit wordt onderwezen en er sprake is van een
niet specifiek voor studenten van de faculteit verzorgende onderwijseenheid, dan is het daaromtrent
211
211
3.
4.
bepaalde uit de onderwijs- en examenregeling van die onderwijseenheid van toepassing. De

examencommissie waaronder het tentamen ressorteert, bepaalt telkenjare op welke wijze het tentamen
wordt afgenomen.
Aan lichamelijk of zintuiglijk gehandicapte studenten kan de gelegenheid worden geboden de tentamens en
de practica op een zoveel mogelijk aan hun individuele handicap aangepaste wijze af te leggen. Eventueel te
verlenen faciliteiten zijn ter beoordeling van de examencommissie na verzoek van de student. De commissie
neemt hierbij de redelijkheid van het verzoek en de financile en personele mogelijkheden van de faculteit
in acht.
Het in het vorige lid bedoelde verzoek wordt door de student binnen 5 weken na aanvang van de studie
ingediend. Dit verzoek wordt vergezeld van een maximaal 1 jaar oude medische verklaring van een arts of
een geregistreerd gezondheidspsycholoog. Indien er sprake is van dyslexie dient dit verzoek vergezeld te
gaan van een verklaring van een algemeen erkend testbureau inzake dyslexie.
Artikel 14
1.
2.
Mondeling wordt niet meer dan n student tegelijk getentamineerd, tenzij de examencommissie anders
heeft bepaald.
Het mondeling afnemen van een tentamen is openbaar, tenzij de examencommissie of de desbetreffende
examinator in een bijzonder geval anders heeft bepaald, dan wel de student daartegen bezwaar heeft
gemaakt.
Artikel 15
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.
3.
2.
3.
4.
HET INZAGERECHT
Gedurende tenminste 1 maand na de bekendmaking van de uitslag van een schriftelijk tentamen krijgt de
student op zijn verzoek inzage in zijn beoordeelde werk.
Gedurende de termijn genoemd in lid 1 kan elke belangstellende kennisnemen van de vragen en opdrachten
van het desbetreffende tentamen, alsmede van de normen aan de hand waarvan de beoordeling heeft
plaatsgevonden.
De examinator kan bepalen dat inzage of kennisneming geschiedt op een van tevoren vastgestelde plaats en
tijdstip. Indien de student aantoont door overmacht verhinderd te zijn of te zijn geweest op een aldus
vastgestelde plaats en tijdstip te verschijnen, wordt hem een andere mogelijkheid geboden, zo mogelijk
binnen de in lid 1 genoemde termijn.
Artikel 17
1.
VASTSTELLING EN BEKENDMA KING VAN DE UITSLAG
De examinator stelt terstond na het afnemen van een mondeling tentamen de uitslag vast en reikt de
student de desbetreffende schriftelijke verklaring uit.
De examinator stelt de uitslag van een schriftelijk tentamen zo spoedig mogelijk doch uiterlijk binnen 15
werkdagen na afloop van de zitting vast. De examinator verschaft de studentenadministratie van de faculteit
de nodige gegevens. De studentenadministratie zorgt voor registratie, publicatie en melding van de uitslag
binnen 20 werkdagen na afloop van de zitting aan de student met in achtneming van de privacy van de
student.
Registratie van de resultaten vindt alleen plaats indien de student zich tijdig voor het betreffende tentamen
in het Tentamen Aanmeld Systeem heeft aangemeld (zie art. 4 Regels en Richtlijnen)
Ten aanzien van een op andere wijze dan mondeling of schriftelijk af te leggen tentamen bepaalt de
examencommissie van tevoren op welke wijze en binnen welke termijn de student in kennis wordt gesteld
van de uitslag.
Tentamenuitslagen worden gedateerd op de dag van afname. Resultaten van practica worden gedateerd op
de dag van de inlevering van het verslag.
Artikel 16
1.
MONDELINGE TENTAMENS
DE NABESPREKING VAN TENTAMENS
Zo spoedig mogelijk na de bekendmaking van de uitslag van een mondeling tentamen vindt desgevraagd
dan wel op initiatief van de examinator een nabespreking plaats tussen de examinator en de student. Alsdan
wordt de gegeven beoordeling gemotiveerd.
Gedurende een termijn van 1 maand, die aanvangt op de dag na de bekendmaking van de uitslag, kan de
student, die een schriftelijk tentamen heeft afgelegd aan de desbetreffende examinator om een
nabespreking verzoeken. De nabespreking geschiedt op een door de examinator te bepalen plaats en
tijdstip, maar binnen een redelijke termijn.
Indien een collectieve nabespreking wordt georganiseerd, kan de student een verzoek als bedoeld in het
vorige lid pas indienen, wanneer hij bij de collectieve bespreking aanwezig is geweest en het desbetreffende
verzoek motiveert, of wanneer hij door overmacht verhinderd is geweest bij de collectieve bespreking
aanwezig te zijn.
Het bepaalde in het voorgaande lid is van overeenkomstige toepassing, indien de examencommissie dan wel
de examinator de student gelegenheid biedt om zijn uitwerkingen te vergelijken met modelantwoorden.
Paragraaf 4
Artikel 18
1.
212
VRIJSTELLING VAN TENTAMENS
VRIJSTELLING VAN TENTAMENS EN/OF PRAKTISCHE OEFENING
De examencommissie kan op grond van eerder met goed gevolg afgelegde tentamens en/of examens in het
hoger onderwijs, dan wel op grond van buiten het hoger onderwijs opgedane kennis of vaardigheden,
2.
vrijstelling verlenen voor n of meer tentamens en/of praktische oefeningen, indien de student tenminste
voldoet aan een van de hierna te noemen voorwaarden:
a)
behaald tentamen van een qua inhoud en studielast overeenkomstige onderwijseenheid van een
andere universitaire opleiding in Nederland of daarbuiten, van de Open Universiteit dan wel van een
vergelijkbare hogere beroepsopleiding in Nederland;
b)
bewijs van tijdens een opleiding buiten het Nederlands hoger onderwijs opgedane kennis of ervaring
dan wel van door hem in ander verband reeds verrichte werkzaamheden.
De examencommissie kan op voorstel van de desbetreffende examinator vrijstelling verlenen voor een
tentamen. Het voorstel wordt met redenen omkleed.
Paragraaf 5
Artikel 19
1.
2.
2.
SAMENSTELLING
Het examenprogramma behorende bij de examens vermeld in art. 7 wordt jaarlijks door de decaan
vastgesteld na overleg met de examencommissie en wordt in de Study Guide Luchtvaart- en
Ruimtevaarttechniek van dat jaar vermeld.
Voor het propedeuse en BSc-examen geldt dat de examenuitslag wordt vastgesteld overeenkomstig het
examenprogramma behorende bij het cohort (zie art. 2, lid q) van de student. Dit wil zeggen dat de student
die in jaar x begonnen is het propedeuse programma van jaar x en het verdere BSc-programma van jaar
x+1 (het tweede cursusjaar) en x+2 (het derde cursusjaar) dient af te leggen. Het invoeren van een
verandering in het onderwijsprogramma kan vergezeld gaan van een overgangsregeling waarin de
uitzonderingen op dit artikel worden vastgesteld door de decaan.
Artikel 20
1.
TIJDVAKKEN EN FREQUENTIE EXAMENS
Tot het afleggen van de propedeuse- en het bachelorsexamen wordt tenminste tweemaal per jaar de
gelegenheid gegeven. De data van de zittingen van de examencommissie worden gepubliceerd in de Study
Guide van de opleiding van het betreffende studiejaar.
De student kan zich voor het examen aanmelden zodra hij heeft voldaan aan de opleidingseisen en de
bewijzen van de door hem behaalde onderdelen aan de studentenadministratie overlegt.
Paragraaf 6
Artikel 21
1.
2.
EXAMENS
STUDIEBEGELEIDING EN STUDIEADVIES
PROPEDEUSE-ADVIES
Aan iedere student wordt in de loop van zijn eerste jaar van inschrijving voor de propedeuse een advies
uitgebracht over de voortzetting van zijn studie binnen of buiten de opleiding. De student die na de
tentamenperiode van het tweede semester 24 studiepunten (ECTS) of minder heeft behaald, of het
eerstejaars project met een onvoldoende resultaat heeft beindigd, wordt nog niet toegelaten tot het tweede
jaar (zie art. 11, lid 2). De student ontvangt hiervan bericht.
De decaan draagt zorg voor studiebegeleiding van de studenten, die voor de opleiding zijn ingeschreven,
mede ten behoeve van hun orintatie op mogelijke studiewegen in en buiten de opleiding.
Artikel 22
STUDIEVOORTGANGSRAPPORT
1.
Iedere student wordt in de gelegenheid gesteld om via het programma BlackBoard op internet zijn
studievoortgang te bekijken.
2.
Na afloop van het studiejaar wordt aan iedere student bericht gezonden omtrent zijn studievoortgang.
Paragraaf 7
Artikel 23
1.
2.
3.
2.
WIJZIGING REGELING
Wijziging van deze regeling wordt door de decaan bij afzonderlijk besluit vastgesteld, na overleg met de
Examencommissie. De studentenraad heeft instemmingsrecht.
Geen wijzigingen vinden plaats die van toepassing zijn op het lopende studiejaar, tenzij de belangen van de
studenten hierdoor redelijker wijze niet worden geschaad.
Wijzigingen kunnen voorts niet ten nadele van de student van invloed zijn op enige beslissing die krachtens
deze regeling door de examencommissie ten aanzien van een student is genomen.
Artikel 24
1.
INVOERINGSBEPALINGEN
OVERGANGSREGELING
Indien de samenstelling van het studieprogramma inhoudelijk wijziging ondergaat, dan wel dat n van de
in de onderwijs- en examenregeling opgenomen artikelen wijziging ondergaat, wordt door de decaan een
overgangsregeling vastgesteld die gepubliceerd wordt in de uitvoeringsregeling.
In deze overgangsregeling wordt in ieder geval opgenomen:
213
213
a.
b.
c.
Artikel 25
1.
2.
een regeling omtrent vrijstellingen die verkregen kunnen worden op grond van reeds behaalde
tentamens,
het aantal malen dat alsnog tentamen in de onderdelen van het oude programma kan worden
afgelegd,
de geldigheidsduur van de overgangsregeling.
BEKENDMAKING
De decaan zorgt voor een passende bekendmaking van deze regeling en van de uitvoeringsregelingen,
alsmede van de wijziging ervan.
De onderwijs- en examenregeling en de uitvoeringsregeling van ieder van de opleidingen worden
opgenomen in de Study Guide.
Artikel 26
INWERKINGTREDING
Deze regeling treedt in werking op 1 september 2003.
214
REGELS EN RICHTLIJNEN VAN DE EXAMENCOMMISSIE

Artikel 1
TOEPASSINGSGEBIED
Deze regels en richtlijnen zijn van toepassing op de tentamens en de examens van de bacheloropleiding
Luchtvaart- en Ruimtevaarttechniek, hierna te noemen: de opleiding.
Artikel 2
1.
2.
BEGRIPSOMSCHRIJVING
In deze regels en richtlijnen wordt verstaan onder onderwijs- en examenregeling (OER) de geldende
onderwijs- en examenregeling bedoeld in artikel 7.12 van de Wet op het hoger onderwijs en
wetenschappelijk onderzoek(WHW).
De overige in deze Regels voorkomende begrippen hebben dezelfde betekenis als in de OER en in de WHW.
Artikel 3
DAGELIJKSE GANG VAN ZAKEN
De examencommissie bestaat uit vijf leden en wijst uit haar midden de voorzitter aan. De voorzitter is belast met
de behartiging van de dagelijkse gang van zaken van de commissie. De commissie wordt ondersteund door een
ambtelijk secretaris en geadviseerd door de studieadviseur.
Artikel 4
1.
2.
3.
De aanmelding voor LR-tentamens geschiedt via het tentamen-aanmeldsysteem (TAS). De aanmelding start
4 weken voor het begin van de tentamenperiode, en sluit 2 weken voor het betreffende tentamen.
Aanmelding voor tentamens die door andere faculteiten verzorgd dient te gebeuren overeenkomstig de bij
die faculteit geldende regeling.
Indien een student meent zich t.a.v. de inschrijving op overmacht te kunnen beroepen, dient hij zich uiterlijk
twee weken voor de dag van het tentamen tot de studieadviseur te wenden. Door het overleggen van een
door de studieadviseur getekende verklaring van aantoonbare overmacht kan hij alsnog worden toegelaten
tot het tentamen.
Alleen de tentamenresultaten van die studenten die op de door het tentamen-aanmeldsysteem, of door een
eventueel als alternatief gehanteerd systeem, geproduceerde aanmeldingslijst staan of in het bezit zijn van
een overmachtsverklaring, worden in het cijferregistratiesysteem geadministreerd.
Artikel 5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
AANMELDING EN DEELNAME TENTAMENS
DE ORDE TIJDENS EEN TENTAMEN
De examencommissie c.q. de aangewezen examinator draagt er zorg voor, dat ten behoeve van de
schriftelijke tentaminering surveillanten worden aangewezen die namens en onder verantwoordelijkheid van
de examinator erop toezien dat het tentamen in goede orde verloopt.
De student is verplicht zich op verzoek van of vanwege de examencommissie te legitimeren met het bewijs
van inschrijving van de TU Delft en de campuscard.
Aanwijzingen van de examencommissie c.q. de examinator of surveillant die voor de aanvang van het
tentamen zijn gepubliceerd, alsmede aanwijzingen die tijdens het tentamen en onmiddellijk na afloop
daarvan worden gegeven, dienen door de student te worden opgevolgd.
Een student die niet voldoet aan het bepaalde bij of krachtens het tweede en derde lid kan door de
examencommissie c.q. de examinator worden uitgesloten van verdere deelname. De uitsluiting heeft tot
gevolg dat geen uitslag van het betreffend tentamen wordt vastgesteld. Voordat de examencommissie
hiertoe besluit, stelt zij de student in de gelegenheid te worden gehoord.
De duur van het tentamen is zodanig dat studenten, naar redelijke maatstaven gemeten, voldoende tijd
hebben om de vragen te beantwoorden.
De tentamenopgaven mogen door de studenten na afloop van het tentamen worden meegenomen. Een
uitzondering op deze regel geldt voor tentamens waarbij de opgaven en antwoorden tezamen dienen te
worden ingeleverd.
De tentamenruimte mag niet eerder worden betreden dan na toestemming van de surveillant.
Binnen een half uur na de officile aanvang van het tentamen is het de kandidaten niet toegestaan de zaal
te verlaten. In dringende gevallen kan na dit half uur toestemming worden gegeven de tentamenruimte
tijdelijk te verlaten. Niet meer dan n persoon tegelijk mag afwezig zijn.
Tentamenkandidaten mogen geen mobiele telefoon bij zich dragen, deze moeten in een tas opgeborgen zijn
en uit staan. Het is onder geen voorwaarde toegestaan om tijdens een tentamen een mobiele telefoon mee
naar buiten te nemen. Gebruik van een mobiele telefoon of andere communicatiemiddelen tijdens een
tentamenzitting wordt opgevat als fraude (zie art. 6).
Kandidaten dienen zelf voor schrijf-, reken- en tekenmateriaal te zorgen. Uitwerk- en kladpapier is evenwel
aanwezig.
Indien bij een tentamen het gebruik van bepaalde rekenapparatuur niet is toegestaan dient de examinator
dit ruim voor het tentamen duidelijk te maken.
De tekst van de tentamenuitwerkingen mag niet met potlood of met rode inkt worden geschreven (tenzij
daartoe van tevoren door de docent toestemming is gegeven).
Tijdens de tentamenzitting mogen geen boeken, dictaten etc. worden geraadpleegd (tenzij daartoe van
tevoren door de docent toestemming is gegeven).
Indien door een surveillant fraude wordt geconstateerd, wordt gehandeld conform artikel 6, lid 2 van deze
regeling.
215
215
15.
16.
17.
Alvorens de tentamenzaal definitief te verlaten (niet eerder dan een half uur na aanvang van de
tentamenzitting) dient de kandidaat ten minste het voorblad van de uitwerking, voorzien van naam en
studienummer, aan de surveillant te overhandigen.
De surveillant geeft voor aanvang van het tentamen aanwijzingen over hoe te handelen indien de kandidaat
het tentamen voortijdig meent te moeten afbreken.
Studenten die menen in aanmerking te kunnen komen voor een afwijkende tentaminering dienen, conform
het bepaalde in artikel 13 lid 3 en 4 van de OER, een met redenen omkleed verzoekschrift in bij de
voorzitter van de examencommissie.
Artikel 6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
FRAUDE
Onder fraude wordt verstaan het handelen van een student dat erop is gericht het vormen van een juist
oordeel omtrent zijn kennis, inzicht en vaardigheden geheel of gedeeltelijk onmogelijk te maken.
Voorbeelden van fraude zijn het spieken bij tentamens, het overnemen van practicumverslagen van
medestudenten en het plegen van plagiaat.
Wanneer ter zake van het afleggen van een examenonderdeel of examen fraude wordt geconstateerd of
vermoed, wordt dit door de examinator of surveillant zo spoedig mogelijk schriftelijk vastgelegd. De
examinator of surveillant kan de examinandus verzoeken eventuele bewijsstukken beschikbaar te stellen.
Een weigering hiertoe wordt in het schriftelijke verslag vermeld. De examinandus krijgt de mogelijkheid het
examenonderdeel of examen verder af te ronden.
De examinandus wordt in de gelegenheid gesteld een schriftelijk commentaar bij het verslag van de
examinator of surveillant te voegen. Het verslag en het eventuele commentaar worden zo spoedig mogelijk
ter hand gesteld van de examencommissie.
De examencommissie kan de examinandus uitsluiten van volgende deelnames aan het desbetreffende
examenonderdeel of examen. De uitsluiting heeft tot gevolg dat geen uitslag van het desbetreffende
examenonderdeel of examen wordt vastgesteld.
Voordat de examencommissie een besluit tot uitsluiting neemt, stelt zij de examinandus in de gelegenheid
ter zake te worden gehoord.
In geval van fraude kan de examencommissie de student voor de termijn van ten hoogste n jaar,
gerekend vanaf het moment van fraude, het recht ontnemen om tentamens en examens van de opleiding af
te leggen.
Artikel 7
MAATSTAVEN
De examencommissie c.q. de examinator neemt bij de beslissingen, die hij/zij moet nemen, tot richtsnoer de
volgende maatstaven en weegt bij strijdigheid het belang van hanteren van de ene maatstaf tegen dat van de
andere af:
a.
het behoud van kwaliteits- en selectie-eisen van een tentamen;
b.
doelmatigheidsniveau, onder meer tot uitdrukking komend in een streven om tijdverlies voor studenten, die
goede voortgang met de studie maken bij de voorbereiding van een examen of examenonderdeel zoveel
mogelijk te beperken.
c.
bescherming tegen zichzelf van de student die een te grote studielast op zich wil nemen;
d.
mildheid ten opzichte van studenten die door omstandigheden, buiten hun schuld, in de voortgang van hun
studie vertraging hebben ondervonden.
Artikel 8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
De vragen en opgaven van het tentamen gaan de tevoren bekend gemaakte bronnen, waaraan de
tentamenstof is ontleend, niet te boven. Uiterlijk een maand voor het afnemen van het tentamen wordt de
omvang van de te tentamineren stof bekend gemaakt.
De vragen en opgaven van het tentamen zijn zo evenwichtig mogelijk verspreid over de examenstof.
Het tentamen representeert de onderwijsdoeleinden naar inhoud en vorm.
De vragen en opgaven zijn duidelijk en ondubbelzinnig.
Geruime tijd voor het afnemen van het desbetreffende tentamen maakt de examencommissie resp. de
examinator bekend op welke wijze uitvoering wordt gegeven aan het bepaalde in artikel 12 van de OER, met
betrekking tot de wijze waarop het tentamen wordt afgelegd.
Geruime tijd voor het schriftelijk tentamen stelt de examencommissie of examinator de studenten die
daaraan deel willen nemen, in de gelegenheid kennis te nemen van een schriftelijke proeve van een
dergelijk tentamen.
Van ieder tentamen is een Nederlandstalige en een Engelstalige versie.
Artikel 9
1.
2.
216
VRAGEN EN OPGAVEN
BEOORDELING TENTAMEN
Voor het vaststellen van (eind)cijfers voor examenonderdelen gelden de volgende voorwaarden:
a.
bij de beoordeling wordt gebruik gemaakt van een schaal van 1 tot 10, waarbij zoveel mogelijk
gehele cijfers worden toegekend;
b.
voor practica kunnen ook de volgende beoordelingen worden gebruikt: onvoldoende of voldoende
c.
eindcijfers vanaf 6.0 zijn 'voldoende (eind)cijfers';
d.
eindcijfers lager dan 6.0 zijn 'onvoldoende (eind)cijfers'
e.
een vrijstelling komt overeen met het cijfer 6,0.
Ingeval een examenonderdeel bestaat uit meerdere deelvakken en deze vakken apart getentamineerd
worden geldt de volgende regeling:
a.
de cijfers van de deelvakken worden gegeven in n decimaal achter de komma
b.
voor het examenonderdeel wordt een gewogen eindcijfer vastgesteld volgens de regel:
eindcijfer = [gewicht(i) x cijfer(i)]/ gewicht(i)
c.
d.
e.
f.
waarin het gewicht van een deelvak (i) gelijk is aan het aantal studiepunten van dat vak;
zolang een deelcijfer ontbreekt wordt geen eindcijfer vastgesteld;
zolang een deelcijfer lager is dan 5.0 wordt geen eindcijfer vastgesteld;
het eindcijfer wordt afgerond op n decimaal achter de komma.
Wanneer voor een van de deelvakken vrijstelling is verleend, wordt dit niet meegewogen in het
eindcijfer.
Artikel 10 BEOORDELING EXAMEN

1.
2.
3.
De student is geslaagd voor het propedeutisch examen indien hij voor alle examenonderdelen een voldoende
eindcijfer heeft behaald, of indien hij voor maximaal twee examenonderdelen een onvoldoende eindcijfer
heeft behaald, mits deze onvoldoendes niet lager zijn dan cijfer 5.0, deze onderdelen geen practica betreffen
en deze onderdelen tezamen niet meer dan zes studiepunten (ECTS) bedragen.
De student is geslaagd voor het bachelorexamen indien hij het propedeuse-examen heeft behaald en indien
hij voor alle verdere examenonderdelen een voldoende eindcijfer heeft behaald. Of indien hij voor maximaal
n onderdeel van het onderwijsprogramma van het tweede en voor maximaal n onderdeel van het
onderwijsprogramma van het derde cursusjaar een onvoldoende eindcijfer heeft behaald, mits deze
onvoldoendes geen vak betreffen dat groter is dan vijf studiepunten (ECTS), niet lager zijn dan cijfer 5.0 en
deze onderdelen geen practica betreffen.
Per vak wordt het hoogst behaalde cijfer in de examenlijst van een student opgenomen.
Artikel 11
1.
2.
3.
Uitslagen van stemmingen van de examencommissie geschieden bij gewone meerderheid van stemmen.
Staken de stemmen, dan geeft de stem van de voorzitter van de examencommissie de doorslag, tenzij het
schriftelijke stemmingen betreft.
Staken de stemmen bij een schriftelijke stemming, dan vindt eenmaal herstemming plaats; staken de
stemmen weer, dan is het voorstel waarvoor wordt gestemd verworpen.
Artikel 12
1.
2.
3.
2.
3.
2.
3.
4.
GETUIGSCHRIFTEN EN VERKLARINGEN
Ten bewijze dat het examen met goed gevolg is afgelegd, wordt door de examencommissie eenmaal per
jaar een getuigschrift uitgereikt. Het getuigschrift wordt getekend door de voorzitter van de
examencommissie.
a.
Op het getuigschrift als bedoeld in lid 1 wordt vermeld welke onderdelen het examen heeft omvat en,
in voorkomende gevallen, welke bevoegdheid daaraan is verbonden.
b.
Bij het getuigschrift wordt een cijferlijst verstrekt.
In geval de gexamineerde tijdens het afleggen van de studieonderdelen blijk heeft gegeven van
uitzonderlijke bekwaamheden kan dit op het getuigschrift worden vermeld met de woorden met lof. In deze
regeling (artikel 12) wordt aangegeven aan welke voorwaarden de student moet voldoen.
De student die meer dan n tentamen met goed gevolg heeft afgelegd en aan wie, bij het verlaten van de
universiteit, geen getuigschrift als bedoeld in lid 1 kan worden uitgereikt, ontvangt op zijn verzoek een door
de desbetreffende examencommissie afgegeven verklaring.
Artikel 14
1.
MET LOF
Een student kan voor het propedeuse-examen het predikaat "met lof" verkrijgen indien de
examencommissie daartoe besluit en aan de volgende voorwaarden is voldaan:a. het gewogen gemiddelde
van de in de uitvoeringsregeling genoemde onderdelen voor het propedeuse-examen is minimaal een 8.b.
de studieduur voor de propedeutische fase van de opleiding van de betrokkene is niet langer dan 1 jaar.
Een student kan voor het bachelorexamen het predikaat "met lof" verkrijgen indien aan de volgende
voorwaarden is voldaan:a. het gewogen gemiddelde van de onderdelen voor het bachelorexamen (inclusief
de propedeuseonderdelen) is minimaal een 8. b. de studieduur van de bacheloropleiding van de betrokkene
bedraagt ten hoogste 4 jaar.
Bij het bepalen van de studieduur als bedoeld in de leden 1 en 2 wordt in ieder geval rekening gehouden
met studievertraging door omstandigheden die een student in aanmerking doen komen voor een
ondersteuning volgens de Regeling Financile Ondersteuning Studenten (RFOS).
Artikel 13
1.
VASTSTELLING EXAMENUITSLAGEN
GOEDKEURINGSPROCEDURE
Een verzoek tot het afleggen van het propedeuse- of bachelor examen wordt ingediend bij de
examencommissie.
Een verzoek tot vrijstelling voor een tentamen of een praktische oefening als bedoeld in artikel 17 van de
OER wordt door de student bij de examencommissie ingediend. Vrijstellingen worden alleen verleend
wanneer de student staat ingeschreven voor de opleiding.
Een verzoek om af te wijken van het onderwijs- en examenreglement wordt door de student ingediend bij
de examencommissie. Dit schriftelijk verzoek is altijd met redenen omkleed.
Een besluit goedkeuring te onthouden aan een verzoek als in lid 1, 2 en 3 van dit artikel, wordt door de
examencommissie gemotiveerd genomen. De student wordt schriftelijk van het besluit in kennis gesteld.
217
217
Artikel 15
1.
2.
TERMIJNEN
Over een verzoek als in artikel 13 lid 1 wordt tenminste tweemaal per jaar een besluit genomen.
Over een verzoek als in artikel 13, lid 2 of lid 3 wordt beslist binnen 40 werkdagen na ontvangst van het
verzoek of, indien het verzoek is ingediend tijdens een academische vakantie, dan wel binnen een periode
van drie weken voorafgaande aan een academische vakantie, binnen 40 werkdagen na afloop daarvan. De
examencommissie kan de beslissing voor ten hoogste 10 werkdagen verdagen. Van de verdaging wordt,
voor de afloop van de in de eerste volzin genoemde termijn, schriftelijk mededeling gedaan aan de student.
Artikel 16
BEROEPSRECHT
Tegen beschikkingen van de examencommissie, dan wel van examinatoren alsmede tegen de behandeling
ondervonden tijdens het afleggen van een tentamen of examen, staat gedurende 4 weken nadat deze aan de
student bekend zijn gemaakt, beroep open bij het College van Beroep voor de examens bedoeld in artikel 7.60
WHW.
Artikel 17
WIJZIGING REGELS EN RICHTLIJNEN
Geen wijzigingen vinden plaats die van toepassing zijn op het lopende studiejaar, tenzij de belangen van studenten
hierdoor redelijkerwijs niet worden geschaad.
Artikel 18
INWERKINGTREDING
218
APPENDIX 1. FINAL OBJECTIVES BSC-PROGRAM IN AEROSPACE ENGINEERING

Profile BSc graduate Aerospace Engineering
The BSc graduate has basic knowledge of and insight in the aerospace engineering sciences including aerospace
design. Furthermore, he has knowledge of the basic sciences and general engineering sciences insofar these are
relevant to aerospace engineering. His technical-scientific knowledge is accompanied by an application-directed and
problem-solving attitude. He is capable of integrating the various disciplines in order to solve non-standard
technical or design problems within a well-defined context, and to communicate clearly the chosen solutions. The
BSc graduate is well-prepared to enter the MSc in aerospace engineering or related sciences.
FINAL OBJECTIVE BSc-1
Basic sciences and technical tools
1.
The BSc graduate has thorough knowledge of and insight into the basic sciences including their generic
methods and tools insofar as these are relevant to engineering practice.
1.1. Knowledge of and insight into mathematics: calculus, statistics, ordinary and partial differential
equations, linear algebra and numerical analysis;
1.2. Knowledge of and insight into physics: statics and dynamics, solid and fluid mechanics,
thermodynamics, electricity and chemistry;
1.3. Knowledge of relevant aspects of computer science and software;
1.4. Basic familiarity with and experience in physical modeling and using mathematical and numerical
methods to solve engineering problems.
General engineering sciences
2.
The BSc graduate has thorough knowledge of and insight into the general engineering sciences to be able to
operate in non-standard conditions.
2.1. Knowledge, insight, and skills concerning general engineering sciences: engineering mechanics,
strength of materials, materials and manufacturing methods, engineering fluid dynamics, control
theory & systems and design methods in general;
2.2. Ability to relate general engineering sciences to Aerospace Engineering disciplines.
FINAL OBJE CTIVE BSc-3
Aerospace Engineering sciences
3.
The BSc graduate has a basic knowledge of the demands on aerospace vehicles as regards safety, reliability,
aerodynamic and structural design, and flight performance.
3.1
Basic knowledge of and insight into the engineering sciences related to aerospace vehicles:
- aerodynamics;
- performance, stability, and control;
- propulsion;
- structures and materials;
- strength and vibrations;
- equipment and systems;- production, maintenance, and industrial process management;
- operational use, including air traffic control;
- structural design of aircraft and spacecraft.
3.2
Acquaintance with the diversity and interdependence of problems (synthesis) within the
aforementioned fields;
3.3
Basic ability to synthesize and to integrate (aerospace) knowledge;
3.4
Selecting and analyzing relevant sources independently and critically.
General engineering and Aerospace Engineering applications
4.
The BSc graduate has the skills to apply his knowledge of engineering and aerospace sciences.
4.1. Knowledge, insight and skills concerning general engineering sciences applications through (lab)
exercises:
4.1.1. illustration and visualization through applications;
4.1.2. skills in applications;
4.1.3. training in problem-solving.
4.2. Basic knowledge, insight and skills concerning Aerospace Engineering applications through (lab)
exercises:
4.2.1. illustrations and applications of engineering practice;
4.3. Training in use of scientific general engineering software;
Communication skills
5.
The BSc graduate must be able to report his solutions and conclusions of his technical(-scienific) work
clearly both orally and in writing.
5.1. Skills in writing reports;
5.2. Skills in oral reporting using state -of-the-art presentation techniques.
The Aerospace Engineering industry
6.
The BSc graduate has basic knowledge and an understanding of the (national and international) aerospace
industry and (research) institutes. Furthermore, a basic understanding is required of the context in which
engineering is practiced.Knowledge of:
219
219
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
The most important actors in the aerospace industry and their mutual contacts, both national and
international;
The social context of the aerospace industry;
The implications of the aerospace industry on society;
Industrial organization and management processes.

Design and synthesis abilities
7.
The BSc graduate must be able to recognize, formulate, and analyze engineering problems and to offer one
or more solutions to these problems. He must be able to create a synthesis between diverse facets of the
problem, to identify and to evaluate various possibilities. Under the supervision of senior staff he must be
able to approach technical problems with an awareness of multidisciplinary solutions based on
technical/scientific analysis.
7.1
Has obtained design experience;
7.2
Being able to apply and integrate aerospace knowledge in a multidisciplinary guided project;
7.3
Ability to function in project teams and to contribute to the process of knowledge transfer;
7.4
Have basic knowledge of sustainable development;
7.5
Have an awareness on how to approach technical problems from a scientific background.
220
APPENDIX 2. ABSENTIEREGELING VOOR EERSTE EN TWEEDEJAARS

PROJECTONDERWIJS
Aanwezigheid op de projectdagdelen is verplicht en zal door de projectleiding worden geregistreerd.
Ten aanzien van absentie geldt het volgende:
1.
U bent zelf verantwoordelijk om de binnen de gestelde marges gemiste dagdelen binnen de duur van het
project op eigen gelegenheid in te halen, zulks ter beoordeling van de projectleiding. Het niet inhalen van
gemiste dagen heeft tot gevolg dat u het project volgend jaar in zijn geheel moet overdoen. U dient zelf een
voorstel te doen voor het inhalen van gemiste dagdelen. Tijdens de zomervakantie zijn er geen
inhaalmogelijkheden. U kunt zich pas het jaar daarop weer voor het project in kwestie aanmelden.
2.
Het niet op tijd aanwezig zijn op project dagdelen kan tot gevolg hebben dat deze dagen als absentiedagen
worden geregistreerd.
3.
In geen geval mag de hele eerste week van een project worden gemist. Dit houdt automatisch in dat u
wordt uitgesloten van deelname aan het betreffende project in dat studiejaar.
Daarnaast zijn de volgende marges gesteld:
4.
Voor AE1-004CAD, AE1-004PRO en AE1-516 geldt dat u maximaal 1 ingeroosterd dagdeel of avond mag
missen. Deze moet worden ingehaald in een door de docent aangewezen periode.
Voor het AE1-004 AER project en het AE1-007 STR project geldt dat u maximaal 2 dagdelen per
semester mag missen.
Voor het AE2-011 of het AE2-002 project mag u maximaal 3 dagdelen missen, waarvan maximaal 2
aaneengesloten.
Afwezigheid om welke reden dan ook van meer dan het toegestane aantal te missen dagdelen f het niet
inhalen van de gemiste dagdelen, heeft tot gevolg dat u geen voldoende resultaat meer voor het project
behaalt en dat u zich volgend jaar opnieuw voor het gehele project moet aanmelden.
Studenten, die menen door deze regeling ernstig benadeeld te worden, kunnen zich wenden tot de studieadviseurs.
221
221
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION REGULATIONS M.SC.
Onderwijs- en examenregeling (OER)2

(art. 7.13 W.H.W.)
inclusief de Regels en Richtlijnen
van de examencommissie
(art. 7.12 W.H.W.) voor de
Masteropleiding
A full English edition of the Teaching and Examination Regulations B.Sc. will be issued separately.
223
223
ONDERWIJS- EN EXAMENREGELING (OER) MASTEROPLEIDING

Paragraaf 1
Artikel 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ALGEMEEN
TOEPASSELIJKHEID VAN DE REGELING
Deze regeling is van toepassing op het onderwijs en de examens van de masteropleiding Aerospace
Engineering, verder te noemen: de opleiding.
De opleiding wordt verzorgd onder verantwoordelijkheid van de Faculteit Luchtvaart- en
Ruimtevaarttechniek van de Technische Universiteit Delft, verder te noemen: de faculteit.
Voor de opleiding genoemd onder 1. is een uitvoeringsregeling van kracht die bestaat uit de
vakomschrijvingen in de Study Guide en de Regels en Richtlijnen, die een aanvulling op en een geheel
vormen met deze onderwijs- en examenregeling.
De onderwijs- en examenregeling en de uitvoeringsregeling worden vastgesteld door de decaan, na overleg
met de Examencommissie. De studentenraad heeft instemmingsrecht.
De Examencommissie heeft de mogelijkheid om ten gunste van de student af te wijken van de onderwijs- en
examenregeling alsmede de regels en richtlijnen.
Artikel 2
BEGRIPSBEPALINGEN
De in dit reglement voorkomende begrippen hebben, indien die begrippen ook voorkomen in de Wet op het hoger
onderwijs en wetenschappelijk onderzoek (WHW) de betekenis die deze wet eraan geeft.
In deze regeling wordt verstaan onder:
a.
de wet: de Wet op het Hoger onderwijs en Wetenschappelijk onderzoek afgekort tot WHW en zoals sindsdien
gewijzigd;
b.
opleiding: de masteropleiding bedoeld in artikel 7.3a, lid 1 onder a van de wet;
c.
student:hij of zij die is ingeschreven aan de Technische Universiteit Delft (als student of extraneus) voor het
volgen van het onderwijs en/of het afleggen van de tentamens en de examens van de opleiding;
d.
propedeuse: de propedeutische fase van de opleiding, als onderdeel van de opleiding, genoemd in artikel
7.8 van de wet;
e.
practicum:een praktische oefening als bedoeld in art. 7.13, lid 2 onder d van de wet, in n van de volgende
vormen:
het maken van een scriptie;
het maken van een werkstuk of een proefontwerp;
het uitvoeren van een ontwerp- of onderzoekopdracht;
het verrichten van een literatuurstudie;
het verrichten van een stage;
het deelnemen aan veldwerk of een excursie;
het uitvoeren van proeven en experimenten;
het deelnemen aan een project;
of het deelnemen aan een andere onderwijsactiviteit, die gericht is op het bereiken van bepaalde
vaardigheden.
f.
tentamen: een onderzoek naar en beoordeling van de kennis, het inzicht en de vaardigheden van de student
met betrekking tot een bepaalde onderwijseenheid door minstens n daartoe door de examencommissie
aangewezen examinator.
g.
examen: toetsing, waarbij door de examencommissie wordt vastgesteld of alle tentamens van de tot de
propedeuse en kandidaats behorende onderwijseenheden met goed gevolg zijn afgelegd (conform artikel
7.10 van de wet).
h.
examencommissie: de examencommissie van een opleiding ingesteld conform artikel 7.12 van de wet.
i.
examinator: degene die door de examencommissie wordt aangewezen ten behoeve van het afnemen van
tentamens, conform artikel 7.12 van de wet;
j.
uitvoeringsregeling: de vakomschrijvingen in de Study Guide en de Regels en Richtlijnen behorende bij de
onderwijs- en examenregeling.
k.
studiepunt: de omvang van examenonderdelen wordt uitgedrukt in studiepunten conform het European
Credit Transfer System (ECTS). Een studiepunt komt overeen met 28 studiebelastingsuren.
l.
werkdag: maandag t/m vrijdag m.u.v. de erkende feestdagen.
m.
studiegids: de handleiding voor de opleiding genoemd in artikel 1 bevattende de specifieke informatie voor
de masteropleiding
n.
instelling: Technische Universiteit Delft
o.
examenprogramma: het geheel van eisen betreffende kennis, inzicht en vaardigheden, behorende bij een
bepaalde fase van de studie. Het voor een bepaald cursusjaar geldende examenprogramma wordt in de
Study Guide Luchtvaart- en Ruimtevaarttechniek van dat jaar vermeld;
p.
examenonderdeel: een onderwijseenheid van de opleiding, in de zin van de wet;
q.
cohort: de groep studenten die zich in een bepaald studiejaar voor het eerst voor de opleiding Luchtvaarten Ruimtevaarttechniek heeft ingeschreven.
r.
afstudeercommissie: de docenten en gasten van buiten de faculteit die betrokken zijn bij het afstudeerwerk
en de beoordeling ervan.
224
Artikel 3
DOEL VAN DE OPLEIDING: PROFIEL VAN DE MSC GRADUATE
De MSc graduate overziet het gehele lucht- en ruimtevaart gebied. Hij heeft diepgaande kennis van n of meer
lucht- en ruimtevaart kennisgebieden en is in staat relevante wiskundige, fysische en algemeen technische kennis
toe te passen. Zijn technisch-wetenschappelijke kennis gaat samen met toepassingsgerichtheid en
probleemoplossend vermogen. Hij is in staat om de verschillende disciplines te integreren om non-standard
complexe ontwerp en technische problemen op te lossen. Hij kan (computer) tools ontwikkelen en verifieert
oplossingen door experimenten. Hij werkt zelfstandig maar is ook een waardevol lid van multidisciplinaire teams.
Hij presenteert en verdedigt de gekozen oplossingen helder en is zich bewust van de technische en sociale
consequenties van deze oplossingen.
Artikel 4
1.
3.
TOELATING TOT DE MASTEROPLEIDING
Studenten die in het bezit zijn van het bachelordiploma Luchtvaart- en Ruimtevaarttechniek van de TUD,
hebben toegang tot de opleiding. Studenten met een bachelordiploma Werktuigbouwkunde, Maritieme
Techniek, Electrotechniek of Technische Natuurkunde van een van de drie Nederlandse technische
universiteiten, hebben toegang tot de opleiding, maar zullen enig aanvullend onderwijs moeten volgen.
In afwijking van lid 1 hebben studenten die in september 2001 of eerder begonnen zijn met de vijfjarige
opleiding Luchtvaart- en Ruimtevaarttechniek toegang tot de opleiding wanneer zij:
De propedeuse afgerond hebben n
aan hun vierde inschrijvingsjaar of hoger beginnen n
het tweedejaars projectonderwijs afgerond hebben.
Voor studenten die noch aan lid 1 noch aan lid 2 voldoen neemt de examencommissie op individuele basis
een beslissing over de toelating tot de master.
Artikel 5
EINDTERMEN VAN DE OPLEIDING
De eindtermen van de masteropleiding zijn opgenomen in Appendix 1.

Artikel 6
INRICHTING VAN DE OPLEIDING
De masteropleiding wordt uitsluitend voltijds verzorgd.

Artikel 7
1.
2.
3.
TAAL
Het onderwijs wordt gegeven en de examens worden afgenomen in het Engels.

In afwijking hiervan kan het onderwijs in het Nederlands gegeven worden indien de specifieke aard de
inrichting of de kwaliteit van het onderwijs dan wel de herkomst van de studenten daartoe aanleiding geeft.
Indien een student n of meer onderdelen van een examen in een andere taal dan het Engels wenst af te
leggen, kan hij daartoe een verzoek indienen bij de examencommissie.
Paragraaf 2
SAMENSTELLING ONDERWIJSPROGRAMMA MASTEROPLEIDING
Artikel 8
1.
De samenstelling van het onderwijsprogramma van de masteropleiding voor studenten met een BSc in
Luchtvaart- en Ruimtevaarttechniek is als volgt:
M.Sc. Jaar 1
M.Sc. Jaar 2
2.
(18 ECTS)
(6 ECTS)
(36 ECTS)
(60 ECTS)
De samenstelling van het onderwijsprogramma van de masteropleiding voor studenten met een BSc anders
dan Aerospace Engineering is als volgt:
M.Sc. Jaar 1
M.Sc. Jaar 2
3.
Stage
Voorbereidende vakken voor afstuderen (leerstoelprogramma)
Algemene vakken
Afstudeerwerk
Capita Selecta modules

Voorbereidende vakken voor afstuderen (leerstoelprogramma)
Algemene vakken.
Stage
Afstudeerwerk
(18 ECTS)
(36 ECTS)
(6 ECTS)
(18 ECTS)
(42 ECTS)
Op basis van de in de uitvoeringsregeling vastgelegde programmas voor de mastervarianten stellen de

betrokken afstudeerhoogleraar en de student het programma in onderling overleg op. Dit programma wordt
schriftelijk vastgelegd op het daarvoor bestemde formulier dat door de student wordt ingeleverd bij de
onderwijsadministratie. Het vastleggen van het examenprogramma dient te hebben plaatsgevonden voordat
de student zich aanmeldt voor het afleggen van onderdelen van genoemde examenprogramma's.
225
225
Paragraaf 3
Artikel 9
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
3.
4.
2.
2.
3.
4.
5.
226
MONDELINGE TENTAMENS
Mondeling wordt niet meer dan n student tegelijk getentamineerd, tenzij de examencommissie anders
heeft bepaald.
Het mondeling afnemen van een tentamen is openbaar, tenzij de examencommissie of de desbetreffende
examinator in een bijzonder geval anders heeft bepaald, dan wel de student daartegen bezwaar heeft
gemaakt.
Artikel 14
1.
VORM VAN DE TENTAMENS EN DE WIJZE VAN TOETSEN
De tentamens die behoren tot het masterexamen worden afgelegd op de wijze zoals in de
uitvoeringsregeling van de betreffende opleiding voor het lopende studiejaar wordt beschreven. De
praktische vaardigheid wordt getoetst in de practicumuren.
Indien de wijze waarop een tentamen kan worden afgelegd niet is aangegeven, omdat dat tentamen
betrekking heeft op een onderwijseenheid die niet in de faculteit wordt onderwezen en er sprake is van een
niet specifiek voor studenten van de Faculteit verzorgende onderwijseenheid, dan is het daaromtrent
bepaalde uit de onderwijs- en examenregeling van die onderwijseenheid van toepassing. De
examencommissie waaronder het tentamen ressorteert, bepaalt telkenjare op welke wijze het tentamen
wordt afgenomen.
Aan lichamelijk of zintuiglijk gehandicapte studenten wordt de gelegenheid geboden de tentamens en de
practica op een zoveel mogelijk aan hun individuele handicap aangepaste wijze af te leggen. Eventueel te
verlenen faciliteiten zijn ter beoordeling van de examencommissie na verzoek van de student. De commissie
neemt de redelijkheid van het verzoek en de financile en personele mogelijkheden van de faculteit in acht.
Het in het vorige lid bedoelde verzoek wordt door de student binnen 5 weken na aanvang van de studie
ingediend. Dit verzoek wordt vergezeld van een maximaal 1 jaar oude medische verklaring van een arts of
geregistreerde gezondheidspsycholoog. Indien er sprake is van dyslexie dient dit verzoek vergezeld te gaan
van een verklaring van een algemeen erkend testbureau inzake dyslexie.
Artikel 13
1.
GELDIGHEIDSDUUR TENTAMENS
Studenten die de studie hebben onderbroken, of op andere wijze studievertraging hebben opgelopen,
behoren onderdelen die 10 jaren of langer geleden zijn behaald en inmiddels vakinhoudelijke wijziging
hebben ondergaan, opnieuw af te leggen.
Artikel 12
1.
VOLGORDE TENTAMENS
In de uitvoeringsregeling wordt de volgorde bepaald waarin de tentamens c.q. practica moeten worden
afgelegd.
Artikel 11
1.
AANTAL, TIJDVAKKEN EN FREQUENTIE TENTAMENS
Tot het afleggen van de tentamens van de opleiding wordt tweemaal per jaar de gelegenheid gegeven: de
eerste maal aansluitend op de periode waarin het onderdeel werd onderwezen en afgerond;
De tentamens bedoeld in het eerste lid worden afgenomen zoals voor het desbetreffende vak is aangegeven
in het rooster van het lopende studiejaar; van de gelegenheid tot het afleggen van schriftelijke tentamens
wordt jaarlijks bij het begin van het studiejaar een tentamenrooster gemaakt en gepubliceerd.
Indien ten aanzien van een tentamen in lid 1 bedoeld niet is aangegeven hoeveel malen per studiejaar het
kan worden afgelegd omdat het gaat over een onderdeel dat niet in de faculteit zelf wordt onderwezen, en
het onderdeel ook niet speciaal voor de faculteit verzorgd wordt, is het daaromtrent bepaalde in de
onderwijs- en examenregeling van de desbetreffende faculteit of opleiding van toepassing, behoudens een
hiervan afwijkende beslissing van de examencommissie van de betreffende faculteit.
Tot het afleggen van het tentamen van een onderdeel dat is komen te vervallen, wordt in het eerste
studiejaar dat het vak is vervallen het betreffende tentamen nog eenmaal aangeboden.
Artikel 10
1.
TENTAMENS
VASTSTELLING EN BEKENDMAKING VAN DE UITSLAG
De examinator stelt terstond na het afnemen van een mondeling tentamen de uitslag vast en reikt de
student de desbetreffende schriftelijke verklaring uit.
De examinator stelt de uitslag van een schriftelijk tentamen zo spoedig mogelijk doch uiterlijk binnen 15
werkdagen na afloop van de zitting vast. De examinator verschaft de studentenadministratie van de faculteit
de nodige gegevens. De studentenadministratie zorgt voor registratie, publicatie en melding van de uitslag
binnen 20 werkdagen na afloop van de zitting aan de student met in achtneming van de privacy van de
student.
Registratie van de resultaten vindt alleen plaats indien de student zich tijdig voor het betreffende tentamen
in het Tentamen Aanmeld Systeem heeft aangemeld (zie art. 4 Regels en Richtlijnen)
Ten aanzien van een op andere wijze dan mondeling of schriftelijk af te leggen tentamen bepaalt de
examencommissie van tevoren op welke wijze en binnen welke termijn de student in kennis wordt gesteld
van de uitslag.
Tentamenuitslagen worden gedateerd op de dag van afname. Resultaten van practica worden gedateerd op
de dag van de inlevering van het verslag.
Artikel 15
1.
2.
3.
Gedurende tenminste 1 maand na de bekendmaking van de uitslag van een schriftelijk tentamen krijgt de
student op zijn verzoek inzage in zijn beoordeelde werk.
Gedurende de termijn genoemd in lid 1 kan elke belangstellende kennisnemen van de vragen en opdrachten
van het desbetreffende tentamen, alsmede van de normen aan de hand waarvan de beoordeling heeft
plaatsgevonden.
De examencommissie kan bepalen dat inzage of kennisneming geschiedt op een van tevoren vastgestelde
plaats en tijdstip. Indien de student aantoont door overmacht verhinderd te zijn of te zijn geweest op een
aldus vastgestelde plaats en tijdstip te verschijnen, wordt hem een andere mogelijkheid geboden, zo
mogelijk binnen de in lid 1 genoemde termijn.
Artikel 16
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
HET INZAGERECHT
DE NABESPREKING VAN TENTAMENS
Zo spoedig mogelijk na de bekendmaking van de uitslag van een mondeling tentamen vindt desgevraagd
dan wel op initiatief van de examinator een nabespreking plaats tussen de examinator en de student. Alsdan
wordt de gegeven beoordeling gemotiveerd.
Gedurende een termijn van 1 maand, die aanvangt op de dag na de bekendmaking van de uitslag, kan de
student, die een schriftelijk tentamen heeft afgelegd aan de desbetreffende examinator om een
nabespreking verzoeken. De nabespreking geschiedt op een door de examinator te bepalen plaats en
tijdstip, maar binnen een redelijke termijn.
Indien door of vanwege de examencommissie dan wel de examinator een collectieve nabespreking wordt
georganiseerd, kan de student een verzoek als bedoeld in het vorige lid pas indienen, wanneer hij bij de
collectieve bespreking aanwezig is geweest en het desbetreffende verzoek motiveert, of wanneer hij door
overmacht verhinderd is geweest bij de collectieve bespreking aanwezig te zijn.
Het bepaalde in het voorgaande lid is van overeenkomstige toepassing, indien de examencommissie dan wel
de examinator de student gelegenheid biedt om zijn uitwerkingen te vergelijken met modelantwoorden.
De examencommissie c.q. examinator kan afwijkingen toestaan van het bepaalde in het tweede en derde
lid.
Paragraaf 4
Artikel 17
1.
2.
VRIJSTELLING VAN TENTAMENS EN/OF PRAKTISCHE OEFENING
De examencommissie kan op grond van eerder met goed gevolg afgelegde tentamens en/ of examens in het
hoger onderwijs, dan wel op grond van buiten het hoger onderwijs opgedane kennis of vaardigheden,
vrijstelling verlenen voor n of meer tentamens en/of praktische oefeningen, indien de student tenminste
voldoet aan een van de hierna te noemen voorwaarden:
a)
behaald tentamen van een qua inhoud en studielast overeenkomstige onderwijseenheid van een
andere universitaire opleiding in Nederland of daarbuiten, van de Open Universiteit dan wel van een
vergelijkbare hogere beroepsopleiding in Nederland;
b)
bewijs van tijdens een opleiding buiten het Nederlands hoger onderwijs opgedane kennis of ervaring
dan wel van door hem in ander verband reeds verrichte werkzaamheden.
De examencommissie kan op voorstel van de desbetreffende examinator vrijstelling verlenen voor een
tentamen. Het voorstel wordt met redenen omkleed.
Paragraaf 5
Artikel 18
1.
2.
Tot het afleggen van het masterexamen wordt viermaal per jaar de gelegenheid gegeven.
De student kan zich voor het examen aanmelden zodra hij heeft voldaan aan de opleidingseisen en de
bewijzen van de door hem behaalde onderdelen bij de studentenadministratie overlegt.
Artikel 19
2.
EXAMENS
TIJDVAKKEN EN FREQUENTIE EXAMENS
Paragraaf 6
1.
VRIJSTELLING VAN TENTAMENS
STUDIEVOORTGANGSRAPPORTAGE
STUDIEVOORTGANGSRAPPORT
Iedere student wordt in de gelegenheid gesteld om via het programma BlackBoard op internet zijn
studievoortgang te bekijken.
Na afloop van het studiejaar wordt aan iedere student bericht gezonden omtrent zijn studievoortgang.
227
227
Paragraaf 7
Artikel 20
1.
2.
3.
INVOERINGSBEPALINGEN
WIJZIGING REGELING
Wijziging van deze regeling wordt door de decaan bij afzonderlijk besluit vastgesteld, na overleg met de
examencommissie. De studentenraad heeft instemmingsrecht.
Geen wijzigingen vinden plaats die van toepassing zijn op het lopende studiejaar, tenzij de belangen van de
studenten hierdoor redelijker wijze niet worden geschaad.
Wijzigingen kunnen voorts niet ten nadele van de student van invloed zijn op enige beslissing die krachtens
deze regeling door de examencommissie ten aanzien van een student is genomen.
Artikel 21
OVERGANGSREGELING
1.
Indien de samenstelling van het studieprogramma inhoudelijk wijziging ondergaat, dan wel dat n van de
in de onderwijs- en examenregeling opgenomen artikelen wijziging ondergaat, wordt door de decaan een
overgangsregeling vastgesteld die gepubliceerd wordt in de uitvoeringsregeling.
2.
In deze overgangsregeling wordt in ieder geval opgenomen:
a. een regeling omtrent vrijstellingen die verkregen kunnen worden op grond van reeds behaalde
tentamens,
b. het aantal malen dat alsnog tentamen in de onderdelen van het oude programma kan worden afgelegd,
c. de geldigheidsduur van de overgangsregeling.
Artikel 22
1.
2.
BEKENDMAKING
De decaan zorgt voor een passende bekendmaking van deze regeling en van de uitvoeringsregelingen,
alsmede van de wijziging ervan.
De onderwijs- en examenregeling en de uitvoeringsregeling van ieder van de opleidingen worden
opgenomen in de Study Guide.
Artikel 23
INWERKINGTREDING
228
REGE LS EN RICHTLIJNEN VAN DE EXAMENCOMMISSIE

Artikel 1
TOEPASSINGSGEBIED
Deze regels en richtlijnen zijn van toepassing op de tentamens en de examens van de masteropleiding Aerospace
Engineering, hierna te noemen: de opleiding.
Artikel 2
1.
2.
BEGRIPSOMSCHRIJVING
In deze regels en richtlijnen wordt verstaan onder onderwijs- en examenregeling (OER) de geldende
onderwijs- en examenregeling bedoeld in artikel 7.12 van de Wet op het hoger onderwijs en
wetenschappelijk onderzoek(WHW);
De overige in deze Regels voorkomende begrippen hebben dezelfde betekenis als in de OER en in de WHW.
Artikel 3
DAGELIJKSE GANG VAN ZAKEN
De examencommissie bestaat uit vijf leden en wijst uit haar midden de voorzitter aan. De voorzitter is belast met
de behartiging van de dagelijkse gang van zaken van de commissie. De commissie wordt ondersteund door een
ambtelijk secretaris en geadviseerd door de studieadviseur.
Artikel 4
1.
2.
3.
De aanmelding voor LR-tentamens geschiedt via het tentamen-aanmeldsysteem (TAS). De aanmelding start
4 weken voor het begin van de tentamenperiode, en sluit 2 weken voor het betreffende tentamen.
Aanmelding voor tentamens die door andere faculteiten verzorgd dient te gebeuren overeenkomstig de bij
die faculteit geldende regeling.
Indien een student meent zich op overmacht te kunnen beroepen, dient hij zich uiterlijk tien werkdagen voor
de dag van het tentamen tot de studieadviseur te wenden. Door het overleggen van een door de
studieadviseur getekende verklaring van aantoonbare overmacht kan hij alsnog worden toegelaten tot het
tentamen.
Alleen de tentamenresultaten van die studenten die op de door tentamenaanmeldsysteem, of door een
eventueel als alternatief gehanteerd systeem, geproduceerde aanmeldingslijst staan of in het bezit zijn van
een overmachtsverklaring, worden in het cijferregistratiesysteem geadministreerd.
Artikel 5
1.
2.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11
TOELATING TOT DE LEERSTOEL
Voor studenten die zijn begonnen in het vijfjarige programma geldt dat officile toelating tot de leerstoel pas
mogelijk is na voltooiing van de Ontwerp/Synthese oefening.
Wanneer een student reeds vakken van een bepaalde afstudeerrichting heeft gevolgd zonder officile
registratie bij de betreffende leerstoel kunnen daar naderhand geen rechten aan worden ontleend.
Artikel 6
1.
AANMELDING TENTAMENS
DE ORDE TIJDENS EEN TENTAMEN
De examencommissie c.q. de aangewezen examinator draagt er zorg voor, dat ten behoeve van de
schriftelijke tentaminering surveillanten worden aangewezen die namens en onder verantwoordelijkheid van
de examinator erop toezien dat het tentamen in goede orde verloopt.
De student is verplicht zich op verzoek van of vanwege de examencommissie te legitimeren met het bewijs
van inschrijving van de TU Delft en de campuscard.
Aanwijzingen van de examencommissie c.q. de examinator of surveillant die voor de aanvang van het
tentamen zijn gepubliceerd, alsmede aanwijzingen die tijdens het tentamen en onmiddellijk na afloop
daarvan worden gegeven, dienen door de student te worden opgevolgd.
Een student die niet voldoet aan het bepaalde bij of krachtens het tweede en derde lid kan door de
examencommissie c.q. de examinator worden uitgesloten van verdere deelname. De uitsluiting heeft tot
gevolg dat geen uitslag van het betreffend tentamen wordt vastgesteld. Voordat de examencommissie
hiertoe besluit stelt zij de student in de gelegenheid te worden gehoord.
De duur van het tentamen is zodanig dat studenten, naar redelijke maatstaven gemeten, voldoende tijd
hebben om de vragen te beantwoorden.
De tentamenopgaven mogen door de studenten na afloop van het tentamen worden meegenomen. Een
uitzondering op deze regel geldt voor tentamens waarbij de opgaven en antwoorden tezamen dienen te
worden ingeleverd.
De tentamenruimte mag niet eerder worden betreden dan na toestemming van de surveillant.
Binnen een half uur na de officile aanvang van het tentamen is het de kandidaten niet toegestaan de zaal
te verlaten. In dringende gevallen kan na dit half uur toestemming worden gegeven de tentamenruimte
tijdelijk te verlaten. Niet meer dan n persoon tegelijk mag afwezig zijn.
Tentamenkandidaten mogen geen mobiele telefoon bij zich dragen, deze moeten in een tas opgeborgen zijn
en uit staan. Het is onder geen voorwaarde toegestaan om tijdens een tentamen een mobiele telefoon mee
naar buiten te nemen. Gebruik van een mobiele telefoon tijdens een tentamenzitting wordt opgevat als
fraude (zie art. 7 ).
Kandidaten dienen zelf voor schrijf-, reken- en tekenmateriaal te zorgen. Uitwerk- en kladpapier is evenwel
aanwezig.
Indien bij een tentamen het gebruik van bepaalde rekenapparatuur niet is toegestaan dient de examinator
dit ruim voor het tentamen duidelijk te maken.
229
229
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
De tekst van de tentamenuitwerkingen mag niet met potlood worden geschreven (tenzij daartoe van
Tijdens de tentamenzitting mogen geen boeken, dictaten etc. worden geraadpleegd (tenzij daartoe van
Indien door een surveillant fraude wordt geconstateerd, wordt gehandeld conform artikel 7, lid 2 van deze
regeling.
Alvorens de tentamenzaal definitief te verlaten (niet eerder dan een half uur na aanvang van de
tentamenzitting) dient de kandidaat ten minste het voorblad van de uitwerking, voorzien van naam en
studienummer, aan de surveillant te overhandigen.
De surveillant geeft voor aanvang van het tentamen aanwijzingen over hoe te handelen indien de kandidaat
het tentamen voortijdig meent te moeten afbreken.
Studenten die menen in aanmerking te kunnen komen voor een afwijkende tentaminering dienen, conform
het bepaalde in artikel 12, lid 3 en 4 van de OER, een met redenen omkleed verzoekschrift in bij de
voorzitter van de examencommissie.
Artikel 7
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
FRAUDE
Onder fraude wordt verstaan het handelen van een student dat erop is gericht het vormen van een juist
oordeel omtrent zijn kennis, inzicht en vaardigheden geheel of gedeeltelijk onmogelijk te maken.
Voorbeelden van fraude zijn het spieken bij tentamens, het overnemen van practicumverslagen van
medestudenten en het plegen van plagiaat.
Wanneer ter zake van het afleggen van een examenonderdeel of examen fraude wordt geconstateerd of
vermoed, wordt dit door de examinator of surveillant zo spoedig mogelijk schriftelijk vastgelegd. De
examinator of surveillant kan de examinandus verzoeken eventuele bewijsstukken beschikbaar te stellen.
Een weigering hiertoe wordt in het schriftelijke verslag vermeld. De examinandus krijgt de mogelijkheid het
examenonderdeel of examen verder af te ronden.De examinandus wordt in de gelegenheid gesteld een
schriftelijk commentaar bij het verslag van de examinator of surveillant te voegen. Het verslag en het
eventuele commentaar worden zo spoedig mogelijk ter hand gesteld van de examencommissie.
De examencommissie kan de examinandus uitsluiten van volgende deelnames aan het desbetreffende
examenonderdeel of examen. De uitsluiting heeft tot gevolg dat geen uitslag van het desbetreffende
examenonderdeel of examen wordt vastgesteld.
Voordat de examencommissie een besluit tot uitsluiting neemt, stelt zij de examinandus in de gelegenheid
ter zake te worden gehoord.
In geval van fraude kan de examencommissie de student voor de termijn van ten hoogste n jaar,
gerekend vanaf het moment van de fraude, het recht ontnemen om tentamens en examens van de opleiding
af te leggen.
Artikel 8
MAATSTAVEN
De examencommissie c.q. de examinator neemt bij de beslissingen, die hij/zij moet nemen, tot richtsnoer de
volgende maatstaven en weegt bij strijdigheid het belang van hanteren van de ene maatstaf tegen dat van de
andere af:
a.
het behoud van kwaliteits- en selectie-eisen van een tentamen;
b.
doelmatigheidsniveau, onder meer tot uitdrukking komend in een streven om tijdverlies voor studenten, die
goede voortgang met de studie maken bij de voorbereiding van een examen of examenonderdeel zoveel
mogelijk te beperken.
c.
bescherming tegen zichzelf van de student die een te grote studielast op zich wil nemen;
d.
mildheid ten opzichte van studenten die door omstandigheden, buiten hun schuld, in de voortgang van hun
studie vertraging hebben ondervonden.
Artikel 9
VRAGEN EN OPGAVEN
1.
De vragen en opgaven van het tentamen gaan de tevoren bekend gemaakte bronnen, waaraan de
tentamenstof is ontleend, niet te boven. Uiterlijk een maand voor het afnemen van het tentamen wordt de omvang
van de te tentamineren stof bekend gemaakt.
2.
De vragen en opgaven van het tentamen zijn zo evenwichtig mogelijk verspreid over de examenstof.
3.
Het tentamen representeert de onderwijsdoeleinden naar inhoud en vorm.
4.
De vragen en opgaven zijn duidelijk en ondubbelzinnig.
5.
Geruime tijd voor het afnemen van het desbetreffende tentamen maakt de examencommissie resp. de
examinator bekend op welke wijze uitvoering wordt gegeven aan het bepaalde in artikel 13 van de OER, met
betrekking tot de wijze waarop het tentamen wordt afgelegd.
6.
Geruime tijd voor het schriftelijk tentamen stelt de examencommissie of examinator de studenten die
daaraan deel willen nemen, in de gelegenheid kennis te nemen van een schriftelijke proeve van een
dergelijk tentamen.
Artikel 10
BEOORDELING TENTAMEN
Voor het vaststellen van (eind)cijfers voor examenonderdelen gelden de volgende voorwaarden:
1.
Bij de beoordeling wordt gebruik gemaakt van een schaal van 1 tot 10, waarbij zoveel mogelijk gehele
cijfers worden toegekend;
a.
Voor practica kunnen ook de volgende beoordelingen worden gebruikt: onvoldoende of voldoende.
b.
eindcijfers vanaf 6.0 zijn 'voldoende (eind)cijfers';
c.
eindcijfers lager dan 6.0 zijn 'onvoldoende (eind)cijfers'.
230
2.
d.
Een vrijstelling komt overeen met het cijfer 6.0.
Ingeval een examenonderdeel bestaat uit meerdere deelvakken en deze vakken apart getentamineerd
worden geldt de volgende regeling:
a.
de cijfers van de deelvakken worden gegeven in n decimaal achter de komma
b.
voor het examenonderdeel wordt een gewogen eindcijfer vastgesteld volgens de regel:
eindcijfer = [gewicht(i) x cijfer(i)]/ gewicht(i)
c.
d.
e.
f.
Artikel 11
waarin het gewicht van een deelvak (i) gelijk is aan het aantal studiepunten van dat vak;
zolang een deelcijfer ontbreekt wordt geen eindcijfer vastgesteld;
zolang een deelcijfer lager is dan 5.0 wordt geen eindcijfer vastgesteld;
het eindcijfer wordt afgerond op n decimaal achter de komma.
Wanneer voor een van de deelvakken vrijstelling is verleend, wordt dit niet meegewogen in het
eindcijfer.
DE AFSTUDEEROPDRACHT
De afstudeeropdracht vormt het laatste onderdeel van het masterexamenprogramma. Als afsluiting van dit
onderdeel vindt een beoordelingsgesprek met de afstudeercommissie plaats voorafgegaan door een presentatie
van het afstudeerwerk. Afhankelijk van het gevolgde programma is het afstudeerwerk inclusief het schrijven van
het verslag en de presentatie 60 ECTS of 42 ECTS groot.
1.
De afstudeeropdracht kan pas worden uitgereikt als de student het eerste jaar van de masteropleiding heeft
afgerond. Afwijken hiervan kan in overleg met de afstudeerbegeleider.
2.
Het is onmogelijk een afstudeeropdracht te krijgen wanneer de bachelorfase nog niet is afgerond.
3.
De presentatie van het afstudeerwerk kan pas plaatsvinden als alle voorgaande onderdelen van de studie
zijn afgerond. De student dient het ir.-examen minimaal vier weken voor de geplande afstudeerdatum aan
te vragen.
4.
De afstudeercommissie bestaat uit drie deskundigen onder wie de afstudeerdocent. Deze dient lid te zijn van
de vaste wetenschappelijke staf.
5.
De presentatie en het afsluitende beoordelingsgesprek met de afstudeercommissie hebben uiterlijk een
maand na het inleveren van het afstudeerverslag plaats. In de maanden juli en augustus kan van deze regel
worden afgeweken, dit dient echter altijd te gebeuren in overleg met de afstudeerhoogleraar.
Artikel 12
1.
2.
De student is geslaagd voor het masterexamen indien hij voor alle examenonderdelen een voldoende
eindcijfer heeft behaald, of indien hij voor maximaal n examenonderdeel een onvoldoende eindcijfer heeft
behaald mits deze onvoldoende niet lager is dan cijfer 5.0, dit onderdeel geen practicum, de periode
praktisch werken of het afstudeerwerk betreft.
Het hoogst behaalde cijfer voor een bepaald vak wordt in de examenlijst van een student opgenomen.
Artikel 13
1.
2.
3.
2.
2.
3.
MET LOF
Een student kan voor het masterexamen het predikaat "met lof" verkrijgen indien de examencommissie
daartoe besluit en aan de volgende voorwaarden is voldaan:a. Het gewogen gemiddelde van de in de
uitvoeringsregeling genoemde onderdelen van het eerste jaar van de masteropleiding is minimaal een 8.b.
Voor geen enkel onderdeel van de masteropleiding is een onvoldoende behaald.c. De studieduur van de
masteropleiding van de betrokkene is niet langer dan 3 jaar.d. Het cijfer voor het afstudeerwerk is minimaal
een 9.
Bij het bepalen van de studieduur als bedoeld in de lid 1 wordt in ieder geval rekening gehouden met
studievertraging door omstandigheden die een student in aanmerking doen komen voor een ondersteuning
volgens de Regeling Financile Ondersteuning Studenten (RFOS)
Artikel 15
1.
VASTSTELLING EXAMENUITSLAGEN
Uitslagen van stemmingen van de examencommissie geschieden bij gewone meerderheid van stemmen.
Staken de stemmen, dan geeft de stem van de voorzitter van de examencommissie de doorslag, tenzij het
schriftelijke stemmingen betreft.
Staken de stemmen bij een schriftelijke stemming, dan vindt eenmaal herstemming plaats; staken de
stemmen weer, dan is het voorstel waarvoor wordt gestemd verworpen.
Artikel 14
1.
BEOORDELING EXAMEN
GETUIGSCHRIFTEN EN VERKLARINGEN
Ten bewijze dat het examen met goed gevolg is afgelegd, wordt door de examencommissie viermaal per
jaar een getuigschrift uitgereikt. Het getuigschrift wordt getekend door de voorzitter van de
examencommissie.
a.
Op het getuigschrift als bedoeld in lid 1 wordt vermeld welke onderdelen het examen heeft omvat en,
in voorkomende gevallen, welke bevoegdheid daaraan is verbonden.
b.
Bij het getuigschrift wordt een cijferlijst verstrekt.
In geval de gexamineerde tijdens het afleggen van de studieonderdelen blijk heeft gegeven van
uitzonderlijke bekwaamheden kan dit op het getuigschrift worden vermeld met de woorden met lof. In deze
regeling (artikel 14) wordt aangegeven aan welke voorwaarden de student moet voldoen.
231
231
4.
De student die meer dan n tentamen met goed gevolg heeft afgelegd en aan wie, bij het verlaten van de
universiteit, geen getuigschrift als bedoeld in lid 1 kan worden uitgereikt, ontvangt op zijn verzoek een door
de desbetreffende examencommissie afgegeven verklaring.
Artikel 16
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Wanneer de student het eerste jaar van de masteropleiding heeft afgerond, kan hij bij de examencommissie
een goedkeuringsverklaring aanvragen waarin staat aangegeven dat de student alle examenonderdelen van
het eerste jaar van de masteropleiding heeft afgerond. (art. 11 lid 3).
Een verzoek tot het afleggen van het mastersexamen kan tot een maand voor de afstudeerpresentatie
worden ingediend bij de examencommissie, mits de student in het bezit is van een goedkeuringsverklaring
van het eerste jaar van de MSc.
Een verzoek tot vrijstelling voor een tentamen of een praktische oefening als bedoeld in artikel 17 van de
OER wordt door de student bij de examencommissie ingediend. Vrijstellingen worden alleen verleend
wanneer de student staat ingeschreven voor de opleiding.
Een verzoek om af te wijken van het onderwijs- en examenreglement wordt door de student ingediend bij
de examencommissie. Dit verzoek is altijd met redenen omkleed.
Een besluit goedkeuring te onthouden aan een verzoek als in lid 1, 2 en 3 van dit artikel, wordt door de
examencommissie gemotiveerd genomen. De student wordt schriftelijk van het besluit in kennis gesteld.
Artikel 17
1.
2.
GOEDKEURINGSPROCEDURE
TERMIJNEN
Over een verzoek als in artikel 16 lid 1 wordt op de maandelijkse vergaderingen van de examencommissie
een besluit genomen. Aanvragen voor goedkeuring van het vierde jaar dienen een maand voor de
vergadering ingediend te zijn.
Over een verzoek als in artikel 16, lid 2 of lid 3 wordt beslist binnen 40 werkdagen na ontvangst van het
verzoek of, indien het verzoek is ingediend tijdens een academische vakantie, dan wel binnen een periode
van drie weken voorafgaande aan een academische vakantie, binnen 40 werkdagen na afloop daarvan. De
examencommissie kan de beslissing voor ten hoogste 10 werkdagen verdagen. Van de verdaging wordt,
voor de afloop van de in de eerste volzin genoemde termijn, schriftelijk mededeling gedaan aan de student.
Artikel 18
BEROEPSRECHT
Tegen beschikkingen van de examencommissie, dan wel van examinatoren alsmede tegen de behandeling
ondervonden tijdens het afleggen van een tentamen of examen, staat gedurende 4 weken nadat deze aan de
student bekend zijn gemaakt, beroep open bij het College van Beroep voor de examens bedoeld in artikel 7.60
WHW.
Artikel 19
WIJZIGING REGELS EN RICHTLIJNEN
Geen wijzigingen vinden plaats die van toepassing zijn op het lopende studiejaar, tenzij de belangen van studenten
hierdoor redelijkerwijs niet worden geschaad.
Artikel 20
INWERKINGTREDING
232
APPENDIX 1. FINAL OBJECTIVES MSC-PROGRAM IN AEROSPACE ENGINEERING

Profile MSc graduate Aerospace Engineering
The MSc graduate has an overall view of the aerospace engineering field. He has thorough and detailed knowledge
of one or more aerospace engineering disciplines and is able to apply relevant mathematical, physical and general
engineering knowledge. His technical-scientific knowledge is accompanied by an application-directed and problemsolving attitude. He is capable of integrating the various disciplines in order to solve complex non-standard
technical or design problems. He is able to develop (computer-assisted) tools and verifies solutions through
experiments. He works independently but will also be a valuable member of multidisciplinary teams. He clearly
communicates and defends chosen solutions showing an awareness of their technical and social implications.
FINAL OBJECTIVE MSc-1
Basic sciences and technical tools
1.
The MSc graduate has thorough knowledge of and insight into the basic sciences including their generic
methods and tools insofar as these are relevant to engineering practice. The knowledge and insight must be
aimed at application to complex problems.
1.1. Knowledge of and insight into mathematics including partial differential equations, linear algebra,
numerical analysis and statistics;
1.2. Knowledge of insight into physics including dynamics, solid and fluid mechanics and thermodynamics;
1.3. Knowledge of relevant aspects of computer science and software;
1.4. Extended knowledge of and experience in physical modeling and using mathematical and numerical
methods to solve engineering problems;
1.5. Extended knowledge of and insight into mathematics, physics, and computer science insofar as these
relate to the final studies in one of the Aerospace Engineering disciplines.
General engineering sciences
2.
The MSc graduate has thorough knowledge of and insight into the general engineering sciences to be able to
operate in non-standard conditions.
2.1. Knowledge, insight, and skills concerning general engineering sciences: engineering mechanics,
strength of materials, materials and manufacturing methods, engineering fluid dynamics, control
theory & systems and design methods in general;
2.2. Ability to relate general engineering sciences to Aerospace Engineering disciplines;
2.3. Ability to apply knowledge of general engineering subjects to new situations and to use this
knowledge to solve operational problems;
2.4. Extended knowledge of and insight into general engineering sciences insofar as these relate to the
final studies in one of the Aerospace Engineering disciplines.
Aerospace Engineering sciences
3.
The MSc graduate has a broad knowledge of the demands on aerospace vehicles as regards safety,
reliability, aerodynamic and structural design, and flight performance in general. Detailed knowledge of at
least one of the aerospace engineering sciences as mentioned under 3.1.
3.1. Thorough knowledge of and insight into the aerospace engineering sciences:
aerodynamics;
performance, stability, and control;
propulsion;
structures and materials;
strength and vibrations;
equipment and systems;
production, maintenance, and industrial process management;
operational use, including air traffic control;
structural design of aircraft and spacecraft.
3.2
Acquaintance with the diversity and interdependence of problems (synthesis) within the
aforementioned fields;
3.3
Extended knowledge of and insight into Aerospace Engineering disciplines and their diversity,
interdependence and coherence in problem solving activities (synthesis);
General engineering and Aerospace Engineering applications
4.
The MSc graduate has the skills to apply his knowledge of engineering and aerospace sciences.
4.1. Knowledge, insight and skills concerning Aerospace Engineering applications through (lab) exercises:
4.1.1. illustrations and applications of engineering practice;
4.2. Training in use of scientific general engineering software;
4.3. Training in the use and development of advanced scientific software for aerospace applications.
Communication skills
5.
The MSc graduate must be able to report clearly on his technical-scientific work both orally and in writing.
5.1. Skills in writing reports;
5.2. Skills in oral reporting using state -of-the-art presentation techniques;
5.3. Ability to function in project teams and to contribute to the process of knowledge transfer.
233
233

The Aerospace Engineering industry
6.
The MSc graduate has knowledge and an understanding of the (national and international) aerospace
industry and (research) institutes. Furthermore, a basic understanding is required of the context in which
engineering is practiced.Knowledge of:
6.1. The most important actors in the aerospace industry and their mutual contacts, both national and
international;
6.2. The social context of the aerospace industry;
6.3. The implications of the aerospace industry on society;
6.4. Industrial organization and management processes;
6.5. Sustainable development;
6.6. The Aerospace Engineering profession and industrial practice.
Scientific attitude in professional problem-solving
7.
The MSc graduate must be able to recognize, formulate, and analyze engineering problems and to offer one
or more solutions to these problems. He must be able to create a synthesis between diverse facets of the
problem, to identify and to evaluate various possibilities. With limited coaching of senior staff he must be
able to approach technical problems with an awareness of multidisciplinary solutions based on
technical/scientific analysis. This means the ability to:
7.1
synthesize and to integrate knowledge;
7.2
apply knowledge of conceptual design;
7.3
generate new ideas, being creative in finding solutions;
7.4
work independently;
7.5
develop (computer-assisted) tools to solve problems;
7.6
verify developed theories and solutions through experiments;
7.7
select and analyze relevant sources independently and critically;
7.8
work in multidisciplinary teams;
7.9
analyze and synthesize problems in the area of expertise;
7.10 take into account neighboring fields of expertise when designing solutions to problems;
7.11 judge the consequences of choices made for neighboring fields;
7.12 motivate the choices made;
7.13 report conclusions and solutions;
7.14 defend the work performed.
FINA L OBJECTIVE MSc-8
Capability and interest
8.
The MSc graduate must obtain insight into his capabilities and interests in view of his future professional
position(s).
Preparation for professional career
9.
The MSc graduate must be prepared for a broad range of engineering duties in various Aerospace
Engineering or related disciplines following a certain period of on-the-job learning and training.Final
objectives 18 must guarantee that the recently graduated MSc graduate will achieve the following:
a broad engineering education, including a good understanding of design process and manufacturing;
accessibility to a broad range of employment positions;
sufficient flexibility as regards professional career;
ability to think critically and creatively;
understanding of the context in which engineering is practiced;
good communication skills;- ability to function as a member of a team;
curiosity and a desire to engage in life-long learning.
234
STAFF TELEPHONE DIRECTORY

Name
A
Agusdinata, ir. B.
Ambrosius, prof.ir. B.A.C.
Arnold, drs. A.G.
Astori, dr.ir. P.
B
Bakker, prof.dr.ir. P.G.
Barrett, Dr. R.M.
Bart, dr.ir. G.C.J.
Baten, ir. T.J.
Bedford, Prof. T.J.
Beek, ir. P.C.W.
Bennani, Dr.ir. S.
Bergsma, dr.ir. O.K.
Beukers, prof.ir. A.
Bijl, dr.ir.drs. H.
Bikker, prof.ir. H.
Boermans, ir. L.M.M.
Boonen, ir. K.H.M.
Borst, prof.dr.ir. R.
Brok, ir. S.W.
Brgemann, Ir. V.P.
Bruin, dr.ir. C.
Buijtenen, prof.ir. J.P.
C
Chin, ir. R.T.H.
Chu, dr. Q.P.
Coenen, Dr.Ir. A.J.R.M
Correlj, A.F.
Corstens, ir. H.F.M.
Cremer Mtd, ing. H.A.P.
D
Daalderop, drs. Ir. A.G.M.
Dekkers, ir. R.
Deventer-Gille, Mrs. J.
Dingemans, dr. T.J.
Dolfsma, dr. W.A.
Drimmelen, Ir. R.
E
Elmendorp, prof.dr.ir. J.J.
G
Geers, ir. H.J.A.M.
Gerritsma, dr.ir. M.I.
Geven, ir. P.J.C.M.
Giesen, prof.dr.ir. E.
Gisolf, prof.dr.ir. A.
Groot, ing. M.C.
Gutirrez, dr. M.A.
H
Haaf, ir. W.
Haan, ir. A.R.C.
Haan, ir. P.A.J.
Hamann, ir. R.J.
Hanjalic, prof.dr.dipl.-ing. K.
Heijer, J.C.
Hermans, prof.dr.ir. A.J.
Hol, ir. J.M.A.M.
Holierhoek, ir. J.G.
Holten, prof.dr.ir. Th.
Homan, Ir. J.J.
Hommel, ir. G.
Hooghiemstra, dr. G.
Horssen, dr.ir. W.T.
Hulsen, dr.ir. M.A.
Hulshoff, dr. S.J.
I
Israel, dr. F.P.
J
Jalving, ing. N.H.
Jansen, dr.ir. E.L.
Jong, prof.dr.ir. Th.
Jongkind, dr.ir. W.
K
Kamp, ir. A.
Kan, ir. J.J.I.M.
Building Room
Telephone number
Email address
62
62
7
62
1007
918
810
015-2785571
015-2785173
015-2783753
015-2789550
B.Agusdinata@lr.tudelft.nl
A.G.Arnold@wtm.tudelft.nl
p.astori@lr.tudelft.nl
64
62
22
61
62
36
62
62
61
64
34
45
62
65
22
62
22
62
031
10.01
B-067
010
015-2785907
015-2789196
015-2786061
015-2781580
3.050
026
NB 0.18
004
036
OP
217
1018
1.07
B-203
045
F-204
1001
015-2787292
015-2782674
015-2785135
015-2785144
015-2785373
015-2782711
015-2786387
015-2785911
015-2785464
015-2782484
015-2785492
015-2786378
015-2782179
r.m.barrett@lr.tudelft.nl
g.c.j.bart@tn.t udelft.nl
t.j.bedford@its.tudelft.nl
P.C.W.Vanbeek@its.tudelft.nl
H.Bijl@lr.tudelft.nl
H.Bikker@wbmt.tudel ft.nl
K.Boonen@lr.tudelft.nl
R.deBorst@lr.tudelft.nl
S.W.Brok@tn.t udelft.nl
V.P.Brugemann@lr.tudelft.nl
c.bruin@tnw.tudelft.nl
J.P.vanBuijtenen@wbmt.tudelft.nl
62
62
36
31
36
62
1011
027
HB20.100
C0.070
03.120
610
015-2783992
015-2783586
015-2781894
015-2787924
015-2783898
015-2785177
R.T.Chin@lr.tudelft.nl
A.J.R.M.Coenen@ITS.tudelft.nl
a.f.correlje@tbm.tudelft.nl
36
34
62
62
31
31
10.230
8D-3 -20
807
1.34
3.3.260
C4.1.170
015-2784401
015-2783153
015-2784615
015-2784520
015-2783548
015-2781043
A.G.M.Daalderop@its.tudelft.nl
r.dekke rs@wbmt.tudelft.nl
j.vandeventer@lr.tudelft.nl
T.J.Dingemans@lr.tudelft.nl
w.a.dolfsma@tbm.tudelft.nl
R.vanDrimmelen@tbm.tudelft.nl
015-2782623
j.j.elmendorp@tnw.tudelft.nl
H.J.A.M.Geers@its.tudelft.nl
P.J.C.M.Geven@its.tudelft.nl
E.vandergiesen@ocp.tudelft.nl
A.Gisolf@ctg.tudelft.nl
M.C.deGroot@wbmt.tudelft.nl
M.A.Gutirrez@lr.tudelft.nl
22
36
64
23
40
22
34
65
08.110
038
2.30
D218
8D-2 -21
1.41
015-2783832
015-2785903
015-2783190
015-2782272
015-2785299
015-2781821
015-2782083
34
31
61
62
22
34
36
62
62
62
62
32
36
36
34
62
8D-3 -25
3.4.090
018
812
B 070
OP
HB 03.140
1121
1009
1015
0.43
7-1-137
HB 06.090
03-080
AHD
NB 1.56
015-2786781
015-2787553
015-2785165
015-2782079
015-2781735
015-2783116
015-2782511
015-2785379
015-2785643
015-2785301
015-2788230
015-2786507
015-2782589
015-2783524
015-2784194
015-2781538
A.R.C.dehaan@tbm.tudelft.nl
P.A.J.deHaan@lr.tudelft.nl
k.hanjalic@tnw.tudelft.nl
J.C.denHeijer@wbmt.tudelft.nl
A.J.Hermans@its.tudelft.nl
J.G.Holierhoek@lr.tudelft.nl
J.J.Homan@lr.tudelft.nl
G.Hommel@wbmt.tudelft.nl
G.hooghiemstra@its.tudelft.nl
M.A.hulsen@wbmt.tudelft.nl
S.J.Hulshoff@lr.tudelft.nl
62
914
015-2782072 /
(071-5275891)
F.P.Israel@lr.tudelft.nl
65
62
62
L 1.21
1122
721
N.H.Jalving@lr.tudelft.nl
e.l.jansen@lr.tudelft.nl
T.H.deJong@lr.tudelft.nl
62
813
015-2788454
015-2782592
015-2781455 /
015-2787587
015-2787458
62
62
919
704
015-2785172
015-2783634
A.Kamp@lr.tudelft.nl
J.vanKan@math.tudelft.nl
235
235
Name
K (continued)
Kanter, ir. J.L.C.G.
Keijzer, dr.ir. M.
Keulen, prof.dr.ir. F.
Keuvelaar, J.
Klees, R.
Kleinknecht, Prof.dr. A.
Klomp, ir. A.W.H.
Koolhaas, prof.dr.ir. J.W.
Koren, Prof.dr.ir. B.
Kraaikamp, dr C.
Kraeger, ir. A.M.
Kram, L.R.F.
Krijnen, ir. J.A.
Kuik, prof.dr.ir. G.A.M.
Kwakernaak, ir. A.
L
Laaken, drs. B.M.D.
M
Maaren, dr. H.
Meijer, dr. H.C.
Meijer, ir. B.R.
Meijer, prof.dr. H.G.
Melkert, ir. J.A.
Mulder, dr.ir. K.F.
Mulder, dr.ir. M.
Mulder, prof.dr.ir. J.A.
N
Naastepad, Dr. C.W.M.
Naeije, ir. M.C.
Neve, ir. J.J.L.
Niet, ing. H.
Nijenhuis, dr.ir. K.
Noomen, ir. R.
O
Ockels, prof.dr. W.J.
Offerman, Hans
Oude Engberink, B.W.
Oudheusden, dr.ir. B.W. van
P
Paassen, dr.ir. M.M. van
Paassen, ing. D.M. van
Passchier, ir. D.M.
Pavel, M.Sc. M.D.
Picken, prof.dr. S.J.
Planken, dr. P.C.M.
Poel, dr.ir. I.R.
Poot, Drs. A.P.
Post, drs. P.C.
Pronk, ir. C.
R
Ravesteijn, dr. W.
Reijns, prof.ir. G.L .
Remmers, ir. J.J.C.
Riemslag, dr.ir. A.C.
Rijlaarsdam, mr.ir. A.
Riks, dr.ir. E.
Rivera, dr. P.
Rixen, prof. D.J.
Roest, drs. R.
Rooze nburg, N.F.M.
Rothwell, prof.dr. A.
Ruijgrok, prof.ir. G.J.J.
S
Santema, Prof.mr.dr.ir. S.C.
Saunders - Smits, ir. G.N.
Scarano, dr.ing. F.
Schaik, Dr. F.J.
Scharroo, ir. R.
Schee, prof.ir. P.A.
Sinke, ir. J.
Slingerland, ir. R.
Slooff, prof.i r. J.W.
Sluys, dr.ir. L.J.
Smit, prof.ir. K.
Snijder, ing. J.
Soijer, ir. M.W.
Sopers, ir. F.P.M.
Staat, J.J.
236
Building Room
Telephone number
Email address
61
36
34
34
52
31
61
31
64
36
62
62
62
23
61
049
HB 03.130
8C-3-08
KP
1420
C2.090
NB VM 0.47
F 136
033
6.070
023
408
1018
T.B.D.
010B
015-2784186
015-2785803
015-2786515
015-2785702
015-2785100
015-2783469
015-2785134
015-2783408
015-2782053
015-2781910
015-2782594
015-2787332
015-2785368
015-2785170
015-2785353
m.keijzer@its.tudelft.nl
F.vanKeulen@wbmt.tudelft.nl
J.Keuvelaa r@wbmt.tudelft.nl
R.Klees@CiTG.TUDelft.nl
A.Kleinknecht@tbm.tudelft.nl
A.W.H.Klompe@lr.tudelft.nl
J.W.Koolhaas@TBM.tudelft.nl
C.Kraaikamp@its.tudelft.nl
A.M.Kraeger@lr.tudelft.nl
L.R.F.Kram@lr.tudelft.nl
J.A.Krijnen@lr.tudelft.nl
G.A.M.vankuik@ct.tudelft.nl
A.Kwakernaak@lr.tudelft.nl
31
3.1.030
015-2781160
b.m.d.vanderlaaken@tbm.tudelft.nl
36
22
34
36
62
31
62
62
HB 07.090
F 204
8D-4 -06
04.060
1014
4.1.170
028
031
015-2784936
015-2786010
015-2786876
015-2782500
015-2785338
015-2781043
015-2789471
015-2785378
H.C.Meijer@tn.tudelft.nl
B.R.Meijer@WbMt.tudelft.nl
J.A.Melkert@lr.tudelft.nl
K.F.Mulder@tbm.tudelft.nl
31
62
34
34
C2.040 TPM
912
8D-4 -07
EV
62
920
015-2786318
015-2783831
015-2786581
015-2785542
015-2782630
015-2785377
c.w.m.naastepad@tbm.tudelft.nl
M.C.Naeije@lr.tudelft .nl
J.J.L.Neve@wbmt.tudelft.nl
h.deNiet@wbmt.tudelft.nl
K.teNijenhuis@tnw.tudelft.nl
ron.noomen@deos.tudelft.nl
62
918
015-2785172
W.J.Ockels@lr.tudelft.nl
40
64
074
034
015-2782346
015-2785349
b.w.oudeengberink@tnw.tudelft.nl
62
62
64
024
1012
039
12 DCT
22
31
31
36
0.027
E-014
3.3.250
C.2.020
3.1.030
08.090
015-2785370
015-2782067
015-2786386
015-2783992
015-2786946
015-2786965
015-2784716
015-278928
015-2783175
015-2781803
D.M.vanPaassen@lr.tudelft.nl
D.M.Passchier@lr.tudelft.nl
m.d.pavel@lr.tudelft.nl
S.J.Picken@tnw.tudelft.nl
Planken@tnw.tudelft.nl
i.r.vandepoel@tbm.tudelft.nl
a.p.poot@tbm.tudelft.nl
c.pronk@its.tudelft.nl
31
62
62
3.3.080
918
NB TM 1.52
62
62
34
22
32
62
62
1114
1.36
8C-2-11
A-276
10-4A -09
1115
1012
015-2784120
015-2785172
015-2783151
015-2784765
015-2784798 (Secr.)
015-2782094
015-2784559
015-2781523
015-2782480
015-2783472
015-2782056
015-2782067
W.Ravesteijn@tbm.tudelft.nl
G.L.Reijns@lr.tudelft.nl
J.J.C.Remmers@lr.tudelft.nl
A.C.Riemslag@tnw.tudelft.nl
A.Rijlaarsdam@tbm.tudelft.nl
E.riks@lr.tudelft.nl
P.Rivera@lr.tudelft.nl
D.J.Rixen@wbmt.tudelft.nl
r.roest@tnw.tudelft.nl
N.F.M.Roozenburg@io.tudelft.nl
G.J.J.Ruijgrok@lr.tudelft.nl
32
62
64
NLR
62
65
61
62
64
4A -03
1102
036
Amsterdam
913
1.21
0.54
1020
041
62
61
62
34
62
1006
001
025
8D-4 -24
509
015-2783076
015-2785369
015-2785902
020-5113208
015-2781483
015-2786388
015-2785137
015-2785332
015-2782053
015-2782728
015-2784978
015-2785147
015-2788277
015-2785343
015-2785334
Schaik@nlr.nl
R.Scharroo@lr.tudelft.nl
P.A.vanderSchee@lr.tudelft.nl
R.Slingerland@lr.tudelft.nl
J.W.Slooff@lr.tudelft.nl
L.J.Sluys@citg.tudelft.nl
J.Snijder@lr.tudelft.nl
M.W.Soijer@lr.tudelft.nl
f.p.m.sopers@wbmt.tudelft.nl
J.J.Staat@lr.tudelft.nl
Name
S (continued)
Staveren, ir. W.H.J.J.
Stoorvogel, prof.dr. A.A.
Storm, dr. S.T.H.
Stroosma, ir. O.
Suiker, dr.ir. A.S.J.
T
Tichem, dr.ir. M.
Tijssens, dr.ir. M.G.A.
Tooren, prof.dr.ir. M.J.L.
Torenbeek, prof.ir. E.
Turteltaub, dr. S.R.
V
Vaart, dr.ir. J.C.
Veeke, ir. H.P.M.
Veldhuis, ir. L.L.M.
Verbeek, J.
Verheij, drs. J.A.
Verheul, Dr. H.H.M
Vermeeren, dr.ir. C.A.J.R.
Vermeersen, dr. L.L.A.
Visser, dr.ir. H.G.
Visser, dr.ir. P.N.A.M.
Vogelesang, prof.ir. L.B.
Vos, ir. P.R.
Vries, ir. J.
W
Wakker, prof.ir. K.F.
Walpot, dr.ir. L.M.G.F.M.
Weber, Dr.ir. J.H.
Wehrmann, drs. C.
Wenckebach, prof.dr. W.Th.
Wiethoff, dr. M.
Wijker, ir. J.J.
Wijting, W.
Wilders, dr. P.
Willemse, H.R.
Wittenberg, ir. T.C.
Woerkom, prof.dr.ir. P.Th.L.M.
Z
Zandbergen, ir. B.T.C.
Zegveld, Dr. M.A.
Zhou, dr. J.
Zuidema, dr.ir. J.
Zwaag, Prof. Dr. Ir. S.
Zwaan, prof.ir. R.J.
Building Room
Telephone number
Email address
62
36
31
62
62
028
06.270
c2.040
SIM 06
1.42
015-2785314
015-2781912
015-2781300
015-2785344
015-2781629
w.h.j.j.vanstaveren@lr.tudelft.nl
A.A.Stoorvogel@its.tudelft.nl
S.T.H.Storm@tbm.tudelft.nl
o.stroos ma@lr.tudelft.nl
A.Suiker@lr.tudelft.nl
34
65
61
62
8D-4 -11
1.54
018
1018
M.Tichem@wbmt.tudelft.nl
M.J.L.vanTooren@lr.tudelft.nl
E.Toorenbeek@lr.tudelft.nl
62
1.48
015-2781603
015-2789552
015-2784794
015-2782098 /0152785176
015-2785360
62
34
45
34
36
31
61
62
62
62
61
62
62
026
8D-4 -25
041
MR
HB 04.240
B3.330
005
901
1022
922
003
1013
1112
015-2785376
015-2782706
015-2782009
015-2784173
015-2785044
015-2781139
015-2785160
015-2788272
015-2782095
015-2782535
015-2785145
015-2785132
015-2786306
J.C .vanderVaart@lr.tudelft.nl
H.P.M.Veeke@WBMT.TUDelft.nl
janv@adse.nl
j.a.verheij@ITS.tudelft.nl
h.h.m.verheul@tbm.tudelft.nl
C.A.J.R.Vermeeren@lr.tudelft.nl
B.Vermeersen@lr.tudelft.nl
L.B.Vogelesang@lr.tudelft.nl
P.R.Vos@lr.tudelft.nl
62
915
36
31
22
31
62
31
36
34
65
62
19.280
B1.130
B-006
A0.300
1113
B3.060
03.060
OP
1 .21
027
015-2782065
071-5795527
015-2781698
015-2781549
015-2782040
015-2781716
015-2781382
015-2784710
015-2787291
015-2781814
015-2788232
015-2783586 /
015-2782792
louis.walpot@atosorigin.com
j.h.weber@its.tudelft.nl
C.Wehrmann@tbm.tudelft.nl
W.T.Wenckebach@tnw.tudelft.nl
M.Wiethoff@tbm.tudelft.nl
J.J.Wijker@lr.tudelft.nl
w.wijting@tbm.tudelft.nl
P.Wilders@its.tudelft.nl
H.R.Willemse@wbmt.tudelft.nl
T.C.Wittenberg@lr.tudelft.nl
P.vanWoerkom@wbmt.tudelft.nl
62
32
22
22
62
62
814
C2.100
092
173
NB FAM1.30
1113
015-2782059
015-2784711
015-2785357
015-2782208
015-2782248
015-2781382
m.a.zegveld@tbm.tudelft.nl
J.Zhou@tnw.tudelft.nl
J.Zuidema@tnw.tudelft.nl
R.J.Zwaan@lr.tudelft.nl
S.R.Turteltaub@lr.tudelft.nl
237
237
ABBREVIATIONS AND COMMON PHRASES
ABBREVIATIONS AND COMMON PHRASES

Studies:
BK
CiTG
CT
ET
IO
ITS
LR
MK
OCP
ST
TA
TB
TBM
TN
TNW
TWI
WbMT
WTM
(Bouwkunde) Architecture
(Civiele Techniek en Geowetenschappen) Civil Engineering and Geosciences
(Civiele Techniek) Civil Engineering
(Electro Techniek) Electrical Engineering
(Industrieel Ontwerpen) Industrial Design Engineering
(Informatie Technologie en Systemen) Information Technology and Systems
(Luchtvaart- en Ruimtevaarttechniek) Aerospace Engineering (AE)
(Materiaalkunde) Material Science
(Ontwerp Constructie en Productie) Design Engineering and Production
(Scheikundige Technologie en bioprocesstechnologie) Chemical and Bioprocess Technology
(Technische Aardwetenschappen) Applied Earth Sciences
(Technische Bestuurskunde) Systems Engineering Policy Analysis and Management
(Techniek Bestuur en Management) Technology Policy and Management
(Technische Natuurkunde) Applied Physics
(Technische Natuurwetenschappen) Applied Sciences
(Technische Wiskunde en Informatica) Technical Mathematics and Informatics
(Werktuigbouwkunde en Maratieme techniek) Mechanical Engineering and Marine Technology
(Wijsbegeerte en Technische Maatschappijwetenschappen)
Other abbreviations:
ARBO
(ARBeids Omstandigheden) Working conditions
AULA
University Auditorium (Mekelweg 5)
B.Sc.
Bachelor of Science
DTO
(Dienst Technische Ondersteuning) Technical Support Group of TU Delft
ECTS
European Credits Transfer System
EJW
(Eerste Jaars Weekend) First year weekend
EUROAVIA
European Association of Aerospace Students
HBO
(Hoger Beroeps Onderwijs) Higher Vocational Education
IBG
(Informatie Beheer Groep) Information administration group
KIM
(Koninklijk Instituut Marine) Royal Dutch Naval Academy
KMA
(Koninklijke Militaire Academie) Royal Dutch Military Academy
LVD
(LuchtVaart Dispuut) The VSV`s Aviation Wing
M.Sc.
Master of Science
NLR
(Nationaal Lucht- en ruimtevaart laboratorium) National Aerospace Laboratory
OER
(Onderwijs Examen Regeling) Teaching and examination regulations
OPCIE
(Opleidings Commissie) Curriculum Advisory Committee
OV
(Openbaar Vervoer) Public transport
OWEE
(OntvangstWEek Eerste jaars) Reception week for prospect students
RFOS
(Regeling Financile Ondersteuning Studenten) Financial support regulations for students
RVD
(RuimteVaart Dispuut) The VSV`s Space Wing
S.p.
(StudiePunt) Credit (C.)
SR
(Studenten Raad) Student council
SSVOBB
(Stichting VliegtuigOntwikkeling -Bouw en Beheer) Delft Student Aircraft Manufacturer
STA*D
(STudenten Adviesbureau Delft) Student Advisory Office
Stufi
(Studiefinanciering) Student financing
TAS
(Tentamen Aanmeld Systeem) Interim Examination Registration System
TU
(Technische Universiteit) Technical University
TUD
(Technische Universiteit Delft) Delft University of Technology
UEA
University Education Act
VSSD
(Vereniging voor Studie- en Studentenbelangen te Delft)
VSV
(Vliegtuigbouwkundige studievereniging) Society of Aerospace students 'Leonardo da Vinci'
W.H.W.
(Wet op Hoger en Wetenschappelijk onderwijs) University Education Act (U.E.A.)
Other terms:
Cursusjaar
Doctoraal examen
Kandidaats
examen
Prestatiebeurs
Studiejaar
Tempometer
Tentamen
238
Course year; the P examination is one of the five course years

Same as the Ingenieurs examen, equivalent to the M.Sc. degree.
Candidate examination, equivalent to the Bachelors degree (BSc).
Scholarship based on performance
Study year; period of registration at the Faculty (September to June).
Study pace indicator
Interim examination
Lecture weeks
44 44 45 46 47 48
November
27
3 10 17 24
28
4 11 18 25
29
5 12 19 26
30
6 13 20 27
31
7 14 21 28
1 8 15 22 29
2 9 16 23 30
2nd part
49 50 51 52 1
December
1 8 15 22 29
2 9 16 23 30
3 10 17 24 31
4 11 18 XX
5 12 19 XX
6 13 20 27
7 14 21 28
XX
2
3
4
Lecture weeks
1st part
2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 10
January
February
5 12 19 26
2 9 16 23 1
6 13 20 27
3 10 17 24 2
7 14 21 28
4 11 18 25 3
8 15 22 29
5 12 19 26 4
9 16 23 30
6 13 20 27 5
10 17 24 31
7 14 21 28 6
11 18 25
1 8 15 22 29 7
14 14 15 16 17
April
29
5 XX 19
30
6 13 20
31
7 14 21
1 8 15 22
2 XX 16 23
3 10 17 24
4 XX 18 25
Lecture weeks
11 12 13
March
8 15 22
9 16 23
10 17 24
11 18 25
12 19 26
13 20 27
14 21 28
Third year only
Lecture free week
Interim examinations
Lecture free week/
Christmas holiday
Lecture free week
National holidays of the academic calendar year 2003 - 2004 (on these days the buildings of TU Delft are closed for all kind of activities):
December 25 and 26, 2003 = Christmas Day and Boxing Day
January 1, 2004 = New Year's Day
April 9, 2004 = Good Friday
April 11 and 12, 2004 = Easter Sunday and Easter Monday
April 30, 2004 = Queen's Birthday
May 5, 2004 = Liberation Day
May 20, 2004 = Ascension Day
May 30 and 31, 2004 = Whit Sunday and Whit Monday
* Note: during the May holiday the Design Synthesis Exercise (AE3-001) will continue.
2004
2nd semester
XX = National holiday of the academic calendar year 2003 - 2004 (on this day the TU Delft is closed for all kind of activities).
Lecture weeks
1st part
week 36 37 38 39 40 40 41 42 43
September
October
Mo. 1 8 15 22 29
6 13 20
Tu.
2 9 16 23 30
7 14 21
We. 3 10 17 24
1 8 15 22
Th.
4 11 18 25
2 9 16 23
Fr.
5 12 19 26
3 10 17 24
Sa.
6 13 20 27
4 11 18 25
Su.
7 14 21 28
5 12 19 26
2003
1st semester
26
27
28
29
XX
18
Lecture
weeks
2nd part
18 19 20 21 22 23
May
3 10 17 24 XX
4 11 18 -XX 12 19 -6 13 XX 27
7 14 21 28
1 8 15 22 29
2 9 16 23 XX
ACADEMIC CALENDAR YEAR 2003 - 2004
23 24 25
June
7 14
1 8 15
2 9 16
3 10 17
4 11 18
5 12 19
6 13 20
31 31 32 33 34
August
26
2 9 16
27
3 10 17
28
4 11 18
29
5 12 19
30
6 13 20
31
7 14 21
1 8 15 22
Holiday
26 27 27 28 29 30
July
21 28
5 12 19
22 29
6 13 20
23 30
7 14 21
24
1 8 15 22
25
2 9 16 23
26
3 10 17 24
27
4 11 18 25
summer holiday
35 36 36
Sep
23 30
24 31
25
1
26
2
27
3
28
4
29
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
37
Start 2004-2005
Holiday
Lecture free week
May holiday*
F A C U LT I E S
AND
COURSES
23
61
22
51
IRCTR, International Research Centre for

Telecommunications-transmission and Radar Mekelweg 4
IRI, Interfaculty Reactor Institute Mekelweg 15
Koiter Institute Stevinweg 1
NIMR, Netherlands Institute for Metals Research
50
23
40
Chemical Technology Julianalaan 136
Life Science & Technology Julianalaan 67
Materials Science Rotterdamseweg 137
Faculty of Architecture Berlageweg 1
12
40
24
20
5
8
7
23
Mobility Studies Thijsseweg 11

SIMONA, International Centre for Research in Simulation,
Motions and Navigation Technologies Anthony Fokkerweg 1
TIES,Technology Institute for Embedded Systems Mekelweg 4
VEMC, Power Electronics and Electromagnetic Power
36
36
Faculty of Design, Engineering and Production
Industrial Design Engineering Landbergstraat 15
Marine Technology Mekelweg 2
Mechanical Engineering Mekelweg 2
32
34
34
Multi Media Services Zuidplantsoen 2

Sports Centre Mekelweg 8
9
37
Infrastructure and Logistics Kluyverweg 4
23
31
38
36
11
20
65
Dietz Laboratory Mijnbouwplein 11

High Speed Aerodynamics Laboratory Kluyverweg 2
Industrial Design Engineering Studio Cornelis Drebbelweg 5
Kramers Laboratorium voor fysische technologie
Prins Bernhardlaan 6
2
64
35
15
Mekelweg 4
DITSE, Delft Institute for Information Technology in
Service Engineering Jaffalaan 5
Duwind, Institute for Wind Energy Stevinweg 1
DISens, Delft Institute for Intelligent Sensor Microsystems
Aero- en Hydrodynamics Leeghwaterstraat 21
34
36
DIDE, Delft Institure for Sustainable Energy Julianalaan 136
L A B O R AT O R I E S
Thijsseweg 11
DEOS, Delft Institute for Earth-Oriented Space Research
12
52
10
65
TRAIL, Research School for Transport,
Mekelweg 2
Mekelweg 2
CCD, Computer Integrated Manufacturing Centre Delft
34
VSSD, Delft Student Union Poortlandplein 6
TU Shop Mekelweg 5
TU Delft Real Estate Department Zuidplantsoen 8
Top Tech Studies Mekelweg 4
Studium Generale Mekelweg 10
Student Advisory Office Julianalaan 134
Staff Executive Board Julianalaan 134
M.Sc. International Programme Zuidplantsoen 6
Logistics & Environmental Services Anthony Fokkerweg 5
Library, Delft University of Technology Library Prometheusplein 1

60
J.M. Burgercentrum, Research School for Fluid Dynamics
34
BKC, Batch Knowledge Centre Jaffalaan 5
Executive Board Cornelis Drebbelweg 9

21
DISC, Dutch Institute of Systems and Control Mekelweg 2
34
Adhesion Institute Kluyverweg 3
31
Energy & Real Estate Services Leeghwaterstraat 36
Doc Vision Support Centre TU Delft Leeghwaterstraat 42
61
RESEARCH INSTITUTES
Department for Technical Support location Michiel de Ruyterweg 10-12
34a
45
DIMES, Delft Institute for Micro-Electronics and Submicron
36
Department for Technical Support location Rotterdamseweg 139
43
CTG, Centre for Technical Geoscience Mijnbouwstraat 120
Faculty of Technology, Policy and Management Jaffalaan 5
Department for Technical Support location Mekelweg 6
Delft University Press Prometheusplein 1
Delft University Fund Mekelweg 5
Delft Museum of Technology Ezelsveldlaan 61
Delft Enterprises Julianalaan 134
Technology Mekelweg 4
41
Julianalaan 67
31
36
BSDL, Research School for Biotechnical Sciences Delft Leiden,
Technical Mathematics Mekelweg 4
36
21
Bouw, School for Advanced Studies in Construction, Stevinweg 1
23
Technical Informatics Mekelweg 4
36
20
Media & Knowledge Engineering Mekelweg 4
36
Electrical Engineering Mekelweg 4
36
Mekelweg 4
Cultural Centre Mekelweg 10 Mekelweg 10
SCHOOLS
Communication & Marketing Group Julianalaan 134

38
RESEARCH
Stevinweg 1
8
WOT,Workgroup Offshore Technology Stevinweg 1
CICAT, Managementcentre for International Cooperation
Campus Services De Vries van Heystplantsoen 2
Business Service Centre Julianalaan 134
Botanic Garden Julianalaan 67
Conversion Centre Mekelweg 4
ASCI, Advanced School for Computing and Imaging,
Faculty of Information Technology and Systems
Geodetic Engineering Thijsseweg 11
52
23
63
Civil Engineering Stevinweg 1
23
Aula Congress Centre Mekelweg 5
SERVICES/OTHER
Alumni Office De Vries van Heijstplantsoen 2
OTB, Research Institute for Housing, Urban and
Wind Turbines Research Facility Watermanweg 20
TNO-TPD-TU Delft Stieltjesweg 1
Structures and Materials Laboratory Kluyverweg 3
Stevinlaboratory 4 Stevinweg 1
Rotterdamseweg 137
52
Applied Earth Sciences Mijnbouwstraat 120
Civil Engineering and Geosciences
23
Rotterdamseweg 145
36
23
Interduct, Delft University Clean Technology Institute
44
Biotechnology Julianalaan 67
Institute Wind Energy Leeghwaterstraat 42

23
Mekelweg 6
Low Speed Aerodynamics Laboratory
Laboratory for Process Equipment Leeghwaterstraat 44
36
45
Communication Technology in education
Laboratories Electrical Engineering Kluyverweg 6
Applied Physics Lorentzweg 1
46
ICTO, Expertise Centre TU Delft, Information and
22
65
HPaC, High Performance Applied Computing Lorentzweg 1
Jaffalaan 5
22
31
Faculty of Aerospace Engineering Kluyverweg 1
Faculty of Applied Sciences
62

LR Study Guide 2003-2004

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LR Study Guide 2003-2004

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LR Study Guide 2003-2004

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AEROSPACE ENGINEERING STUDY GUIDE

Academic year 2003-2004

CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

Education and Student Affairs Office

Telephone: (015) 27 82076, fax: (015) 27 87589

Annual schedule 2003-2004: the semester system

Lecture free week

Sept. 1, 2003 - Oct. 17, 2003

Oct. 20, 2003 - Oct. 24, 2003

1 Oct. 27, 2003 - Oct. 31, 2003

Nov. 3, 2003 - Dec. 19, 2003

2 Jan. 5, 2004 - Jan. 23, 2004

4 June 7, 2004 - June 25, 2004

Readers, study books and interim examination sales

Study counseling and supervision

Why am I failing so many courses?

results are dated and determined as follows:

Interim examinations and TAS

A telephone must be connected in the interim-examination room.

Exemption from an examination unit

Safety, health, and well-being

VSSD student support

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE PROGRAM

CHAPTER 2 - B.SC. PROGRAM

Aircraft Stress Analysis

Space Engineering and

Finite Element Method

Alterations in the B.Sc. program

Credits: European Credit Transfer System (ECTS)

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE PROGRAM

Important prerequisites in the B.Sc. program

B.Sc. 2nd year

B.Sc. 3rd year

(M.Sc. 1st year)

B.SC. FIRST COURSE YEAR

CHAPTER 3 - FIRST COURSE YEAR

Delft Applied Mechanics

Hours of lectures per week

Metal Working Demo

* Included in the course credits

B.SC. FIRST COURSE YEAR

The project consists of several modules. These

An integrated introduction to the various

See each separate module for details.

First part of first semester

This project is a prerequisite for ae2-011 and

B.SC. FIRST COURSE YEAR

The Aerodynamics project is implemented in the

Technical drawings are the primary info medium to

See Detailed description.

This practical consists of 3 half days or evenings of

Manual AutoCAD, part of first year package

B.SC. FIRST COURSE YEAR

This laboratory exercise constitutes a general

See the individual group schedules.

1. Lecture notes: Some aspects of aerospace

B.SC. FIRST COURSE YEAR

This course is a general introduction to the field of